Download: hp LaserJet 8100 and 8150 print systems and paper handling devices service manual
hp LaserJet 8100 and 8150 print systems and paper handling devices printed on at least 50% total recycled fiber with at least 10% post-consumer paper copyright © 2000 Hewlett-Packard Company printed in USA service manual english *C4265-90907* *C4265-90907* C4265-90907 HP LaserJet 8150 and 8100 Series Print Systems and Paper Handling Devices Service Manual _ © Copyright Hewlett-Packard Warranty Trademark Credits Company, 2000 The information contained in Adobe is a trademark of Adobe All Rights Reserved. this document is subject to Systems Incorporated which Reproduction, adaptation, or change ...
Author:
Naruaki Sugahara Shared: 7/30/19
Downloads: 1761 Views: 3574
Content
hp LaserJet 8100 and 8150 print systems and paper handling devices printed on at least 50% total recycled fiber with at least 10% post-consumer paper copyright © 2000 Hewlett-Packard Company printed in USA service manual english *C4265-90907* *C4265-90907* C4265-90907, HP LaserJet 8150 and 8100 Series Print Systems and Paper Handling Devices Service Manual _, © Copyright Hewlett-Packard Warranty Trademark Credits Company, 2000 The information contained in Adobe is a trademark of Adobe All Rights Reserved. this document is subject to Systems Incorporated which Reproduction, adaptation, or change without notice. may be registered in certain translation without prior written jurisdictions. permission is prohibited, except Hewlett-Packard makes no as allowed under the copyright warranty of any kind with Arial is a U.S. registered laws. respect to this information. trademark of the Monotype HEWLETT-PACKARD Corporation. Part number: C4265-90907 SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS CompuServeTM is a U.S. First Edition, November 2000 THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY AND trademark of CompuServe, Inc. FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR ENERGY STAR is a U.S. PURPOSE. registered service mark of the Hewlett-Packard shall not be United States Environmental liable for any direct, indirect, Protection Agency. incidental, consequential, or Microsoft® is a U.S. registered other damage alleged in trademark of Microsoft connection with the furnishing or Corporation. use of this information. PANTONE® Pantone, Inc.’s check-standard trademark for color. PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated, which may be registered in certain jurisdictions. TrueType is a U.S. trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/Open Company Limited. Windows, MS Windows, and Windows NT are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Hewlett-Packard Company 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise, Idaho 83714 U.S.A., >.>> - ? Provides an online help tool with more details on display error messages. Cycles through the selected menu item’s values. Press + to move forward or - to move backward. -VALUE+ Cycles through the selected menu item’s values. Press + to move forward or - to move backward. SELECT Saves the selected value for that item. An asterisk (*) appears next to the selection, indicating that it is the new default. Default settings remain when the printer is switched off or reset (unless you reset all factory defaults from the Resets Menu). Prints one of the printer information pages from the control panel. CANCEL Cancels the print job that the printer is processing. The time it JOB takes to cancel depends on the size of the print job. (Press it only once.)
2 If your printer is connected over the network to a server or shared printer, use the following command to upgrade the printer’s firmware: Open a DOS command window and enter this command: Copy /b \\< computername >\ For example, if your machine is jsmith-nt and you have your share defined as LJ8150 then you could send an RFU image to the printer with the command: copy /b upgrade.rfu \\jsmith-nt\lj8150 148 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907,
Conventions
This is a combined Service Manual for both the HP LaserJet 8100 series printer and the HP LaserJet 8150 series printer. The HP LaserJet 8150 series printer shares most characteristics of the HP LaserJet 8100 series printer, except where stated. This manual uses the following conventions: Color is used to emphasize items that are important to the material under discussion. Bold is used for emphasis, particularly in situations where italic type would be confusing. Italic type is used to indicate related documents or emphasis. DISPLAY type indicates text as seen on the printer control panel display. Commands you use on a computer keyboard or on the printer control panel are shown in KEYCAP. Two examples are SELECT, and - VALUE +. COURIER type indicates text that you type on a computer keyboard exactly as shown. Hint Hints are used to suggest an action that might simplify the process. Note Notes contain important information set off from the text. CAUTION Caution messages alert you to the possibility of damage to equipment or loss of data. WARNING! Warning messages alert you to the possibility of personal injury. C4265-90907 iii, iv C4265-90907,Table of Contents
.1 Product Information Printer Features.26 Features of the HP Digital Copier .29 Product Overview .31 External View of the Printer .31 External View of HP Digital Copier .34 Identification .37 Model and Serial Numbers .37 Paper-handling Devices, Accessories, and Options .38 Ordering Information.40 Hard Disk .47 Determining Memory Requirements .48 Paper Capacities and Sizes .50 Printer and Paper-handling Devices .50 Media Selection Guidelines.52 Printer Media Selection Guidelines .52 Copy Module Media Selection Guidelines .56 Service Approach .61 Ordering Parts .61 Exchange Program .62 Consumables .62 Toner Cartridge Life .62 Refilled Toner Cartridges and Non-HP Staple Cartridges .63 Recycling Toner Cartridges .63 Technical Assistance .64 HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology) .64 Internet .64 World Wide Web.65 HP Reseller Sales and Service Support Line (US Only) .65 Other Areas .65 Regulatory Information .66 FCC Regulations .66 Environmental Product Stewardship.68 Material Safety Data Sheet.70 Environmental Conformity .71 Declarations of Conformity .72 Safety Statements .73 Warranty .77 C4265-90907 Table of Contents i, 2 Site Requirements Operating Environment .80 Space Requirements .81 Environmental Requirements .84 Specifications .85 Printer and Paper-handling Devices .85 Copy Module.89 3 Operating Overview Using the Printer Control Panel.92 Control Panel Layout .92 Indicator Lights .93 Settings and Defaults .94 Printer Driver Information .94 Paper Source Default .95 Performing a Cold Reset .96 Setting the Display Language .96 Printer Control Panel Menus .100 HP LaserJet 8100 Series Quick Copy Jobs Menu .101 HP LaserJet 8100 Series Private/Stored Jobs Menu .101 HP LaserJet 8150 Series Quick Copy Menu .102 HP LaserJet 8150 Series Private/Stored Jobs Menu .102 Information Menu .104 Paper Handling Menu .105 Print Quality Menu .108 Printing Menu .110 Configuration Menu .113 Configuration of MBM Menu .118 I/O Menu .119 EIO Menu .121 Duplex Registration Menu .123 Resets Menu.125 Using the HP Digital Copier Front Panel .126 HP Digital Copier Front Panel.127 HP Digital Copier Settings .136 Loading Documents into the ADF.138 Loading Documents onto the Flatbed.140 Printer Service Mode.141 Setting Page Count, Maintenance Count, and Serial Number .143 Setting the Cold Reset Default Paper Size.144 HP Digital Copier Service Mode .145 HP Digital Copier Administrator Mode.147 Remote Upgrade of the Printer Firmware .148 Upgrade HP Digital Copier Firmware .150 ii Table of Contents C4265-90907, Testing the Printer .153 Paper Path Test .153 Configuration Page .153 4 Maintenance and Adjustments Cleaning the Printer and Paper Handling Accessories .158 Cleaning Spilled Toner .160 Cleaning the HP Digital Copier .161 Materials .161 Vacuum Specifications .161 Cleaning ADF and Glass.162 Cleaning the Document Cover, Document Holder, and Flatbed Glass .162 Cleaning the ADF .163 Copy Module Optics Cleaning.165 Cleaning the ADF Lamp and Mirrors .165 Lubricating the ADF Gears .165 Cleaning the Carrier Unit and Mechanical Assemblies.166 Lubricating the Carrier Unit Shaft .166 Lubricating the Top of the Carrier Guide Rail .166 Lubricating the Flatbed Motor Gears .166 Cleaning the Front Panel .166 Maintaining the Printer .167 Maintaining the Copy Module .168 HP Digital Copier Maintenance Parts .168 Adjusting Printer Input Trays .169 Adjusting for Edge-to-Edge Printing .169 Adjusting Input Trays for Normal Printing .170 Adjusting the 2000-sheet Printer Input Tray .172 Adjusting Duplex Registration of the Paper Trays.174 Adjusting the Copy Module .175 Types of Adjustment .175 When to Calibrate or Adjust the Copy Module .175 Calibration Target .175 Entering the Calibration Menu in Service Mode .176 How to Perform an Offset Adjustment Calibration .177 How to Perform a Density Calibration Adjustment .177 How to Perform an ADF Vertical Magnification Adjustment .177 C4265-90907 iii, 5 Functional Overview Printer Functional Overview .180 Power Distribution System .181 AC Power Distribution .182 Overcurrent/Overvoltage Protection .182 High Voltage Power Distribution .183 Formatter System .184 DC Controller System .187 Laser and Scanner Drive .187 Paper Motion Monitoring and Control .187 Clutches .187 Engine Test Microswitch.188 Motors.188 Image Formation System .189 Toner Cartridge.190 Drum Cleaning .192 Drum Conditioning .193 Image Writing .194 Image Developing.196 Image Transferring and Media Separation .198 Image Fusing .199 Paper Paths and Components .200 Printer, Duplexer, and Envelope Feeder .200 Paper Size Switches (Trays 2 and 3) .203 Printing from Tray 1 .203 Printing from Trays 2 and 3 .203 Printing from the Envelope Feeder .204 Printing with the Duplexer.204 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4) Components .205 2000-Sheet Input Tray Operation .2072x500-sheet Input Tray.2102x500-sheet Input Tray Operation .212 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Components .214 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Operation.216 8-bin Mailbox Components .220 8-bin Mailbox Operation .223 Finisher Components .225 Stapler Unit Operation .227 Main Functional Cycles of the Stapler (Internal Paper Path) .229 Communication Link (Daisy Chain) .230 Paper Jam Detection .232 Printer Timing .232 IEEE 1284 Parallel Cable Information.234 Copy Module Functional Overview .235 Copy Module System .235 Function and Layout of the Copy Processor.237 iv Table of Contents C4265-90907, Copy Module Power Up Process .239 Copy Processor Board .239 Copy Module.241 Printer components of copy module power up process .242 Notes About the MFP Printer Product ID .242 ADF Simplex Operation.243 ADF Duplex Operation .244 Flatbed Operation .244 Copy Module Image Path .246 Communication with the Printer .248 Communication Channels.248 Print Job Interrupt .248 Paper Path and Sensors.249 6 Removal and Replacement Removal and Replacement Strategy.252 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions .252 Required Tools .253 User Installable Accessories .254 Hardware Table.262 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement.264 Control Panel .265 Covers .267 Delivery Unit (for Face-down Bin) .276 Diverter Assembly.279 Diverter Door Assembly .280 Lower Right Door Assembly .281 Fan 1, Laser/Scanner and Housing (Exhaust) .284 Fan 2, Low Voltage Power Supply (Exhaust) .286 Fan 3, Formatter Fan and Housing (Intake) .287 Fan 4, Delivery Unit (Exhaust) .288 Fan 5, Tray 1 (Intake) .289 Tray 1 .291 Tray 1 Pickup Assembly .294 Feeder Assembly .298 Formatter Assembly .300 Fusing Assembly .302 Laser/Scanner Assembly .304 Main Gear Assembly .306 Main Motor Assembly .309 Paper Input Unit (PIU) .310 PCA, DC Controller.311 Output Paper Sensor PCA .312 High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS).319 Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS) .320 Registration Assembly .321 C4265-90907 v, Tray 1 Feed Roller and Separation Pad .324 Tray 2 and 3 Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers .326 Paper Input Unit Sensor (PS2) .327 Registration Sensor (PS1) .329 Face-up Solenoid Assembly (SL3) .331 Transfer Roller Assembly .332 Tray 2 and 3 Assemblies .334 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement.335 Orientation .336 Front Cover.337 Back Cover .338 Left Cover .339 Right Cover.340 Main Drive Assembly .341 Paper Tray .343 Main Cable Harness .344 Controller PCA .346 Front LED PCA Assembly .348 Pickup Assembly .350 Power Supply .352 Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers .354 Paper Quantity Switch Assembly .356 Paper Size Switch Assembly .356 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) .358 Tension Springs .360 Locating Pins .361 Casters and Stabilizing Feet.362 Adjustable Foot.3632x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement .364 Orientation of the2x500-sheet Input Tray .365 Back Cover .366 Left Cover .367 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) .368 Right Cover.371 Front Top Cover .374 Trays 4 and 5 .377 Pickup Assembly .379 Paper Deck Drive Assembly .381 Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers .383 Controller PCA .384 Tray-Size Sensing PCA .385 Power Supply .387 Main Cable .388 Storage Paper Tray .390 Front Door (Storage Area) .391 Casters .392 Foot Tip and Adjustable Foot Tip (Stabilizing Feet) .393 vi Table of Contents C4265-90907, Locating Pins .394 Front LED PCA .395 Envelope Feeder .396 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement .397 Orientation of the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox.398 Front Cover.399 Back Cover .402 Top Cover .404 Controller PCA .408 Power Supply .409 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) .410 Face-down Bins .414 Empty Bin Sensor PCA.417 Full Bin and Interlock Sensor PCA .419 LED PCA .421 Face-up Sensors PCA .422 Reversing Mechanism Motor .423 Face-up/Diverter Assembly (Flipper) .425 Short Tray 7 .428 Solenoid Reversing Mechanism .429 Flipper Solenoid .430 Handle .431 Latching Mechanism.432 Cover Latch .433 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement.434 Orientation .435 Front and Back Covers .436 Top Cover .437 Power Supply .438 Paper Bins and Blind Cover .439 Flipper Assembly .440 Delivery Head Motor .443 Transport Belt Motor .444 Input Paper Guide.446 Metal Tape and Housing Assembly .448 Controller PCA .450 Anticurl Strings .452 Delivery Head Assembly.454 Interlock Switch.459 Diagnostic LED PCA.460 User Status LED PCA.462 Adjustable and Fixed Casters.464 Attachment Assembly .465 Stapler Assembly Removal and Replacement .466 Mailbox with Stapler, Stapler Removal or Installation.467 Back Plate.469 Stapler Controller PCA .471 C4265-90907 vii, Top Cover Assembly .474 Stapler Bed Assembly .475 Hinges.477 Duplexer .478 HP Digital Copier Removal and Replacement .479 Installing the HP Digital Copier .480 Install the Optional Output Accessory.483 Install the Copy Connect EIO Board into the Printer .484 Install the Copy Connect Cable .485 Hardware Table .487 Orientation of the HP Digital Copier .489 Copy Module Maintenance Parts .490 Separation Pad Assembly .490 Pick Roller Assembly .491 Copy Module Skins .495 Document Holding Pad.495 Paper Chute Flip-out.496 Output Tray Flip-out .497 Output Tray.497 Flatbed (FB) Cover Assembly.498 ADF Latch Cap .501 ADF Cover .502 Front Panel .504 Panel Cover .509 Front Panel Brackets .510 Upper Cover .512 Copy Module Power Supply/Main Board Assemblies .514 Copy Processor Board .514 Power Supply and Main Board Tray .515 RFI Cover .517 Control PCA .519 Fan .522 Power Supply .523 Back PCA .524 Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies .525 Optical Unit .525 ADF Lamp PCA .527 ADF Lamp.529 Sensor Unit Assembly .530 ADF Motor Unit .533 ADF Belt .534 LED Assembly PCA .536 ADF Unit .537 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies.538 Front Panel Frame Ground Spring .538 Output Tray Brackets .539 Glass Plate Assembly.540 viii Table of Contents C4265-90907, Home Position Sensor .542 Carrier Unit Lamp .544 Carrier Unit .547 Felt Pad .551 Feet.552 Frame Ground Spring .553 Front Lamp PCA .554 Junction PCA and Cover .555 Front Panel Ribbon Cable .557 Carrier Belt and Motor .559 7 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Process.562 Printer System Troubleshooting Process .565 Printer/Paper-Handling Troubleshooting Process .566 Copy Module Troubleshooting Process .568 Troubleshooting the Print System .570 Preliminary Operating Checks .570 Communication.571 Interface Troubleshooting .571 Network Troubleshooting .573 Verify Host System Operation .575 Verify Network and Server Operation .575 General Troubleshooting Information .576 Miscellaneous Problems and Solutions .576 Paper Curl.581 Troubleshooting the Printer and Paper-handling Devices.582 Engine Test.585 Event Log Pages .586 Printer Message Tables .595 Engine Error Messages .596 Input Device Messages .608 Output Device Messages .616 Finisher Devices Messages .628 Paper Handling Controller Error Messages .632 Paper Jams.634 Paper Path Test .636 Menu Map.639 Configuration Pages .641 File Directory Page .644 Usage Page .645 Check the Toner Cartridge .650 Image Quality Tables .651 Repetitive Defect Ruler.664 Image System Troubleshooting .666 High-Voltage Power Supply Check.667 C4265-90907 ix, Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices .669 2000-sheet Input Tray Standalone Diagnostics .6692x500-sheet Input Tray Standalone Diagnostics .673 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Standalone Diagnostics.677 8-bin Mailbox Standalone Diagnostics .682 Diagrams.690 Troubleshooting the Copy Module .703 Status Messages .706 Testing the Copy Module .716 Copy Processor LED Test .716 Copy Module Boot Up Icon Conditions.718 Copy Module Offline Test .719 Other Tests .721 Service Mode Tests .723 8 Parts and Diagrams How to Use the Part Lists and Diagrams .726 Ordering Parts .726 Common Hardware.726 Illustrations and Parts Lists .727 Printer and paper-handling components .728 Printer Parts and Diagrams.730 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams.744 Input Devices .744 Output Devices .751 HP Digital Copier Parts and Diagrams .762 Alphabetical Parts List (Printer and Paper-handling Devices).777 Alphabetical Parts List (Copy Module) .787 Numerical Parts List (Printer and Paper-handling devices).791 Numerical Parts List (Copy Module) .801Index
x Table of Contents C4265-90907,List of Tables
Table 1-1. Common features of the HP LaserJet 8100 Series and the HP LaserJet 8150 Series - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 26 Table 1-2. Comparison of HP LaserJet 8100 Series Printer Features - - - - 27 Table 1-3. Comparison of HP LaserJet 8150 Series Printer Features - - - - 28 Table 1-4. Accessories and Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 40 Table 1-5. Minimum Memory Requirements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 49 Table 1-6. Paper Capacities and Sizes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 50 Table 1-7. Paper Weight Equivalence - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 55 Table 1-8. Declaration of Conformity (HP LaserJet 8100 series and HP LaserJet 8150 series) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 72 Table 2-1. Printer and Toner Cartridge Environmental Conditions - - - - - - 84 Table 2-2. Dimensions of printer and Paper-handling Devices - - - - - - - 85 Table 2-3. Dimensions of Output Devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 86 Table 2-4. Electrical Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 87 Table 2-5. Acoustic Emissions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 88 Table 2-6. Specifications for Copy Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 89 Table 3-1. Control Panel Keys - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 92 Table 3-2. Indicator Lights - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 93 Table 3-3. Factory Default Settings- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 97 Table 3-4. HP LaserJet 8100 Series Quick Copy Jobs Menu - - - - - - - - 101 Table 3-5. HP LaserJet 8100 Series Private/Stored Jobs Menu - - - - - - - 101 Table 3-6. HP LaserJet 8150 Series Job Retention Menu - - - - - - - - - - 102 Table 3-7. Information Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 104 Table 3-8. Paper Handling Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 105 Table 3-9. Print Quality Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 108 Table 3-10. Printing Menu- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 110 Table 3-11. Configuration Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 113 Table 3-12. MBM Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 118 Table 3-13. I/O Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 119 Table 3-14. EIO Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 121 Table 3-15. Duplex Registration Menu- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 123 Table 3-16. Resets Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 125 Table 3-17. Status Bar - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 127 Table 3-18. Menu Tabs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 128 Table 3-19. Context-sensitive Help - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 133 Table 3-20. Default Configurations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 133 Table 3-21. Functions of Buttons and LEDs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 134 Table 3-22. Start Button LED States- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 135 Table 3-23. Default Settings- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 136 Table 3-24. Service Mode Menu Items - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 141 Table 3-25. Key to Figure 3-5 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 154 C4265-90907 List of Tables xi, Table 3-26. Key to Figure 3-6 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 155 Table 4-1. Cleaning the Printer- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 160 Table 4-2. Cleaning the Document Cover, Document Holder, and Flatbed Glass- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 162 Table 4-3. Cleaning the ADF - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 163 Table 5-1. Printer Sensors, Solenoids, Clutches, Motors, and Fans - - - - - 201 Table 5-2. Paper Size Switches - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 203 Table 5-3. 2000-sheet Input Tray Sensors, Switches, Clutches and Motors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 206 Table 5-4. 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Quantity Switches - - - - - - - - - 208 Table 5-5. 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Size Switches - - - - - - - - - - - 208 Table 5-6. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Sensors, Switches, and Motors- - - - - 211 Table 5-7. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Switches- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 212 Table 5-8. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Sensors, Switches, and Motors - - - - - 215 Table 5-9. 8-bin Mailbox Sensors, Switches, Motors, and Controller PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 221 Table 5-10. Stapler Motors, Sensors, and Switches - - - - - - - - - - - - - 227 Table 5-11. Printer Timing- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 232 Table 5-12. Parallel Cable Pin Assignments - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 234 Table 6-1. Hardware Table- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 262 Table 6-2. Hardware Table- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 487 Table 7-1. Paper Curl - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 581 Table 7-2. Power On Defects or Blank Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 582 Table 7-3. Fans - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 584 Table 7-4. HP LaserJet 8150 Series Event Log Page 2 - - - - - - - - - - - 587 Table 7-5. Engine Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 596 Table 7-6. 2000-sheet Input Tray Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - 608 Table 7-7. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - 612 Table 7-8. Envelope Feeder Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 615 Table 7-9. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - 617 Table 7-10. 8-bin Mailbox Error Messages- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 622 Table 7-11. Stapler Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 628 Table 7-12. Duplexer Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 631 Table 7-13. Paper Handling Controller Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - 632 Table 7-14. General Paper Path Troubleshooting Questions - - - - - - - - - 633 Table 7-15. Key to Figure 7-16 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 640 Table 7-16. Printer Devices Troubleshooting- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 648 Table 7-17. Image Quality- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 649 Table 7-18. Blank (White) Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 651 Table 7-19. Black Pages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 651 Table 7-20. Fading Print - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 652 Table 7-21. Dropout- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 654 Table 7-22. Black Lines (parallel or perpendicular to path) - - - - - - - - - - 654 Table 7-23. Toner Smear - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 655 Table 7-24. Background Scatter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 656 Table 7-25. Repetitive Defects - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 657 Table 7-26. Line at Edge of Paper - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 658 xii List of Tables C4265-90907, Table 7-27. Misshapen Characters, Voids - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 659 Table 7-28. Faulty Registration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 660 Table 7-29. Image Skew - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 660 Table 7-30. Bubble Print - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 661 Table 7-31. White Stripes Parallel to Path - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 662 Table 7-32. Partial Blank Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 662 Table 7-33. Compressed Print- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 663 Table 7-34. Blank Portion in the Middle of the Page (Tray 4 Input only) - - - - 663 Table 7-35. DIP Switch Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 671 Table 7-36. 2000-sheet Input Tray LED Status Interpretation- - - - - - - - - 672 Table 7-37. DIP Switch Settings for troubleshooting test procedures - - - - - 674 Table 7-38. Patterns of LED flashing (2-second pause between each pattern) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 676 Table 7-39. DIP switch settings for troubleshooting test - - - - - - - - - - - 677 Table 7-40. Patterns of Flashing LEDs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 679 Table 7-41. 8-bin Mailbox LED Status Interpretation - - - - - - - - - - - - - 685 Table 7-42. Power On Checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 704 Table 7-43. Display and Communication Checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 705 Table 7-44. Boot Errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 707 Table 7-45. Equipment Errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 708 Table 7-46. Temporary Errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 710 Table 7-47. Error Conditions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 713 Table 7-48. Copy Processor LED Test Results - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 717 Table 7-49. Icon Conditions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 718 Table 7-50. Other Tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 721 Table 8-1. Printer and Paper-Handling Components - - - - - - - - - - - - 728 Table 8-2. Printer Covers and Doors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 731 Table 8-3. Printer Internal Components (1 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 733 Table 8-4. Printer Internal Components (2 of 4)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 735 Table 8-5. Printer internal Components (3 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 737 Table 8-6. Printer Internal Components (4 of 4)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 739 Table 8-7. Detail of Assemblies - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 741 Table 8-8. PCB Assembly Locations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 742 Table 8-9. Face-up Solenoid Assembly- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 743 Table 8-10. 2000-sheet Input Tray Components (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - 745 Table 8-11. 2000-sheet Input Tray Components (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - 747 Table 8-12. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Internal Components- - - - - - - - - - 749 Table 8-13. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Internal Components - - - - - - - - - - 752 Table 8-14. 8-bin Mailbox Components (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 755 Table 8-15. 8-bin Mailbox Components (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 757 Table 8-16. 8-bin Mailbox Components (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 759 Table 8-17. Stapler Internal Components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 761 Table 8-18. Covers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 764 Table 8-19. Flatbed - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 765 Table 8-20. Glass Plate and PCA Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 767 Table 8-21. Carrier Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 769 Table 8-22. ADF Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 770 C4265-90907 xiii, Table 8-23. Optical Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 773 Table 8-24. Document Cover Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 774 Table 8-25. Screws (1 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 775 Table 8-26. Screws (2 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 775 Table 8-27. Screws (3 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 776 Table 8-28. Screws (4 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 776 Table 8-29. Alphabetical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices - - 777 Table 8-30. Alphabetical Parts List – Copy Module- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 787 Table 8-31. Numerical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices - - - 791 Table 8-32. Numerical Parts List – Copy Module- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 801 xiv List of Tables C4265-90907,List of Figures
Figure 1-1 Copy System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 29 Figure 1-2 Printer - Front and Right Side View with Tray 1 Open - - - - - - - - - - 31 Figure 1-3 Rear and Left Side View - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 33 Figure 1-4 Front view of HP Digital Copier - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 34 Figure 1-5 Rear view of HP Digital Copier - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 34 Figure 1-6 Preferred Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 35 Figure 1-7 Digital Copier Tabletop Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 36 Figure 1-8 Sample Model and Serial Number Label for the printer - - - - - - - - - 37 Figure 1-9 Paper Handling Devices and Accessories - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 38 Figure 1-10 Paper size specification - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 56 Figure 1-11 Paper orientation- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 59 Figure 1-12 Areas of the Paper that Should Not Be Perforated - - - - - - - - - - - - 60 Figure 1-13 Sample 5% Page Coverage - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 62 Figure 2-1 Printer Space Requirements (Top view) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 81 Figure 2-2 Printer Space Requirements (Side view) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 81 Figure 2-3 Printer Space Requirements (with Mailbox and Input Device) - - - - 82 Figure 2-4 Printer and Copy Module Space requirements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 83 Figure 2-5 Dimensions of Paper Handling Devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 87 Figure 3-1 Control Panel Layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 92 Figure 3-2 Front Panel Layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 127 Figure 3-3 Button/LED Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 134 Figure 3-4 Copy Module Service Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 145 Figure 3-5 Configuration Page (varies with installed options)- - - - - - - - - - - - 154 Figure 3-6 Menu Map Page (varies with printer models and installed options) 155 Figure 4-1 Cleaning the Document Cover, Document Holder, and Flatbed Glass - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 162 Figure 4-2 Parts of the ADF - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 163 Figure 4-3 Image Area Margins - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 170 Figure 4-4 Tray Position Adjustment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 171 Figure 4-5 Tray 4 Position Adjustment- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 172 Figure 4-6 Creating an Offset Target- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 176 Figure 5-1 Printer Functional Block Diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 180 Figure 5-2 Low Voltage Power Distribution System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 181 Figure 5-3 Low Voltage Power Supply- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 182 Figure 5-4 High Voltage Power Supply Contacts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 184 Figure 5-5 Normal Mode vs. EconoMode- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 187 Figure 5-6 Image Formation Block Diagram- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 190 Figure 5-7 Photosensitive Drum - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 192 Figure 5-8 Drum Cleaning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 193 Figure 5-9 Primary Charging Roller- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 194 C4265-90907 List of Figures xv, Figure 5-10 Image Writing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 195 Figure 5-11 Image Development - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 198 Figure 5-12 Image Transferring and Media Separation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 199 Figure 5-13 Image Fusing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 200 Figure 5-14 Printer Paper Paths - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 201 Figure 5-15 Printer Sensors, Solenoids, Clutches, Motors, and Fans - - - - - - - 204 Figure 5-16 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Path - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 207 Figure 5-17 2000-sheet Input Tray Sensors, Switches, Clutches, and Motors - 209 Figure 5-182x500-sheet Input Tray Paper Path - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 212 Figure 5-192x500-sheet input Tray Sensors and Switches - - - - - - - - - - - - - 213 Figure 5-20 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Components (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 216 Figure 5-21 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Components (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 217 Figure 5-22 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Block Diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 221 Figure 5-23 8-bin Mailbox Paper Path - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 222 Figure 5-24 8-bin Mailbox Sensors, Switches, Motors, and Controller PCA- - - 224 Figure 5-25 Finisher Paper Path- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 228 Figure 5-26 Stapler Motors, Sensors, and Switches - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 229 Figure 5-27 Stapler Cycles- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 232 Figure 5-28 Recommended C-link Configuration (Daisy Chain) - - - - - - - - - - - 234 Figure 5-29 General Timing Diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 236 Figure 5-30 Copy Module System Block Diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 238 Figure 5-31 Copy Processor and key components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 240 Figure 5-32 Image path (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 249 Figure 5-33 Locations of ADF Sensors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 252 Figure 5-34 ADF Sensors functional diagram- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 253 Figure 6-1 Phillips vs. Posidriv Screwdrivers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 257 Figure 6-2 Disk Drive- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 259 Figure 6-3 Control Panel (1 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 269 Figure 6-4 Control Panel (2 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 270 Figure 6-5 AC Access Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 272 Figure 6-6 Back Cover- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 273 Figure 6-7 Front Cover (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 274 Figure 6-8 Front Cover (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 275 Figure 6-9 Left Lower Cover- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 276 Figure 6-10 Top Cover (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 277 Figure 6-11 Top Cover (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 278 Figure 6-12 Delivery Unit (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 280 Figure 6-13 Delivery Unit (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 281 Figure 6-14 Diverter Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 283 Figure 6-15 Diverter Door Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 284 Figure 6-16 Lower Right Door Assembly (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 285 Figure 6-17 Right Lower Door Assembly (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 286 Figure 6-18 Right Lower Door Assembly (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 287 Figure 6-19 Fan 1, Laser/Scanner (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 288 Figure 6-20 Fan 1, Laser/Scanner (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 289 Figure 6-21 Fan 2, Low Voltage Power Supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 290 Figure 6-22 Fan 3, Formatter Fan- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 291 xvi List of Figures C4265-90907, Figure 6-23 Fan 4, Delivery Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 292 Figure 6-24 Fan 5 Removal (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 293 Figure 6-25 Fan 5 Removal (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 294 Figure 6-26 Tray 1 Removal (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 295 Figure 6-27 Tray 1 Removal (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 296 Figure 6-28 Tray 1 Removal (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 297 Figure 6-29 Tray 1 Pickup Unit Removal (1 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 298 Figure 6-30 Tray 1 Pickup Unit Removal (2 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 299 Figure 6-31 Tray 1 Pickup Unit Removal (3 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 300 Figure 6-32 Tray 1 Pickup Unit Removal (4 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 301 Figure 6-33 Feeder Assembly (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 302 Figure 6-34 Feeder Assembly (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 303 Figure 6-35 Formatter Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 305 Figure 6-36 Fusing Assembly- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 306 Figure 6-37 Laser/Scanner Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 308 Figure 6-38 Main Gear Assembly (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 310 Figure 6-39 Main Gear Assembly (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 311 Figure 6-40 Main Gear Assembly (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 312 Figure 6-41 Main Motor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 313 Figure 6-42 Paper Input Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 314 Figure 6-43 DC Controller PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 315 Figure 6-44 Output Paper Sensor PCA (1 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 316 Figure 6-45 Output Paper Sensor PCA (2 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 317 Figure 6-46 Output Paper Sensor PCA (3 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 318 Figure 6-47 Output Paper Sensor PCA (4 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 319 Figure 6-48 Paper Size PCA (1 of 3)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 320 Figure 6-49 Paper Size PCA (2 of 3)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 321 Figure 6-50 Paper Size PCA (3 of 3)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 322 Figure 6-51 High Voltage Power Supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 323 Figure 6-52 Low Voltage Power Supply- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 324 Figure 6-53 Registration Assembly (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 325 Figure 6-54 Registration Assembly (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 326 Figure 6-55 Registration Assembly (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 327 Figure 6-56 Tray 1 Feed Roller- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 328 Figure 6-57 Tray 1 Separation Pad - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 329 Figure 6-58 Tray 2 and 3, Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers - - - - - - - - - - 330 Figure 6-59 Paper Input Unit Sensor (PS2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 333 Figure 6-60 Registration Sensor (PS1) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 335 Figure 6-61 Face-up Solenoid Assembly, SL3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 336 Figure 6-62 Transfer Roller Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 337 Figure 6-63 2000-sheet Input Tray Orientation- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 342 Figure 6-64 2000-sheet Input Tray Front Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 343 Figure 6-65 2000-sheet Input Tray Back Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 344 Figure 6-66 2000-sheet Input Tray Left Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 345 Figure 6-67 2000-sheet Input Tray Right Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 346 Figure 6-68 2000-sheet Input Tray Main Drive Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 347 Figure 6-69 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Tray- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 349 C4265-90907 xvii, Figure 6-70 2000-sheet Input Tray Main Cable Harness - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 351 Figure 6-71 2000-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 352 Figure 6-72 2000-sheet Input Tray Front LED PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 355 Figure 6-73 2000-sheet Input Tray Pickup Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 356 Figure 6-74 2000-sheet Input Tray Power Supply- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 358 Figure 6-75 2000-sheet Input Tray Rollers: Pickup, Feed, and Separation - - - 361 Figure 6-76 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Size and Paper Quantity Switch (1 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 364 Figure 6-77 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Size and Paper Quantity Switch Assemblies (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 365 Figure 6-78 2000-sheet Input Tray Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) - - - - - - - - - - 366 Figure 6-79 2000-sheet Input Tray Tension Springs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 368 Figure 6-80 2000-sheet Input Tray Locating Pins - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 369 Figure 6-81 2000-sheet Input Tray Casters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 370 Figure 6-82 2000-sheet Input Tray Adjustable Foot - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 371 Figure 6-83 Orientation of the2x500-sheet Input Tray - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 373 Figure 6-84 Back Cover- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 374 Figure 6-85 Left Cover- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 375 Figure 6-86 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 376 Figure 6-87 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 377 Figure 6-88 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 378 Figure 6-89 Right Cover (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 379 Figure 6-90 Right Cover (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 380 Figure 6-91 Right Cover (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 381 Figure 6-92 Front Top Cover (1 of 3)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 382 Figure 6-93 Front Top Cover (2 of 3)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 383 Figure 6-94 Front Top Cover (3 of 3)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 384 Figure 6-95 Trays 4 and 5 (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 385 Figure 6-96 Trays 4 and 5 (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 386 Figure 6-97 Pickup Assembly (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 387 Figure 6-98 Pickup Assembly (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 388 Figure 6-99 Paper Deck Drive Assembly (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 389 Figure 6-100 Paper Deck Drive Assembly (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 390 Figure 6-101 Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 391 Figure 6-1022x500-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 392 Figure 6-103 Tray-Size Sensing PCA (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 393 Figure 6-104 Tray-Size Sensing PCA (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 394 Figure 6-105 Power Supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 395 Figure 6-106 Main Cable (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 396 Figure 6-107 Main Cable (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 397 Figure 6-108 Storage Paper Tray - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 398 Figure 6-109 Front Door (Storage Area) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 399 Figure 6-110 Casters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 400 Figure 6-111 Foot Tip and Adjustable Foot Tip - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 401 Figure 6-112 Locating Pins - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 402 Figure 6-113 Front LED PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 403 Figure 6-114 Orientation of the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 406 xviii List of Figures C4265-90907, Figure 6-115 Front Cover (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 407 Figure 6-116 Front Cover (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 408 Figure 6-117 Front Cover (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 409 Figure 6-118 Back Cover (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 410 Figure 6-119 Back Cover (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 411 Figure 6-120 Top Cover (1 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 412 Figure 6-121 Top Cover (2 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 413 Figure 6-122 Top Cover (3 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 414 Figure 6-123 Top Cover (4 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 415 Figure 6-124 Mailbox Controller PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 416 Figure 6-125 Mailbox Power Supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 417 Figure 6-126 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) (1 of 5)- - - - - - - - - - - - 418 Figure 6-127 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) (2 of 5)- - - - - - - - - - - - 419 Figure 6-128 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) (3 of 5)- - - - - - - - - - - - 420 Figure 6-129 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) (4 of 5)- - - - - - - - - - - - 421 Figure 6-130 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) (5 of 5)- - - - - - - - - - - - 422 Figure 6-131 Face-down Bins (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 423 Figure 6-132 Face-down Bins (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 424 Figure 6-133 Face-down Bins (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 425 Figure 6-134 Empty Bin Sensor PCA (1 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 426 Figure 6-135 Empty Bin Sensor PCA (2 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 427 Figure 6-136 Full Bin and Interlock Sensor PCA (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 428 Figure 6-137 Full Bin and Interlock Sensor PCA (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 429 Figure 6-138 LED PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 430 Figure 6-139 Face-up Sensors PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 431 Figure 6-140 Reversing Mechanism Motor (1 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 432 Figure 6-141 Reversing Mechanism Motor (2 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 433 Figure 6-142 Face-up/Diverter Assembly (Flipper) (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 434 Figure 6-143 Face-up/Diverter Assembly (Flipper) (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 435 Figure 6-144 Face-up/Diverter Assembly (Flipper) (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 436 Figure 6-145 Short Tray 7 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 437 Figure 6-146 Solenoid Reversing Mechanism - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 438 Figure 6-147 Flipper Solenoid - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 439 Figure 6-148 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Handle - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 440 Figure 6-149 Latching Mechanism - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 441 Figure 6-150 Cover Latch - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 442 Figure 6-151 Orientation of the 8-bin Mailbox - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 444 Figure 6-152 8-bin Mailbox Covers (Front and Back) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 445 Figure 6-153 8-bin Mailbox Top Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 447 Figure 6-154 8-bin Mailbox Power Supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 448 Figure 6-155 8-bin Mailbox Paper Bins and Blind Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 449 Figure 6-156 8-bin Mailbox Flipper Assembly (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 450 Figure 6-157 8-bin Mailbox Flipper Assembly (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 451 Figure 6-158 8-bin Mailbox Flipper Assembly (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 452 Figure 6-159 8-bin Mailbox Delivery Head Motor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 453 Figure 6-160 8-bin Mailbox Transport Belt Motor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 454 Figure 6-161 8-bin Mailbox Input Paper Guide (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 456 C4265-90907 xix, Figure 6-162 8-bin Mailbox Input Paper Guide (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 457 Figure 6-163 8-bin Mailbox Metal Tape and Housing Assembly (1 of 2) - - - - - - 458 Figure 6-164 8-bin Mailbox Metal Tape and Housing Assembly (2 of 2) - - - - - - 459 Figure 6-165 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 460 Figure 6-166 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 461 Figure 6-167 8-bin Mailbox Anticurl Strings (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 462 Figure 6-168 8-bin Mailbox Anticurl Strings (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 463 Figure 6-169 8-bin Mailbox Delivery Head Assembly (1 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 464 Figure 6-170 8-bin Mailbox Delivery Head Assembly (2 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 465 Figure 6-171 8-bin Mailbox Delivery Head Assembly (3 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 466 Figure 6-172 8-bin Mailbox Delivery Head Assembly (4 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 467 Figure 6-173 8-bin Mailbox Interlock Switch - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 469 Figure 6-174 8-bin Mailbox Diagnostic LED PCA (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 470 Figure 6-175 8-bin Mailbox Diagnostic LED PCA (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 471 Figure 6-176 8-bin Mailbox User Status LED PCA (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 472 Figure 6-177 8-bin Mailbox User Status LED PCA (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 473 Figure 6-178 8-bin Mailbox Adjustable and Fixed Casters- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 474 Figure 6-179 8-bin Mailbox Attachment Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 475 Figure 6-180 Mailbox with Stapler, Stapler Removal or Installation - - - - - - - - - 477 Figure 6-181 C-link Cable on Mailbox with Stapler - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 478 Figure 6-182 Back Plate (1 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 479 Figure 6-183 Back Plate (2 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 480 Figure 6-184 Stapler Controller PCA (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 481 Figure 6-185 Stapler Controller PCA (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 482 Figure 6-186 Stapler Controller PCA (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 483 Figure 6-187 Top Cover Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 484 Figure 6-188 Stapler Bed Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 485 Figure 6-189 Hinges - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 487 Figure 6-190 Optional Output Accessory- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 493 Figure 6-191 Copy Connect EIO Board (slot 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 494 Figure 6-192 View with HP Digital Copier Stand (preferred configuration) - - - - 495 Figure 6-193 View with HP Digital Copier on Tabletop - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 495 Figure 6-194 Orientation of the HP Digital Copier- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 499 Figure 6-195 Separation Pad Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 500 Figure 6-196 Pick Roller Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 501 Figure 6-197 Pick Rollers (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 502 Figure 6-198 Pick Rollers (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 503 Figure 6-199 Document Holding Pad - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 505 Figure 6-200 Paper Chute Flip-out - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 506 Figure 6-201 Output Tray - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 507 Figure 6-202 FB Cover Assembly- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 508 Figure 6-203 Thumb Screw for Document Cover Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 509 Figure 6-204 Removing the Cover from the Posts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 510 Figure 6-205 ADF Latch Cap - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 511 Figure 6-206 ADF Cover (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 512 Figure 6-207 ADF Cover (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 513 Figure 6-208 Front Panel (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 514 xx List of Figures C4265-90907, Figure 6-209 Front Panel (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 515 Figure 6-210 Front Panel Cable Clamp and Front Panel Frame Ground Plate - 516 Figure 6-211 Front Panel Ribbon Cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 517 Figure 6-212 Unplugging the Ribbon Cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 518 Figure 6-213 Panel Cover (bottom view) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 519 Figure 6-214 Front Panel Brackets (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 520 Figure 6-215 Front Panel Brackets (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 521 Figure 6-216 Upper Cover (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 522 Figure 6-217 Upper Cover (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 523 Figure 6-218 Copy Processor Board- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 524 Figure 6-219 Power Supply and Main Board Tray (1 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 525 Figure 6-220 Power Supply and Main Board Tray (2 of 2)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 526 Figure 6-221 RFI Cover (inside/rear view) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 527 Figure 6-222 RFI Cover (outside/front view) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 528 Figure 6-223 Control PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 529 Figure 6-224 Card Cage - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 530 Figure 6-225 EEPROM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 531 Figure 6-226 Fan - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 532 Figure 6-227 Power Supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 533 Figure 6-228 Back PCA- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 534 Figure 6-229 Optical Unit (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 535 Figure 6-230 Optical Unit (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 536 Figure 6-231 ADF Lamp PCA (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 537 Figure 6-232 ADF Lamp PCA (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 538 Figure 6-233 ADF Lamp - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 539 Figure 6-234 Sensor Unit Assembly (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 540 Figure 6-235 Sensor Unit Assembly (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 541 Figure 6-236 Sensor Unit Assembly (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 542 Figure 6-237 ADF Motor Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 543 Figure 6-238 ADF Belt- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 544 Figure 6-239 LED Assembly PCA- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 546 Figure 6-240 ADF Unit (shown without Optical Unit)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 547 Figure 6-241 Front Panel Frame Ground Spring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 549 Figure 6-242 Output Tray Brackets- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 550 Figure 6-243 Glass Plate Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 551 Figure 6-244 Idle Roller Coil Spring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 552 Figure 6-245 Home Position Sensor (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 553 Figure 6-246 Home Position Sensor (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 554 Figure 6-247 Dust Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 555 Figure 6-248 Lamp (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 556 Figure 6-249 Lamp (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 557 Figure 6-250 Carrier Unit (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 558 Figure 6-251 Carrier Unit (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 559 Figure 6-252 Carrier Belt - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 560 Figure 6-253 Unplugging the Ribbon Cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 561 Figure 6-254 Felt Pad - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 562 Figure 6-255 Feet - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 563 C4265-90907 xxi, Figure 6-256 Frame Ground Spring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 564 Figure 6-257 Front Lamp PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 565 Figure 6-258 Junction PCA Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 566 Figure 6-259 Junction PCA - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 567 Figure 6-260 Front Panel Ribbon Cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 568 Figure 6-261 Unplugging the Ribbon Cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 569 Figure 6-262 Carrier Belt and Motor (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 570 Figure 6-263 Carrier Belt and Motor (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 571 Figure 7-1 Troubleshooting Process - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 575 Figure 7-2 Print System Troubleshooting Process - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 577 Figure 7-3 Printer and Paper-Handling Troubleshooting Process (1 of 2) - - - 578 Figure 7-4 Printer and Paper-Handling Troubleshooting Process (2 of 2) - - - 579 Figure 7-5 Copy Module Troubleshooting Process (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 580 Figure 7-6 Copy Module Troubleshooting Process (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 581 Figure 7-7 Communications Link (C-link) Cables, Supported Daisy Chain Connections583 Figure 7-8 Sample JetDirect Configuration Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 586 Figure 7-9 Fan Location and Airflow- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 596 Figure 7-10 Engine Test Button - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 597 Figure 7-11 Sample Event Log, page one - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 600 Figure 7-12 HP LaserJet 8150 Series Sample Event Log, page two- - - - - - - - 601 Figure 7-13 Error Format for Paper Handling - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 606 Figure 7-14 Paper Path Jam Locations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 648 Figure 7-15 Paper Path Test Source and Output Selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 650 Figure 7-16 Sample Menu Map - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 653 Figure 7-17 Sample printer Configuration Page (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 655 Figure 7-18 Sample Copy Module Configuration Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 656 Figure 7-19 Sample File Directory Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 657 Figure 7-20 Sample Usage Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 659 Figure 7-21 Repetitive Defect Ruler - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 678 Figure 7-22 High Voltage Power Supply Contacts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 681 Figure 7-23 8-bin Mailbox LEDs Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 695 Figure 7-24 8-bin Mailbox Power Supply Test Mode Switch - - - - - - - - - - - - - 696 Figure 7-25 Printer Sensors and Switches- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 704 Figure 7-26 Printer Motor, Clutches, and Solenoids - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 705 Figure 7-27 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (1 of 5) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 706 Figure 7-28 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (2 of 5) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 707 Figure 7-29 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (3 of 5) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 708 Figure 7-30 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (4 of 5) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 709 Figure 7-31 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (5 of 5) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 710 Figure 7-32 Mailbox with Stapler Wiring Diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 711 Figure 7-33 2000-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA Inputs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 712 Figure 7-34 2000-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA Outputs- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 713 Figure 7-35 2000-sheet Input Tray Main Wiring Diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 714 Figure 7-36 8-bin Mailbox Main Wiring Diagram- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 715 Figure 7-37 Copy Processor LEDs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 730 Figure 7-38 Locations of ADF Sensors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 733 xxii List of Figures C4265-90907, Figure 8-1 HP LaserJet 8150 MFP Paper-Handling Components- - - - - - - - - 742 Figure 8-2 Printer Covers and Doors- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 744 Figure 8-3 Printer Internal Components (1 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 746 Figure 8-4 Printer Internal Components (2 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 748 Figure 8-5 Printer Internal Components (3 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 750 Figure 8-6 Printer Internal Components (4 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 752 Figure 8-7 Detail of Assemblies - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 754 Figure 8-8 PCB Assembly Location Diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 756 Figure 8-9 Face-up Solenoid Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 757 Figure 8-10 2000-sheet Input Tray Components (1 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 758 Figure 8-11 2000-sheet Input Tray Components (2 of 2) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 760 Figure 8-122x500-sheet Input Tray Internal Components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 762 Figure 8-13 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Internal Components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 765 Figure 8-14 8-bin Mailbox Components (1 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 768 Figure 8-15 8-bin Mailbox Components (2 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 770 Figure 8-16 8-bin Mailbox Components (3 of 3) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 772 Figure 8-17 Stapler Internal Components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 774 Figure 8-18 Assembly Location Diagram - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 776 Figure 8-19 Covers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 777 Figure 8-20 Flatbed- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 779 Figure 8-21 Glass Plate and PCA Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 781 Figure 8-22 Carrier Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 783 Figure 8-23 ADF Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 784 Figure 8-24 Optical Unit- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 787 Figure 8-25 Document Cover Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 788 Figure 8-26 Screws (1 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 789 Figure 8-27 Screws (2 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 789 Figure 8-28 Screws (3 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 790 Figure 8-29 Screws (4 of 4) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 790 C4265-90907 xxiii, xxiv List of Figures C4265-90907, 1 Product InformationChapter Contents
Printer Features .26 Features of the HP Digital Copier.29 Product Overview .31 Identification .37 Paper-handling Devices, Accessories, and Options.38 Paper Capacities and Sizes .50 Media Selection Guidelines .52 Service Approach.61 Technical Assistance .64 Regulatory Information.66 Warranty .77 C4265-90907 Chapter Contents 25,Printer Features Table 1-1. Common features of the HP LaserJet 8100 Series and
the HP LaserJet 8150 Series Feature HP LaserJet 8100 Series HP LaserJet 8150 Series Description Description Print Speed 32 ppm letter or A4 32 ppm letter or A4 17 ppm ledger (11 by 17) 17 ppm ledger (11 by 17) 18 ppm A3 18 ppm A3 20 ppm legal 20 ppm legal 20.5 ppm B4 20.5 ppm B4 Custom Tray 12 ppm 12 ppm Tray 1 12 ppm 12 ppm Duplex Speed 12 ppm letter or A4 12 ppm letter or A4 8.4 ppm ledger (11 by 17) or 8.4 ppm ledger (11 by 17) or A3 A3 9 ppm legal or B4 9 ppm legal or B4 Text and Graphics 600 dpi with FastRes 600 dpi with FastRes Resolution FastRes 1200 provides FastRes 1200 provides 1200 dpi quality at full 1200 dpi quality at full speed speed plus Resolution plus Resolution Enhancement technology Enhancement technology (REt) (REt) Standard Printer Enhanced PCL 6 Enhanced PCL 6 Languages: PCL 5e for compatibility PCL 5e for compatibility PostScript™ Level 2 PostScript™ Level 3 emulation emulation Duty Cycle Up to 150,000 images Up to 150,000 images (Monthly Usage) Internal Typefaces 45 PCL, 35 PostScript 45 PCL, 35 PostScript Cartridge Slots None None 26 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907,Table 1-1. Common features of the HP LaserJet 8100 Series and
the HP LaserJet 8150 Series Feature HP LaserJet 8100 Series HP LaserJet 8150 Series Description Description Power Control PowerSave Mode PowerSave Mode Control Panel 6 Keys, 3 LEDs, LCD Display 6 Keys, 3 LEDs, LCD Display (2-line, 16 characters per (2-line, 16 characters per line) line) EconoMode Yes Yes (draft quality)Table 1-2. Comparison of HP LaserJet 8100 Series Printer Features
Features HP LaserJet HP LaserJet HP LaserJet HP LaserJet 8100 8100 N 8100 DN 8100 MFP (C4214A) (C4215A) (C4216A) (C4217A) Memory:1 16 MB 16 MB 24 MB2 48 MB3 Standard IEEE-1284 ECP IEEE-1284 ECP IEEE-1284 ECP IEEE-1284 ECP Interfaces Parallel A to C Parallel A to C Parallel A to C Parallel A to C connector connector connector connector JetDirect EIO JetDirect EIO JetDirect EIO Duplexer Optional Optional Standard Standard Hard Disk Optional Optional Optional Standard 1. Printer memory is optimized with Memory Enhancement technology (MEt). Printer has 16 MB RAM onboard. DIMMs available for use include 4, 8, 16, and 64 MB modules. See Chapter 8 for option product numbers. SDRAM available includes 4, 8, 16, and 64 MB modules. EDO RAM available in- cludes 4, 8, and 16 MB modules. 32 MB SDRAM modules are compatible, but not available from HP. A maximum of 192 MB RAM can be configured. 2. 16 MB on-board RAM, and one 8 MB DIMM. 3. To upgrade an HP LaserJet 8100 printer to MFP, the firmware date code must end with 5.44 or higher. Otherwise, you will have to update the firm- ware.C4265-90907 Printer Features 27
,Table 1-3. Comparison of HP LaserJet 8150 Series Printer Features
Features HP LaserJet HP LaserJet HP LaserJet HP LaserJet HP LaserJet 8150 8150N 8150DN 8150HN 8150MFP (C4265A) (C4266A) (C4267A) (C4269A) (C4268A) Memory:1 32 MB 32 MB 32 MB 32 MB 64 MB Standard IEEE-1284 IEEE-1284 IEEE-1284 IEEE-1284 IEEE-1284 Inter-faces ECP ECP ECP ECP ECP Parallel A to Parallel A to Parallel A to Parallel A to Parallel A to C connector C connector C connector C connector C connector JetDirect EIO JetDirect EIO JetDirect EIO JetDirectEIO
Duplexer Optional Optional Standard Standard Standard Hard Disk Optional Optional Optional Optional Standard 1. Printer memory is optimized with Memory Enhancement. SDRAM DIMMs available for use include 8, 16, 32, and 64 MB modules. See Chapter 8 for op- tion product numbers. Flash DIMMS available in 2, 4, and 8 MB modules. A maximum of 160 MB RAM can be configured. 28 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907,Features of the HP Digital Copier
Figure 1-1 Copy System ● Straight-through paper path ● Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)—load original facedown ● One pass duplex scanning/2 complete optical systems ● 32 images per minute letter/A4 and 16 images per minute 11 by 17/A3 ● Touch screen LED panel with keypad ● Copy module’s 400 by 300 and 400 by 600 8-bit grayscale is converted to the printer’s 600 by 600 dithered black and white (FastRes is sideband, 2-bit grayscale) ● Auto/Photo/Text modes ● IEEE-1394 high speed serial connection (Copy Processor Board to Copy Connect EIO) ● Job Interrupt at (printing) boundary ● N-up layout (printing multiple pages per sheet) ● Auto-configure to printer settings ● Copy books C4265-90907 Features of the HP Digital Copier 29, ● Power Save ● Copy module firmware is stored on the printer’s hard disk for easy upgrades ● Copy module can be placed on an optional copy stand 30 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907,Product Overview External View of the Printer
Figure 1-2 Printer - Front and Right Side View with Tray 1 Open (Views may vary with different models and accessories) 1 Left Output Bin (face up) 2 Control Panel 3 Standard Output Bin (face down) 4 Adjustable Paper Stop 5 Top Cover 6 Envelope Feeder (optional) 7 Tray 1 (multipurpose) C4265-90907 Product Overview 31, 8 Tray 1 Extensions 9 Tray 1 Paper Width Guides 10 Front Door 11 Tray 2 12 Optional 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4) 13 Tray 3 14 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler (0ptional) 15 On/Off Switch 16 Optional Duplexer (internal) 17 Optional Stapler 32 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907,Formatter Assemblies
Figure 1-3 Rear and Left Side View 1 Formatter Assembly 2 Parallel IEEE-1284 Interface Port 3 EIO Slot 3 Location 4 EIO Slot 2 Location (Hard Disk Location) 5 External Paper Handling Controller Port (behind EIO Slot 2/Hard Disk Accessory Location) 6 EIO Slot 1 Location 7 Firmware DIMM 8 DIMM Slots (3) 9 AC Power Connector 10 Model and Serial Number Label C4265-90907 Product Overview 33,External View of HP Digital Copier
Automatic document Automatic feeder (ADF) Paper guides document feeder Paper output bin loaded LED Automatic document feeder Extension input tray Extension Power switch (back right) ADF lever Document cover and holding pad Graphical display panel Front panel Flatbed Figure 1-4 Front view of HP Digital Copier Power switch Power inlet Power supply and main board tray handle Interface connector Copy processor board Figure 1-5 Rear view of HP Digital Copier 34 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907,Configurations
Optional HP Digital Copier Optional HP Digital Copier Stand Optional Output Devices (A): HP printer 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler A or 8-bin Mailbox or 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox B Optional Input on Stand Devices (B): or 3000-sheet Stacker 2000-sheet Input Tray or or 3000-sheet Stapler/ 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Stacker Figure 1-6 Preferred Configuration C4265-90907 Product Overview 35, HP printer Optional Output Devices (C): Optional HP Digital Copier 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler or C 8-bin Mailbox or 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox on Stand D or 3000-sheet Stacker or 3000-sheet Stapler/ Stacker Optional Input Devices (D): Table 2000-sheet Input Tray or2x500-sheet Input Tray or Printer Stand Figure 1-7 Digital Copier Tabletop Configuration 36 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907,Identification Model and Serial Numbers
The model and serial numbers are listed on identification labels located on the rear of the printer. The model number is alphanumeric, such as C4214A. The serial number contains information about the Country of Origin, the Revision Level, the Production Code, and production number of the printer. The label also contains power rating and regulatory information as shown in figure 1-8. Figure 1-8 Sample Model and Serial Number Label for the printer Note The locations of the labels may change. The identification labels for the copy module are located on the back cover, below the ADF. The identification labels for the 2000-sheet Input Tray and2x500-sheet Input Tray are located on the back panel, directly below the identification labels on the printer. To locate the identification labels for the 8-bin Mailbox and 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler, detach the paper-handling device from the printer. The identification labels are located on the bottom right of the front side (side that attaches to printer). To locate the identification labels for the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox, detach the paper-handling device from the printer. The identification label is located on the bottom side of the back cover. C4265-90907 Identification 37,Paper-handling Devices, Accessories, and Options
The accessories and optional equipment for the printer are shown in figure 1-9 and described in table 1-4. All the paper-handling devices in figure 1-9 and in table 1-4 are optional. Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000- sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling Accessories (C4788-90904). HP Digital Copy 2,000 Input Tray 2x500-sheet Input Tray Printer Stand Stand (Tray 4) (Trays 4 and 5) HP LaserJet MFP Custom Paper Upgrade Kit Tray Figure 1-9 Paper Handling Devices and Accessories 38 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907, 5-bin Mailbox 3000-sheet Stapler/Stacker 8-bin Mailbox with Stapler or 3000-sheet Stacker 7-bin Tabletop Duplexer HP Fast Envelope Mailbox InfraRed Feeder Connect C4265-90907 Paper-handling Devices, Accessories, and Options 39,Ordering Information
Use only accessories specifically designed for this printer. To order an accessory, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider. Table 1-4. Accessories and Options Item Description or Use HP LaserJet HP LaserJet 8100 Series 8150 Series Part Number Part Number Paper2x500-sheet Two 500-sheet Input C4780A C4780A Handling Input Tray Trays. 2000-sheet Input 2000-sheet Input Tray. C4781A C4781A Tray Envelope Feeder Automatically feeds up to C3765B C3765B 100 envelopes. Custom Paper Allows printing on C4184A C4184A Tray custom-sized paper. Replaces Tray 3 or Tray 5. Duplex Printing Allows automatic printing C4782A C4782A Accessory on both sides of paper. (duplexer - standard on DN, HN and MFP bundles) 7-bin Tabletop Each face-down output C4783A C4783A Mailbox bins holds 120 sheets of paper. One Face-up Bin holds 100 sheets of paper. Designed for tabletop use. 8-bin Mailbox Each of the 8 output bins C4785A C4785A holds 250 sheets of paper. 40 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907, Table 1-4. Accessories and Options (continued) Item Description or Use HP LaserJet HP LaserJet 8100 Series 8150 Series Part Number Part Number 5-bin Mailbox with Each of the 5 output bins C4787A C4787A Stapler holds 250 sheets of paper. Provides job separation by stapling jobs. 3,000-sheet One 3000-sheet stacking C4779A C4779A stacker device. 3,000-sheet One 3000-sheet stacking C4788A C4788A Stacker/Stapler device provides stapling for up to 50 sheets of paper per document. MFP Upgrade Kit Copy module, copy C4166A C4166B connect card, hard disk, cables. Printer Printer Stand Used in place of the C2975A C2975A Stands 2000-sheet Input Tray or the2x500-sheet Input Tray when an 8-bin Mailbox or a 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler is attached. Cannot be used with the HP Digital Copy. Stand for 7-bin Allows 7-bin Tabletop C4239A C4239A Tabletop Mailbox Mailbox to be used when printer is mounted on2x500-sheet Input Tray, 2000-sheet Input Tray, or printer stand. Copy module Allows copy module to be C4231A C4231A stand placed above the printer (must have paper handling input device). C4265-90907 Paper-handling Devices, Accessories, and Options 41, Table 1-4. Accessories and Options (continued) Item Description or Use HP LaserJet HP LaserJet 8100 Series 8150 Series Part Number Part Number Printing HP Multipurpose HP brand paper for a HPM1120 HPM1120 Supplies Paper variety of uses (1 box of 10 reams, 500 sheets (Other HP media each). To order a sample is available where in the U.S. call office products are (800) 471-4701. sold.) HP LaserJet Paper Premium HP brand paper HPJ1124 HPJ1124 for use with HP LaserJet (Other HP media printers (1 box of 10 is available where reams, 500 sheets each). office products are To order a sample in the sold.) U.S. call (800) 471-4701. Toner Cartridge Replacement HP C4182X C4182X (20,000 images) Microfine toner cartridge. 42 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907, Table 1-4. Accessories and Options (continued) Item Description or Use HP LaserJet HP LaserJet 8100 Series 8150 Series Part Number Part Number Memory, Dual In-line Boosts the ability of the Fonts, and Memory Module printer to handle large Mass (DIMM) print jobs (HP LaserJet Storage (100-pin) 8100 Series maximum 192 MB with HP brand DIMMs; HP LaserJet 8150 Series maximum 160 MB with HP brand DIMMs). EDO DIMMs 4 MB C4135A Not Supported (100-pin) 8 MB C4136A Not Supported 16 MB C4137A Not Supported SDRAM DIMMs 4 MB C4140A Not Supported (100-pin) 8 MB C4141A C7842A 16 MB C4142A C7843A 32 MB C4143A C7845A 64 MB C3913A C7846A Flash DIMM Permanent storage for (100-pin) fonts and forms: 2 MB C4286A C4286A 4 MB C4287A C4287A 8 MB (firmware) Not Supported C8530A Font DIMM 8 MB Asian ROM: (100-pin) traditional Chinese C4292A C4292A simplified Chinese C4293A C4293A Hard Disk Permanent storage for C2985B C2985B fonts and forms, copying and digital sending. C2985-69002 C2985-69002 Enables Raster Image (exchange) (exchange) Processor (RIP) ONCE multiple printing and Job Retention. C4265-90907 Paper-handling Devices, Accessories, and Options 43, Table 1-4. Accessories and Options (continued) Item Description or Use HP LaserJet HP LaserJet 8100 Series 8150 Series Part Number Part Number Cable and Parallel Cables 3 Meter IEEE-1284 cable C2946A C2946A Interface 10 Meter IEEE-1284 C2947A C2947A Accessories cable Macintosh For PhoneNET or 92215N 92215N Network Cable Kit LocalTalk connection. (Requires EIO 1-to-1 connection 92215S 92215S card) (Macintosh DIN-8 cable male-male). Cable and Enhanced I/O HP JetDirect print server Interface Cards multi-protocol EIO Accessories network cards: Ethernet (RJ-45 only) J3110A J3110A Ethernet (RJ-45 and J3111A J3111A BNC) an LocalTalk J3112A J3112A Token Ring (RJ-45 and J3113A J3113A DB-9) Fast Ethernet 10/100Base-TX N/A J4169A (RJ-45 only) USB, Serial, LocalTalk. N/A J4135A HP Fast InfraRed Enables wireless printing C4103A C4103A Connect from any IRDA-compliant device (such as a laptop computer). Power Box For connecting an 8-bin C4789A C4789A Mailbox to the printer when the printer is on a printer stand. This item is included with the 2000-sheet Input Tray and the2x500-sheet Input Tray. 44 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907, Table 1-4. Accessories and Options (continued) Item Description or Use HP LaserJet HP LaserJet 8100 Series 8150 Series Part Number Part Number Maintenance Preventive For 110V units. C3914A C3914A Accessory Maintenance Kit C3914-69001 C3914-69001 For 220V units. C3915A C3915A C3915-69001 C3915-69001 Documen- HP LaserJet A guide to using paper 5963-7863 5963-7863 tation Printer Family and other print media with Print Media Guide HP LaserJet printers. HP JetDirect Print A guide to installing and 5967-2244 5967-2244 Server Software using the JetDirect Print (English) (English) Installation Guide Server software with HP LaserJet printers. Contains information for multiple operating systems. PCL 5/PJL A guide to using printer 5021-0377 5021-0377 Technical commands with Reference HP LaserJet printers. Documentation Package HP LaserJet 8100 This is an online user C4214-60103 N/A User Guide guide provided on the printing system software CD-ROM. HP LaserJet 8150, This is an online user N/A Included with 8150N, 8150DN, guide provided on software CD- 8150HN, and compact disc. This CD- ROM: 8150MFP Printers ROM contains all C4265-60601 User Guide supported languages. (Americas) C4265-60102 (Europe) C4265-60103 (Asia) C4265-90907 Paper-handling Devices, Accessories, and Options 45, Table 1-4. Accessories and Options (continued) Item Description or Use HP LaserJet HP LaserJet 8100 Series 8150 Series Part Number Part Number HP LaserJet 8150 An additional copy of the N/A C4265-90901 Getting Started getting started guide. (English Guide version) User An additional copy of the C4214-99001 C4265-99001 Documentation getting started guide and (English (English Bundle the ready reference guide. version) version) Available in all supported languages. HP LaserJet 8100/ Service Manual C4265-90907 C4265-90907 8150 Service Manual HP 3000-sheet Instructions for installing C4788- 90900 C4788- 90900 Stacker and HP the 3000-sheet Stacker 3000-sheet and 3000-sheet Stapler/Stacker Stapler/Stacker (C4779x and C4788x) Installation Guide HP 3,000-sheet 3,000-sheet Stapler/ C4788-90904 C4788-90904 Stacker, HP 3,000- Stacker Service Manual sheet Stapler/ Stacker Service Manual Supplement 46 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907,Hard Disk
An optional hard disk can be installed to permanently store downloaded fonts and forms in the printer. Unlike the standard printer memory, permanently downloaded items remain on the hard disk even when the printer is powered off. Fonts downloaded to the hard disk are available to all users of the printer. The hard disk is also used with the HP Digital Copy and for some Job Retention features. The HP LaserJet 8100 Series printers must have a hard disk for accessing Job Retention, but the HP LaserJet 8150 Series have two of the four Job Retention features without a hard disk. To initialize the hard disk: With the printer turned off, hold down CANCEL JOB and SELECT and turn on the printer. Then press MENU and -VALUE, then SELECT.Job Retention
There are four job retention features: Quick Copy, Proof and Hold, Private Job, and Stored Job (all are available with a hard disk installed). Proof and Hold and Private Job are also available without a hard disk installed for the HP LaserJet 8150 Series only. To access each of the features, first follow the steps below, then continue to the section that describes the feature you wish to use. For Windows only: 1 Select Print from the application’s menu. 2 Click Properties to display the properties dialog box. 3 Click the Destination tab to display the destination options. 4 Click Options under Destination Features to display Job Retention Options. For Macintosh only: Select Job Retention from the pull-down menu in the print dialog box for newer drivers. For older drivers, select Printer Specific Options.HP LaserJet Resource Manager
The HP LaserJet Resource Manager allows you to control hard disk and flash memory features not found in the drivers. Use the HP LaserJet Resource Manager to initialize disk and flash memory and to download, delete, and manage fonts to disk, across networks. It is also used to update firmware for the HP Digital Copier. HP LaserJet Resource Manager is not available for the Macintosh. C4265-90907 Paper-handling Devices, Accessories, and Options 47, Macintosh users can use the HP LaserJet Utility, and Windows® users can use the HP printer driver to download fonts. The printer hard disk can also be write-protected through software for additional security. See the online help associated with your HP software for more information. For the Macintosh environment, see the online help in the HP LaserJet Utility Guide included with the HP LaserJet Utility software. For the Windows environment, see your HP Windows driver online help.Determining Memory Requirements
The amount of memory you need depends on the types of documents you print. With the PCL printer language, the printer can print most text and graphics at 300 or 600 dpi without additional memory. Add memory to your printer if you: ● Commonly print complex graphics ● Use many downloaded fonts ● Print complex documents ● Use advanced functions (such as I/O Buffering and Resource Saving) Note In the HP LaserJet 8100 printer, you can remove the 16 MB DIMM and add up to three 64 MB DIMMs for a total of 192 MB of usable memory. Note In the HP LaserJet 8150 printer, you can add up to two 64 MB DIMMs for a total of 160 MB of usable memory. Note In the HP LaserJet 8150 series, the original 32 MB DIMM must remain in slot designator J-10 of the formatter board for the printer to start up and operate properly. 48 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907, Table 1-5 presents the amount of memory required for the most common print jobs performed with the HP printer using 600-dpi printing. Table 1-5. Minimum Memory Requirements Print Job Paper Size PCL Minimum PostScript Memory Emulation Requirements Minimum Memory Requirements single-sided printing Letter, A4, Legal 16 MB 16 MB 11 by 17 in, A3 16 MB 16 MB two-sided printing Letter, A4 16 MB 16 MB Legal 16 MB 16 MB 11 by 17 in, A3 24 MB 24 MB MFP printing and Letter, A4, Legal 40 MB 40 MB copying 11 by 17 in, A3 40 MB 40 MB C4265-90907 Paper-handling Devices, Accessories, and Options 49,Paper Capacities and Sizes Printer and Paper-handling Devices
Table 1-6. Paper Capacities and Sizes Tray or Bin Capacity Paper Weight Tray 1 Up to 100 ● Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4, 16 to 53 lb Bond (multipurpose) sheets Executive, A5, Legal, 11 by (60 to 199 g/m2) 17, ISO A3, JIS B5, JIS B4, JPostD Two-sided: ● Custom sizes: 16 to 28 lb Bond Minimum: 3.9 by 7.5 in. (60 to 105 g/m ) (98 by 191 mm) Maximum: 11.7 by 17.7 in. (297 by 450 mm) ● Other media types: transparencies and labels Up to 10 ● Envelope sizes: envelopes Com 10, C5, DL Monarch and B5 Note: Envelopes, transparencies, and labels are supported only from Tray 1. Tray 2 Up to 500 Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4, 16 to 28 lb sheets Legal, JIS B4 (60 to 105 g/m2) Tray 3 Up to 500 Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4, 16 to 28 lb sheets Legal, JIS B4, ISO A3, 11 by 17 (60 to 105 g/m2) Face-down Up to 500 Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4, A5, (Output bin) sheets Executive, Legal, 11 by 17, ISO A3, JIS B5, JIS B4 Face-up Up to 100 Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4, A5, (Output bin) sheets Executive, Legal, 11 by 17, ISO A3, JIS B5, JIS B4 Optional Up to 2,000 Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4, 16 to 28 lb 2000-sheet sheets Legal, JIS B4, ISO A3, 11 by 17 (60 to 105 g/m2) Input Tray (Tray 4) Optional Tray 4 Up to 500 Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4, 16 to 28 lb (2 x 500-sheet sheets Legal, JIS B4 (60 to 105 g/m2) Input Tray) 50 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907, Table 1-6. Paper Capacities and Sizes (continued) Tray or Bin Capacity Paper Weight Optional Tray 5 Up to 500 Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4, 16 to 28 lb (2 x 500-sheet sheets Legal, JIS B4, ISO A3, 11 by 17 (60 to 105 g/m2) Input Tray) Optional Custom Up to 500 ● Typical paper sizes: Letter, 16 to 28 lb Paper Trays (Tray sheets ISO A4, Legal, JIS B4, ISO (60 to 105 g/ m2) 3 or 5) A3, 11 by 17, 8K, 16K, JIS EXEC, Executive ● Custom sizes: Minimum: 3.9 by 7.5 in (98 by 191 mm) Maximum: 11.7 by 17.7 in (297 by 450 mm) 5-bin Mailbox Up to 250 Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4, 16 to 28 lb with Stapler and sheets per Legal, JIS B4, ISO A3, 11 by 17, (60 to 105 g/m2) 8-bin Mailbox bin envelopes, transparencies, and labels Note: Envelopes, transparencies, and labels are only supported in the Face-up (left) output bin. The staple bin only supports A4 and Letter paper sizes. 7-bin Tabletop Up to 120 Paper sizes: Letter, ISO A4, Legal 16 to 28 lb Mailbox sheets per Note: B5, JIS B4, 11by 17, ISO (60 to 105 g/m2) bin A3, envelopes, transparencies, and labels are only supported in the Face-up Bin. Envelope Feeder Up to 100 Envelope sizes: Commercial #28, 16 to 24 lb envelopes C5, DL, Monarch, ISO B5, JPostD (60 to 90 g/m2) Duplexer Paper sizes: Letter, Legal, 16 to 28 lb 11 by 17, A3, A4, B4 (60 to 105 g/m2) C4265-90907 Paper Capacities and Sizes 51,Media Selection Guidelines Printer Media Selection Guidelines
Note More detailed specifications are in the HP LaserJet 8150 User Guide and the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. See Documentation in Accessories and Options on page 40.Paper
To achieve the best possible print quality and avoid paper jams, follow these guidelines for selecting paper: ● Use only copier grade paper that meets all specifications in the Print Media guide. Avoid paper with embossed lettering, perforations, or texture that is too smooth or too rough. ● Colored paper should be of the same high quality as white photocopy paper. The pigments must withstand the fusing temperature of 392° F (200° C) for 0.1 second without deterioration. Do not use paper with a colored coating that was added after the paper was produced. ● Pre-printed forms must be printed with non-flammable, heat- resistant inks that do not melt, vaporize, or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the fusing temperature of 392° F (200° C) for 0.1 second. ● A small sample of a new print media should be tested before purchasing large quantities.Envelopes
CAUTION To prevent severe damage to the printer, do not use envelopes that have windows, clasps, snaps, or any non-paper materials. Print Envelopes to the Face-up Bin ONLY. Envelopes can be printed from Tray 1 and from the optional Envelope Feeder. Choose envelopes that are well-constructed. They should lie flat and be sharply creased. They should not be wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged. Envelope adhesive must be compatible with the heat and pressure of the fusing process. 52 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907,Adhesive Labels
Use the following guidelines when selecting labels: CAUTION Tray 1 is required for printing adhesive labels. Print labels to the Face-up Bin ONLY. This printer does not support use of labels with any exposed spaces. Do not attempt to print on label sheets after any of the labels have been removed from the sheet. Damage to the printer may result. ● Labels must be arranged on the carrier sheet so there are no exposed spaces on the sheet. Using label stock with spaces between rows or columns of labels can often result in labels peeling off during printing, causing serious jamming and possible damage to the printer. ● The top sheet (printing surface) must be of copier quality and provide good toner adhesion. ● The carrier sheet (backing sheet) must be compatible with the temperature and pressure of the fusing process, and must be coated for easy release of the top sheet. ● The adhesive must be stable at the 392° F (200° C) temperature encountered for 0.1 second in the fusing process, and must not produce emissions that exceed exposure levels or threshold limits established by OSHA and other safety agencies. Adhesives must not come into direct contact with any part of the printer. A wide selection of suitable labels may be ordered through Hewlett- Packard. Available sizes are listed in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. C4265-90907 Media Selection Guidelines 53,Transparencies
CAUTION Tray 1 is required for printing transparencies. Print transparencies to the Face-up Bin ONLY. Transparencies used in HP LaserJet printers must be able to withstand the 392° F (200° C) temperature encountered in the printer's fusing process for 0.1 second. Suitable transparency film is available through Hewlett-Packard. See the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide for details.Storing Print Media
Follow these guidelines when stacking and storing print media: ● Store paper in its wrapper until ready to use. ● Re-wrap partially used packages of media before storing. ● Stack each carton upright and squarely on top of the other. ● Store envelopes in a protective box to avoid damaging the edges of the envelopes. ● Keep stored media away from temperature and humidity extremes. ● DO NOT store cartons or reams directly on the floor where they will absorb a higher moisture content. Instead, place cartons on a pallet or on shelves. ● DO NOT store individual reams in a manner that causes them to curl or warp along the edges. ● DO NOT stack more than six cartons on top of each other. ● DO NOT place anything on top of media, regardless of whether the paper is packaged or unpackaged. ● DO NOT store printed documents in vinyl folders (which may contain plasticizers) or expose the documents to petroleum- based solvents.Shipping Print Media
When shipping print media through different environments, plastic wrap all cartons on the shipping pallet. When shipping media across bodies of water, wrap individual cartons as well. Packaging must protect the media from physical damage. 54 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907,Paper Weight Equivalence Table
Use this table to determine approximate equivalent points in weight specifications other than U.S. bond weight. For example, to determine the equivalent of 20 lb U.S. bond weight paper in U.S. cover weight, locate the bond weight (in row 3, second column) and scan across the row to the cover weight (in the fourth column). The equivalent is 28 lb. Shaded areas indicate a standard weight for that grade. Table 1-7. Paper Weight Equivalence U.S. U.S. U.S. U.S. U.S. U.S. U.S. Tag Europe Japan Post Bond Text/ Cover Bristol Index Weight Metric Metric Card1 Weight Book Weight Weight Weight (lb) Weight Weight thick- (lb) Weight (lb) (lb) (lb) (g/m2) (g/m2) ness (lb) (mm) 1 16 41 22 27 33 37 60 60 2 17 43 24 29 35 39 64 64 3 20 50 28 34 42 46 75 75 4 21 54 30 36 44 49 80 80 5 22 56 31 38 46 51 81 81 6 24 60 33 41 50 55 90 90 7 27 68 37 45 55 61 100 100 8 28 70 39 49 58 65 105 105 9 32 80 44 55 67 74 120 120 10 34 86 47 58 71 79 128 128 11 36 90 50 62 75 83 135 135 12 .18 39 100 55 67 82 91 148 148 13 .19 42 107 58 72 87 97 157 157 14 .20 43 110 60 74 90 100 163 163 15 .23 47 119 65 80 97 108 176 176 16 53 134 74 90 110 122 199 199 1. U.S. Post Card measurements are approximate. Use for reference only. C4265-90907 Media Selection Guidelines 55,Copy Module Media Selection Guidelines Paper Specifications
This section explains specifications of paper that can be used for the ADF unit. Any type of paper can be used on the flatbed.Paper Size
Figure 1-10 shows the acceptable paper sizes.B
letter/A4A
Paper feeding direction 11x17/A3A B
Figure 1-10 Paper size specification Maximum MinimumABAB8in (210 mm) 6 in (148 mm) 12 in (297 mm) 17 in (432 mm) 6 in (148 mm) 8 in (210 mm) 56 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907,HP Digital Copier Supported Sizes
● Ledger - 11 by 17 in (279 by 432 mm) ● Executive - 7.3 by 10.5 in (191 by 267 mm) ● Letter - 8.5 by 11 in (216 by 279 mm) ● Legal - 8.5 by 14 in (216 by 356 mm) ● A3 - 11.7 by 16.5 in (297 by 419 mm) ● A4 - 8.3 by 11.7 in (210 by 297 mm) ● A5 - 5.8 by 8.2 in (148 by 210 mm) ● B4 (JIS) - 10.1 by 14.3 in (257 by 364 mm) ● B5 (JIS) - 7 by 9.9 in (176 by 250 mm) C4265-90907 Media Selection Guidelines 57,Paper Conditions Ream Weight
Plain paper: 16 to 34 lb (52 to 127 g/m2) Recycled paper: 17 to 24 lb (64 to 90 g/m2) Bond paper: 16 to 28 lb (64 to 104 g/m2) Note The ADF holds up to 50 sheets of 24 lb paper. Capacity will be less for thicker paper. For example, 24 lb HP LaserJet Paper has a capacity of 43, and 28 lb Xerox 4024 paper has a capacity of 32.Document Quality
Do not load the following into the ADF: ● Carbonless paper or forms ● Paper with clips or staples ● Paper with wet ink or correction fluid ● LabelsPrecautions
The following documents might be hard to feed through the ADF. If the document slips in the ADF (Jam Error) or a double-feed occurs often, use the HP Digital Copier’s flatbed. ● Paper of unequal thickness, such as envelopes ● Paper with folds, tears, large wrinkles, or curl ● Paper with clips or staples ● Paper with wet ink ● Mixed paper sizes ● Color copied paper ● Tracing paper ● Coated paper ● Carbon paper ● Paper smaller than 6 by 4 in (148 by 105 mm) or larger than A3 or 11 x 17 in ● Other than paper • cloth • metal foil 58 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907, • transparency film ● Photographic paper ● Paper with notches on the side ● Paper that is not rectangular ● Thin paper CAUTION Use the flatbed for delicate paper or paper that does not meet specifications for the ADF. Carbonless papers have the chemical composition which damages the Separation Pad and Pick Roller. Therefore, note the following remarks. ● Cleaning: If mispicks occur frequently, clean the Separation Pad and Pick Roller more often. See “Cleaning the ADF” on page 163. ● Replacement of parts: The Separation Pad and the Pick Roller should be replaced more often. See page 168. Note Paper should be stacked in the chute as shown in figure 1-11. More than More than 1 in 1 in (30 mm) Feed direction (30 mm) Feed direction Less than Less than .2 in .1 in (5 mm) (3 mm) Top of the paper Read surface Top of the paper Read surface Figure 1-11 Paper orientation C4265-90907 Media Selection Guidelines 59,Perforated Paper
Perforations in the areas shown in figure 1-12 may cause problems when the paper is fed through the ADF. If so, use the flatbed to read perforated paper. Figure 1-12 Areas of the Paper that Should Not Be Perforated 60 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907,Service Approach
Repair of the printer normally begins with a three-step process: ● Step 1: Isolate the problem to the major system (the host computer, the network and/or server, or the printer system). ● Step 2: Determine if the problem is located in the paper-handling devices or in the printer engine. ● Step 3: Troubleshoot the problem using the procedures in Chapter 7. Once a faulty part is located, repair is usually accomplished by assembly level replacement of Field Replaceable Units (FRUs). Some mechanical assemblies may be repaired at the subassembly level. Replacement of components on the printed circuit assemblies is not supported by Hewlett-Packard.Ordering Parts
Field replaceable part numbers are listed in Chapter 8 of this manual. Replacement parts may be ordered from HP's Commercial Service and Support Organization-Americas (CSSO-A), or Commercial Service and Support Organization-Europe (CSSO-E).Phone numbers
CSSO-A (Commercial Service and Support Organization- Americas) (800) 227-8164 (U.S. Only) CSSOE (Commercial Service and Support Organization-Europe) (49 7031) 142253 HP Software and Accessory Distribution Center (SADC) (661) 257-5565 C4265-90907 Service Approach 61,Exchange Program
HP offers remanufactured assemblies for some parts. These are identified in Chapter 8 and can be ordered through Parts Direct Ordering (PDO), CSSO-A, or CSSO-E.Consumables
The printer has two consumables; the toner cartridge and staple cartridges, which may be ordered directly from Hewlett-Packard. See Chapter 8 for ordering information.Toner Cartridge Life
The toner cartridge is designed to simplify replacement of the major “consumable” parts. The toner cartridge contains the printing mechanism and a supply of toner. At 5% page coverage, a toner cartridge is guaranteed to print approximately 20,000 images (see figure 1-13). Figure 1-13 Sample 5% Page Coverage 62 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907, The toner cartridge may print less than 20,000 images if routinely printing very dense print. Conversely, when routinely printing images with less coverage (such as short memos), or in EconoMode, the toner cartridge may print more than 20,000 images. However, EconoMode does not extend toner cartridge component life. Note For best results, always use a new toner cartridge before the expiration date stamped on the toner cartridge box.Refilled Toner Cartridges and Non-HP Staple Cartridges
While Hewlett-Packard does not prohibit the use of refilled toner cartridges and non-HP staple cartridges during the warranty period or while under a maintenance contract, their use is not supported for the following reasons: ● Repairs resulting from the use of refilled toner cartridges and non-HP staple cartridges are not covered under the Hewlett- Packard warranty or maintenance contract. ● Hewlett-Packard has no control or process to ensure that a refilled toner cartridge or non-HP staple cartridge functions at the high level of reliability of a new HP LaserJet toner cartridge or HP LaserJet staple cartridge. Also, Hewlett-Packard cannot predict the long term reliability effect on the printer when using different toner formulations found in refilled cartridges. ● The print quality of HP LaserJet toner cartridges influences the customer's perception of the printer. Hewlett-Packard has no control over the actual print quality of a refilled toner cartridge.Recycling Toner Cartridges
In order to reduce waste, Hewlett-Packard uses a recycling program for used toner cartridges. Cartridge components that do not wear out are recycled, as are plastics and other materials. Hewlett-Packard pays the shipping costs from the user to the recycling plant. For each cartridge returned, HP donates one U.S. dollar to be shared by the Nature Conservancy and the National Wildlife Federation. To join this recycling effort, follow the instructions inside the toner cartridge box. C4265-90907 Service Approach 63,Technical Assistance
HP ASAP (Automated Support Access Program) provides free technical support information 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. The ASAP system includes HP FIRST, explained below. The ASAP service requires a touchtone phone.HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology)
HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology) is a phone-in fax service providing product information for HP LaserJet users as well as service personnel. Receiving a fax requires a type 3 facsimile machine or fax card. Service related information includes: ● Product Data Sheets ● Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).HP FIRST, U.S.
Call the HP ASAP system (800) 231-9300 and follow the voice prompts to enter HP FIRST.HP FIRST, Europe
Call HP FIRST at one of the following numbers: ● U.K., 0800-96-02-71 ● Netherlands, 06-02-22-420 ● Belgium (Dutch), 078-11-19-0 ● Germany, 0130-810061 ● Switzerland (German), 155-1527 ● Austria, 0660-8128 For English service outside the above countries, (31) 20-681-5792.Internet
Anonymous FTP library service is available for around-the-clock access to drivers, software, and technical support information for HP peripheral and computer products. Please note that paths may change without notice. Access the Internet or FTP address and use the menus to locate the software or support of your choice. URL for Access HP: http://www.hp.com URL for Software and Support: http://www.hp.com/go/cposupport FTP address: ftp.hp.com Login: anonymous Password: your Internet name (or user identification) 64 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907, FTP Path for Drive Software: /pub/printers FTP Path for Network Software: /pub/networkingWorld Wide Web
Download printer driver software using www.hp.com/cposupport/ eschome.html.HP Reseller Sales and Service Support Line
(US Only) The Hardware Technical Support Center (HTSC) is available for technical support to assist Hewlett-Packard authorized service technicians. The HTSC can be reached at 1-800-544-9976 between 7:00 A.M. and 6:00 P.M. Mountain Standard Time, Monday, Tuesday, Thursday, and Friday. On Wednesdays the office closes at 4:00 P.M.Other Areas
Outside of North America and Europe, contact your local HP sales office for assistance in obtaining technical support. C4265-90907 Technical Assistance 65,Regulatory Information FCC Regulations
The HP LaserJet 8100 and 8150 Series printers have been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If this equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ● Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna ● Increase separation between equipment and receiver ● Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is located ● Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/ TV technician Note Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment. Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class B limits of Part 15 of FCC rules. Note Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment. Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class B limits of Part 15 of FCC rules. Note The HP LaserJet 8100MFP, 8150MFP, or any model of HP LaserJet 8100 or 8150 printer with an HP Digital Copy attached, complies with Class A limits. The HP Digital Copier has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. 66 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907, The printer has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If this equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ● Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ● Increase separation between equipment and receiver. ● Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is located. ● Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician. C4265-90907 Regulatory Information 67,Environmental Product Stewardship Protecting the Environment
Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally-sound manner. The printer has been designed to minimize impacts on the environment. The printer design eliminates: Ozone Production The printer uses charging rollers in the electrophotographic process and therefore generates no appreciable ozone gas (03). CFC Usage Class I U.S. Clean Air Act stratospheric ozone-depleting chemicals (chlorofluorocarbons [CFCs], for example) have been eliminated from the manufacturing of the printer and packaging. The printer design reduces: Energy Consumption For the HP LaserJet 8100 Series, energy usage drops from 500/505 (110V/220V units) watts (W) during printing to as little as 35/40 (110V/ 220V units) W while in low-power (Power Save) mode. For the HP LaserJet 8150 Series, energy usage drops from 685/685 (110V/220V units) watts (W) during printing to as little as 37/40 (110V/220V units) W while in inactive, PowerSave mode. This saves energy without affecting the high performance of the printer. This product qualifies for the ENERGY STAR program (U.S. and Japan). ENERGY STAR is a voluntary program established to encourage the development of energy- efficient office products. The ENERGY STAR name is a registered service mark of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has determined that this product meets ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency. Toner Consumption EconoMode uses about 50% less toner. (HP does not recommend full-time use of EconoMode.) 68 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907, Paper use The printer’s optional duplexing feature, which provides for two- sided printing, reduces paper usage and the resulting demands on natural resources. The design of the printer facilitates the recycling of: Plastics Plastic parts have material identification markings, according to international standards, which enhance the ability to identify plastics for proper disposition at the end of the printer’s life. HP Toner Cartridges In many countries, this product’s toner cartridge/drum can be returned to HP using the prepaid shipping label and instructions included inside each new HP Toner Cartridge box. If your country is not listed in the recycling guide, call your local HP Sales and Service Office for further instructions. HP Cartridge Recycling Program information: Since 1990, the HP LaserJet Toner Cartridge Recycling Program has collected more than twelve million cartridges that otherwise may have been discarded into landfills. Once a cartridge is returned, it is disassembled and reusable components are cleaned and inspected for quality conformance. After passing strict inspection procedures, materials such as nuts, screws, and clips are reclaimed and used to produce new cartridges. Remaining materials are melted down and used as raw materials for a variety of other products. Over 95 percent (%) of the weight of returned materials is recycled. For more information in the U.S., call (1) (800) 340-2445 or contact the HP LaserJet Supplies Website at http://ljsupplies.com/planetpartners. Non-US customers can call the local HP Sales and Service Office for further information regarding the HP Toner Cartridge Recycling Program. Paper The printer is suited for the use of recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Medias Guide. To ensure printer longevity, HP provides the following: Spare Parts and Spare parts and consumable supplies for this product will be Consumables made available for at least five years after production has Availability stopped. C4265-90907 Regulatory Information 69,Material Safety Data Sheet
The Toner Cartridge/Drum MSDS can be obtained by calling the U.S. HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology) at (1) (800) 231-9300. Use Index number 7 for a listing of the Toner Cartridge/Drum Material/Chemical Safety Data Sheets. Non-U.S. customers should refer to the HP Support pages at the front of this user guide for appropriate phone numbers and information. For more information in the U.S., call (1) (800) 340-2445 or contact the HP LaserJet Supplies Website at http://ljsupplies.com/planetpartners. 70 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907,Environmental Conformity
Plastics Plastic parts have material identification markings, according to international standards, which enhance the ability to identify plastics for proper disposition at the end of the printer’s life. The plastics used in the printer housing and chassis are technically recyclable. Printer and Parts Design for recycling has been incorporated into the printer and its accessories. The number of materials has been kept to a minimum while ensuring proper functionality and high product reliability. Dissimilar materials have been designed to separate easily. Fasteners and other connections are easy to locate, access, and remove with common tools. High priority parts have been designed to be accessed quickly for efficient disassembly and repair. Plastic parts have been primarily designed in two colors to enhance recycling options. A few small parts are colored specifically to highlight customer access points. HP disposes of returned products in an environmentally sound manner. Many of the functional parts are recovered, tested, and reused as fully-warrantied service parts. Used printer parts are not placed into new product manufacturing. The remainder of the product parts are recycled, if possible. For product take-back information, contact your local HP Sales and Service Office. Paper The printer is suited for the use of recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. The printer is suited for the use of recycled paper according to DIN 19 309. Acoustics It is advisable to place printers with a sound power level of Lwad of 6.3 Bel (A) or higher into a separate or divided up room. C4265-90907 Regulatory Information 71,Declarations of Conformity
Table 1-8. Declaration of Conformity (HP LaserJet 8100 series and HP LaserJet 8150 series) DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 Manufacturer's Name: Hewlett-Packard Company Manufacturer's Address: 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA declares, that the product Product Name: LaserJet 8100 Series and 8150 Series Model Number C4214A, C4215A, C4216A, C4229A, C4265A, C4266A, C4267A conforms to the following Product Specifications: Safety: IEC 60950:1991+A1:1992+A2:1993+A3:1995+A4:1996/ EN 60950:1992+A1:1993+A2:1993+A3:1995+A4:1997+A11:1997 IEC 60825-1:1993_A1:1997/ EN 60825-1:1994+A11:1996 Class 1 Laser/LED Product EMC: CISPR 22;193+A1:1995+a2:1996/ EN 55022:1994+A1:1995+A2:1997 Class B EN 6100-3-2:1995 EN 61000-3-3:1995 EN 55024:1998 FCC Title 47 CFR, part 15 Class B2,3 /ICES-002, Issue 2 As / NZS 3458:1995 72 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907, Table 1-8. Declaration of Conformity (HP LaserJet 8100 series and HP LaserJet 8150 series) Supplementary Information: EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, and carries the CE-Marking accordingly. 1 The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett- Packard Personal Computer Systems. 2 This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any itnerference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 3 Product exhibits Class A operation when connected to Local Area Network (LAN) cables using print server accessories. Boise, Idaho USA July 10, 2000 European Contact: your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Serivce Office or Hewlett-Packard Gmbh, Department HG-TRE /Standards Europe, Henenberger Straße 130, D71034 : +46-7031-14-3143) USA Contact: Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, Idaho 83707-0015 (Phone: (208) 396-6000)Safety Statements Laser Safety Statement
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The printer is certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside the printer is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation. C4265-90907 Regulatory Information 73, WARNING! Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified in this user’s guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation.Canadian DOC Regulations
Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements. <VCCI Statement (Japan)
HP LaserJet 8100 and 8150 (Model C4214A, C4215A, C4216A, C4265A, C4266A, C4267A, C4268A, C4269A) HP Digital Copier (Model C4166A, C4217, C4230A, C4268A) 74 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907,Korean EMI statement
HP LaserJet 8100 and 8150 (Model C4214A, C4215A, C4216A, C4265A, C4266A, C4267A, C4268A, C4269A) HP Digital Copier (Model C4166A, C4217, C4230A, C4268A)Laser Statement for Finland LASERTURVALLISUUS
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT HP LaserJet 8100, 8150-laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle. Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN 60825-1 (1993) mukaisesti. VAROITUS ! Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle. VARNING ! Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1. C4265-90907 Regulatory Information 75,HUOLTO
HP LaserJet 8100, 8150-kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja. VARO ! Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen. VARNING ! Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för osynlig laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen. Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista: Aallonpituus 770-795 nm Teho 5 mW Luokan 3B laser 76 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907,Warranty
This warranty entitles you to standard warranty services for your printer and accessories and is available from HP worldwide. However, there may be local variations in the level of warranty service. You should contact the local HP Service Center to check for the applicable local warranty in your country or province.One-Year On-Site Limited Warranty
Hewlett-Packard warrants its computer hardware products against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year from purchase by the end user. During the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. The warranty period begins either on the date of delivery or, where the purchase price includes installation by Hewlett-Packard, on the date of installation. Should HP be unable to repair or replace the product within a reasonable amount of time, you will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price if you return the product. To have your printer serviced by HP you should contact the closest HP Service Center.Exclusions
The warranty on your HP LaserJet 8100 Series/8150 Series printer shall not apply to defects resulting from: ● Improper or inadequate maintenance by customer. ● Customer supplied software or interfacing. ● Unauthorized modification or misuse. ● Operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product. ● Operation of non-supported printing media. ● Duty cycle abuse maximum (see the note on the following page). ● Using a mechanical switchbox with the printer without a designated surge protector. ● Improper site preparation and maintenance. ● Failure to perform key operator maintenance every 350,000 images. ● Use of non-HP toner cartridges (see the following explanation), memory boards, interface boards, or staple cartridges. C4265-90907 Warranty 77, Note The use of non-Hewlett-Packard consumables or accessories alone does not affect either your warranty or any maintenance contract you may have purchased. However, if an HP LaserJet printer failure or damage is found to be attributable directly to the use of a non-HP toner cartridge, HP will not repair the printer free-of-charge. In this case, standard time-and-materials charges will be applied to service your printer for that particular failure or damage. Operation of the printer beyond the limit of its duty cycle (printing greater than the equivalent of 150,000 images per month) shall be deemed printer abuse and all repairs thereafter will be billed on a time- and-materials basis. If you are using a mechanical switch box, ensure that it is equipped with a surge protector. Damage to your printer could occur from the use of unprotected mechanical switch boxes.Warranty Limitations
The warranty set forth above is exclusive and no other warranty, whether written or oral, is expressed or implied. Hewlett-Packard specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.Service During the Warranty Period
If your hardware should fail during the warranty period, contact an authorized HP dealer or an HP Customer Service Center.Service After the Warranty Period
If your hardware fails after the warranty period, contact an authorized HP dealer or your local Customer Service Center. If you have an HP Maintenance Agreement, request service under your agreement. 78 Chapter 1 Product Information C4265-90907, 2 Site RequirementsChapter Contents
Operating Environment .80 Space Requirements .81 Environmental Requirements .84 Specifications .85 C4265-90907 Chapter Contents 79,Operating Environment
The electrical specifications listed in table 2-4 on page 87 must be maintained to ensure proper operation of this printer. Consider the following points before installing the printer. ● Install the printer in a well-ventilated, dust-free area, away from any open windows. ● Install the printer and peripherals on a hard, flat, and continuous surface, with all feet level. Do not install on carpet or other soft surfaces. We recommend the use of the HP Digital Copier with the HP Digital Copier Stand. ● Ensure adequate, stable power is supplied. Printer power requirements are listed in table 2-4, “Electrical Specifications,” on page 87. ● Install the printer where there is stable temperature and humidity, away from water sources, humidifiers, air conditioners, refrigerators, or other major appliances (see table 2-1 on page 84). ● Install the printer away from direct sunlight, open flames, or chemicals. If the printer is placed near a window, make sure the window is closed and has a curtain or blind to block any direct sunlight. ● Install the printer with enough space around the MFP package for proper access and ventilation (see “Space Requirements” on page 81). ● Install the MFP package away from the direct flow of exhaust from air ventilation, heating, or air conditioning systems. Note Be sure to leave enough space to completely extend the optional output accessory away from the printer. 80 Chapter 2 Site Requirements C4265-90907,Space Requirements
46.75 in (1187 mm) 11.5 in (292 mm) Figure 2-1 Printer Space Requirements (Top view) 13.75 in (350 mm) 11.5 in (292 mm) Figure 2-2 Printer Space Requirements (Side view) 14.5 in (368 mm) 29.5 in (749 mm) 35 in (889 mm) C4265-90907 Space Requirements 81, 66.25 in (1683 mm) 14.5 in (368 mm) 19.5 in (485 mm) 33 in (838 mm) Figure 2-3 Printer Space Requirements (with Mailbox and Input Device) 35 in (889 mm) 48.4 in (1229 mm) 82 Chapter 2 Site Requirements C4265-90907, 73 in (1854 mm) 43 in (1092 mm) 11 in (279 14.5 in mm) (368 mm) (document cover open) 19.5 in (495 mm) Top and Side Views 33 in (838 mm) (preferred configuration) Figure 2-4 Printer and Copy Module Space requirements 35 in (889 mm) 64 in (1626 mm) C4265-90907 Space Requirements 83,Environmental Requirements
Keep the printer within the following environmental conditions for optimum performance. Table 2-1. Printer and Toner Cartridge Environmental Conditions Operating Storage Temperature 10° to 32.5° C 0° to 40° C (50° to 90.5° F) (32° to 105° F) Humidity 20 to 80% RH 15 to 90% RH (with no condensation) (with no condensation) For printer weights, see table 2-2, “Dimensions of printer and Paper- handling Devices,” on page 85. 84 Chapter 2 Site Requirements C4265-90907,Specifications Printer and Paper-handling Devices
This section contains information on physical and electrical characteristics of the printer. For information on the printer site and environmental requirements (such as operating temperature and humidity, ventilation, etc.), see “Environmental Requirements” on page 84. Table 2-2. Dimensions of printer and Paper-handling Devices Item Height Width Depth Weight Printer only 21.30 in 22.3 in 20.50 in 106 lbs. (48 kg) (541 mm) (566.42 mm) (520 mm) (without toner cartridge and with paper trays) Printer with 40.20 in 24.76 in 20.50 in 160-164 lbs. 2 x 500-sheet or (1021 mm) (629 mm) (520 mm) (72.6-74.4 kg) 2000-sheet Input Tray Toner cartridge n/a n/a n/a 1Full: 114.3 oz (3,200 g) Empty: 78.6 oz (2,200 g) 2 x 500-sheet 18.89 in 24.76 in 20.50 in 61 lbs. Input Tray (480 mm) (629 mm) (520 mm) (27.9 kg. Incl. Transfer without paper Door: 25.59 in. (650 mm) 2000-sheet Input 18.89 in 24.76 in 20.50 in 65 lbs. Tray (480 mm) (629 mm) (520 mm) (29.5 kg) Incl. Transfer Door: 25.59 in (650 mm) 1. Some toner will reside in the waste toner area of a toner cartridge when the toner supply is ex- hausted. Therefore toner cartridge weight may be an unreliable indication of remaining toner sup- ply. C4265-90907 Specifications 85, Table 2-3. Dimensions of Output Devices Item Height Width Depth Weight 8-bin Mailbox 35.23 in 18.0 in 20.0 in 42.32 lb (895 mm) (457 mm) (508 mm) (19.2 kg) Stapler 14.17 in 19.68 in 14.56 in 10.50 lb (360 mm) (500 mm) (370 mm) (4.8 kg) Duplexer 37.40 in 15.31 in 16.73 in 7.93 lb (950 mm) (389 mm) (425 mm) (3.6 kg) Envelope Feeder 5.11 in 15.31 in 14.37 in 7.71 lb (130 mm) (389 mm) (365 mm) (3.5 kg) 7-bin Tabletop 20.87 in 15.0 in 18.5 in 30 lb Mailbox (530 mm) (381 mm) (470 mm) (14 kg) Stand (for 7-bin 18.9 in 16.9 in 18.9 in 32 lb Tabletop Mailbox (480 mm) (430 mm) (480 mm) (14.5 kg) only) Note Information for the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker is located in the HP 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper- Handling Accessories (C4788-90904). 86 Chapter 2 Site Requirements C4265-90907, Figure 2-5 Dimensions of Paper Handling Devices Table 2-4. Electrical Specifications Volts Frequency Amps1 Watts (average) Printer 120 Vac ± 10% 50/60 Hz ± 2 Hz 11.2 maximum, printing = 710 100 Vac ± 10% 50/60 Hz ± 2 Hz 6.0 average standby = 155 PowerSave Mode = 45 220 Vac ± 10% 50/60 Hz ± 2 Hz 5.9 maximum, printing = 700 240 Vac ± 10% 50 Hz ± 2 Hz 3.0 average standby = 155 PowerSave Mode = 45 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4) 120 Vac ± 10% 50/60 Hz ± 2 Hz 0.5 maximum, 45 Watts Maximum 0.3 average 240 Vac ± 10% 50/60 Hz ± 2 Hz 0.3 maximum, 45 Watts Maximum 0.2 average 8-bin Mailbox/5-bin Mailbox with Stapler 100-240 Vac 50/60 Hz ± 2 Hz 0.5 @ 120v 45 Watts Maximum 0.25 @ 240v2x500-sheet Input Tray (Trays 4 and 5) 120 Vac ± 10% 50/60 Hz ± 2 Hz 0.9 maximum 47 Watts Maximum 240 Vac ± 10% 50/60 Hz ± 2 Hz 0.5 maximum 47 Watts Maximum C4265-90907 Specifications 87, Table 2-4. Electrical Specifications (continued) Volts Frequency Amps1 Watts (average) 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox 120 Vac ± 10% 50/60 Hz ± 2 Hz 0.5 maximum 28 Watts Maximum 240 Vac ± 10% 50/60 Hz ± 2 Hz 0.3 maximum 28 Watts Maximum 1. Operating current requirements. Note Information for the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker is located in the HP 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper- Handling Accessories (C4788-90904). 88 Chapter 2 Site Requirements C4265-90907, Table 2-5. Acoustic Emissions Operation position per ISO 9296 Printer Printer System1 (stand-alone) Printing LPA dB(A) 59 db 62 db Standby LPA dB(A) 41 db 44 db Bystander 1m per ISO 9296 Printing LPA dB(A) 53 db 56 db Standby LPA dB(A) 36 db 39 db Sound Power per ISO 9296 Printing LWAD 6.9 bels (A) 7.2 bels (A) Standby LWAD 5.2 bels (A) 5.5 bels (A) 1. Printer System includes the 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4) or2x500-sheet Input Tray (Trays 4 and 5), 8-bin Mailbox/5-bin Mailbox with Stapler, Duplexer, and Envelope Feeder. Note Printer system values are an estimate determined from the baseline values. C4265-90907 Specifications 89,Copy Module
Table 2-6. Specifications for Copy Module Item Specification Dimensions (mm) Width: Depth: Height: 43 in (1092 mm) 26 in (660 mm) 22 in (559 mm) Weight 49 lb. (22 kg) Electrical Voltage and 100 to 120 Volts ±10%, 50 or 60 Hz ±2 Hz frequency 127 Volts, 60 Hz NOM or 220 to 240 Volts ± 10%, 50 Hz ± 2 Hz 220 Volts ± 10%, 60 Hz ± 2 Hz Phases Single Phase Power consumption approximately 30 Watts Environmental Device status Operating Not Operating condition Temperature 50° F to 91° F 32° F to 95° F (10° C to 32.5° C) (0° C to 35° C) Humidity (no 20% to 80% RH 10% to 90% RH condensation) 90 Chapter 2 Site Requirements C4265-90907, 3 Operating OverviewChapter Contents
Using the Printer Control Panel .92 Performing a Cold Reset .96 Printer Control Panel Menus .100 Using the HP Digital Copier Front Panel .126 Printer Service Mode .141 HP Digital Copier Service Mode.145 HP Digital Copier Administrator Mode .147 Remote Upgrade of the Printer Firmware .148 Upgrade HP Digital Copier Firmware .150 Testing the Printer .153 C4265-90907 Chapter Contents 91,Using the Printer Control Panel Control Panel Layout
The control panel contains a 2-line, 16-character-per-line display panel, six keys, and three indicator lights. Cancel GO Job Menu Item - Value + Select Ready Data Attention Figure 3-1 Control Panel Layout Table 3-1. Control Panel Keys Key Function GO ● Places the printer either online or offline. ● Prints any data residing in the printer’s buffer. ● Allows the printer to resume printing after being offline. Clears most printer messages and places the printer online. ● Allows the printer to continue printing with an error message such as TRAY x LOAD [TYPE] [SIZE] or UNEXPECTED PAPER SIZE. ● Confirms a manual feed request if Tray 1 is loaded and TRAY 1 MODE= CASSETTE has been set from the Paper Handling Menu in the printer’s control panel. ● Overrides a manual feed request from Tray 1 by selecting paper from the next available tray. ● Exits the control panel menus. (To save a selected control panel setting, first press SELECT.) MENU Cycles through the control panel menus. Press the right end of the button to move forward or the left end of the button to move backward. 92 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907, Table 3-1. Control Panel Keys (continued) Key Function ITEM Cycles through the selected menu’s items. Press the right end of the button to move forward or the left end of the button to move backward. Menu items that appear depend on the options installed and the configuration of other menu choices.Indicator Lights
The control panel indicator lights are described in the following table. Table 3-2. Indicator Lights Indicator= State Explanation Action Ready On Ready to receive data. No action required. Flashing Going offline. No action required. Off Printer is offline. Press GO to place printer online. Data On Data is resident in the No action required. printer and processed as far as possible. More data is expected, but no activity on the channel at this time. Flashing Data is being received or No action required. processed. Off No data is being received No action required. or processed in the printer. C4265-90907 Using the Printer Control Panel 93, Table 3-2. Indicator Lights (continued) Indicator= State Explanation Action Attention On Catastrophic error. Printer Turn printer off, then system is halted. on. If problem persists, see Chapter 7. Flashing The printer needs Read and respond to attention. display panel message. Off There are no messages No action required. or error conditions requiring attention.Settings and Defaults
The printer makes most printing decisions based on either temporary settings or factory (permanent) defaults. Note Settings you send from software applications override printer defaults. Temporary Settings are the values set for the current print job by your software application. Temporary settings remain in effect until the current print job is finished. Control Panel Defaults are the values entered by selecting a control panel item and pressing SELECT. An asterisk (*) next to the item name indicates that it is now the default. The printer retains default settings even when power is turned off. Factory Defaults are the permanent default values for each menu item set at the factory. Factory default values are listed in table 3-3 on page 97.Printer Driver Information
When you change a setting from the printer control panel, the new setting becomes the printer default value. You can override any Printing Menu setting through most software applications and from the printer driver. 94 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907,Paper Source Default
The printer paper source is specified by the print job, not the printer control panel. The following paragraphs apply when the current job does not specify a paper source. Unless changed or not specified by the current job, the software application, or the printer driver, the paper source default is determined by the “Cold Reset Paper Size” (letter or A4) set in the Service Mode Menu. ● If Tray 1 is set to cassette, it will look for the default size. ● If there is no paper in Tray 1, and Tray 4 of the 2000-sheet Input Tray is installed and loaded with the Cold Reset Paper Size, the printer will pull from Tray 4. ● The printer pulls paper from Tray 5 first if the Optional2x500-sheet Input Tray is installed. ● If there is no paper in Tray 1, and Tray 4 is not installed, the printer will pull from the first tray containing the Cold Reset Paper Size. ● If none of the trays contain the Cold Reset Paper Size, the printer will prompt the user to put letter or A4 paper in Tray 1. C4265-90907 Using the Printer Control Panel 95,Performing a Cold Reset Cold Reset
Cold Reset clears all data from the printer memory and sets all the defaults back to the factory settings. CAUTION Performing a Cold Reset resets the JetDirect configuration. To avoid making changes to your configuration, remove the JetDirect card before performing a Cold Reset. If possible, print a Configuration Page prior to performing a Cold Reset. This will document current settings for later reference. To perform a Cold Reset: 1. Turn off the printer. 2 While pressing GO, turn the printer on. COLD RESET appears briefly on the display, then INITIALIZING appears. After a few seconds, RESTORING FACTORY SETTINGS appears on the display, followed by OFFLINE. The Cold Reset is complete. 3. Press GO to return the printer online. READY appears on the display.Setting the Display Language
1 Press and hold SELECT while powering on. Hold SELECT until SELECT LANGUAGE appears. 2 Release SELECT. INITIALIZING appears briefly. Wait for LANGUAGE=ENGLISH to appear. 3 Press + repeatedly until the desired language appears. 4 Press SELECT to save your choice. An asterisk (*) will appear beside your language selection. 5 Press GO to return to a READY state. Note The language that appears on the HP Digital Copier display is customized through the language selected on the printer. If the printer language is set to a language other than the six offered by the HP Digital Copier, then the HP Digital Copier will default to English. (See the printer online user guide for more information.) 96 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907, Table 3-3. Factory Default Settings Menu Item HP LaserJet HP LaserJet 8100 Series 8150 Series Default Default APPEND CR TO LF NO NO ATALK ON AUTO CONTINUE= ON ON BINDING LONG EDGE CFG IPX/SPX NO CFG LINK NO CFG NETWORK NO NO CFG TCP/IP NO CLEARABLE WARNINGS JOB JOB CONFIGURE CUSTOM PAPER NO NO CONFIGURE EDGE TO EDGE NO CONFIGURE FUSER MODE NO NO COPIES11COURIER REGULAR REGULAR CREATE CLEANING PAGE NO NO CROSSFEED SIZE INCHES DLC/LLC ON DUPLEX= OFF OFF ECONOMODE= OFF OFF EDGE TO EDGE OVERRIDE OFF FORM 60 LINES 60 LINES I/O TIMEOUT= 15 SECONDS 15 SECONDS IO BUFFER= AUTO AUTO I/O BUFFER SIZE 100K IPX/SPX ON JAM RECOVERY= AUTO AUTO JOB HELD TIMEOUT OFF C4265-90907 Performing a Cold Reset 97, Table 3-3. Factory Default Settings (continued) Menu Item HP LaserJet HP LaserJet 8100 Series 8150 Series Default Default MAINTENANCE MESSAGE OFF MANUAL FEED OFF OFF NEW TONER CARTRIDGE NO NO OPERATION MODE MAILBOX ORIENTATION= PORTRAIT PORTRAIT OVERRIDE A4/LETTER NO NO PAGE PROTECT AUTO PAPER DEST= STANDARD STANDARD OUTPUT BIN OUTPUT BIN PAPER= LETTER LETTER PARALLEL ADV FUNCTIONS ON ON PARALLEL HIGH SPEED SETTING= YES YES PCL FONT NUMBER00PCL FONT PITCH 10 10 PCL FONT POINT SIZE 12 PCL FONT SOURCE INTERNAL INTERNAL PCL MEMORY 400 K PCL SYMBOL SET PC-8 PC-8 PERSONALITY= AUTO AUTO POWERSAVE ON= 1 HOUR 30 MINUTES PRINT PS ERRORS OFF OFF PRINT TEST PAGE TRAY ALL PS MEMORY 400 K QUICK COPY JOBS 32 RAM DISK AUTO AUTO RAM DISK SIZE 800K 800K RESOLUTION= FASTRES 1200 FASTRES 1200 RESOURCE SAVE= OFF OFF 98 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907, Table 3-3. Factory Default Settings (continued) Menu Item HP LaserJet HP LaserJet 8100 Series 8150 Series Default Default RET= MEDIUM MEDIUM TCP/IP ON TONER DENSITY= 3 3 TONER LOW= CONTINUE CONTINUE TRAY 1 MODE FIRST FIRST TRAY 2 TYPE PLAIN PLAIN TRAY 3 TYPE PLAIN PLAIN TRAY 4 TYPE PLAIN TRAY 5 TYPE PLAIN TRAY X SHIFT NONE [TYPE] NORMAL UNIT OF MEASURE INCHES WIDE A4 NO NO X-DIMENSION 11.7 INCHES Y-DIMENSION 17.7 INCHES C4265-90907 Performing a Cold Reset 99,Printer Control Panel Menus
Press MENU to cycle through the control panel menus. Each menu is described in a separate table in this section. Figure 7-16 on page 652 provides a map of all the menus and their associated items. Menu items are displayed only if their associated option is installed, or their function is activated. All menus and their associated items are accessible when the printer is online. In menu mode, if no keys are pressed for approximately 30 seconds, the system will automatically return to the top level and display either an existing error, or one of the following: ● READY, if the printer was online. ● OFFLINE, if the printer was offline.To select a menu item
1 Press MENU repeatedly until the desired menu appears. 2 Press ITEM repeatedly until the desired item appears. 3 Press + repeatedly (or hold down + to scroll) until the desired setting appears. 4 Press SELECT to save the selection. An asterisk (*) appears next to the selection, indicating that it is now the default. 5 Press MENU or GO to exit the menus. Note Shaded items appear only if the associated option or function is installed and activated. 100 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907,HP LaserJet 8100 Series Quick Copy Jobs Menu
There are four job retention features: Quick Copy, Proof and Hold, Private Job, and Stored Job (all are available with a hard disk installed). This menu provides a list of the quick copy jobs stored on the printer’s hard disk. The user can print or delete these jobs from the control panel. Note If there are no quick copy jobs stored on the printer’s hard disk or RAM, this menu is not displayed on the control panel. Table 3-4. HP LaserJet 8100 Series Quick Copy Jobs Menu Item Value Explanation [USERNAME] The name of the person who owns the quick copy job. COPIES=1 1 to 999 The number of additional copies the user wants to print. DELETE 1-999: Prints the requested number of copies of the job. DELETE: Deletes the job from the printer’s hard disk.HP LaserJet 8100 Series Private/Stored Jobs Menu
This menu provides a list of the private and stored jobs on the printer’s hard disk. The user can print or delete these jobs from the control panel. Note If there are no private and stored jobs on the printer’s hard disk or RAM, this menu is not displayed on the control panel. Table 3-5. HP LaserJet 8100 Series Private/Stored Jobs Menu Item Value Explanation [JOBNAME] The name of the job stored on the printer’s hard disk or RAM. PIN:0000 To print the job, the user must enter the Personal Identification Number (PIN) assigned to the job in the driver. C4265-90907 Printer Control Panel Menus 101, Table 3-5. HP LaserJet 8100 Series Private/Stored Jobs Menu (continued) Item Value Explanation COPIES=1 1 to 999 The number of additional copies the user wants to print. DELETE 1-999: Prints the requested number of copies of the job. DELETE: Deletes the job from the printer’s hard disk or RAM. Note The Quick Copy Jobs Menu and the Private/Stored Jobs Menu will only appear if you have a Hard Disk, if you have selected a Job Retention Option, and if you have sent jobs to the printer.HP LaserJet 8150 Series Quick Copy Menu
There are four job retention features: Quick Copy, Proof and Hold, Private Job, and Stored Job (all are available with a hard disk installed). Proof and Hold and Private Job are available in RAM on the HP LaserJet 8150 Series only.HP LaserJet 8150 Series Private/Stored Jobs Menu
This menu provides a list of the Job Retention jobs on the printer’s hard disk or RAM. The user can print or delete these jobs from the control panel. Note If there are no Job Retention jobs on the printer’s hard disk or RAM, this menu is not displayed on the control panel. Table 3-6. HP LaserJet 8150 Series Job Retention Menu Item Value Explanation [USERNAME] The name of the person who owns the quick copy job. [JOBNAME] The name of the job stored on the printer’s hard disk or RAM. PIN:0000 To print the job, the user must enter the Personal Identification Number (PIN) assigned to the job in the driver. 102 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907, Table 3-6. HP LaserJet 8150 Series Job Retention Menu Item Value Explanation COPIES=1 1 to 999 The number of additional copies the user wants to print. DELETE 1-999: Prints the requested number of copies of the job. DELETE: Deletes the job from the printer’s hard disk or RAM. C4265-90907 Printer Control Panel Menus 103,Information Menu
This menu contains printer information pages that give details about the printer and its configuration. To print a page from the information menu, scroll to the desired page and press SELECT. Table 3-7. Information Menu Item Explanation PRINT The menu map shows the layout and current settings of the MENU MAP control panel menu items. PRINT The configuration page shows the printer’s current configuration. CONFIGURATION If an HP JetDirect print server card is installed, a JetDirect configuration page will print out as well. PRINT The PCL font list shows all the PCL fonts currently available to the PCL FONT LIST printer. PRINT The PS font list shows all the PS fonts currently available to the PS FONT LIST printer. PRINT The file directory shows information for all of the installed mass FILE DIRECTORY storage devices. It appears only when a mass storage device, such as a flash DIMM or hard disk, is installed in the printer. PRINT The event log lists printer events or errors on the first page. The EVENT LOG second page is a manufacturing page. SHOW This item allows you to view the most recent printer events on the EVENT LOG control panel display. Press - VALUE + to scroll through the event log entries. PRINT The paper path test can be used to verify that the paper path is PAPER PATH TEST working properly, or to troubleshoot problems with a type of paper. Choose the Input Tray, output bin, duplexer (if available), and number of copies. Note Feeding paper from Tray 1 will not allow the user to send paper to the Face-down output bins during this test. PRINT USAGE PAGE Only shown when hard disk is installed. Primarily used for printer page tracking, could be used for cost accounting. 104 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907,Paper Handling Menu
When paper handling settings are correctly configured through the control panel, you can print by choosing the type and size of paper from the printer driver or software application. Some items in this menu (such as duplex and manual feed) can be accessed from a software application, or from the printer driver (if the appropriate driver is installed). Printer driver and software application settings override control panel settings. Table 3-8. Paper Handling Menu Item Values Explanation ENV FEEDER For supported This item appears only when the optional envelope SIZE=COM10 paper types, feeder is installed. Set the value to correspond with the see table 1-6. envelope size currently loaded in the envelope feeder. ENV FEEDER Appears only when the optional envelope feeder is TYPE=PLAIN installed. Set the value to correspond with the envelope type currently loaded in the envelope feeder. TRAY 1 MODE= FIRST Determine how the printer will use Tray 1. FIRST CASSETTE FIRST: If paper is loaded in Tray 1, the printer will pull paper from that tray first. CASSETTE: A paper size must be assigned to Tray 1 using the TRAY 1 SIZE option (the next item in this menu when TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE). This allows Tray 1 to be used as a reserved tray. TRAY 1 Appears only when TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE. Set the SIZE=LETTER value to correspond with the paper size currently loaded in Tray 1. TRAY 2 TYPE= For supported Set the value to correspond with the paper type PLAIN paper types, currently loaded in Tray 2. see table 1-6. TRAY 3 TYPE= For supported Set the value to correspond with the paper type PLAIN paper types, currently loaded in Tray 3. see table 1-6. *TRAY 4 TYPE= For supported Set the value to correspond with the paper type PLAIN paper types, currently loaded in the Optional 2000-sheet Input Tray see table 1-6. (Tray 4) or Tray 4 of the Optional2x500-sheet Input Tray (Trays 4 and 5). *TRAY 5 TYPE= For supported Set the value to correspond with the paper type PLAIN paper types, currently loaded in Tray 5 of the Optional2x500-sheet see table 1-6. Input Tray (Trays 4 and 5). C4265-90907 Printer Control Panel Menus 105, Table 3-8. Paper Handling Menu (continued) Item Values Explanation PAPER DEST= STANDARD This item appears when an output device is installed. STANDARD OUTBIN OUTBIN Set the value to correspond to the appropriate bin. LEFT OUTBIN Additional output bins appear in the menu with the installation of output devices.OPTIONAL BIN
MANUAL OFF Feed the paper manually from Tray 1, rather than FEED=OFF ON automatically from a tray. When MANUAL FEED=ON and Tray 1 is empty, the printer goes offline when it receives a print job and displays MANUALLY FEED [PAPER SIZE]. *DUPLEX=OFF OFF This item appears only when a duplexer is installed. ON Set the value to ON to print on both sides (duplex) or OFF to print on one side (simplex) of a sheet of paper. BINDING= LONG EDGE This item appears only when an optional duplexer is LONG EDGE SHORT EDGE installed and the duplex option is on. Choose the binding edge when duplexing (printing on both sides of paper). OVERRIDE NO Choose YES to print on letter-size paper when an A4 A4/LETTER=NO YES job is sent, but no A4-size paper is loaded in the printer (or to print on A4-size paper when a letter job is sent, but no letter paper is loaded in the printer). PRINT TEST PAGE ALL HP LaserJet 8150 series only. This item appears only TRAY=ALL 1 when an external input paper handling device is 2 installed. An edge-to-edge calibration page will print for the tray selected. TRAY X NONE HP LaserJet 8150 series only. This item appears only SHIFT=NONE LEFT 1 when an external input paper handling device is LEFT 2 installed. Allows you to set a value that will shift the placement of an image to the left or right on the page. LEFT 3 RIGHT 1 RIGHT 2 RIGHT 3 106 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907, Table 3-8. Paper Handling Menu (continued) Item Values Explanation [TYPE]=NORMAL NORMAL This item appears when CONFIGURE FUSER MODE LOW MENU=YES. The printer speeds are for Letter or HIGH1 A4.Press - VALUE + or to make your selection, and press SELECT to save the setting. HIGH2 NORMAL = 32 ppm. HIGH3 LOW = slightly lower temperature at 32 ppm. HIGH1 = slightly higher than normal at 32 ppm. HIGH2 = slightly higher than normal at 24 ppm. This allows more time to fuse toner for special types of media (i.e. heavy, rough stock) HIGH3 = slightly hotter fusing than H1 or H2 at 16 ppm, for media needing more time in the fusing process. Most paper types are set to NORMAL by default. The exceptions are as follows: TRNSPRNCY=LOW LABELS=HIGH1 CARDSTOCK=HIGH2 ROUGH=HIGH1 Caution: If you change the fuser mode to HIGH1, HIGH2 or HIGH3, be sure to change it back to the default when you are done printing. Setting a paper type to HIGH1, HIGH2 or HIGH3 may shorten the life of the fuser or cause other failures or jams. CONFIGURE FUSER NO Default is NO. Choose YES to configure. The fuser MODE MENU=NO YES mode can be changed only from this menu option in the control panel. Note: To see the default fuser mode for each papertype, select YES, scroll pack to the Information Menu, and print a menu map. CONFIGURE EDGE NO HP LaserJet 8150 Series only. Configure the margin TO EDGE=NO YES alignment of the tray you wish to print an edge-to-edge print job from. NO: The edge-to-edge configuration menu items are not accessible. YES: Additional edge-to-edge configuration menu items appear. Note Items marked with an * only appear in the menu if the2x500-sheet Input Tray, the 2000-sheet Input Tray, or the duplexer are installed. To see the default fuser mode for each paper type, select YES, scroll back to the Information Menu, and print a menu map. C4265-90907 Printer Control Panel Menus 107,Print Quality Menu
Some items in this menu can be accessed from a software application, or from the printer driver (if the appropriate driver is installed). Printer driver and software application settings override control panel settings. Table 3-9. Print Quality Menu Item Values Explanation RESOLUTION= 300 Select the resolution from the following values: FASTRES 1200 600 300: Produces draft print quality at the printer’s FASTRES 1200 maximum speed (32 ppm). 300 dpi (dots per inch) is recommended for some bitmapped fonts and graphics, and for compatibility with the HP LaserJet III family of printers. 600: Produces high print quality at the printer’s maximum speed. FASTRES 1200: Produces optimum print quality (comparable to 1200 dpi) at the printer’s maximum speed. Note It is best to change the resolution from the printer driver or software application. (Driver and software settings override control panel settings.) RET=MEDIUM OFF Use the printer’s Resolution Enhancement technology LIGHT (REt) setting to produce print with smooth angles, MEDIUM curves, and edges. All print resolutions, including FastRes 1200, benefitDARK
from REt. Note It is best to change the REt setting from the printer driver or software application. (Driver and software settings override control panel settings.) 108 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907, Table 3-9. Print Quality Menu (continued) Item Values Explanation ECONOMODE= OFF Turn EconoMode on (for draft mode) or off (for high OFF ON quality). EconoMode creates draft-quality printing by reducing the amount of toner on the printed page by up to 50%. CAUTION HP does not recommend full-time use of EconoMode. (If EconoMode is used full-time, it is possible that the toner supply will outlast the mechanical parts in the toner cartridge.) Note It is best to turn EconoMode on or off from the printer driver or software application. (Driver and software settings override control panel settings.) TONER DENSITY=3 1 Lighten or darken the print on the page by changing the 2 toner density setting. The settings range from 1 (light) to35(dark), but the default setting of 3 usually produces 4 the best results. 5 Use a lower toner density setting to save toner. Note It is best to change the toner density from the printer driver or software application. (Driver and software settings override control panel settings.) CREATE CLEANING No value to Press SELECT to print a cleaning page (for cleaning PAGE select. excess toner from the paper path). In order for the cleaning page to work properly, print the page on copier grade paper (not bond or rough paper). Follow the instructions on the cleaning page. PROCESS No value to This item appears only after a cleaning page has been CLEANING PAGE select. generated. Press SELECT to process the cleaning page. C4265-90907 Printer Control Panel Menus 109,Printing Menu
Some items in this menu can be accessed from a software application, or from the printer driver (if the appropriate driver is installed). Printer driver and software application settings override control panel settings. Table 3-10. Printing Menu Item Values Explanation COPIES=1 1 to 999 Sets the default number of copies by selecting any number from 1 to 999. Press - VALUE + once to change the setting by increments of 1, or hold down - VALUE + to scroll by increments of 10. Note It is best to set the number of copies from the printer driver or software application. (Driver and software settings override control panel settings.) CROSS FEED INCHES The size of the custom paper on the cross-feed side SIZE=INCHES MILLIMETERS specified in inches or millimeters. Note The feed direction is the direction that paper is fed through the printer. The cross-feed direction is perpendicular to the feed direction. PAPER= For supported Sets the default image size for paper and envelopes. LETTER paper types, see (The item name will change from paper to envelope as table 1-6. you scroll through the available sizes.) Note The defaults indicated here are for 110V printers. The default paper size for 220V printers is A4. The default envelope size for 220V printers is DL. CONFIGURE NO NO: The custom paper menu items are not accessible. CUSTOM PAPER=NO YES YES: This menu item allows the user to configure a custom size when printing from Tray 1. The increments can be set to inches or millimeters. 110 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907, Table 3-10. Printing Menu (continued) Item Values Explanation UNIT OF INCHES This item appears only when CONFIGURE CUSTOM MEASURE=INCHES MILLIMETERS PAPER=YES. Select the unit of measurement for the custom paper size. X DIMENSION= For supported This item appears only when CONFIGURE CUSTOM 11.7 INCHES paper types, see PAPER=YES. Select the dimension to be fed in to the table 1-6. printer (short edge). Y DIMENION= For supported This item appears only when CONFIGURE CUSTOM 17.7 INCHES paper types, see PAPER=YES. Select the other dimension (long edge). table 1-6. FORM=60 LINES 5 to 128 Sets vertical spacing from 5 to 128 lines for default paper size. Press - VALUE + once to change the setting by increments of 1, or hold down - VALUE + to scroll by increments of 10. ORIENTATION= PORTRAIT Determines the default orientation of print on the page. PORTRAIT LANDSCAPE Note It is best to set the page orientation from the printer driver or software application. (Driver and software settings override control panel settings.) PCL FONT INTERNAL INTERNAL: Internal fonts. SOURCE=INTERNAL SOFT SOFT: Permanent soft fonts. SLOT 1, 2, or SLOT 1, 2, or 3: Fonts stored in one of the three 3 DIMM slots. PCL FONT 0 to 999 The printer assigns a number to each font and lists NUMBER= them on the PCL Font List. The font number appears in 0 the Font # column of the printout. PCL FONT PITCH= 0.44 to 99.99 This item might not appear, depending on the font 10.00 selected. Press - VALUE + once to change setting by increments of 0.01 for pitch, or hold down - VALUE + to scroll by increments of 1. C4265-90907 Printer Control Panel Menus 111, Table 3-10. Printing Menu (continued) Item Values Explanation PCL FONT POINT 4.00 to 999.75 This item may not appear, depending on the font SIZE=12.00 selected. Press - VALUE + once to change setting by increments of 0.25 for point size, or hold down - VALUE + to scroll by increments of 1. PCL SYMBOL PC-8 Select any one of several available symbol sets from SET=PC-8 many others the printer’s control panel. A symbol set is a unique grouping of all the characters in a font. PC-8 or PC-850 is recommended for line draw characters. COURIER=REGULAR REGULAR Select the version of Courier font to use: DARK REGULAR: The internal Courier font available on the HP LaserJet 4 Series printers. DARK: The internal Courier font available on the HP LaserJet III Series printers. Both fonts are not available at the same time. WIDE A4=NO NO The Wide A4 setting changes the number of YES characters that can be printed on a single line of A4 paper. NO: Up to 78 10-pitch characters can be printed on one line. YES: Up to 80 10-pitch characters can be printed on one line. APPEND CR TO LF= NO Select YES to append a carriage return to each line NO YES feed encountered in backward-compatible PCL jobs (pure text, no job control). Some environments, such as UNIX, indicate a new line using only the line feed control code. This option allows the user to append the required carriage return to each line feed. PRINT PS OFF Select ON to print the PS error page when PS errors ERRORS=OFF ON occur. EDGE TO EDGE OFF HP LaserJet 8150 series only. Turns the edge-to- OVERRIDE= OFF ON edge mode on or off for all print jobs. This mode can be overridden inside a print job by an edge-to-edge PJL variable. 112 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907,Configuration Menu
Items in this menu affect the printer’s behavior. Configure the printer according to your printing needs. Table 3-11. Configuration Menu Item Values Explanation POWERSAVE= OFF HP LaserJet 8100 Series only. The PowerSave feature Off 15 MINUTES minimizes the amount of power consumed by the printer 30 MINUTES when it is idle and reduces wear on the printer’s electronic components. It also turns off the display’s 1 HOUR backlight. 2 HOURS When you send a print job, press a control panel key, 3 HOURS open a paper tray, or open the top cover, the printer automatically comes out of PowerSave mode. Note PowerSave turns off the backlight on the display, but the display is still readable. POWERSAVE TIME= 15 MINUTES HP LaserJet 8150 Series only. Set the printer to enter 30 MINUTES 30 MINUTES PowerSave after it has been idle for a specified amount 1 HOUR of time. Turning PowerSave off is not recommended. The PowerSave feature does the following: 2 HOURS ● Minimizes the amount of power consumed by the 3 HOURS printer when it is idle. ● Reduces wear on the printer’s electronic components. (Turns off the display’s backlight, but the display is still readable.) When you send a print job, press a control panel key, open a paper tray, or open the top cover, the printer automatically comes out of PowerSave mode. To turn PowerSave off, see “Resets Menu” on page 125. PERSONALITY= AUTO Select the default printer language (personality). AUTO PCL Normally you should not change the printer language PS (the default is AUTO). If you change it to a specific printer language, the printer will not automatically switch from one language to another unless specific software commands are sent to the printer. C4265-90907 Printer Control Panel Menus 113, Table 3-11. Configuration Menu (continued) Item Values Explanation RESOURCE SAVE= OFF This item dedicates printer memory to save each OFF ON language’s permanent resources. (You might need to AUTO add memory to the printer in order for this item to appear.) The amount of memory set aside can be different for each installed language. Some languages might have memory set aside for resource saving without requiring all languages to do so. Any time the amount of memory dedicated to a specific language is changed, all languages will lose all saved resources, including any unprocessed print jobs. OFF: No language resource saving is performed, and language-dependent resources, such as fonts and macros, are lost when language or resolution changes. ON: An item will appear for each installed language that allows the user to allocate a particular amount of memory to that language’s resource saving area. (See the items below.) AUTO: The printer automatically determines the amount of memory to use for each installed language’s resource saving area. To reset the pages, turn the printer off, hold down the ITEM - and the VALUE - keys while turning the printer on. Wait for RESET MAINT/ COUNT to display on the control panel before releasing the keys. PCL MEMORY+ 0K and up This item appears only when RESOURCE SAVE=ON. 400K (This value Select the amount of memory used for saving PCL depends on resources. Printer default is the minimum amount of the amount of memory needed to perform resource saving for PCL. installed Press - VALUE + to change settings by increments of 10 memory.) (up to 100KB) or by increments of 100 (above 100KB). PS MEMORY= 0K and up This item appears only when RESOURCE SAVE=ON. 400K (This value Select the amount of memory used for saving PS depends on resources. Printer default is the minimum amount of the amount of memory needed to perform resource saving for PCL. installed Press - VALUE + to change settings by increments of 10 memory.) (up to 100KB) or by increments of 100 (above 100KB). 114 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907, Table 3-11. Configuration Menu (continued) Item Values Explanation PAGE PROTECT= AUTO This item appears only after a 21 PAGE TOO COMPLEX, AUTO ON PRESS GO TO CONTINUE message displays. Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) attempts to guarantee that all pages will print. If the page does not print, turn PAGE PROTECT to ON. This might increase chances of a 20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY, PRESS GO TO OONTINUE message. If this occurs, simplify the print job or install additional memory. CLEARABLE JOB Set the amount of time that a clearable warning is WARNINGS=JOB ON displayed on the printer’s control panel. JOB: Warning messages display on the control panel until the end of the job from which they were generated. ON: Warning messages display on the control panel until GO is pressed. AUTO CONTINUE= ON This item determines how the printer reacts to errors. ON OFF ON: If an error occurs that prevents printing, the message will display, and the printer will go offline for 10 seconds before returning online. OFF: If an error occurs that prevents printing, the message will remain on the display and the printer will remain offline until GO is pressed. TONER CONTINUE This item determines how the printer behaves when LOW=CONTINUE STOP toner is low. The TONER LOW message will first appear when the toner cartridge is almost out of toner. (About 100 to 300 images can still be printed.) CONTINUE: The printer will continue to print while the TONER LOW message is displayed. STOP: The printer will go offline and wait for further action. C4265-90907 Printer Control Panel Menus 115, Table 3-11. Configuration Menu (continued) Item Values Explanation RAM DISK=AUTO ON HP LaserJet 8150 series only. This item determines OFF how the RAM disk is configured. This item appears only AUTO if there is no hard disk installed and the printer has at least 12 MB of memory. OFF: The RAM disk is disabled. ON: The RAM disk is enabled. Configure the amount of memory to be used with the item RAM DISK SIZE. Note If the setting is changed from OFF to ON or from OFF to AUTO, the printer will automatically reinitialize when it becomes idle. RAM DISK 0K and up. (This HP LaserJet 8150 series only. This item determines SIZE=xxxK value depends the size of the RAM disk. This item appears if RAM on the amount of DISK=ON or AUTO. installed Press - VALUE + to change settings by increments of memory.) 100. Note This setting cannot be changed if RAM DISK=AUTO. Changing this value will cause the printer to reinitialize when it becomes idle. JAM RECOVERY= AUTO This item determines how the printer behaves when a AUTO ON paper jam occurs. OFF AUTO: The printer automatically selects the best mode for printer jam recovery (usually ON). This is the default setting. ON: The printer automatically reprints pages after a paper jam is cleared. OFF: The printer does not reprint pages following a paper jam. Printing performance might be increased with this setting. 116 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907, Table 3-11. Configuration Menu (continued) Item Values Explanation MAINTENANCE OFF This item appears only after the PERFORM PRINTER MESSAGE=OFF MAINTENANCE message displays. OFF: The PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE message will be cleared. If you do not replace the maintenance kit, the PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE message will be displayed again after approximately 17,500 pages. The message should not be turned off unless the printer maintenance has been performed. If the required maintenance is not performed, the printer’s performance will degrade. NEW TONER NO YES: Resets the printer to recognize new cartridge, and CARTRIDGE=NO YES resets the toner gauge on the configuration page. QUICK COPY JOBS 1 to 50 Specifies the number of quick copy jobs that can be =32 stored on the printer’s hard disk. JOB HELD OFF HP LaserJet 8150 series only. Sets the amount of time TIMEOUT=OFF 1 HOUR that quick copy, proof and hold, private, and stored jobs 4 HOURS are kept before being automatically deleted from the queue. 1 DAY 1 WEEK C4265-90907 Printer Control Panel Menus 117,Configuration of MBM Menu
Items in the MBM menu define the operating mode for the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox, 8-bin Mailbox, or 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler. Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000- sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling Accessories (C4788-90904). Table 3-12. MBM Menu Item Value Explanation OPERATION MODE: MAILBOX Defines the operating mode for the multibin mailbox that MAILBOX STACKER is installed. JOB SEPARATOR MAILBOX: Each bin can be addressed individually as the destination and can have a name assigned to it byCOLLATOR
the network or printer administrator. STACKER: Stacks the output from the lowest bin to the top, regardless of job boundaries. This operating mode takes advantage of the total capacity of the bins. The software sees the multibin mailbox as one logical bin. JOB SEPARATOR: Automatically separates incoming jobs, which may have multiple copies, and assigns a bin to each. It uses all the bins, but the software sees the multibin mailbox as one logical bin. If a bin is full, the printer automatically sends the job to the next available bin. COLLATOR: Automatically separates multiple prints of one page. Each printout is delivered in consecutive bins, starting with the Face-up Bin. 118 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907,I/O Menu
Items in the I/O (input/output) Menu affect the communication between the printer and the computer. Table 3-13. I/O Menu Item Values Explanation I/O TIMEOUT=15 5 to 300 Select the I/O time-out period in seconds. (I/O time-out refers to the time, measured in seconds, that the printer waits before ending a print job.) This setting allows you to adjust time-out for best performance. If data from other ports appear in the middle of your print job, increase the time-out value. Press - VALUE + once to change settings by increments of 1, or hold down - VALUE + to scroll by increments of 10. I/O BUFFER=AUTO AUTO Allocate memory for I/O buffering. ON AUTO: The printer automatically reserves memory for OFF I/O buffering. Additional configurations are not required and the I/O BUFFER SIZE menu item does not appear. ON: The I/O BUFFER SIZE item appears (see below). Specify the amount of memory to be used for I/O buffering. OFF: I/O buffering is not performed and the I/O BUFFER SIZE item does not appear. When the I/O buffer setting is changed, any downloaded resources (such as fonts or macros) will need to be downloaded again, unless they are stored on the hard disk or a flash DIMM. I/O BUFFER 10K and up This item appears only when I/O BUFFER=ON. Specify SIZE=100K the amount of memory for I/O buffering. The maximum amount of memory available for I/O buffering is determined by the amount of memory installed in the printer, the languages installed in the printer, and by other memory allocations that must be made. Press - VALUE + to change settings by increments of 10 (up to 100 KB) or by increments of 100 (above 100 KB). C4265-90907 Printer Control Panel Menus 119, Table 3-13. I/O Menu (continued) Item Values Explanation PARALLEL HIGH YES Select the speed at which data is transmitted to the SPEED=YES NO printer. YES: The printer accepts faster parallel communications used for connections with newer computers. NO: The printer accepts slower parallel communications used for connections with older computers. PARALLEL ADV ON Turn the bidirectional parallel communication on or off. FUNCTIONS=ON OFF The default is set for a bidirectional parallel port (IEEE-1284). This setting allows the printer to send status messages to the computer. (Turning the parallel advanced functions on might slow language switching.) 120 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907,EIO Menu
EIO (enhanced input/output) Menus depend on the particular accessory product installed in an EIO slot of the printer. If the printer contains an HP JetDirect print server EIO card, you can configure basic networking parameters using the EIO Menu. These and other parameters can also be configured through HP JetAdmin. Table 3-14. EIO Menu Item Values Explanation CFG IPX/SPX=NO NO NO: The IPX/SPX Menu is not accessible. YES YES: The IPX/SPX Menu appears. In the IPX/SPX Menu, you can specify the frame type parameter used on your network. The default is AUTO, to automatically set and limit the frame type to the one detected. For Ethernet cards, frame type selections include EN_8023, EN_II, EN_8022, EN_SNAP. For Token Ring cards, frame type selections include TR_8022, TR_SNAP. In the IPX/SPX Menu for Token Ring cards, you can also specify NetWare Source Routing parameters, which include SRC RT=AUTO (default), OFF, SINGLE R, or ALL RT. CFG TCP/IP=NO NO NO: The TCP/IP Menu is not accessible. YES YES: The TCP/IP Menu appears. In the TCP/IP Menu, you can specify BOOTP=YES for TCP/IP parameters to be automatically loaded from a bootp or DHCP server when the printer is turned on. If you specify BOOTP=NO, you can manually set selected TCP/IP parameters from the control panel. You can manually set each byte of the IP address (IP), Subnet Mask (SM), Syslog Server (LG), and Default Gateway (GW). Also, you can manually set the Timeout time period. C4265-90907 Printer Control Panel Menus 121, Table 3-14. EIO Menu (continued) Item Values Explanation CFG LINK=NO NO NO: The 10/100Base-TX link configuration menu is not YES accessible. YES: Allows you to access and manually set 10/ 100Base-TX link parameters. Auto: (Default) The print server will automatically configure itself to match the network’s link speed and communication mode. ● 10T HALF: Sets 10 Mbps, half-duplex operation on the print server. ● 10T FULL: Sets 10 Mbps, full-duplex operation on the print server. ● 100TX HALF: Sets 100 Mbps, half-duplex operation on the print server. ● 100TX FULL: Sets 100 Mbps, full-duplex operation on the print server. 122 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907,Duplex Registration Menu
The duplex registration menu is available in the HP LaserJet 8150 Series. The items in this menu will assist you in aligning the images on the front and back of a duplexed page by calibrating Tray 2, 3, or 4. This feature is not available for Tray 1. You will need to repeat the following items for each tray. Table 3-15. Duplex Registration Menu Item Explanation TRAY n Print a test page for Trays 2, 3 or 4 (a test page will print for Tray 4 only PRINT TEST PAGE if an external input device is attached, and Tray 5 will be aligned from performing the instructions for Tray 4 if you have the external 2x500 Input Tray installed). TRAY n X=0 0 is the X offset for the second side of the duplexed page for pages coming from Tray n. the registration marks range from -5 to +5. TRAY n Y=0 0 is the Y offset for the second side of the duplexed page for pages coming from Tray n. The registration marks range from -5 to +5. The duplex registration feature allows precise alignment of images on the front and back of a duplexed page. Image placement varies slightly for each input tray. The alignment procedure must be performed for each tray. 1 Press MENU until DUPLEX REGISTRATION MENU appears on the printer control panel display. 2 Press ITEM until PRINT TEST PAGE appears for the tray you want. 3 Press SELECT to print the page. 4 Hold the printed page up to a light source and choose the number on each axis where the lines on the front and back of the page align most accurately. 5 Repeat step 1. 6 Press ITEM until TRAY n X= appears and use -VALUE + to enter the number you selected from the test page in step 4. Press SELECT to save this value. 7 Repeat step 6 for the Y axis. 8 Press ITEM to scroll up through the duplex registration menu until PRINT TEST PAGE appears for the tray you want. 9 Press SELECT to print the page. C4265-90907 Printer Control Panel Menus 123, 10 Repeat step 4 to verify that the lines on the front and back of the page are now properly aligned. Note If the lines on the front and back of the page do not properly align, then repeat steps 4-9 until they are properly aligned. 124 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907,Resets Menu
CAUTION Use this menu with caution. You can lose buffered page data or printer configuration settings when you select these items. Only reset the printer under the following circumstances: ● You want to restore the printer’s default settings. ● Communication between the printer and computer has been interrupted. ● You are having problems with a port. The items in the Resets Menu will clear all memory in the printer, while CANCEL JOB clears only the current job. Table 3-16. Resets Menu Item Explanation POWERSAVE=OFF HP LaserJet 8150 Series only. The PowerSave feature minimizes the amount of power consumed by the printer when it is idle and reduces wear on the printer’s electronic components. When you send a print job, press a control panel key, open a paper tray, or open the top cover, the printer automatically comes out of PowerSave mode. Note PowerSave turns off the backlight on the display, but the display is still readable. RESET MEMORY This item clears the printer buffer and the active I/O input buffer, and makes the control panel defaults current. Resetting memory during a print job can result in data loss. RESTORE FACTORY This item performs a simple reset and restores most of the factory SETTINGS (default) settings. This item also clears the input buffer for the active I/O. Resetting memory during a print job can result in data loss. RESET ACTIVE I/O This item performs a simple reset and clears the input and output CHANNEL buffers (for the active I/Os only). Resetting memory during a print job can result in data loss. RESET ALL I/O This item performs a simple reset and clears the input and output CHANNELS buffers for all I/Os. C4265-90907 Printer Control Panel Menus 125,Using the HP Digital Copier Front Panel Install the Front Panel Overlay
1 1 Choose the Front Panel overlay printed with your language. 2 Press the overlay in place on the HP Digital Copier Front Panel until it clicks. 3 To remove the Front Panel overlay, pull it up and off. Note The language that appears on the HP Digital Copier display is customized through the language selected on the printer. If the printer language is set to a language other than the six offered by the HP Digital Copier (English, French, 3 Italian, German, Spanish, and Dutch), then the HP Digital Copier will default to English. (See the printer online user guide for more information.) 126 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907,HP Digital Copier Front Panel Front Panel Layout and Display Settings
Device Status Number of Context-sensitive Reset Start Message Copies Help Paper Reduce/ Numerical Enlarge Keypad 2-sided/N-up Output/Staple Copy Quality More Features Stop Figure 3-2 Front Panel Layout Table 3-17. Status Bar The Status Bar displays the current: ● "device status message" ● "number of copies selected" ● "context-sensitive help button" (available for certain features) device status The READY TO COPY, COPYING, or ACCEPTING message COPY JOBS message is displayed. ACCEPTING COPY JOBS indicates that the printer is busy. You can configure the next copy job when the printer is busy. number of copies The current number of copies selected for the selected copy job is displayed. This setting defaults to 1. context-sensitive This button remains present on the Front Panel help button display when available. When selected, help for the function appears. C4265-90907 Using the HP Digital Copier Front Panel 127, Table 3-18. Menu Tabs Menu Tabs allow access to any of the HP Digital Copier settings. Each tab shows related job settings. Select OK or EXIT to make changes as you move from tab to tab. Press OK to exit the menu tabs and start a copy job. Press EXIT to return to the default display tab. You can also select START to begin a copy job before exiting the menu tabs. Menu tabs ● "paper tab" ● "reduce/enlarge tab" ● "2-sided/N-up tab" ● "output/staple tab" ● "copy quality tab" ● "book copy tab" ● "job binding tab" ● "configuration tab" ● "about tab" paper tab Allows you to choose paper for the copy job based on size, tray, or type. ● Size - Shows the current size selected. When a selection is made, the Tray list will update automatically. ● Tray - Shows the current tray selected. If the selected paper size is currently installed in multiple trays, the tray selection text will highlight AUTOMATIC. This indicates that the printer will make the tray selection based on its auto- selection criteria. If the selected paper size is located in only one tray, the location will be shown by the list text. When a selection is made, the Size and Type will update automatically. Note If you choose a paper type that is not already loaded in the printer, the printer will prompt you to load Tray 1 with the correct paper before the job is printed. 128 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907, Table 3-18. Menu Tabs (continued) reduce/enlarge tab Allows you to enlarge or shrink the size of the document. Allows you to choose the paper size for your original document and specify a different size for the copy. For example, copying from A4 to letter. You may also specify the output paper size and then choose a scaling percent to reduce or enlarge a region of the source document. You may choose to copy a fully bled page onto the printable region of the output paper. You are presented with the following controls for selecting the desired paper scaling percent: ● Reduce/Enlarge - Shows input-to-output paper sizes. When a size is selected, the proper scaling percent for the currently selected input and output paper sizes is displayed. ● Percent - Shows the current page scaling percent. C4265-90907 Using the HP Digital Copier Front Panel 129, Table 3-18. Menu Tabs (continued) reduce/enlarge tab ● Custom Media Reduction - This setting allows (continued) you to switch between the standard/enlargement settings and the custom mode. This allows you to choose your original and copy document sizes independently. When the Custom Media Reduction box is checked, you can select a paper size under the Original list for your original document and then select the paper size in the Copy list for the size you want to copy. The percent text box automatically calculates page scaling percent. When the Custom Media Reduction box is unchecked, you may select from a list of standard reduction or enlargement settings, such as Letter (LTR) to Legal (LGL). Also, you may select the Manual setting in order to adjust the scaling percent by hand. When Manual is selected you may increase or decrease the scaling percent by one percent increments. You may reduce a document by up to 25 percent or enlarge a document by up to 200 percent. When you have chosen Manual, you may also choose the size of your original document. The copier will reduce that document by the percent you have selected. ● Shrink Page to Printable Region - This allows you to copy a fully bled page onto the printable region of the currently selected output paper size. There are limits to how far out to the edge of the page the printer can print. If you are copying a page that has printing all the way out to the edges (full bleed), then checking this box will cause the image to be reduced slightly so that the entire edge-to-edge image may print within the printable region of the output paper. 130 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907, Table 3-18. Menu Tabs (continued) 2-sided/N-up tab This tab has four controls for setting up the options and a preview image that graphically illustrates the current settings. ● 2-sided Copying - Shows the currently selected 2-sided mode. Choose the two-sided mode you need. The preview image will update to display your choice. ● Flip Pages Up - This setting is active if you choose to copy onto both sides of the output paper. By default, the pages of the two-sided binding are flipped to the left, like a book, when viewed from the backside of the job. When the setting is checked, the pages are bound, appearing flipped up when viewed from the backside of the job. The preview image will update to display your choice. ● N-up Copying - Shows the currently selected number of input pages to be printed on each output page. Choose the number of input pages needed to print on each output page. The preview image will update to display your choice. ● Print Page Borders - This setting is active when you select two or more pages for each sheet. When checked, page borders will print around each page image on the output page. The preview image will update to display your choice. output/staple tab ● You can configure the output and stapling options using the two main controls on this tab. ● Output Bin - Shows the currently selected output bin. Choose which bin the copy job will be delivered to. If the output bin is set to the stapling bin and a stapling option is selected, then changing the output bin to another location will turn off the stapling option. ● Stapling - Allows you to choose stapling options. The number of options displayed will depend on the stapling device installed. If you select an option to have the output stapled, then the Output Bin setting will change to display that stapling can only take place in the Staple Bin. C4265-90907 Using the HP Digital Copier Front Panel 131, Table 3-18. Menu Tabs (continued) copy quality tab ● Copy Mode - You may change the copy quality settings from this tab. There are three settings to choose from in Copy Mode: Photo - This mode is optimized for photo clarity. Text - This mode is optimized for text sharpness. This is the default mode. ● Brightness - You may change the brightness setting from this tab. Press the left or right arrow to increase or decrease the brightness level as indicated by the slider. There are five settings for brightness. book copy tab Allows you to make a copy of an open book with a single page of output for each page of the book. Align the spine of the book with the book markings on the flatbed paper guides. ● Follow the prompts provided on the Front Panel when using this mode. ● You can copy multiple pages from a book and bind them together as one job. See the "job binding tab" description for more information. job binding tab Takes multiple copies from the flatbed and binds them together as one job. This allows the user to duplex, print n-up pages, and staple jobs from the flatbed. ● Follow the prompts provided on the Front Panel when using this mode. configuration tab Provides configuration settings for the HP Digital Copier. For example: ● Allows you to turn on or off the audible key feedback. ● Allows you to adjust the Front Panel display contrast. 132 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907, Table 3-18. Menu Tabs (continued) about tab Used to find available help topics. Displays: ● system version information ● current page counts for the flatbed and ADF ● number of pages until the next required service Table 3-19. Context-sensitive Help Press the to enter the HP Digital Copier help system. Follow the prompts provided in the help system to find additional descriptions of certain features and functions. Table 3-20. Default Configurations If the HP Digital Copier is idle and unattended for one minute, the HP Digital Copier settings will return to the default configuration. Press the Reset key on the Front Panel to return all of the HP Digital Copier settings to the default configuration. The setting changes that you make will remain for one minute before they reset to a default setting. For example, if you walk up to the HP Digital Copier and press the 5 key, the number of copies selected will be set to five. If you do not make any other setting changes and do not initiate a job by pressing the Start key within one minute, then the number of copies selected will automatically return to one. After a copy job is completed, the current settings will not change until after another minute expires. This makes it possible to set up the HP Digital Copier settings in a particular manner only once for a number of jobs. C4265-90907 Using the HP Digital Copier Front Panel 133,Button/LED Functions
Paper Sensor LED RESET START Keys 0-9STOP
Start Button LED C Figure 3-3 Button/LED Functions Table 3-21. Functions of Buttons and LEDs Name of the button or LED Function Button 0-9 Use to enter the number of copies you desire. May also be used periodically to enter a numerical value (for example, in service mode). RESET Resets all of the copier settings to the default values. START Begins a copy job or continues a copy job that has been interrupted because of an error. STOP Stops a copy job. C Clears the number of copies setting. (Does not clear the other copy module settings.) LED Paper Sensor Illuminates when paper is loaded correctly in the LED ADF. Start Button LED See “Start Button LED” on page 135 for a detailed description of this LED. 134 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907,Start Button LED
Table 3-22. Start Button LED States LED color On Flashing Slow Flashing Fast Green The copy module is The copy module is in The copy module is ready to make copies. Power Save mode. making copies. Amber The copy module has a The copy module has an The copy module has an critical error. Turn the error and requires error that requires printer and copy module attention. attention from your off, and then turn the service provider. printer and copy module on. Note When the copy module is in Power Save mode, the back light of the display panel will be turned off and the Start LED (green) will flash at a slow rate to indicate that the system is turned on. To bring the system out of Power Save mode, place paper in the ADF, press any key on the numerical keypad, or touch the touch screen. C4265-90907 Using the HP Digital Copier Front Panel 135,HP Digital Copier Settings
Table 3-23. Default Settings Feature Description Default Number of copies 1 to 999 1 Paper Source Selection of paper tray Auto-select (any tray) Select Selection by paper size Letter/A4 Plain Collation Collated Collated Grouped (uncollated) Stapled Select output bin Reduce/Enlarge 25% to 200% in 1% 100% increments Supports standard presets, such as Legal to Letter. Copy quality text, photo text Duplex 1-1, 1-2, 2-1, 2-2 1-1 If the printer does not have a duplexer installed, then 1-2 and 2-2 are not available. N-up 1-up, 2-up, 4-up 1-up 2-up documents will be rotated. 136 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907, Table 3-23. Default Settings (continued) Feature Description Default Book copy Copies an open book with Not selected a single page of output for each page of the book. Brightness 5 levels (2 lighter, normal, Normal 2 darker) Job binding This allows the user to Not selected duplex, print n-up pages, and staple jobs from the flatbed. C4265-90907 Using the HP Digital Copier Front Panel 137,Loading Documents into the ADF
1A1Pull up on the ADF Input Tray (A) and place the bar (B) in operating position. 2 Square up and insert originals face down into the input tray. Load to the line indicator on the paper guide.B
Note The system will exit Power Save when 2 you place the document into the ADF. The LED will light up and a tone will sound when paper is loaded correctly. Remove paper clips and staples. Flatten the staple holes. 3 If the document size exceeds A4 or Letter size, extend the Input Tray and 3 output bin by flipping out the extensions. Continued on next page. 138 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907, 4 4 Set the guides so that there is a little amount of clearance between the side edges and the guides. Adjust the guides to the document size. Note Squeeze the guide lever to free the guides. Load documents so that the thickness is less than 0.32 inches (8 mm). 5 Set the guides so that they touch the document sides. 5 After a document is copied, remove the original from the copy module and the copy from the output bin. Note Letter and A4-size originals fed through the ADF will be rotated automatically to print correctly. C4265-90907 Using the HP Digital Copier Front Panel 139,Loading Documents onto the Flatbed
1 1 Open the document cover. 2 Place the document face down and align the top left with the reference mark. Carefully close the document cover and press START. 140 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907,Printer Service Mode
The Service Mode should be used only by authorized service personnel. While in Service Mode, you can: ● Verify and set the Page Count and serial number. These are displayed on the Configuration Page. ● Set the Cold Reset Paper Size Default. (This sets the factory default paper size to either Letter or A4.) ● Clear the Event Log. Initiate the Service Mode as follows: 1 Hold down SELECT and JOB CANCEL while powering on the printer, until all lights are illuminated and the Display is blank. (If the Display Panel reads INTERNAL TEST at this point, the keys were released too soon. Repeat this step until successful.) 2 Press MENU (on the right side of the toggle switch), then SELECT. The message SERVICE MODE is displayed briefly, then the printer automatically begins an INTERNAL TEST. After several seconds, both Control Panel Indicators turn off. (The printer may display WARMING UP if it has not warmed up completely.) After the printer has warmed up and passed the self test, SERVICE MODE is displayed. 3 Press MENU once to display SERVICE MENU. To exit the Service Mode press GO. Table 3-24. Service Mode Menu Items Service Mode Item Actions Menu Items Choices Required PAGES= 0000000 Displays total number of pages printed by the printer. Press + to step through values above cursor. Press SELECT to activate choice. Cursor will move to next digit. Printer will set new number into NVRAM after least significant digit is selected. Pressing MENU or ITEM before completing all digits will cancel the new setting. Pressing MENU returns printer to the main menu system. Pressing ITEM moves to the next menu item. C4265-90907 Printer Service Mode 141,Table 3-24. Service Mode Menu Items (continued)
Service Mode Item Actions Menu Items Choices RequiredMAINTENANCE 0000000 Displays pages since last maintenance (maintenance should
be performed every 350,000 pages).COUNT=
Press + to step through values above cursor. Press SELECT to activate choice. Cursor will move to next digit. Printer will set new number into NVRAM after least significant digit is selected. Pressing MENU or ITEM before completing all digits will cancel the new setting. Pressing MENU returns printer to the main menu system. Pressing ITEM moves to the next menu item.MAINTENANCE 350000 Allows a service technician to change the page count when the PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE 350,000 is the default INTERVAL=
value. This is provided for customers with printing environments that require more frequent maintenance cycles.SERIAL xxxxxxxxxx Displays printer serial number (also located on the printer back
cover).NUMBER=
Press + to step through values above cursor. Press SELECT to activate choice. Cursor will move to next digit. Printer will set new number into NVRAM after least significant digit is selected. Pressing MENU or ITEM before completing all digits will cancel the new setting. Pressing MENU returns printer to the main menu system. Pressing ITEM moves to the next menu item.COLD RESET LETTER * Press + to change setting.
Press SELECT to activate choice.PAPER= A4 DIAGNOSTICS= OFF * For factory test purposes ONLY.
DO NOT change.ON CLEAR EVENT Press SELECT to activate.
Printer returns to READY when completed.LOG
142 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907,Setting Page Count, Maintenance Count,
and Serial Number The page count, maintenance count, and printer serial numbers are stored in Non-Volatile Memory. PAGECOUNT is the total number of images printed by the printer, MAINTCOUNT is the pages since last maintenance (maintenance should be performed every 350,000 images), and SERIAL NUMBER= is the printer serial number (also located on the printer back cover). If it is necessary to replace the Formatter PCA, these numbers should be set to the current values to accurately reflect the age of the print engine. The procedures for setting these values are listed in table 3-24. Before removing the old Formatter PCA, print a Configuration Page to verify the current values. Note If it is not possible to print a Configuration Page, try to verify the values before replacing the Formatter PCA by following steps 1 through 3 below. After verifying the page count, maintenance count, and printer serial number from the old Formatter PCA, replace it with the new PCA, then perform the following steps. 1 Enter the Service Mode as previously described in this chapter. 2 When SERVICE MODE is displayed, press MENU to access the Service Menu. 3 Press ITEM to display PAGECOUNT=, MAINTCOUNT=, and SERIAL NUMBER=. 4 Enter the appropriate values for each item. 5 Press GO to exit Service Mode. C4265-90907 Printer Service Mode 143,Setting the Cold Reset Default Paper Size
When replacing a Formatter PCA with a default paper size setting of A4, set COLD RESET PAPER= to A4. 1 Enter the Service Mode as previously described in this chapter. 2 Press MENU to access the Service Menu. 3 Press ITEM to step through the menu until COLD RESET PAPER=LETTER* is displayed. 4 Press + to toggle between Letter and A4 paper. 5 Press SELECT to activate your choice. 6 Press GO to exit Service Mode. 7 Perform a Cold Reset to activate new choice. 144 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907,HP Digital Copier Service Mode
Figure 3-4 Copy Module Service Mode To enter service mode, hold down the RESET, 0, and 1 keys while you turn on the power. The copy module skips its normal power up self-tests. ● Reset the ADF cleaning counter and maintenance counter to zero when you perform cleaning and maintenance procedures. ● In case of a failed EEPROM, reprogram the copy module’s serial number from the Serial Number Management Menu. ● Use the Calibration Menu to recalibrate the copy module when you replace the following parts: • Lamps • Optics • ADF Assembly • Carrier Unit • Flatbed Cover Assembly • Control PCA with EEPROM C4265-90907 HP Digital Copier Service Mode 145, Note The EEPROM stores all calibration settings. If you replace the Control PCA, be sure to retain the EEPROM from the bad Control PCA and install it in the replacement Control PCA. ● Test sensors, Front Panel and the ADF from the Tests Menu. 146 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907,HP Digital Copier Administrator Mode
Administrator Mode is a separate mode from Service Mode. This mode allows you to set defaults for copy jobs only. This mode does not set defaults for print jobs or for digitally sent jobs. To set defaults for print jobs see “HP Digital Copier Settings” on page 136. This mode is password protected so that only administrators can enter. To enter Administrator Mode type in 999#320* while the printer and copy module are turned on and ready. You will now see the Administration Menu. Press SET COPY DEFAULTS. You will now see the end user control panel. Set each area to the desired default state. The areas that can have defaults chosen are: ● Paper-set defaults ● Reduce/Enlarge-cannot set defaults ● 2-Sided/N-Up-Set-set defaults ● Output/Staple-set defaults ● Copy Quality-set defaults ● Book Copy-cannot set defaults ● Job Binding-cannot set defaults ● Configuration-set defaults Make sure to press SAVE when you are finished. Press EXIT ADMIN MODE to see the regular end-user screen. Note There is a setting in the Administrator Mode to restore the defaults to factory settings. C4265-90907 HP Digital Copier Administrator Mode 147,Remote Upgrade of the Printer Firmware
The latest firmware is available for download from http://www.hp.com. Once the firmware image is on your C: drive, you have two options: ● Download the file directly to your printer using the manual method given below. ● Use WebJetAdmin to simultaneously download printer firmware to one or more printers.Manually Dowload Printer Firmware
1 If your printer is connected via parallel port, JetDirect network port or Standard Network port on the PC, use the following command to upgrade the printer’s firmware: Open a DOS command window and enter this command: Copy /bDownload Printer Firmware Using HP WebJetAdmin
1 Bring up the WebJetAdmin main page 2 For a single printer, type the IP hostname or IP address of the printer in the Quick Device Find field in the top right corner and click Go. For multiple printer updates see the WebJetAdmin User documentation. 3 Click the right arrow right below the Go button to move to the Update menu option. 4 Select Update and "Update Printer" (rather than "Update JetDirect") and Continue. 5 Use the Browse button to locate the firmware image file you downloaded from the Internet. 6 Use the Upload button to move the firmware image file from your C: drive to the HP WebJetAdmin server. 7 Click the "refresh" icon in the top right corner (it looks like a page with two arrows in a circle). 8 Select the datecode that you want to send to the printer. The datecode is in the format: YYYYMMDD where YYYY is 2000, and MM and DD are the month and day of the firmware build. 9 Click the "Update Firmware" button. HP Web JetAdmin will send the selected firmware image file to the printer. C4265-90907 Remote Upgrade of the Printer Firmware 149,Upgrade HP Digital Copier Firmware
There are three ways to update copy module firmware: ● HP Digital Sender Configuration Utility ● PJL datastream through a parallel port ● HP Resource Manager All three types of firmware upgrades can be downloaded from the World Wide Web, and the digital sending configuration utility is also available on CD-ROM. Note If digital sending is being used on the HP LaserJet 8000 Series MFP, the Digital Sender Configuration Utility is the only method available to upgrade firmware. Using the DOS parallel upgrade method or the HP Resource Manager upgrade method will break the digital sending connection.HP Digital Sender Configuration Utility upgrade
Before using this method of upgrade, make sure that you have a license number entered in the digital sending utility or you have the actual license to enter into the digital sending utility. 1 Locate the specific workstation that has been servicing the MFP device and that has been administering the digital sending capability. 2 Confirm that the workstation or server has the correct driver connection to the MFP. This connection must be in place for the upgrade to occur. 3 Open the digital sending configuration utility and go to the configuration tab. 4 Confirm that all the settings are correct. 5 Click on the reinitialize button. 6 The upgrade can take several minutes. This will depend on whether there are addresses in the address book manager and how many addresses are being downoaded. A maximum of 200,000 addresses can be downloaded. 7 When the upgrade is complete, the printer and copy module will restart. 150 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907,PJL Data stream upgrade through a parallel port
The DOS parallel port upgrade can only be used for upgrading copy capability. If digital sending is being used on the MFP, refer to the digital sender configuration utility upgrade method. 1 Download and unzip the self-extracting CMFxxx.EXE files from www.hp.com and copy it to the PC that will be directly connected to the MFP to perform the upgrade. 2 After expanding, locate the CMFxxx.PJL file and CMFDIR.PJL if needed. Default directory is C:\TEMP 3 Directly connect the PC to the MFP you want to upgrade, usually with a parallel cable. 4 Turn the MFP on and wait until the control panel displays READY. 5 If the PC is Windows based, you may have to modify the port settings so that MS DOS print jobs are not spooled. This is done in Windows 95/98 by selecting Start, Settings, Printers, choose the printer using LPT1, select File, Properties, Details, and Port Settings. 6 Open a DOS window. 7 Change directories to the directory containing the CMFxxx.PJL file, if necessary. 8 If the copy module firmware directories are available, go to step 9. If you cannot find the copy module firmware directories, type copy/b CMFDIRS.PJL lpt1 and press the enter key. Note This step may result in a disk error if the directories are on the MFP hard disk. This temporary error does not indicate a problem with the disk and will be cleared with a power cycle. The error can be cleared by pressing the “Go” key. 9 Type copy/b CMFxxx.PJL lpt1 and press the enter key. 10 The MFP control panel should display PROCESSING for about 30 seconds, then return to displaying READY without printing a page. 11 Turn the MFP and the Copy Module off and then back on to complete the upgrade. C4265-90907 Upgrade HP Digital Copier Firmware 151,HP Resource Manager Upgrade
1 Verify that the host PC to be used for the upgrade is a Windows 9x or NT machine and that HP Resource Manager has been successfully installed. (If Resource Manager is not installed, install it using a custom installation from the original HP LaserJet 8100 or 8150 driver Software CD.) 2 Obtain the .mfw files from www.hp.com and copy it to the host computer that will be used to perform the upgrade. 3 Verify that the host PC is connected to the MFP(s) to be upgraded either with a C-type parallel connector or a network. 4 Start HP Resource Manager (Start, Programs, HP LaserJet). 5 Select the preferred communication channel at the bottom of the screen (TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, or Local). 6 Drag the icons for the printers to be updated into the Printers folder. Multiple printers can be updated at the same time. 7 Using the lower right hand window, browse to the new firmware files (*.MFW) and drag the file icons to the firmware folder in the top left window. (This file now appear as a ROF file.) 8 The upper right hand window will be updated to reflect the MFP's status. 9 Click the upgrade button and wait for the operation to complete. 10 Verify that the MFP's status changed to “upgraded.” 11 Power the LaserJet and the Copy Module off and back on to complete the update. 152 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907,Testing the Printer Paper Path Test
You can test printer operation with the Paper Path Test. It will print 1, 10, 50, 100, or 500 (single or 2-sided) pages from any of the paper trays (or the Envelope Feeder) and deliver them to a previously specified output bin. First, select PAPER DESTINATION and 2-SIDED printing (if a duplexer is installed) in the Configuration Menu (table 3-11), and then run the Paper Path Test from the Information Menu (table 3-7). Note If feeding from Tray 1, the default output will always be the Face-up Bin. 1 Press MENU. 2 Press (-)ITEM twice. 3 Press SELECT and continue making your desired paper path test. 4 Press SELECT to execute the test.Configuration Page
When you print a Configuration Page, the printer checks its internal controller and I/O interface, then prints a page showing the overall printer configuration (see figure 7-17 on page 654), and a Menu Map showing the current menu settings (see figure 7-16 on page 652). You can review these printouts to verify proper installation of installed accessories, options, and personalities. 1 Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears. 2 Press ITEM until PRINT CONFIGURATION appears. 3 Press SELECT to print the configuration pages. For sample information pages, see “Information Pages” on page 651. C4265-90907 Testing the Printer 153, Figure 3-5 Configuration Page (varies with installed options) Table 3-25. Key to Figure 3-5 1 Printer Information lists the serial number, HP JetSend IP addresses, page counts, and other information for the printer. 2 Event Log lists the number of entries in the log, the maximum number of entries viewable, and the last three entries. 3 Installed Personalities and Options lists all printer languages that are installed (such as PCL and PS) and lists options that are installed in each DIMM slot and EIO slot. 4 Memory lists the printer memory, PCL Driver Work Space (DWS), and I/O buffering and resource saving information. 5 Security lists the status of the printer’s control panel lock, control panel password, and disk drive. 6 Paper Tray and Options lists the size settings for all trays and lists any optional paper handling devices installed. 7 Toner gauge provides a graphic representation of how much toner is left in the cartridge. 154 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907, Figure 3-6 Menu Map Page (varies with printer models and installed options) Table 3-26. Key to Figure 3-6 Information Menu lets you print information pages and perform a paper path test. Paper Handling Menu contains paper handling options. Print Quality Menu lets you set print quality settings. Printing Menu contains various print options. Configuration Menu contains various printer settings. I/O Menu contains communication settings. Resets Menu shows options for resetting the printer. Note Items will only appear if options are installed. C4265-90907 Testing the Printer 155, 156 Chapter 3 Operating Overview C4265-90907, 4 Maintenance and AdjustmentsChapter Contents
Cleaning the Printer and Paper Handling Accessories .158 Cleaning the HP Digital Copier .161 Cleaning ADF and Glass .162 Copy Module Optics Cleaning .165 Maintaining the Printer .167 Maintaining the Copy Module.168 Adjusting Printer Input Trays .169 Adjusting the 2000-sheet Printer Input Tray .172 Adjusting Duplex Registration of the Paper Trays .174 Adjusting the Copy Module .175 C4265-90907 Chapter Contents 157,Cleaning the Printer and Paper Handling Accessories
To maintain print quality and paper performance, thoroughly clean the printer and the paper handling devices: ● Every time you change the toner cartridge. ● After printing approximately 20,000 images. ● Whenever print quality problems occur. ● If the edge-to-edge feature is used frequently (HP LaserJet 8150 series only). Clean the outside surfaces with a lightly dampened cloth. Clean the inside with only a dry, lint-free cloth. Use the guidelines listed in table 4-1. Observe the warnings and cautions below. WARNING! Before you begin these steps, turn the printer off and unplug all power cords to avoid shock hazard. Be careful when cleaning around the Fusing Assembly area. It may be HOT. CAUTION To avoid permanent damage to the toner cartridge, do not use ammonia-based cleaners on or around the printer. Do not touch the transfer roller with your fingers. This can cause print quality problems. 158 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4265-90907,Cleaning the Printer
1 Before you begin these steps, turn the printer off and unplug all cords. 2 Open the top cover of the printer and remove the toner cartridge. WARNING! Avoid touching the adjacent fusing area. It may be HOT.CAUTION
Do not touch the transfer roller (A). Oils from your hands can contaminate the roller and reduce print quality. If toner gets on your clothes, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash your clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric. 3 With a dry lint-free cloth, wipe any residue from the paper path area, the registration roller (B), and the toner cartridge cavity. Use the brush supplied with the printer to remove residue from tight areas. 4 Replace the toner cartridge, close the printer, reconnect all cables, and turn the printer on. C4265-90907 Cleaning the Printer and Paper Handling Accessories 159, Table 4-1. Cleaning the Printer Component Cleaning Method/Notes Outside Covers Use a water-dampened cloth. Do not use solvents or ammonia-based cleaners. Inside General Use a dry, lint free cloth. Remove all dust, spilled toner, and paper particles. Paper Pickup, Feed, Use a water-dampened lint-free cloth. and Separation Rollers Separation Pad Use a dry lint-free cloth. Registration Roller Use a dry lint-free cloth. Transfer Roller Use a dry, lint-free cloth. DO NOT TOUCH the transfer roller with your fingers. Fusing Assembly Use a water-dampened lint-free cloth.Cleaning Spilled Toner
Defective toner cartridges can develop leaks. Also, after a paper jam has occurred, there may be some toner remaining on the rollers and guides inside the printer. The images that print immediately after the jam may pick up this toner. Clean spilled toner with a cloth slightly dampened in cold water. Do not touch the Transfer Roller with the damp cloth or with your fingers. Do not use a vacuum cleaner unless it is equipped with a micro-fine particle filter. Note If toner gets on your clothing, use cold water to remove it. Hot water sets toner stains into fabric. 160 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4265-90907,Cleaning the HP Digital Copier
Clean the ADF Assembly, including the Rollers and Separation Pad, every 6,000 pages, or more frequently with certain paper types. To check the “ADF Scans Since Last Cleaning” counter, print a Configuration Page from the Printer Information Menu. You must reset the cleaning counter in the printer’s service mode after you clean the copy module (see page 143). Symptoms indicating that it is time to clean the copy module include increasing mispicks and an optical failure.Materials
● Dry, lint-free cloth ● Isopropyl alcohol (any concentration, including denatured alcohol) ● Vacuum (see below) ● Blow brush ● Glass cleaner (for flatbed glass only) ● Terrace Oil 46 (light weight oil) ● Alvania Grease No. 2 (white or silicone grease) CAUTION Do not use organic solvents such as thinner. Never use glass cleaner on any part of the copy module except the flatbed glass. Be sure no liquid enters the copy module from the edges of the Glass Plate Assembly. (See page 551.)Vacuum Specifications
Use the same type of vacuum used for printer maintenance. Be sure to use a vacuum with adequate filtration so that microfine toner is not released into the air. Paper dust and unfused toner particles can accumulate in the ADF and on the Carrier Unit. The type of narrow attachments that are used with printer and copier machine vacuums are particularly useful for cleaning. CAUTION When using the vacuum be careful not to damage paper sensors. Never use the vacuum for the Carrier Unit or Optical Unit. These should be hand cleaned only. C4265-90907 Cleaning the HP Digital Copier 161,Cleaning ADF and Glass
A quick clean takes approximately 15 minutes and should be performed every 6,000 pages.Cleaning the Document Cover, Document Holder, and Flatbed Glass
isopropyl paint thinner - Document alcohol do not use! Cover Document Holder Flatbed Glass Cloth Figure 4-1 Cleaning the Document Cover, Document Holder, and Flatbed Glass Use a cloth that is either dry or dampened with a small amount of the appropriate cleaning material listed in Table 4-2 below to remove dirt from the Document Cover, Document Holder, and flatbed glass. Table 4-2. Cleaning the Document Cover, Document Holder, and Flatbed Glass Part Cleaning Materials Document Cover non-abrasive, neutral detergent or alcohol Document Holder Flatbed Glass alcohol or glass cleaner DO NOT USE DETERGENT 162 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4265-90907,Cleaning the ADF
1 Unplug the copy module. 2 Press the latch and lift open the ADF. Pick Spring Feed Rollers Pick Rollers Separation Pad Exit Rollers ADF Latch Idle Rollers (Feed) Paper Guide ADF Glass Figure 4-2 Parts of the ADF Table 4-3. Cleaning the ADF Part Cleaning method Problem with dirty or worn part Separation Pad Using a cloth with isopropyl alcohol, Double-feeds wipe the Separation Pad in a downward direction. Be careful not to hook the Pick Springs. ADF Glass Wipe the glass lightly with a cloth and Vertical streaking when you isopropyl alcohol or glass cleaner to scan from the ADF remove any paper dust or toner. C4265-90907 Cleaning ADF and Glass 163, Table 4-3. Cleaning the ADF (continued) Part Cleaning method Problem with dirty or worn part Pick Rollers Remove the Pick Rollers. Using a cloth Misfeeds, paper slippage, and dampened with isopropyl alcohol, firmly jams and thoroughly wipe each Pick Roller in a horizontal direction, from end to end to remove dirt. Do not touch the rubber part of the rollers. Skin oils can damage the rollers. Feed, Exit, and Using a cloth with isopropyl alcohol, Paper jams Idler Rollers wipe the rollers in a horizontal direction, making sure to remove any built-up toner or ink. Make sure the rollers are dry before scanning. Paper Guide Gently wipe the Paper Guide area with Vertical streaking when a soft cloth. copying from the ADF 164 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4265-90907,Copy Module Optics Cleaning
An optics clean takes approximately 30 minutes and should be performed every 12,000 pages.Cleaning the ADF Lamp and Mirrors
CAUTION Use a lint free cloth with isopropyl alcohol to clean the Lamp and to clean fingerprints, toner, or paper dust from the mirror. Be careful not to scratch the mirror. Do not use glass cleaner. 1 Open the ADF. 2 Remove the ADF Latch (page 511) and ADF Cover (page 512). 3 Remove the ADF Unit and ADF Lamp (pages 547 to 539). 4 Clean the mirrors with a blow brush. See the Caution above. 5 Clean the Lamp with a dry or alcohol-dampened, lint-free cloth. Do not touch the Lamp with your fingers. 6 Replace the Lamp, ADF Unit, ADF Cover, and ADF Latch Cap.Lubricating the ADF Gears
If necessary, place an even coating of Alvania Grease No. 2 (white or silicone grease) on the teeth of the ADF Gears as needed. C4265-90907 Copy Module Optics Cleaning 165,Cleaning the Carrier Unit and Mechanical Assemblies
1 Remove the skins (starting on page 505) and the Glass Plate Assembly (page 551). 2 Clean any dirt from the back of the Glass Plate Assembly, especially under the ADF Unit and the White Reference Strip. 3 Vacuum any dirt from the inside of the Mechanical Frame. 4 Remove the Lamp from the Carrier Unit (page 555). 5 Remove any dirt from the Carrier Unit Mirrors with a blow brush. CAUTION Use a lint free cloth with isopropyl alcohol to clean fingerprints, toner, or paper dust from the mirror. Be careful not to scratch the mirror. Do not use glass cleaner. 6 If the Carrier Unit Shaft is dirty, wipe it off with a cloth, then relubricate it (see below). Otherwise, be careful not to remove the lubricant.Lubricating the Carrier Unit Shaft
If necessary, or if the Carrier Unit shaft has been cleaned, place an even coating of Terrace Oil 46 (light weight oil) on the Carrier Unit Shaft as needed (for example, if paper dust or other material interferes with movement of the Carrier Unit, or if you have cleaned the shaft). See page 559.Lubricating the Top of the Carrier Guide Rail
If necessary, or if the Carrier Guide Rail has been cleaned, place an even coating of Alvania Grease No. 2 (white or silicone grease) on the top of the Carrier Guide Rail as needed.Lubricating the Flatbed Motor Gears
If necessary, place an even coating of Alvania Grease No. 2 (white or silicone grease) on the teeth of the Flatbed Motor Gears as needed.Cleaning the Front Panel
Use a dry cloth to clean the Front Panel Display. 166 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4265-90907,Maintaining the Printer
The user-conducted preventive maintenance cycle for this printer is every 350,000 images. The part numbers for the preventive maintenance kits are C3914A for the 100V printers, and C3915A for the 220V printers. The kits contain the following replacement parts: one Fusing Assembly, one Transfer Roller Assembly, and eight Feed/ Separation Rollers [two each for Trays 2, 3, the 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4), and the2x500-sheet Input Tray (Trays 4 and 5)]. See Chapter 6 of this manual, and the instructions included in the kits for detailed replacement procedures. The control panel message, PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE, indicates that the 350,000 image maintenance is due. After performing the maintenance procedures: ● Go to the control panel Configuration Menu and set the SERVICE MESSAGE= to OFF. ● Reset PAGES SINCE LAST MAINTENANCE: a. Turn the printer off. b. Holding down the VALUE - and ITEM - keys, turn the printer back on. Wait for Reset Maint/Count to display before releasing the keys. The default (350,000) maintenance message interval can be set to lesser values if needed (50K, 150K, 250K), for printers requiring more frequent maintenance. This feature is provided for customers using heavy, rough, or generally out-of-specification media that prematurely wears out the maintenance parts. C4265-90907 Maintaining the Printer 167,Maintaining the Copy Module
The Separation Pad and Pick Rollers must be replaced every 60,000 pages through the ADF. To check the “ADF Scans Since Last Maintenance” counter, print a Configuration Page from the printer’s Information Menu. You must reset the maintenance counter in service mode after you replace the maintenance parts (see page 143). For removal and replacement procedures, see “Copy Module Maintenance Parts” on page 500. The procedures take approximately 15 minutes. Symptoms that indicate it is time to replace the maintenance parts include increasing mispicks and visible wear or polish on the surface of the Separation Pad or Pick Rollers. Note If highly abrasive papers or papers high in calcium carbonate content are used, replacement intervals may be shorter.HP Digital Copier Maintenance Parts
● 2 Pick Rollers PA03002-C120FJ ● 1 Separation Pad PA03002-C122FJ 168 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4265-90907,Adjusting Printer Input Trays Adjusting for Edge-to-Edge Printing
Note Edge-to-Edge printing is available in the HP LaserJet 8150 Series only. This feature provides the user with the ability to print within approximately 2 millimeters of all edges of the page. An internal-tray calibration page allows the administrator to calibrate each tray. The calibration page can be printed from each internal tray and the top tray of an external paper- handling device. The calibration page cannot be printed from the envelope feeder. The edge- to- edge print mode is set from the printer driver or the control panel. It is most common to use the printer driver when printing individual print jobs. When set from the control panel, the edge-to-edge feature will remain in edge- to- edge print mode until turned off from the control panel or from a print job. To print a calibration page: 1 Make sure that paper is loaded in the desired tray or trays and that the trays are properly inserted into the printer 2 Press MENU repeatedly until PAPER HANDLING MENU appears. 3 Press ITEM repeatedly until CONFIGURE EDGE TO EDGE= NO appears. 4 Press VALUE to change the value to YES. 5 Press SELECT. 6 Press ITEM repeatedly until PRINT TEST PAGE TRAY= n appears. 7 Press VALUE to choose the desired tray (ALL, 1, 2, 3, or 4). 8 Press SELECT to print the calibration page. 9 Follow the instructions on the calibration page to complete the calibration process. CAUTION When using edge-to-edge printing, clean the printer every time the toner cartridge is changed. C4265-90907 Adjusting Printer Input Trays 169,Adjusting Input Trays for Normal Printing
This procedure applies to Trays 2 and 3 (the standard paper trays in the printer) and Trays 4 and 5 in the2x500-sheet Input Tray. To adjust the 2000-sheet Input Tray see “Adjusting the 2000-sheet Printer Input Tray” on page 172. The paper trays are mechanically aligned to the printer chassis at the factory. Perform this procedure ONLY if a paper tray has been replaced with a tray other than the original factory installed tray, or if the top margin of the image area is off-center more than 0.5 mm (0.02 inch). The adjustment procedure is identical for Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5 from the2x500-sheet Input Tray. Note Before performing this procedure, check that the margins in your software application are properly set. 1 Load the paper tray being tested with letter or A4 size paper. 2 Perform a 1-sheet Paper Path Test from that tray (see Paper Path Test under Test Menu in Chapter 3). 3 See figure 4-3 and compare distance A to distance B. Figure 4-3 Image Area Margins 170 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4265-90907, Note See figure 4-4. Each adjustment notch changes the physical position of the tray by 0.5 mm (0.02 inch). Moving the lever counter-clockwise moves the tray inward and increases distance A. Moving the lever clockwise moves the tray outward and decreases distance A. Figure 4-4 Tray Position Adjustment 1 If distance A is greater than distance B by more than 0.5 mm (0.02 inch), move the adjustment lever clockwise one notch. 2 If distance A is less than distance B by more than 0.5 mm (0.02 inch), move the adjustment lever counter-clockwise one notch. 3 After adjusting: • Reinstall the tray. • Re-run the Paper Path Test. • Recheck the measurements. • Re-adjust as necessary. C4265-90907 Adjusting Printer Input Trays 171,Adjusting the 2000-sheet Printer Input Tray
This procedure applies to the 2000-sheet Input Tray. To adjust Trays 2 and 3 (the standard paper trays in the printer) and the2x500-sheet Input Tray (Trays 4 and 5) see page 169. In some cases, the registration from the 2000-sheet Input Tray causes print to start too close to the edge of the paper. This situation is not a typical occurrence. In most cases the 2000-sheet Input Tray offset is fine. Although this may or may not be within specification, it is unacceptable to some users. Perform the following adjustment procedure to correct the situation. 1 With the 2000-sheet Input Tray stand-alone, remove left, right and rear covers from the tray. 2 Remove the vertical transfer unit. 3 Open the 2000-sheet Input Tray paper tray. 4 Loosen both screws that support the paper tray locking bracket on the right side of the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see figure 4-5). Figure 4-5 Tray 4 Position Adjustment 5 Locate the bracket hole and pin at the middle (right side) (see figure 4-5). 6 Slide the bracket so that the locating pin is positioned at the middle of the bracket hole. 172 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4265-90907, 7 Tighten both screws. 8 Loosen both screws that support the paper tray locking bracket on the left side of the 2000-sheet Input Tray. 9 Locate the bracket hole and pin at the middle (left side). Slide the bracket so the locating pin is positioned at the middle of the bracket hole. 10 Tighten both screws. 11 Reassemble the vertical transfer unit. 12 Make sure all the cables (vertical transfer unit and paper deck drive assembly) are reconnected. 13 Reinstall left, right, and rear covers to the tray. Note The locating pin position at the middle could still be unacceptable for some customers’ applications. If so, repeat the procedure by moving the locating pin further back and testing the margin obtained. C4265-90907 Adjusting the 2000-sheet Printer Input Tray 173,Adjusting Duplex Registration of the Paper Trays
The duplex registration menu is available in the HP Laserjet 8150 Series. The items in this menu will assist you in aligning the images on the front and back of a duplexed page by calibrating Tray 2, 3 or 4. This feature is not available for Tray 1. 1 Press MENU until DUPLEX REGISTRATION MENU appears on the printer control panel display. 2 Press ITEM until PRINT TEST PAGE appears for the tray you want. 3 Press SELECT to print the page. 4 Hold the printed page up to a light source and choose the number on each axis where the lines on the front and back of the page align most accurately. 5 Repeat step 1. 6 Press ITEM until TRAY n X= appears and use -VALUE + to enter the number you selected from the test page in step 4. Press SELECT to save this value. 7 Repeat step 6 for the Y axis. 8 Press ITEM to scroll up through the duplex registration menu until PRINT TEST PAGE appears for the tray you want. 9 Press SELECT to print the page. 10 Repeat step 4 to verify that the lines on the front and back of the page are now properly aligned. Note If the lines on the front and back of the page do not properly align, then repeat steps 4-9 until they are properly aligned. 174 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4265-90907,Adjusting the Copy Module Types of Adjustment
● Automatic offset adjustment (Flatbed, ADF front, and ADF back) ● Density adjustment (do this when Lamps or the Optical Unit are replaced) ● ADF vertical magnification (only do this when you replace the ADF Assembly) Note The value of vertical magnification is unique to every ADF Assembly and is noted on a page included with the replacement ADF Assembly.When to Calibrate or Adjust the Copy Module
Perform calibration after any of the following tasks: ● Removing or replacing any of the Lamps or optics ● Replacing the ADF Assembly ● Replacing the Carrier Unit ● Replacing the Flatbed Cover Assembly ● Replacing the Control PCA with EEPROMCalibration Target
Obtain the Calibration Target Kit from HP (part number PA03002- C261FJ) or Blacken a 0.4 inch (10mm) border around a standard A3 size sheet of white paper to create an offset target. A sample offset target is shown in figure 4-6. C4265-90907 Adjusting the Copy Module 175, 11.7 in. ± 0.02 in 297 mm ± 0.5 mm Area to be colored black 16.5 in ± 0.08 in .4 in (10 mm) all around 420 mm ± 2 mm Figure 4-6 Creating an Offset TargetEntering the Calibration Menu in Service Mode
1 Start the copy module in service mode (hold down RESET, 0 and 1 keys while you turn on the power). 2 Select the calibration menu. 176 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4265-90907,How to Perform an Offset Adjustment Calibra-
tion 1 Obtain or create a calibration target (page 175) and enter the Calibration Menu in service mode (page 176). 2 Select the appropriate offset calibration you wish to perform (flatbed, ADF front or ADF back). 3 Load the target and follow the prompts on the front panel. Changes will be saved automatically when the adjustment is complete.How to Perform a Density Calibration Adjust-
ment 1 Obtain a calibration target (part number PA03002-C261FJ) and enter the Calibration Menu in service mode (page 176). 2 Select Density Adjustment. 3 Load the target and follow the prompts on the front panel. Changes will be saved automatically when the adjustment is complete.How to Perform an ADF Vertical Magnification Adjustment
1 Locate the page that shipped with the replacement ADF unit. 2 Enter the Calibration Menu in service mode (page 176). 3 Select ADF Vertical Magnification. 4 Enter the hexadecimal number from the page that shipped with the replacement ADF unit. C4265-90907 Adjusting the Copy Module 177, 178 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments C4265-90907, 5 Functional OverviewChapter contents
Printer Functional Overview .180 Power Distribution System .181 Formatter System.185 DC Controller System .188 Image Formation System .190 Paper Paths and Components .201 Paper Jam Detection .235 Printer Timing.235 IEEE 1284 Parallel Cable Information .237 Copy Module Functional Overview.238 Copy Module Power Up Process .242 ADF Simplex Operation .246 ADF Duplex Operation .247 Flatbed Operation.247 Copy Module Image Path .249 Communication with the Printer .251 C4265-90907 179,Printer Functional Overview
Figure 5-1 is a functional block diagram of the printer showing the basic paths for signal, control, and media. Figure 5-1 Printer Functional Block Diagram 180 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907,Power Distribution System
The AC and DC power supply circuits are contained in the Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS). The high voltages required for image formation are generated by the High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS). The LVPS and Distribution System is illustrated in figure 5-2. See the Reference Diagrams at the end of Chapter 7 for more details. Figure 5-2 Low Voltage Power Distribution System C4265-90907 Power Distribution System 181,AC Power Distribution
The AC power circuitry supplies AC voltage whenever the power cord is connected, and the power switch is on. A toner cartridge must be installed and the top access door must be closed before AC voltage is supplied to the DC power circuits or the Fusing Assembly.Overcurrent/Overvoltage Protection
There are two overcurrent/overvoltage devices in this printer: ● The resettable circuit breaker (CB101) shuts off AC input power to the LVPS in case of an AC overcurrent condition. To reset, remove the LVPS and press in the circuit breaker button (figure 5-3, callout 1). ● Fuse 101 interrupts AC input power to the +24V DC and +5V DC power circuits. Figure 5-3 Low Voltage Power Supply 182 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907,High Voltage Power Distribution
The High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS, see figure 5-4) applies a DC- biased AC voltage to the primary charging roller and the developing roller, and a programmed DC voltage (depending upon the phase of the printing process) to the Transfer Roller. See the General Timing Diagram (figure 5-29 on page 236) for HVPS timing information.Toner Cartridge Detection
A toner level detector inside the toner cartridge is connected to the HVPS when the toner cartridge is installed. If the toner level drops below a predefined level, the TONER LOW message will appear on the display panel. If the toner cartridge is missing, INSTALL TONER CARTRIDGE will be displayed.Print Density Adjustment
The high voltage power supply also controls the image density by varying the voltages applied to the developing cylinder in the toner cartridge. These voltages determine the amount of toner applied to the photosensitive drum. Print density is adjusted from the control panel (Print Quality Menu) or from the driver software. C4265-90907 Power Distribution System 183, Primary Charging Roller Toner Registration/ Toner Sensor Drum Ground Developing Roller Bias Post Transfer Bias Transfer Roller Fuser Bias Figure 5-4 High Voltage Power Supply Contacts 184 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907,Formatter System
The Formatter PCA is responsible for the following: ● Controlling the PowerSave mode. ● Receiving and processing print data from the various printer interfaces. ● Monitoring Control Panel inputs and relaying printer status information (through the Control Panel and the bidirectional I/O). ● Developing and coordinating data placement and timing with the print engine. ● Storing font information. ● Communicating with the host computer through the bidirectional Interface. The Formatter PCA receives a print job from the bidirectional parallel port (IEEE 1284) and separates it into image information and instructions which control the printing process. The DC Controller synchronizes the Image Formation System with the Paper Input and Output Systems, and then signals the Formatter to send the print image data. The Formatter sends the print image data (dots) in the form of a VIDEO signal to start the printing process. The Formatter PCA also provides the electrical interface and mounting locations for three EIO cards, additional memory DIMMs, the Disk Accessory, the 8-bin Mailbox/5-bin Mailbox with Stapler, the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox, and the2x500-sheet Input Tray (Trays 4 and 5).PowerSave
This user-adjustable feature conserves power by shutting down the fuser and exhaust fans after the printer has been idle for a specified time. The default for PowerSave is “ON” and can be turned off from the control panel (Configuration Menu for the HP LaserJet 8100 Series and in the Resets Menu for the HP LaserJet 8150 Series). The default time setting for the HP LaserJet 8100 Series is 1 hour, and it is 30 minutes for the HP LaserJet 8150 Series. The printer retains all printer settings, downloaded fonts, and macros while in PowerSave mode. The printer exits PowerSave mode and enters the warm-up cycle when any of the following occurs: • A print job, valid data, or a PML or PJL command is received at the parallel port or an EIO card. C4265-90907 Formatter System 185, • A Control Panel key is pressed. • Any printer door (except the front access door) is opened and then closed. • A paper tray is opened and then closed. • The Engine Test microswitch is pressed. Note Printer error messages override the PowerSave message. The printer will enter PowerSave mode at the appropriate time, but the error message will continue to be displayed.Resolution Enhancement (REt)
The Formatter PCA contains circuitry for Resolution Enhancement technology (REt), which modifies the standard video dot data on its way to the DC Controller to produce “smoothed” black-to-white boundaries. REt is user-controllable (on or off) from the control panel, or from some software applications. The default setting is on. Note REt settings sent from software applications or printer drivers override the control panel settings. 186 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907,EconoMode
The EconoMode setting uses less toner than the normal printing mode by reducing the dot density. EconoMode, which is a draft- quality printing mode, is user selectable via the control panel (Print Quality Menu) and some software applications. The default setting is off. Note EconoMode does not affect print speed, memory usage, nor extend toner cartridge life. Figure 5-5 Normal Mode vs. EconoMode C4265-90907 Formatter System 187,DC Controller System
The following systems and functions are controlled by the DC Controller PCA: ● DC Power Distribution (+3.3V DC, +5V DC, +24V DC) ● Laser and Scanner Drive ● Paper Motion Monitoring and Control (photosensors and flags) ● Clutches (registration, tray pickup, and Tray 1 feed) ● Engine Test ● Motors (Main Drive, Scanner, and Fans) Figure 5-2 on page 181 shows the Low Voltage Power Supply and Distribution System. See the wiring diagrams at the end of Chapter 7 for detailed listings of the DC Controller inputs and outputs.Laser and Scanner Drive
Based on information received from the Formatter, the DC Controller sends signals to the Laser/Scanner Assembly to modulate the laser diode on and off and to drive the Laser/Scanner motor. See “Image Formation System” later in this chapter for more information.Paper Motion Monitoring and Control
The DC Controller PCA controls paper motion by continuously monitoring the various paper sensors and coordinating paper movement with the other print processes.Clutches
The DC Controller PCA provides drive signals for the Registration Assembly Clutch (CL1), Paper Input Unit Clutch (CL2), and the Tray 1 Feed Clutch. The External Paper Handling PCA mounted on the Formatter Assembly provides the control signals for the clutches in the 2000-sheet Input Tray, 8-bin Mailbox/5-bin Mailbox with Stapler, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray, and 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox. Note Refer to figure 5-2 for details. 188 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907,Engine Test Microswitch
The Engine Test Microswitch, located on the top side of the DC Controller PCA, is activated manually through the square access hole at the top right side of the printer (Figure 7-10). This switch causes the print engine to perform an internal self test diagnostic which bypasses the Formatter PCA and then prints a full page of black parallel lines. This test is useful for troubleshooting printer problems because it isolates the print engine from the Formatter PCA. The engine test printout prints from Tray 3 only and can be activated with the Formatter PCA removed. A continuous test is performed indefinitely if the test button is held in. For more information, see Engine Test in Figure 7-10.Motors
See the General Timing Diagram (figure 5-29 on page 236) for specific timing details for the printer motors. The Main Motor, MT1, is controlled by the DC Controller PCA. The Main Motor drives the Main Gear Assembly and rotates during the Initial Rotation period (following power-on), the Print period, the Last Rotation Period, or whenever the printer front door is opened and closed. The Scanner Motor is controlled and monitored by the DC Controller. It rotates the laser/scanner mirror during the Initial Rotation period and the Print period. The Fan Motors are controlled and monitored by the DC Controller PCA. All five fans operate at full speed during the printing modes. All five fans turn off in the PowerSave mode after the Fuser cools down. The drive signal for the Tray 2 and 3 Paper Pickup Motor, SMT1, is provided by the DC Controller PCA through the Paper Input Unit (PIU) PCA mounted on the right side of the PIU. When the job instructions call for paper to be supplied by Tray 2, SMT1 rotates in a forward direction and drives the Pickup roller for Tray 2. When paper is supplied by Tray 3, SMT1 rotates in the reverse direction and drives the Pickup roller for Tray 3. C4265-90907 DC Controller System 189,Image Formation System
Laser printing requires the interaction of several different technologies (such as electronics, optics, and electrophotographics) to provide a printed page. Each process functions independently and must be coordinated with the other printer processes. The image formation process consists of six steps: 1 Drum Cleaning 2 Drum Conditioning 3 Image Writing 4 Image Developing 5 Image Transferring and Media Separation 6 Image Fusing Figure 5-6 Image Formation Block Diagram 190 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907,Toner Cartridge
The toner cartridge is the “heart” of the Image Formation System. It houses the cleaning, conditioning, and developing steps of the process. The toner cartridge contains the photosensitive drum, primary charging roller, developing station, toner cavity, and cleaning station. Including the components that wear, degrade, or are consumed in a customer-replaceable toner cartridge eliminates the need for a service call when replacement is required.Toner Cartridge/High Voltage Power Supply Contacts
The toner cartridge has three contacts that route voltage from the HVPS PCA. They are: • Upper: Primary Charge • Middle: Developing Bias • Lower: Toner Sensing/Toner Recognition C4265-90907 Image Formation System 191,The Photosensitive Drum
The image from the Laser/Scanner Assembly is written on the drum surface, developed, and transferred to the media. The drum is an aluminum cylinder. The aluminum base of the photosensitive drum is electrically connected to ground potential. The outside of the cylinder is coated with a layer of non-toxic organic-photoconductive (OPC) material. The OPC material becomes electrically conductive when exposed to light. The drum surface is first cleaned of excess toner, then conditioned with a uniform negative charge. When an area on the drum surface is exposed to the laser light beam, the negative charge in that area is conducted to the ground potential of the drum base and thus becomes more positive. Areas not exposed to light remain non-conductive and maintain their negative charge. Figure 5-7 Photosensitive Drum 192 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907,Drum Cleaning
The cleaning blade inside the toner cartridge is in contact with the surface of the drum at all times. As the drum rotates during printing, excess toner is removed from the drum surface and stored in the waste toner receptacle inside the toner cartridge. Figure 5-8 Drum Cleaning C4265-90907 Image Formation System 193,Drum Conditioning
After the drum is physically cleaned, it is conditioned by applying a uniform negative charge across the surface of the drum with the primary charging roller, located in the toner cartridge. The primary charging roller is coated with conductive rubber, charged with an AC current that erases any residual charges, and produces a uniform drum surface potential. The AC current is centered around a negative DC bias which changes according to the Print Density setting. Figure 5-9 Primary Charging Roller 194 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907,Image Writing
During the writing process, a modulated laser diode projects a beam onto a rotating six-sided scanning mirror. As the scanning mirror rotates, the beam is directed through a set of focusing lenses to another mirror that reflects it through a slot on the top of the toner cartridge and onto the photosensitive drum. The beam sweeps across the drum and discharges the negative potential wherever it strikes the surface. This creates a latent (invisible) electrostatic image, which is developed into a visible image as the drum rotates (see figure 5-10). Figure 5-10 Image Writing Because the beam is sweeping the entire length of the drum and the drum is rotating, the entire surface area of the drum can be covered. The speed of the laser/scanner motor (which turns the scanning mirror) and the speed of the main motor (which turns the drum) are synchronized, and each successive sweep of the beam is offset 1/600th of an inch. The beam can be turned on and off to place a dot of light every 1/600th of an inch. This is how the printer achieves its 600 x 600 dpi resolution. After the writing process, the drum surface has a latent (invisible) electrostatic image. At the end of each sweep, the beam strikes the beam detect lens, generating the Beam Detect (BD) signal. The BD signal is sent to the DC Controller, where it is converted to an electrical signal used to synchronize the output of data (VDO) for one sweep (scan line) and to diagnose problems with the laser diode or laser/scanner motor. C4265-90907 Image Formation System 195,FastRes 1200
FastRes 1200 (PCL 6 only) is an HP developed technology that can represent each dot space as one of four different levels of black. However, FastRes 1200 uses only 2 data bits to store information for the same dot space. This means that only half as much RAM is needed to print an image. FastRes 1200 takes advantage of HP’s new smaller toner particle (less than 5 microns) to provide superb test and image quality. 196 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907,Image Developing
The developing process changes the latent electrostatic image into a visible image by depositing negatively charged toner particles on the exposed areas of the drum. The developing station is located inside the toner cartridge and consists of a metallic cylinder that rotates around a fixed magnetic core. The developing cylinder is charged with an AC current that is centered around a negative DC bias. The AC current improves density and contrast by decreasing the attraction between the toner particles and the magnetic core of the cylinder. This increases the repelling action of the toner against the areas of the drum not exposed to laser light. The negative DC bias applied to the developing cylinder is also changed according to the Print Density setting. Both the primary charging roller and developing cylinder DC bias voltages are changed in response to the density setting. These changes in DC bias cause either more or less toner to be attracted to the drum, thus increasing or decreasing print density. The toner is a powdery substance made of black plastic resin bound to iron particles. The toner particles are attracted to the magnetic core of the developing cylinder. A rubber blade “brushes” the toner on the developing cylinder to a uniform thickness. C4265-90907 Image Formation System 197, The toner particles obtain a negative static charge by rubbing against the developing cylinder, which is charged with a negative DC bias. The negatively charged toner is attracted to the discharged (exposed, more positive) areas of the drum and repelled from the negatively charged (non-exposed) areas. Figure 5-11 Image Development 198 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907,Image Transferring and Media Separation
During the image transferring process, the toner image on the drum surface is transferred to the media. A positive charge applied to the back of the media by the transfer roller causes the negatively charged toner particles on the drum surface to be attracted to the media. The small diameter of the drum, combined with the stiffness of the media, causes the media to separate easily from the drum. The static eliminator teeth also help separate the paper from the drum. The static eliminator teeth weaken the attractive forces between the negatively charged drum surface and the positively charged paper. This action keeps thin media from wrapping around the drum. After separation, the drum is cleaned and conditioned for the next image. Figure 5-12 Image Transferring and Media Separation C4265-90907 Image Formation System 199,Image Fusing
The Fusing Assembly bonds the toner particles into the media with a heated fusing roller and a soft pressure roller. There are two levers on the Fusing Assembly that adjust roller pressure for single sheets (down position) or envelopes (up position). Both levers must be set to the same position. The fusing roller contains two quartz-halogen lamps that provide heat for the fusing process. Fusing temperature is monitored by the DC Controller PCA via thermistor TH1. The DC Controller maintains a temperature of about 190° C during print mode. If the fusing system overheats (about 230° C), TH1 opens, interrupting power to the fusing heater, causing a 50.X FUSER ERROR. If the fusing system exceeds 230° C, the thermal fuse opens, moving power away from the fuser. Figure 5-13 Image Fusing 200 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907,Paper Paths and Components Printer, Duplexer, and Envelope Feeder
The components of the printer paper path are illustrated in figure 5-14. Figure 5-15 and table 5-1 illustrate and describe all of the printer sensors, solenoids, clutches, motors, and fans. Figure 5-14 Printer Paper Paths C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 201,Table 5-1. Printer Sensors, Solenoids, Clutches, Motors, and Fans Control Device Title Location
CL1 Registration Clutch PIU (right side) CL2 Paper Input Unit Feed Clutch PIU (right side) CL3 Tray 1 Feed Clutch Tray 1 Drive Unit Fan 1 Laser/Scanner Fan Under Top Cover Fan 2 Low Voltage Power Supply LVPS Fan 3 Formatter Fan Below Formatter Fan 4 Face-down Delivery Unit Fan Under Top Cover Fan 5 Tray 1 Fan Tray 1 Assembly MT1 Main Motor Behind HVPS PS1 Registration Paper Sensor Registration Assembly (center) PS2 Paper Input Unit Paper Sensor Paper Input Unit (top, center) PS1201 Tray 3 Paper Present Sensor Paper Input Unit PCA PS1202 Tray 2 Paper Present Sensor Paper Input Unit PCA PS1203 Tray 3 Paper Level Sensor 1 Paper Input Unit PCA PS1204 Tray 3 Paper Level Sensor 2 Paper Input Unit PCA PS1205 Tray 2 Paper Level Sensor 1 Paper Input Unit PCA PS1206 Tray 2 Paper Level Sensor 2 Paper Input Unit PCA PS1207 Tray 3 Paper Out Sensor Paper Input Unit PCA PS1208 Tray 2 Paper Out Sensor Paper Input Unit PCA PS1301 Tray 1 Paper Present Sensor Tray 1 Drive Unit PCA PS1302 Tray 1 Lifting Plate Position Sensor Tray 1 Drive Unit PCA PS1401 Face-down Bin Full Sensor Switch/Sensor PCA PS1402 Face-down Bin Delivery Sensor Switch/Sensor PCA PS1403 Fuser Delivery Sensor Switch/Sensor PCA SL1 Tray 2 and 3 Paper Pickup Solenoid PIU (right side) SL2 Tray 1 Lifting Plate Solenoid Tray 1 Drive Unit SL3 Face-up Bin Delivery Solenoid Left Rear Corner of Chassis (behind diverter door) SMT1 Tray 2 and 3 Paper Pickup Motor PIU (right side) SW1401 Doors Open Switch Switch/Sensor PCA Tray 2, SW1601 Tray 2 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS Tray 2, SW1602 Tray 2 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS 202 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907,Table 5-1. Printer Sensors, Solenoids, Clutches, Motors, and Fans (continued) Control Device Title Location
Tray 2, SW1603 Tray 2 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS Tray 2, SW1604 Tray 2 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS Tray 3, SW1601 Tray 3 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS Tray 3, SW1602 Tray 3 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS Tray 3, SW1603 Tray 3 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS Tray 3, SW1604 Tray 3 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPSNote See figure 5-15 for the locations of sensors, solenoids, clutches, motors
and fans in table 5-1.C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 203
, Figure 5-15 Printer Sensors, Solenoids, Clutches, Motors, and FansPaper Size Switches (Trays 2 and 3)
The paper guides in Trays 2 and 3 operate four levers at the back of the trays that activate the size sensing switches (SW1601 through SW1604) mounted in the printer chassis. Paper sizes are compared to switch conditions in table 5-2. Table 5-2. Paper Size Switches Paper Size SW1601 SW1602 SW1603 SW1604 Ledger (portrait) OFF OFF OFF OFF 204 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907, Table 5-2. Paper Size Switches Paper Size SW1601 SW1602 SW1603 SW1604 A3 (portrait) OFF ON OFF OFF B4 (portrait) ON OFF OFF OFF Legal (portrait) ON ON OFF OFF Letter (landscape) OFF OFF OFF ON A4 (landscape) OFF OFF ON OFFPrinting from Tray 1
The presence of paper in Tray 1 is detected by the Tray 1 Paper Present Sensor (PS1301). The lifting plate pressurization solenoid (SL2) is then activated, releasing the plate that applies upward pressure on the paper and causing it to contact the Tray 1 pickup roller. The Tray 1 Feed Clutch (CL3) turns on at this time and feeds the paper from Tray 1 to the registration position. The remainder of the Tray 1 print process is identical to the Tray 2 and 3 process, described in “Printing from Tray 1” on page 205.Printing from Trays 2 and 3
The Pickup, Feed, and Separation rollers start rotating when the DC Controller receives the /PRNT signal from the Formatter PCA. Then, the DC Controller activates the Pickup Solenoid (SL1) and starts feeding paper through the Paper Input Unit (PIU), triggering photosensors PS2 and then PS1. These sensors inform the DC Controller that paper has passed through the PIU and is present at the Registration Assembly. When the Laser/Scanner and Fuser are ready, the DC Controller sends the /VSREQ signal to the Formatter. When the Formatter has processed the print data, it sends the /VSYNC and /VDO signals to the DC Controller. The paper is then released from the Registration Assembly (by CL1) and fed to the photosensitive drum, starting the image transfer and fusing processes. After the paper passes through the Fuser, it triggers PS1403 and PS1402 to the specified type, size, and destination of the paper being fed through the printer. C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 205,Printing from the Envelope Feeder
The Envelope Feeder mounts in slots above Tray 1. The printer can print from Tray 1 even during the installation of the Envelope Feeder. When the print job calls for an envelope, it is fed directly to the Registration Assembly. From there, the print process is identical to the Tray 2 and 3 process, described in “Printing from Tray 1” on page 205.Printing with the Duplexer
The duplexer mounts inside the printer below the Fusing Assembly. The back side of the paper is printed first, the paper is turned over, and then fed back to the Registration Assembly for front side printing. When the print job calls for 2-sided printing, a solenoid in the duplexer operates the duplex flipper in the Diverter Assembly and routes the paper to the duplexer. The paper does not exit the printer when being turned over for 2-sided printing. It is routed through a slot in the back of the duplexer, down inside the left cover and under Tray 3. When the duplexer senses the trailing edge of the paper, it reverses direction and feeds the paper back through the duplexer to the Registration Assembly. 206 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907, 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4) Components The HP 2000-sheet Input Tray now supports variable engine input speeds, ranging from 6 to 32 ppm. The 2000-sheet Input Tray also automatically senses paper size. Figure 5-16 illustrates the paper path components in the 2000-sheet Input Tray. Table 5-3 and figure 5-17 describe and illustrate the sensors, switches, clutches, and motors on the 2000-sheet Input Tray. Figure 5-16 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Path C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 207, Table 5-3. 2000-sheet Input Tray Sensors, Switches, Clutches and Motors Control Device Description Location CL31 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) Clutch CL32 Main Drive Clutch VTU MT31 Main Motor Paper Deck Drive Assembly PS31 Paper Entry Sensor VTU PS32 Paper Exit Sensor VTU PS33 Paper Tray Empty Sensor Paper Pickup Assembly PS34 Paper Tray Raised Sensor Paper Pickup Assembly PS35 VTU Closed Sensor Paper Pickup Assembly SW601-SW602 Paper Quantity Switches Lower Chassis SW701-SW704 Paper Size Switches Lower Chassis Power Supply Switch Normal/Diagnostic Mode Power Supply Switch VTU Motor Vertical Transfer Unit Motor for VTU entry and exit rollers 208 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907, Figure 5-17 2000-sheet Input Tray Sensors, Switches, Clutches, and Motors 2000-Sheet Input Tray OperationPickup and Feed System
When the 2000-sheet Input Tray is loaded with paper and the paper tray is closed, the paper stack moves into position under the Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers. This operation is detected by the PS34 sensor in the 2000-sheet Input Tray’s Pickup Assembly. The presence of paper in the paper tray is detected by the PS33 sensor. The paper level is detected by switches SW601 and SW602 in the Paper Quantity Switch Assembly. The paper size is detected by switches SW701 through SW704 in the Paper Size Switch Assembly. Tables 5-4 and 5-5 show the paper quantity and paper size switches on the 2000-sheet Input Tray. C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 209, Table 5-4. 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Quantity Switches SW601 SW602 Remaining Paper Off Off 100% On Off 75% On On 50% Off On 25% Table 5-5. 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Size Switches Paper Size SW701 SW702 SW703 SW704 Ledger Off On Off Off (portrait) A3 (portrait) On On Off Off B4 (portrait) Off Off On Off Legal Off On On Off (portrait) Letter Off On Off On (landscape) A4 On On Off On (landscape) When the Paper Handling Controller on the printer sends an input command to the Controller PCA on the 2000-sheet Input Tray, the Paper Deck Driver runs the Pickup Motor to rotate the Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers. As the Pickup Roller turns, the paper feeds into the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) and passes through the PS31 and PS32 sensors. If the paper fails to reach the PS31 and PS32 sensors in the VTU within the allotted time, the Controller PCA on the 2000-sheet Input Tray assumes that a paper jam has occurred. The 2000-sheet Input Tray stops the operation and reports the paper jam to the Paper Handling Controller on the printer. A paper jam message appears on the printer control panel display. Hardware malfunctions are also displayed on the printer control panel. 210 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907,Lifter Operation
The lifter plate in the 2000-sheet Input Tray’s paper tray is held by two wires that are wound on four pulleys by the Lifter Motor. When the paper tray is open, the pulley gears disengage from the motor gears, and the Lifter lowers by its own weight. The presence or absence of the tray is detected by switches SW701 through SW704 on the unit’s Paper/Tray Size Switch Assembly. After the paper tray is closed, the Lifter Motor lifts the paper stack into position; this action is detected by the PS34 sensor. The PS34 sensor also maintains the height of the paper stack. As paper is picked up by the rollers, the number of sheets decreases. Once the paper stack decreases to a certain level, the PS34 sensor registers a low condition. Then the Paper Deck Driver turns on the Lifter Motor again and lifts the paper stack until the PS34 sensor registers sufficient paper in the tray.Power Supply
The 2000-sheet Input Tray has an internal Power Supply that activates when the printer’s power switch is turned on. The Paper Handling Controller on the printer sends a power-on signal to the Power Supply on the 2000-sheet Input Tray through the Controller PCA on the 2000-sheet Input Tray. When the signal is high, the Power Supply provides both +24V and +5V to the Paper Deck Driver. The +24V drives the motors, clutches, and solenoids for the lifter, feed, and pickup systems. The +5V drives the sensors and PCA electronics.Printing from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4) or 2 x
500-sheet Input Tray (Trays 4 and 5) Trays 4 and 5 feed the paper upward through a guide slot in the Lower Right Door Assembly to the Paper Input Unit. Once there, the operation is the same as printing from Trays 2 and 3, described in “Printing from Tray 1” on page 205. C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 211, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray The2x500-sheet Input Tray is an input paper handling device that provides two additional input trays that hold up to 500 sheets each. The device is designed to support different printer platforms with variable engine input speeds, from 6 to 32 pages per minute, and provide storage space for printer supplies or consumables. The device has automatic paper size sensing and enhanced network management capabilities. The2x500-sheet Input Tray paper path is shown in figure 5-18. Figure 5-182x500-sheet Input Tray Paper Path 212 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907,Table 5-6. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Sensors, Switches, and Motors Control Device Title Location
PS1203 Lower Cassette Paper Level Sensor 1 Pickup Assembly PCA PS1204 Lower Cassette Paper Level Sensor 2 Pickup Assembly PCA PS1201 Lower Cassette Sensor Pickup Assembly PCA PS 1208 Upper Cassette Paper Out Sensor Pickup Assembly PCA PS 1206 Upper Cassette Paper Level Sensor 2 Pickup Assembly PCA PS 1205 Upper Cassette Paper Level Sensor 1 Pickup Assembly PCA PS2 Paper Jam Sensor Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) CL31 VTU Clutch VTU PS35 VTU Closed and Open Sensor Pickup Assembly SW1601-SW1604 Paper Size Switches Back Lower Chassis Power Supply Switch Normal/Diagnostic Mode Switch Power Supply VTU Motor Vertical Transfer Unit for entry and exit VTU rollersFigure 5-192x500-sheet input Tray Sensors and Switches C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 213
, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Operation Communication and control of the input device are made through the Paper Handling Controller by a sequence of instructions controlled into the2x500-sheet Input Tray controller PCA.Pickup and Feed System
When each tray in the2x500-sheet Input Tray is loaded with paper and the paper tray is closed, the paper stack moves into position under the Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers. The trays are detected by the PS1202 sensor in the upper tray and by the PS1201 sensor in the lower tray. The presence of paper is detected in the upper paper tray by the PS1208 sensor, and in the lower tray by sensor PS1207. The paper level is detected by switches SW1205 and SW1206 in the upper tray, and by switches SW1203 and SW1204 in the lower tray. The paper size is detected by switches SW1601 through SW1604 installed in each tray. Table 5-7. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Switches Paper Size SW1601 SW1602 SW1603 SW1604 Ledger (Portrait) OFF OFF OFF OFF A3 (Portrait) OFF ON OFF OFF B4 (Portrait ON OFF OFF OFF Legal (Portrait) ON ON OFF OFF Letter (Landscape) OFF OFF OFF ON A4 (Landscape) OFF OFF ON OFF When the Paper Handling Controller in the printer sends an input command to the Controller PCA on the2x500-sheet Input Tray, the2x500-sheet Input Tray driver engages the Pickup Motor to rotate the Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers. The direction of rotation of the Pickup motor determines which set of rollers are activated. When the motor rotates clockwise, the paper is picked up from the upper tray, and when the motor rotates counterclockwise, the paper is picked up from the lower tray.The2x500-sheet Input Tray driver also engages the2x500-sheet Input Tray motor to activate the Pickup Solenoid, which lowers the rollers to the level of the paper. As the Pickup Roller turns, the paper feeds into the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) and passes through the PS1 and PS2 sensors. 214 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907, If the paper fails to reach the PS1 and PS2 sensors in the VTU within the allotted time, the Controller PCA on the2x500-sheet Input Tray assumes that a paper jam has occurred. The2x500-sheet Input Tray stops the operation and reports the paper jam to the Paper Handling Controller on the printer. A paper jam message appears on the printer control panel display. Hardware malfunctions are also displayed on the printer control panel.Lifter Operation
The2x500-sheet Input Tray drive motor lifts the paper when a tray is installed and when the pickup roller is lowered as a result of a partially filled tray. When a tray is installed, the Paper Pickup Solenoid SL3 is turned on. The movements of the shaft drive arm and the lift-up release arm free the lift-up cam. This advances the lifter gear one tooth at a time, raising the lifting plate. When the paper on the lifting plate engages the pickup roller, the lift-up cam is stopped from rotating, and the lifting operation is completed. When the paper falls below a set level, the actions are the same to lift the plate, except the position of the pickup roller (which is lowered as paper is used) triggers the lift-up release arm to free the lift-up cam, advancing the lifter gear. The lifting operation terminates the same way in both cases, triggered by contact between the paper in the tray and the pickup roller.Power Supply
The2x500-sheet Input Tray has an internal power supply activated when the printer power switch has been turned on. The Paper Handling Controller sends a power-on signal to the power supply through the2x500-sheet Input Tray controller. When the signal is high, the power supply provides +24V and +5V to the paper deck driver. The +24V is used to drive the lifter, Feed, Pickup motors, clutches, and solenoids; +5V drives sensors and PCA electronics. C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 215, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Components Components of the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox paper path, including mailbox sensors, switches and motors, are illustrated in figure 5-20 and figure 5-21 and described in table below. Figure 5-20 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Components (1 of 2) 216 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907,Table 5-8. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Sensors, Switches, and Motors Control Device Title Location
M Motor Upper back side S1 Face-up/down Diverter Solenoid Upper front side S2 Reversing mechanism solenoid Right side of the motor S3 Diverters solenoid (bins 1, 3, and 5) Bottom back side S4 Diverters solenoid (bins 2, 4, and 6) Bottom back side BES1 to 7 Bin empty sensors (1 to 7) Surface of every Face-down Bin BFS1 to 7 Bin full sensors (1 to 7) Upper left side of every Face-down Bin entrance FUBFS Face-up Bin full sensor Upper center of the Face-up Bin entrance ES Paper entry sensor Paper entrance FUDS Face-up Delivery Sensor Rev. assembly. (top cover) PPS1 Paper path sensor 1 Inside the unit, down the entry rollers. PPS2 Paper path sensor 2 Paper path (right cover) ILSW Interlock switch Bottom right sideFigure 5-21 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Components (2 of 2) C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 217
, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Operation The 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox is a low cost output device designed to support different printer platforms at variable engine input speeds and to increase office productivity. The mailbox has a total capacity of 940 sheets distributed in 7x120 Face-down bins and a 1x100 Face-up Bin, and works with four intelligent and configurable operating modes. An additional optional product, the Stand for the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox, allows the customer to attach the mailbox in a floor stand configuration when an input device is attached to the printer.Power-on Sequence
During the power-on sequence, the mailbox runs an initialization routine. The motor will perform a complete cycle and solenoid S2, S3, and S4 will be activated in that order. At the end of this routine, the front cover LED will display a fixed green light, but if there is a problem, the LED will flash red. The information from the paper handling controller is carried by the C-link cables that connect the controller board for all of the C-link protocol-supported devices. The C-link protocol supports up to 5 devices connected to the paper handling controller in a Daisy Chain. Each device controller has an input and output port that provides them the flexibility of connection in different configurations. However, HP recommends using the configuration shown in figure 5-28 on page 234 to avoid rearrangements in the supported device numbering and confusion when evaluating the event log.Receiving Paper
The engine delivers paper to the mailbox through the Face-up Delivery Slot (input paper guide) at 107 mm/sec. The entry sensor (ES) senses paper arrival, and then the Face-up/down Diverter Solenoid actuates only if the paper is going to the Face-up Bin. If the paper has to reach any Face-down Bin, this solenoid will not actuate and the paper will go into the reversing area. 218 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907,Delivering Paper
If the paper is going to the Face-up Bin, the Face-up Delivery Sensor (FUDS) waits for the paper to reach the Face-up Bin. When the bin is full, the paper will actuate the Face-up Bin full sensor (FUBFS). If the paper is sent to any of the Face-down bins, the reversing mechanism will be activated by the reversing mechanism solenoid (S2). The paper path sensor 1 (PPS1) will wait for paper, and the correct diverter solenoid will actuate to deliver the paper in the correct bin (S3 if the paper is going to bin numbers 1 through 3 or S4 for bin number 2). If the paper has to reach other bins, then the paper path sensor 2 (PPS2) will be waiting for it. In the same way, S3 will be activated if the paper final destination is bin number 5, and if not, then S4 will be activated to reach bins 4 through 6. Finally, if the paper destination is bin number 7, none of the solenoids will be actuated. When a specific bin is full, then the paper will actuate the corresponding Face-down Bin full sensor (BFS1 to 7). The unit can report an empty bin condition to the engine based on the empty bin sensors (BES1 to 7).Configuring the Operating Modes
The network administrator chooses the mode of operation through an HP network configuration utility, such as HP JetAdmin or HP LaserJet utility. You must set up your printer driver to reflect the mode chosen by the administrator. Bidirectional environment: The printer automatically selects the mode established by the network administrator. Unidirectional environment: The mode of operation can be changed in the driver. The method for changing the mode varies with the driver and type of operating system. For additional information, see the online help for the printer software.Configurable Mailbox Mode (Default Configuration)
In this mode, each bin can be addressed individually as the output destination and can have a name assigned to it by the network or printer administrator. All the jobs are placed in the Face-down bins. If the assigned bins are full, the printer halts or sends the next pages to the overflow bin, as defined by the MIS manager. C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 219,Job Separator Mode
● Print jobs are automatically sent one job per bin to the first empty bin beginning with the top bin. Non-empty bins are skipped. If all bins have paper, then the job will be sent to the first non-full bin starting at the top. ● If a bin fills during delivery, the system will stop. A control panel message indicates that paper needs to be removed before delivery to that bin can continue. Delivery of the job resumes in the same bin when paper is removed. ● To clear a device full condition, empty all bins. Note Use of an overflow bin can cause a job to be mixed in two bins.Virtual Stacker Mode
In Virtual Stacker Mode, printed sheets are stacked face down in the bins from the lowest bin to the top bin, regardless of job boundaries. This mode of operation takes advantage of the total capacity of the mailbox bins. The software sees the mailbox as one logical bin. When the mailbox is full, the system will halt until all bins are emptied.Collator Mode
● Mopies of a print job are automatically sent one mopy per bin beginning with the top bin. ● If there are more mopies than bins, the delivery resumes sequentially from the top bin until all mopies are delivered. ● If a bin fills during delivery, the system will stop. A control panel message indicates which bin is full, and will display a request to remove paper. Delivery of the mopy resumes in the same bin when paper is removed. ● To clear a device full condition, empty all bins. Note Use of an overflow bin can cause a job to be mixed in two bins. 220 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907, Figure 5-22 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Block Diagram C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 221, 8-bin Mailbox Components The 8-bin Mailbox is an output unit designed for variable speeds, ranging from 6 to 32 ppm. The 8-bin Mailbox holds up to 2,100 sheets distributed in eight 250-sheet Face-down bins and one 100-sheet Face-up Bin. The 8-bin Mailbox also features four intelligent and configurable operating modes.Table 5-9 and figure 5-24 illustrate and describe the 8-bin Mailbox sensors, switches, motors, and Controller PCA. Figure 5-23 illustrates the components of the 8-bin Mailbox paper path. Figure 5-23 8-bin Mailbox Paper Path 222 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907, Table 5-9. 8-bin Mailbox Sensors, Switches, Motors, and Controller PCA Control Description Location Device M1 Delivery Head Motor Upper-back side M2 Flipper Roller Motor with Flipper Assembly (upper back) Encoder M3 Delivery Head Roller Motor Delivery Head Assembly (upper back) M4 Ejector Motor Under Delivery Head Assembly M5 Transport Belt Motor Lower-back side PSBinEmpty Paper Bin Empty Sensor Delivery Head Assembly (upper back) PSBinFull/ Paper Bin (below) Full Delivery Head Assembly (upper Head Sensor back) Position PSEject Delivery Rollers Extended Delivery Head Assembly (upper Sensor back) PSEntry Paper Entry Sensor Flipper Assembly (top, center) PSExit1 Paper Delivered to Head Delivery Head Assembly (upper Sensor back) PSExit2 Paper Delivered to Bin Delivery Head Assembly (upper Sensor back) PSFaceUp Reverse Stepper Motor Flipper Assembly (top, center) Sensor PSFaceFull Face-up Bin Full Sensor Flipper Assembly (top, center) SW1 Interlock Switch Middle-back Side IR LED Infrared Light-emitting Delivery Head Assembly (left, Diode (for Stapler center) Assembly) C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 223, Figure 5-24 8-bin Mailbox Sensors, Switches, Motors, and Controller PCA 224 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907, 8-bin Mailbox OperationPower-on Sequence
During the power-on sequence, the Delivery Head Assembly moves first to the top “home” position at the Face-up Bin. From that position the delivery head moves down, scanning to determine if all the Mailbox bins are installed, if they contain paper, and if they are full. Then the Delivery Head proceeds upward again to the home position and remains there for about 7 seconds. Finally, the Delivery Head Assembly moves to the bottom bin, where it waits for the next command from the Paper Handling Controller. Note If one of the bins has been removed or is not seated correctly, the Delivery Head Assembly will not complete the scan and will send an error message to the printer control panel.Receiving Paper
The printer delivers paper to the 8-bin Mailbox through the left output delivery slot (Input Paper Guide) at a rate of 107 mm per second. Paper arrival is sensed by the PSEntry sensor, which activates the Flipper Roller Motor (M2), causing the paper to move through the 8- bin Mailbox transport and delivery system. See figure 5-23 on page 222.Delivering Paper
The Delivery Head Assembly on the 8-bin Mailbox moves or stays in the indicated bin according to the commands coming from the Paper Handling Controller on the printer. If paper is designated for the Face- up Bin, the 8-bin Mailbox feeds it through the Flipper Assembly. If paper is designated for one of the Face-down bins, the 8-bin Mailbox feeds it through the Flipper Assembly until the trailing edge is sensed by the PSFaceUp sensor. Then the Flipper Roller Motor (M2) reverses and feeds the paper down between the Transport Belt and the Metal Tape until it reaches the Delivery Head Assembly.Configuring the Operating Modes
The network administrator chooses the mode of operation through an HP network configuration utility, such as the HP JetAdmin utility or the HP LaserJet utility for the Macintosh. Additionally, on all workstations that print to the printer, the printer driver might need to be set up to reflect the chosen operating mode. C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 225,Mailbox Mode
In Mailbox Mode, the network administrator can address each bin as an output destination with a name assigned to it. The printer sends a print job to the selected bin. If the assigned bin is full, the printer either stops printing or sends subsequent pages to the overflow bin, which is also defined by the network administrator.Job Separator Mode
● Print jobs are automatically sent one job per bin to the first empty bin beginning with the top bin. Non-empty bins are skipped. If all bins have paper, the job will be sent to the first non-full bin starting at the top. ● If a bin fills during delivery, the system will stop. A control panel message indicates that paper needs to be removed before delivery to that bin can continue. Delivery of the job resumes in the same bin when paper is removed. ● To clear a device full condition, empty all bins. Note Use of an overflow bin can cause a job to be mixed in two bins.Virtual Stacker Mode
In Virtual Stacker Mode, printed sheets are stacked face down in the bins from the lowest bin to the top bin, regardless of job boundaries. This mode of operation takes advantage of the total capacity of the mailbox bins. The software sees the mailbox as one logical bin. When the mailbox is full, the system will halt until all bins are emptied. 226 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907,Collator Mode
● Mopies of a print job are automatically sent one mopy per bin beginning with the top bin. ● If there are more mopies than bins, the delivery resumes sequentially from the top bin until all mopies are delivered. ● If a bin fills during delivery, the system will stop. A control panel message indicates which bin is full, and will display a request to remove paper. Delivery of the mopy resumes in the same bin when paper is removed. ● To clear a device full condition, empty all bins. Note Use of an overflow bin can cause a job to be mixed in two bins.Finisher Components
The 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler is an output-Finisher paper-handling device designed to work with different HP LaserJet printers. It has both mailbox and stapling capability. The stapler unit output bin staples up to 20 sheets (letter and A4,) 20-lb paper), and has a total capacity of 350 stapled sheets. In addition, this component has 5 Face-down bins with a capacity of 250 sheets each, and 1 Face-up Bin with a capacity of 100 sheets, for a total capacity of 1350 non-stapled sheets. The 8-bin Mailbox and the 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler have similar functionality, performance, and parts. The stapler fits into the Mailbox by removing the three upper bins and the blind cover (see figure 8-14 on page 768 for location of the blind cover). C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 227, Figure 5-25 Finisher Paper Path 228 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907, Figure 5-26 Stapler Motors, Sensors, and SwitchesStapler Unit Operation
All communication and control of the mailbox, the 2000-sheet Input Tray, and the stapler unit is through the Paper Handling Controller. These instructions are sent to the stapler controller PCA located in the lower part of the stapler. Power is provided to the stapler by the 8-bin Mailbox/5-bin mailbox with Stapler external 24V DC power supply through the C-link cable. It handles letter and A4 sizes of plain paper. The stapler can staple up to a maximum of 20 sheets. Table 5-10. Stapler Motors, Sensors, and Switches Control Title Location Device M1 Stapler DC Motor Stapler Assembly M2 Rack Stepper Motor Top Cover Assembly M3 Slider Stepper Motor Top Cover Assembly M4 Retainer DC Motor Stapler bed Assembly IR Sensor Infra Red Sensor Stapler bed Assembly STL Sensor Stapler Sensor Stapler Assembly C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 229,Table 5-10. Stapler Motors, Sensors, and Switches (continued) Control Title Location Device
PSRack Rack Sensor Top Cover Assembly PSSlider Slider Sensor Stapler bed Assembly PSRetainer Retainer Sensor Stapler bed Assembly PSBinFull Output Bin Full Sensor Stapler bed Assembly PSNBinFull Next Bin Full Sensor Housing STLout Staples Out Stapler Assembly SW1 Top Cover Interlock Switches (2 in Right Hinge serial) 230 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907,Power-On or Reset Sequence
At power-on or reset, events are performed in the following sequence: 1 Stapler Assembly is set to a ready state. 2 Retainer Assembly is turned to its initial position. 3 Rack Assembly is moved to find its home position, which is in the left side of the Top Cover Assembly. 4 Slider Assembly is moved to find its home position, which is inside of the stapler bed. 5 Slider Assembly is moved fully out from the stapler bed to the eject position. 6 Rack Assembly is moved to activate the Exit Flap Assembly. 7 Slider Assembly is moved to its home position. 8 Rack Assembly is returned to its home position. C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 231,Main Functional Cycles of the Stapler (Internal Paper Path)
Figure 5-27 Stapler Cycles Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000- sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling Accessories (C4788-90904).Paper Feed Cycle
The stapler bed assembly receives the paper from the 8-bin Mailbox/ 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler Head assembly. The IR Sensor detects when the paper arrives in the stapler. The Retainer (a shaft holding two rubber flexible fingers or anti-curl fingers) rotates once to apply pressure down and backward. This action forces the paper to register against the rear wall of the stapler bed, as well as reduces paper curl. The Registration Pusher (located in the right side of the Top Assembly) registers the paper against the left wall of the stapler bed. This cycle is repeated until the amount of sheets to be stapled is reached (with a maximum of 20). 232 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907,Stapling Cycle
The Sliders move the stack of sheets to the stapling position. The Registration Pusher applies slight pressure to the stack of sheets toward the left wall of the stapler bed where the stapler is located. Then the stack of sheets is stapled.Eject Cycle
The stapler bed sliders offset the stacks or jobs. The Off-Set Pusher (located in the left side of the Top Cover Assembly) pushes the stack towards the right side of the stapler bed, whenever it applies. The Sliders move the stack of paper from stapling position to eject position, which is out of the stapler bed (reaching the Wire Frame level). The Wire Frame directs the stack of paper. The Exit Flap Assembly moves down to prevent the job from returning to the stapler bed. The Sliders retract to home position, letting the stack of sheets fall into the output bin. The capacity of the output bin is 350 stapled sheets in jobs of five sheets or equivalent combinations.Communication Link (Daisy Chain)
Communication Link (C-link) devices include: ● C-link Input Devices: • 2000-sheet Input Tray • 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray ● C-link Output Devices: • 8-bin Mailbox • 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler (Includes a Finisher) • 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox • 3,000-sheet Stacker • 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker Communication and control of the C-link devices is through the paper handling controller mounted on the printer's formatter PCA. The C-link devices (C-link protocol) have their own power supply and controller board that receives signals and commands from the paper handling controller. This communication is illustrated in figure 5-28. C4265-90907 Paper Paths and Components 233, Figure 5-28 Recommended C-link Configuration (Daisy Chain) 234 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907,Paper Jam Detection
The PIU Sensor (PS2), the Registration Sensor (PS1), the Fuser Delivery Sensor (PS1403), and the Face-down Delivery Sensor (PS1402) detect paper moving through the printer (see figure 5-15 on page 204 and table 5-1 on page 202 for a description of each sensor and illustration of its locations). If a paper jam is detected, the DC Controller immediately stops the printing process and causes a 13.x PAPER JAM message to be displayed on the control panel. If a paper jam occurs in the Envelope Feeder, Duplexer, 2000-sheet Input Tray, 8-bin Mailbox/5-bin Mailbox with Stapler, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray, or 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox, the 13.x Paper Jam message will indicate the approximate location. See Chapter 7 for more details.Printer Timing
The Formatter PCA and the DC Controller PCA share information during printer operation. This information consists of printer status, command, and dot-image data. Figure 5-29 shows the general timing of the printer events. Table 5-11 lists the events that take place during normal printer operation. Table 5-11. Printer Timing Period Timing Purpose WAIT From power on to the end of Main Motor initial Clear the drum surface potential rotation. and clean the Transfer Roller. STBY From the end of the WAIT or the LSTR period until Maintain the printer in the READY (standby) the input of the PRNT signal from the Formatter state. PCA. Or from the end of the LSTR period to power off. INTR From the input of the PRNT signal from the Stabilize the photosensitive drum (initial rotation) Formatter PCA until the laser diode intensity has sensitivity in preparation for been stabilized. printing. Clean the Transfer Roller. PRNT From the end of the initial rotation until the Scanner Form images on the photosensitive (print) Motor stops. drum based on the /VDO signal from the Formatter PCA. Transfer the image to the media. LSTR From the primary voltage (DC) off until the Main Deliver the last sheet of paper and (last rotation) Motor stops. clean the Transfer Roller. If another PRNT signal is sent from the Formatter PCA, the printer returns to the INTR period. If not, it returns to the STBY period. C4265-90907 Paper Jam Detection 235, Figure 5-29 General Timing Diagram 236 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907,IEEE 1284 Parallel Cable Information
This cable is IEEE 1284 compliant with A-to-C connectors. To take advantage of its enhanced capabilities such as bidirectional communication between the computer and printer, faster transmission of data, and auto configuration of printer drivers, the customer must have the following: ● Support in software applications for these features. ● A parallel cable with the correct pin configuration (see below).Parallel Cable Pin Configuration
For best results, use the C2946A (3 meter) or C2947A (10 meter) cable or equivalent. CAUTION Ensure that all power and interface cables on the printer and host computer are properly grounded in compliance with local codes. Table 5-12. Parallel Cable Pin Assignments Signal Name Printer Pin Number Host Pin Number nSTROBE 15 1 DATA062DATA173DATA284DATA395DATA4 10 6 DATA5 11 7 DATA6 12 8 DATA7 13 9 nACKNLG 3 10 BUSY 1 11 CALL (PE) 5 12 SELECT 2 13 NAutoFd 17 14 O VDC (GND) 19-35 18-25 nFAULT 4 15 nSe/In 16 17 nINIT 14 16 PERIPHLH 36 N.C. 18 C4265-90907 IEEE 1284 Parallel Cable Information 237,Copy Module Functional Overview Copy Module System
Figure 5-30 Copy Module System Block Diagram Note The copy module consists of everything inside the large dotted line. The copy engine consists of the copy module minus the Copy Processor Board. printer ● The printer’s hard disk stores the copy module firmware. ● The Copy Connect Extended Input/Output (EIO) Card functions as a pass-through device. 238 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907,Copy Module
● Power Supply and Main Board Tray Assembly • The Fan Assembly activates while the copy module is turned on. It may run slower if Power Save is on. • The Power Supply provides AC to DC power conversion. • The Control PCA controls copy module electromechanical functions, imaging system, and errors. It also has an EEPROM which stores the default factory settings particular to each copy module, such as serial number and calibration settings. • When you replace the Control PCA, retain the EEPROM from the old PCA and replace it on the new PCA in order to retain the default settings for the HP Digital Copier. • The Back PCA Board provides a connection between the Copy Processor Board and the Control PCA. • The Copy Processor Board is explained on page 240. ● ADF Unit • The ADF Assembly provides all mechanics to move paper. • The LED Assembly provides feedback from the paper empty sensor to the user. If paper is loaded correctly, the LED is green and a tone sounds. • The ADF Motor Unit drives the ADF’s paper handling mechanics. • The Sensor Unit Assembly has 8 sensors (4 paper width sensors to detect standard paper types; 1 ADF open sensor, and 3 paper-handling sensors). • Charge Coupled Device (CCD)/Optics convert reflected light to electronic signals. Also includes mirrors and lenses to point the reflected light. • The ADF Lamp illuminates the original document. • The Lamp Inverter PCA controls and provides power to the ADF Lamp. C4265-90907 Copy Module Functional Overview 239, ● Carrier Unit (a movable optics system under the flatbed glass, used to copy the front side of ADF jobs and flatbed jobs) • Charge Coupled Device (CCD)/Optics convert reflected light to electronic signals. Also includes mirrors and lenses to point the reflected light. • The Carrier Unit Lamp illuminates the original document. • The Lamp Inverter PCA controls and provides power to the Flatbed Motor Unit with Belt. • The Flatbed Motor Unit drives the Carrier Unit back and forth under the flatbed glass. ● Front Panel (LC touch screen and keypad interface) ● Home Position Sensor (detects obstruction of Carrier Unit, a bad Flatbed Motor or Belt) ● Junction PCA (a pass-through connection from the Control PCA to the Carrier Unit, Flatbed Motor Unit, Front Panel, and Home Position Sensor)Function and Layout of the Copy Processor
Figure 5-31 Copy Processor and key components 240 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907, Note The Copy Processor is a replaceable unit.Functions
● Controls the Front Panel display ● Monitors touch screen inputs ● Controls communication from the copier engine (no unsolicited data flows from the copier engine) ● Performs image processing (grayscale to dithered black and white) ● Initiates and controls communication to the printer • The interface is IEEE 1394 based, 200 MB per second total bus speed. • Copy module firmware is downloaded from the printer’s hard disk to the Copy Processor. • The user inputs settings through the touch screen Front Panel to the Copy Processor to the printer. • The printer sends status responses to the Copy Processor. • printer control commands go from the Copy Processor to the printer. • Image data is sent to the printer, essentially printer ready strip buffer data.Key Components
● 2 PM44s [Image processing Digital Signal Processor (DSP)] ● 1 16-bit Motorola 68306 micro-controller ● 1 boot ROM, which provides code to start 1394 communication and begin to download the operating system ● 1 1394 interface and connector ● 1 DRAM C4265-90907 Copy Module Functional Overview 241,Copy Module Power Up Process Copy Processor Board
There are 4 main stages of the power-up process of the Copy Processor. Each of the four stages are represented by an icon displayed on the Digital Copier's front panel. If a Digital Copier does not successfully boot up, the icons displayed will assist the field technician in diagnosing the failure. While first power-up icon is displayed: 1 The 16-bit Motorola 68306 microprocessor boots itself from the ROM. 2 The Copy Processor performs minimum checks (Level-1 checks) on ROM. 3 The Copy Processor polls the keypad for initial key status (to determine whether to start up in Service Mode). 4 The Copy Processor begins performing self-checks. (During Level II checks on the Copy Processor, the user can let go of any keys held down. This is a short phase with no animation.) While second power-up icon is displayed: 5 The connection to the printer starts over the IEEE 1394 interface and looks for the printer. This stage may take more time if the printer is not powered on and ready. If the printer is not available, the Copy Processor continuously monitors the bus to find one. Therefore, the power-on order between the printer and the Copy Module does not matter. While third power-up icon is displayed: 6 The unit begins download of the Copy Module Firmware (CMF) from the printer's hard disk to the Copy Processor's DRAM. This may take up to two minutes, although 60-70 seconds is most typical. The hourglass icon is animated during this time and a progress bar is displayed. 242 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907, While fourth power-up icon is displayed: 7 When the download is complete, the unit begins a checksum test on download, initializes the system, and continues to display the icons until it can display the HP Digital Copier Module's main menu. 8 Initial key state and Level II failure (if any) are written to the Display Manager and are reported to the Front Panel as Boot Error XXXX. See “Boot Errors” on page 721 for a definition of XXXX. 9 The microprocessor jumps to the code in DRAM and never returns to the code in ROM. Then the Copy Module Operating System starts up in Service Mode, if the user was pressing the appropriate keys when power-up began (see Step 3), or the main menu is displayed. Note Icons are drawn at the start of the stage. If the stage fails, the icon will be overdrawn with the error icon. C4265-90907 Copy Module Power Up Process 243,Copy Module
▼ The fan comes on. ▼ The start button LED lights yellow and then goes off. ▼ The Carrier Unit moves to the home position, as detected by the Home Position Sensor. (A grinding noise indicates the shipping lock is in place or an object is blocking the Carrier Unit.) ▼ The ADF clears any paper loaded or partially in the paper path. ▼ The back light on the Front Panel turns on. (Stopping here indicates that the unit has a bad display or connection. This is particularly true if the Copy Processor is functional.) ▼ HP Digital Copier displays on the screen to confirm that the display and connections are good and the Copy Processor is able to boot from ROM. ▼ The copy module polls for an HP LaserJet 8150. If it is not there, the copy module will continuously monitor the bus for one. (The power on order does not matter for the printer or copy module.) ▼ The four icons and the status bar display. ▼ The main menu displays. ● The copy module awaits the start command. 244 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907,Printer components of copy module power up
process ▼ The printer performs startup procedures. Note The Scanner Service Agent is part of the copy module firmware that loads from the printer's hard disk drive into the printer's RAM on power up. When this happens, you see Loading Program 1 or Loading Program 2 on the front panel of the printer. This program runs continuously, instructing the printer how to handle requests and information from the copy module. ▼ The printer loads the Scanner Service Agent from the printer hard disk drive. Loading Program 1 or Loading Program 2 displays on the printer’s Front Panel. Additional programs may be added later for support of additional functionality. Note The units must be power cycled once the copy module firmware is installed.Notes About the MFP Printer Product ID
Versions 5.32 and older firmware for the copy module stored a product ID in NVRAM and also on the hard disk. With an older version of firmware and no product ID in NVRAM or on the hard disk, the copy module will hang on icon 2 of the copy module control panel when you turn it on. If this problem occurs, download the latest version of copy module firmware from http://www.hp.com. Version 5.40 or later firmware will work with a LaserJet 8000, 8100, 8150, Moper 240 and Mopier 320 and does not require a product ID. The only way to remove the product ID is to perform an NVRAM initialization. CAUTION There are different methods of downloading firmware for the copy module. There is one method for downloading when using digital sending and one method for downloading when using the copy functionality only. See “Upgrade HP Digital Copier Firmware” on C4265-90907 Copy Module Power Up Process 245,ADF Simplex Operation
▼ The user inputs commands (through the touch screen and buttons) which are then sent to the Copy Processor Board. ▼ The Copy Processor displays the appropriate screens on the copy module’s LCD based on the user’s inputs. The screens displayed are based on the screens downloaded from the printer. ▼ The user presses the START button and the copy module receives the ADF read command. (The ADF or flatbed is determined by the ADF paper loaded sensor.) ▼ The bottom document placed face-down in the chute is fed through the ADF. Paper size is detected by the Paper Size Sensor (A3, A4, B4, B5). This will tell the ADF Motor when to stop. ▼ The Carrier Unit reads the white reference and then moves to the ADF read position. ▼ The ADF Motor starts to feed the paper. The top sensor detects the edge of the page. ▼ The copy module counts the number of motor pulses to reach the end of the page. It also determines mispicks, double or misfeeds, and end of page when the data ends. ▼ The image is scanned by the copy module engine, as explained on page 249. ▼ The page is stacked in the output tray. This process repeats until the chute is empty. ● The ADF Motor stops and the copy module awaits the next command. 246 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907,ADF Duplex Operation
▼ The user inputs the duplex command from the touch screen on the Front Panel. ▼ Frontside data is the same as simplex operation. ▼ Both the backside and frontside are copied simultaneously by two Charge Coupled Device (CCD) arrays on the HP Digital Copier. (A Charge Coupled Device is a miniature photometer that measures light and converts the measured value to analog voltage.) ▼ Backside data is copied and stored into the backside image buffer residing on the copy engine. ● After the frontside buffer has been sent to the Copy Processor, the data stored in the backside buffer is then sent to the Copy Processor.Flatbed Operation
▼ The user inputs commands (through the touch screen and buttons) which are then sent to the Copy Processor Board. ▼ The Copy Processor displays the appropriate screens on the copy module’s LCD based on the user’s inputs. The screens displayed are based on the screens downloaded from the printer. ▼ The user presses the START button and the copy module looks for paper loaded in the ADF. If no paper is found, the copy module receives the flatbed read command. Note The user interface is identical from ADF copy to flatbed copy. ▼ The Carrier Unit reads the white reference and then moves to the right to read from the flatbed glass and proceeds in steps for user specific paper length. ▼ The copy engine scans the image (see page 249). ● The Carrier Unit returns to the home position and the HP Digital Copier awaits the next command. C4265-90907 ADF Duplex Operation 247,Checks Executed when the Start Button is Pressed
● Paper jam ● ADF open ● Lamp intensity ● Lamp fuse ● Motor fuse ● Detect paper loaded (on ADF) 248 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907,Copy Module Image Path
Figure 5-32 Image path (1 of 2) Step 1: The light source illuminates a horizontal strip of the image called the raster line. Step 2: Reflected light is gathered and guided by lenses and a series of mirrors and is then captured by a 4864 pixel element Charge Coupled Device (CCD) array. The CCD converts analog voltages into raw digital grayscale information. Step 3: Raw digital image data is sent from the copy module’s CCD to PM-44s. The PM-44s convert raw digital information into a printer ready bit stream, dithered black and white with layouts such as N-up, duplex, staple, and so forth, and sends it to the printer via the 1394 cable. Data format is strip buffer raster data. The copy module firmware on the printer adds Printer Job Language (PJL) control commands later. C4265-90907 Copy Module Image Path 249, Repeat: One horizontal line or raster line of the image is captured in a step and the Carrier Unit or ADF mechanically moves to the next step. The distance moved determines the subscan sampling rate (1/ 300 inch = 300 ppi, 1/600 = 600 ppi). Note Pages load face down on the ADF. The backside optics are in the ADF above the frontside optics, which are in the Carrier Unit, below the glass. 250 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907,Communication with the Printer
Note The Copy Connect EIO is essentially a pass through device. ▼ Data is handed from the Copy Connect EIO to the Scanner Service Agent (SSA), which is part of the copy module firmware that runs in the printer’s RAM and shows Loading Program 1 on the printer’s Front Panel when loaded successfully. ▼ The copy module firmware adds several Printer Job Language (PJL) control codes to set resolution, printer language and page layout. ● The data stream goes around the printer’s normal image processing system directly into page memory. This allows for the high speed at which copied pages can be printed.Communication Channels
● Image data: high speed uni-directional 1394 channel ● All other communications: bidirectional 1394 channelPrint Job Interrupt
There are two levels at which a user can interrupt a network print job to make a copy on the copy module: ● Low priority - when you place a document in the ADF or touch any of the buttons on the copy module, all incoming network jobs are held until the copy module is finished copying. ● High priority - Select JOB INTERRUPT on the touch screen. The current mopy job is interrupted at the copy boundary. For instance, if the printer is printing copy 3 of 5, it will finish copy 3 and hold copies 4 and 5 until the copy module is finished copying. C4265-90907 Communication with the Printer 251,Paper Path and Sensors
ADF cover ADF empty open sensor OMR sensor B5sensor A4 B4 size A3 sensor Top of paper sensor Figure 5-33 Locations of ADF Sensors 252 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907, Figure 5-34 ADF Sensors functional diagram C4265-90907 Communication with the Printer 253, 254 Chapter 5 Functional Overview C4265-90907, 6 Removal and ReplacementChapter contents
Removal and Replacement Strategy .256 Required Tools .257 User Installable Accessories .258 Hardware Table .266 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement .268 Input Devices 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement.3412x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement.372 Envelope Feeder .404 Output Devices 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement .405 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement .443 Stapler Assembly Removal and Replacement .476 Duplexer .488 HP Digital Copier HP Digital Copier Removal and Replacement .489 Installing the HP Digital Copier .490 Copy Module Maintenance Parts .500 Copy Module Skins .505 Copy Module Power Supply/Main Board Assemblies.524 Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies .535 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies .549 C4265-90907 Chapter contents 255,Removal and Replacement Strategy
This chapter documents the removal and replacement of major assemblies. Replacement is generally the reverse of removal. Occasionally, directions for difficult or critical replacement procedures are included. WARNING! Unplug the power cord from the power outlet before attempting to service the printer. If this warning is not followed, severe injury may result. Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from the Laser/Scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage your eyes. This printer has some sharp sheet metal edges that can cause injury.Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions CAUTION
The printer and accessories contain parts that are sensitive to ESD. Always service printers at an ESD-protected workstation or wear an anti-static wrist wrap. Watch for the ESD reminder symbol on illustrations. 256 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Required Tools
● #2 magnetized Phillips screwdriver (6-inch shaft) ● Small flat-blade screwdriver ● Small pair needle-nose pliers ● T-10, T-15, and T-20 Torx driver (6-inch shaft) All components in the printer, the 2000-sheet Input Tray, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox, and the2x500-sheet Input Tray use Phillips head screws that require a #2 size Phillips screwdriver. Make sure to use a Phillips screwdriver and not a Posidriv screwdriver. Figure 6-1 shows the difference between a Phillips and a Posidriv screwdriver. Note that the Phillips tip has more beveled surfaces. All screws used in the field-replaceable units of the 8-bin Mailbox and the 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler components require a T-10, T-15 or T- 20 Torx driver. Figure 6-1 Phillips vs. Posidriv Screwdrivers Note See table 6-1 on page 266 and Chapter 8 for a list of the screws and other common hardware used in the printer. CAUTION To install a self-tapping screw, first turn it counter-clockwise to align it with the existing thread pattern, then carefully turn clockwise to tighten. Do not over-tighten. If a self-tapping screw-hold becomes stripped, repair of the screw-hole or replacement of the affected assembly is required. C4265-90907 Required Tools 257,User Installable Accessories Memory and Personality Upgrade CAUTION
DIMMs and the Formatter PCA can be damaged by small amounts of electrostatic discharge (ESD). Wear an anti-static wrist wrap. Print a configuration page (page 653). 1 Turn the printer off. Unplug the power cord, and disconnect any cables. Loosen the two captive thumb screws on the back of the printer. Grasp the screws and pull the formatter board out of the printer. Place it on a flat, non-conductive surface. 2 Remove the DIMM from the antistatic package. Hold the DIMM with fingers against the side edges and thumbs against the back edge. Align the notches on the DIMM with the DIMM slot. (Check that the locks on each side of the DIMM slot are open, or outward.) 3 Press the DIMM straight into the slot (press firmly). 4 Make sure the locks on each side of the DIMM snap inward into place. (To remove a DIMM, the locks must be released.) Slide the formatter board back into the printer, and tighten the two screws. Plug in the power cord and connect all cables. Turn the printer on. 258 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Disk Drive
Figure 6-2 Disk DriveTo remove the disk drive:
1 Turn the printer off, and unplug it. 2 Loosen the 2 captive screws, and remove the disk drive from slot #2 (figure 6-2, callout 1).To reinstall the disk drive:
1 Turn the printer off. 2 Install the disk drive in slot #2 (figure 6-2, callout 1), and tighten the 2 captive screws. 3 Print a configuration page to verify the settings. C4265-90907 User Installable Accessories 259,Duplexer
1 With the printer turned off and unplugged, open the Diverter door on the left side of the printer. 2 Push down the green release lever located at the lower right of the Duplexer and slide it straight out of the printer.Envelope Feeder
1 With the printer turned off and unplugged, slide the Envelope Feeder up and out of the printer. 260 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, 2000-sheet or2x500-sheet Input Tray 1 With the printer turned off and the power cable unplugged, disconnect all C-link cables from the Formatter Assembly and from the input device. WARNING! The printer weighs approximately 106 pounds (48 kg). Use four people to lift it. 2 Lift the printer off of the Tray 4 assembly and place it on a smooth, sturdy surface.To Reinstall:
3 Match the locator pins as illustrated in step 3. 4 Make sure that the printer is aligned on all corners. 5 Reconnect all power and C-link cables. C4265-90907 User Installable Accessories 261, 8-bin Mailbox/5-binMailbox with Stapler
1 With the printer turned off and unplugged, disconnect the power cable and C-link cable from the input device and power box. 2 Carefully slide the 8-bin Mailbox/5- bin Mailbox with Stapler away from the printer until the locator tabs and the lower guide rail are clear. See Figure 2. 3 Press in the green tabs and remove the bracket installed underneath the input device. See Figure 3.To Reinstall:
1 Reinstall bracket underneath input device.Reinstall C-link and power cables. See Figure 1. Note Attach and secure the C-link cable to the lower connector on the input device. Route the mailbox’s power cord beneath the printer to the transfer-door side of the printer and connect it to the bottom of the powerbox. 262 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox 1 With the printer turned off and unplugged (A), disconnect the C-link cable from the top and bottom (B) connectors. 2 Remove the Face-up Bin (A) from the top slot of the mailbox. Depress the handle mechanism on the front of the mailbox (B). Pull the mailbox away from the printer until the tray is fully extended (C). 3 Release the plastic alignment guide from the latching mechanism. 4 Remove the wing nuts from the studs beneath the tray extension on the stand. 5 Slide the mailbox away from the printer. Raise the alignment guide and tape it in place before moving the mailbox. C4265-90907 User Installable Accessories 263,To Reinstall:
1 Place the mailbox onto the stand by aligning the threaded studs on the connector plate with the two holes on the top of the stand. 2 With the tray on the stand fully extended, lower the alignment guide onto the locking mechanism. 3 Slide the mailbox toward the printer. Note Use your thumbs to do this and keep the tray on the stand fully extended. 264 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, 4 Secure the mailbox to the stand by tightening the thumb fastener onto the studs beneath the tray extension on the stand. 5 Push the mailbox toward the printer until it snaps in place. 6 Connect the C-Link cable. Plug the power cord into the mailbox and an AC power outlet. Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000- sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling Accessories (C4788-90904). C4265-90907 User Installable Accessories 265,Hardware Table
Note The screws listed in table 6-1 are also listed in Chapter 8 with their respective assemblies. Table 6-1. Hardware Table Example Reference Description Part Number Usage CH101 and CH102 Screw, w/washer, XA9-0872-000CN General, Metal to M3x8 metal CH103 Screw, M4X8 XB6-7400-807CN Main Motor CH104 Screw, CT, M3X3 XB5-6303-007CN Fan 1, Fan 2 CH105 Screw, w/washer, XA9-0817-000CN Laser/Scanner M3X20 CH106 Screw, tapping, XB4-7401-809CN HVPS, DC truss head, M3X8 Controller CH107 Screw, tapping, pan XB4-7401-009CN Diverter Assembly, head, M4X10 Face-up Solenoid Assembly 266 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Table 6-1. Hardware Table (continued) Example Reference Description Part Number Usage
Kit 1 Complete hardware RY7-5044-000CN 2000-sheet Input screw kit for Tray, general use 2000-sheet Input Tray Kit 3 Complete hardware C4785-60521 8-bin Mailbox/5-bin screw kit for Mailbox Mailbox with Stapler, Elevator HeadC4265-90907 Hardware Table 267
,Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement
Control Panel.269 Covers .271 Delivery Unit (for Face-down Bin) .280 Diverter Assembly .283 Diverter Door Assembly .284 Lower Right Door Assembly .285 Fan 1, Laser/Scanner and Housing (Exhaust) .288 Fan 2, Low Voltage Power Supply (Exhaust).290 Fan 3, Formatter Fan and Housing (Intake).291 Fan 4, Delivery Unit (Exhaust).292 Fan 5, Tray 1 (Intake).293 Tray 1.295 Tray 1 Pickup Assembly.298 Feeder Assembly.302 Formatter Assembly .304 Fusing Assembly .306 Laser/Scanner Assembly .308 Main Gear Assembly .310 Main Motor Assembly .313 Paper Input Unit (PIU) .314 PCA, DC Controller .315 Output Paper Sensor PCA .316 High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) .323 Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS) .324 Registration Assembly.325 Tray 1 Feed Roller and Separation Pad.328 Tray 2 and 3 Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers.330 Paper Input Unit Sensor (PS2) .332 Registration Sensor (PS1).334 Face-up Solenoid Assembly (SL3) .336 Transfer Roller Assembly.337 Tray 2 and 3 Assemblies .339 268 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Control Panel
Figure 6-3 Control Panel (1 of 2) 1 While pushing in on the center area (figure 6-3, callout), lift up on the forward edge of the control panel to release the plastic retaining tab. C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 269, Figure 6-4 Control Panel (2 of 2) 2 Press down on the back while pushing up on the front of the Control Panel to free it from the chassis.To Reinstall:
Plug in the cable, replace the cable in its retainer, insert the rear edge of the control panel under the top cover lip, and press down on the forward edge to snap it into place. 270 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Covers
There are five cover assemblies in this printer: ● AC Access Cover, located at the left rear of the printer. ● Back Cover, provides access to the High Voltage Power Supply, DC Controller, Low Voltage Power Supply, and Main Motor. ● Front Cover, including front access door. ● Left Lower Cover, located below the Diverter Access Door. ● Top Cover, provides access to the Face-down Delivery Unit and Laser/Scanner Assembly. C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 271,AC Access Cover
Figure 6-5 AC Access Cover 1 Remove the Formatter PCA. 2 Remove 3 screws (figure 6-5, callout 1).To Reinstall:
1 Insert the panel edge (figure 6-5, callout 2) inside the back cover (if installed). 2 Be sure to insert the three alignment tabs (figure 6-5, callout 3) into their slots before replacing the screws. 272 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Back Cover
Figure 6-6 Back Cover Note Remove the metal back cover and the plastic panel at the right rear as a single unit. The square opening at the upper rear corner on the right- side plastic panel is the engine test access (callout 6). 1 Remove 5 screws (figure 6-6, callout 1). 2 Open the top cover door, and remove 1 screw (figure 6-6, callout 2). 3 Open the 2000-sheet Input Tray transfer door (if installed), Tray 1, and the Right Lower Door Assembly (callout 7). 4 Remove 2 screws (figure 6-6, callout 3) from the plastic panel to the left of the metal back cover. 5 Carefully release the cover around the AC input connector (figure 6-6, callout 4) at the lower right of the back cover, and slide the right side of the cover slightly forward. 6 Carefully release the retaining tabs (figure 6-6, callout 5) on the plastic panel to the left of the metal back cover by gently pulling the cover to the left while moving both pieces away from the printer chassis. C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 273,Front Cover
Figure 6-7 Front Cover (1 of 2) 1 Open all access doors and remove the Duplexer if installed. 2 Open the front access door, and remove 3 screws (figure 6-7, callout 1). 274 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-8 Front Cover (2 of 2) 3 Open the Diverter Access Door and release the two plastic retaining tabs inside the Duplexer cavity (figure 6-8, callout 2). CAUTION Be careful; the plastic upper retaining tabs will break off if the cover is tilted too far out. 4 Carefully pull the bottom of the cover away from the chassis while moving it to the right to release the retaining tab (figure 6-7, callout 3). 5 Carefully tilt the bottom edge of the cover away from the chassis to release the upper retaining tabs. C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 275,Left Lower Cover
Figure 6-9 Left Lower Cover CAUTION Be careful not to damage the plastic guides on the inside of the lower left cover. They are part of the Duplexer paper path. 1 Remove the Diverter Assembly access door (see figure 6-15). 2 Remove 2 screws (figure 6-9, callout 1). 3 Press down firmly on the top cover outer ends to release the retaining tabs on the inside of the cover (figure 6-9, callout 2) and the retaining tabs at the lower edge of the cover (figure 6-9, callout 3). 4 Pull the cover away from the chassis, left side first.To Reinstall:
1 Relocate the right side of the cover behind the plastic edge piece first. 2 Slide the cover toward the chassis and insert the two retaining tabs into position. Lift up to snap the cover into place. 276 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Top Cover
Figure 6-10 Top Cover (1 of 2) 1 Remove the Control Panel (see figure 6-3 on page 269), then remove 1 screw (figure 6-10, callout 1). 2 Open the Diverter Assembly access door, and remove 1 screw (figure 6-10, callout 2). C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 277, Figure 6-11 Top Cover (2 of 2) 3 Open the top cover door, and remove 1 screw (figure 6-11, callout 3). 4 Remove the clip to easily access the bin cover (figure 6-11, callout 4. CAUTION Be careful not to damage the Face-down Bin Full sensor flag (figure 6-11, callout 5) when removing the top cover. 5 Lift (and hold) the top cover door up, and carefully pull out on the cover to release the retaining tab (figure 6-10, callout 5). 6 Hold the Face-down Bin (figure 6-10, callout 6) down while carefully and slowly lifting the top cover straight up until it clears the Face-down Bin Full sensor flag and the Delivery Unit. 278 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,To Reinstall:
CAUTION Be careful not to damage the Face-down Bin Full sensor flag (figure 6-11, callout 4) when replacing the top cover. 1 Hold the top cover door up and the Face-down Bin (figure 6-10, callout 6) down while lowering the cover into position. 2 Slide the Face-down Bin under the Face-down Bin Full sensor flag, and make sure that the cam (figure 6-11, callout 4) at the rear of the top cover door is properly positioned while lowering the top cover into place. 3 Make sure that the top cover is seated properly and that the retaining tabs are in place before replacing the screws. 4 Reinstall Control Panel. C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 279,Delivery Unit (for Face-down Bin)
Figure 6-12 Delivery Unit (1 of 2) 1 Remove the following components: • Formatter Assembly (see figure 6-35 on page 305) • AC Access Cover (see figure 6-5 on page 272) • Top Cover (see figure 6-10 on page 277) • Front Cover (see figure 6-7 on page 274) 2 Unplug and re-route the fan cable out of the way (figure 6-12, callout 1). 3 Remove 1 screw (figure 6-12, callout 2) to loosen the grounding strip. 4 Remove 1 screw (figure 6-12, callout 3), and remove the metal fan shield. 5 Open the Diverter Assembly access door, remove 2 screws (figure 6-12, callout 4), release the plastic retaining tabs (figure 6-12, callout 5), and remove the metal mounting bracket (figure 6-12, callout 6). 280 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-13 Delivery Unit (2 of 2) 6 Remove 2 screws (figure 6-13, callout 5) and 1 screw (figure 6-12, callout 7). CAUTION Be careful not to damage the plastic sensor flags and gears on the left end of the Delivery Unit, as viewed from the left side. 7 Lift the left end of the Delivery Unit approximately 1/8 inch to clear the alignment pin, and carefully rock it forward and backward while sliding it out of the chassis. C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 281,To Reinstall:
CAUTION Be careful not to damage the plastic sensor flags and gears on the left end of the Delivery Unit. 1 Place the plastic edge on the right end of the Delivery Unit into the chassis. Make sure that the plastic support tab on the right end of the Delivery Unit slides on top of the chassis. 2 Make sure that the plastic sensor flags and gears on the left end of the Delivery Unit can move freely. 3 Replace the metal mounting bracket (figure 6-12, callout 6) before replacing the Delivery Unit screws. Make sure that the plastic clips (figure 6-12, callout 5) are snapped into place before tightening the mounting screws (figure 6-12, callout 4). 282 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Diverter Assembly
Figure 6-14 Diverter Assembly CAUTION Support the Diverter Assembly access door during this procedure to prevent damage to the plastic hinge pins. 1 Open the Diverter Assembly access door and release the support struts (figure 6-14, callout 1) by sliding the strut ends forward and downward. 2 Remove 6 self-tapping screws (figure 6-14, callout 2). Note The access door support struts will fall free when the Diverter Assembly is lifted away from the access door. 3 Lift the Diverter Assembly up and away from the access door. C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 283,Diverter Door Assembly
Figure 6-15 Diverter Door Assembly 1 Open the Diverter access door, and release the support struts (figure 6-15, callout 1) by sliding the strut ends forward and downward. 2 Rotate the door up to align the flat sides of the right hinge pin with the retaining slot (figure 6-15, callout 2), and lift upwards to release it from the retaining slot. 3 Continue lifting up on the right side of the door while pushing it to the left to rotate the left hinge pin out of its locating cavity.To Reinstall:
1 Insert the left side of the door into position first, and then rotate the right side down to snap the hinge pins into position. 2 Reconnect the support struts to the chassis. 284 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Lower Right Door Assembly
Figure 6-16 Lower Right Door Assembly (1 of 3) 1 Remove the back cover assembly (see figure 6-6). 2 Remove Tray 2 and Tray 3. 3 Open the Lower Right Door, and release the lower end of the support strap (figure 6-16, callout 1). C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 285, Figure 6-17 Right Lower Door Assembly (2 of 3) 4 Remove 4 screws (figure 6-17, callout 2). 286 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-18 Right Lower Door Assembly (3 of 3) 5 Release two retainer tabs from the inside of the Tray 3 cavity (figure 6-18, callout 3). 6 Slide the door assembly away from the printer chassis. C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 287,Fan 1, Laser/Scanner and Housing (Exhaust) Fan Housing
Figure 6-19 Fan 1, Laser/Scanner (1 of 2) 1 Remove the toner cartridge. 2 Remove the top cover (see figure 6-10 on page 277). 3 Remove and re-route the cables away from fan housing (figure 6-19, callout 1). 4 Release the housing retainer clip located inside the toner cartridge cavity (figure 6-19, callout 2), and lift the housing up and out of the chassis. 288 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Fan 1 Motor
Figure 6-20 Fan 1, Laser/Scanner (2 of 2) 1 Unplug the fan cable from the DC Controller PCA. 2 Remove 2 screws (figure 6-20, callout 3), and lift the fan and bracket assembly out of the chassis. 3 Remove 2 screws (figure 6-20, callout 4) to separate the fan motor from the bracket. C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 289,Fan 2, Low Voltage Power Supply (Exhaust)
Figure 6-21 Fan 2, Low Voltage Power Supply 1 Remove the back cover (see figure 6-6 on page 273). 2 Remove the fan cable from the DC Controller PCA (figure 6-21, callout 1). 3 Remove 2 screws (figure 6-21, callout 2). 290 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Fan 3, Formatter Fan and Housing (Intake) Fan Motor
Figure 6-22 Fan 3, Formatter Fan Note The fan motor (FM3) can be removed without removing the housing assembly. 1 Remove the back cover (see figure 6-6 on page 273). 2 Unplug the fan connector (figure 6-22, callout 1). CAUTION Do not bend the fan retainer clips upward. Release them by pinching. 3 Release the 2 retainer clips (figure 6-22, callout 2), and slide the fan out of the housing assembly.Fan Housing
4 Remove 2 screws and remove housing.To Reinstall:
Make sure that the fan cable exits from the upper left corner. C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 291,Fan 4, Delivery Unit (Exhaust)
Figure 6-23 Fan 4, Delivery Unit 1 Remove the top cover (see figure 6-10). 2 Unplug the fan cable (figure 6-23, callout 1). 3 Remove 1 screw (figure 6-23, callout 2), and remove the metal fan shield. 4 Release 4 retainer clips (figure 6-23, callout 3), and slide the fan forward out of the Delivery Unit Assembly. 292 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Fan 5, Tray 1 (Intake)
Figure 6-24 Fan 5 Removal (1 of 2) 1 Remove Tray 1 (see figure 6-26). 2 Remove the Tray 1 Pickup Unit. 3 Remove 1 screw (figure 6-24, callout 1). 4 Disconnect the cable (figure 6-24, callout 2). Cable is shown disconnected. C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 293, Figure 6-25 Fan 5 Removal (2 of 2) 5 Insert the flat blade of a screwdriver along the line indicated by callout 1. 6 Turn the screwdriver counter-clockwise slightly to free the fan housing from the fan duct. Then, slide the fan housing out of the duct. 7 Slide the fan out of the housing to replace it. 294 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Tray 1
Figure 6-26 Tray 1 Removal (1 of 3) 1 To remove Tray 1, open the tray fully, then partially close it until the distance between the retaining tab (callout 1) and the stop on the chassis (callout 2) is 1/4”. 2 Pull the right side of the tray outward to free the clip (callout 3) from the pin (callout 4). C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 295, Figure 6-27 Tray 1 Removal (2 of 3) 3 Raise the right side of the tray and guide the white tab around the stop. 296 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-28 Tray 1 Removal (3 of 3) 4 Slide the tray to the right, to free the tray on the left side of the chassis. 5 Remove the tray. C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 297,Tray 1 Pickup Assembly
Figure 6-29 Tray 1 Pickup Unit Removal (1 of 4) 1 Remove the Front Cover. 2 Remove the Rear Cover. 3 Remove Tray 1(see page 295). 4 Open the Pickup Unit door. 5 Remove 4 screws (callout 1). 298 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-30 Tray 1 Pickup Unit Removal (2 of 4) 6 Disconnect the cables (callouts 1 and 2) on the right side of the printer. 7 Remove the cable from the cable guide (callout 3). C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 299, Figure 6-31 Tray 1 Pickup Unit Removal (3 of 4) 8 Tilt the Pickup Assembly out of the chassis from the top (callout 1), then lift up to free it from the chassis (callout 2). 9 Remove the Pickup Assembly from the chassis. 300 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-32 Tray 1 Pickup Unit Removal (4 of 4)To Reinstall:
First, seat the 3 tabs (callout 1) behind the metal rail on the chassis. Then, pivot the Pickup Unit into place. The Pickup Unit has 4 locating pins that will engage guide holes in the chassis wen the unit is properly aligned. C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 301,Feeder Assembly
Figure 6-33 Feeder Assembly (1 of 2) 1 Open the left access door and remove the Duplexer (if installed). 2 Remove the Fusing Assembly (see figure 6-36 on page 306). 3 Open the Top Cover and remove the Toner Cartridge. 4 Remove the Transfer Roller Assembly (see figure 6-62 on page 337). 5 Remove the Registration Assembly (see figure 6-53 on page 325). 6 Unplug the sensor cable at the right side of the Feeder Assembly (figure 6-33, callout 1). 7 Remove 2 screws at the front of the Feeder Assembly (figure 6-33, callout 2). 302 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-34 Feeder Assembly (2 of 2) 8 Remove 1 screw at the back of the Feeder Assembly (figure 6-34). Note Removing the High Voltage Power Supply is recommended to ease the removal of the Feeder Assembly, primarily because of the contact points. 9 Release 4 plastic retaining tabs by moving them in the directions indicated in figure 6-34 while carefully lifting upwards on the Feeder Assembly. 10 Remove the Feeder Assembly by lifting it upwards out of the Toner Cartridge cavity.To Reinstall:
Make sure that the plastic retaining tabs are all properly seated before replacing the screws. C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 303,Formatter Assembly Setting Page Count, Maintenance Count,
and Serial Number The page count, maintenance count, and printer serial number are stored in Non-Volatile Memory. PAGECOUNT is the total number of images printed by the printer, MAINTCOUNT is the page count when the next preventive maintenance should be performed (every 350,000 images), and S.N. is the printer serial number (also located on the printer back cover). If necessary to replace the Formatter PCA, these numbers should be set to the current values to accurately reflect the usage of the print engine. The procedures for setting these values are listed in table 3-24 on page 141. Before removing the old Formatter PCA, print a Configuration Page to verify the current values. Note If it is not possible to print a Configuration Page, try to verify the values before replacing the Formatter PCA by following steps 1 through 3, below. After verifying the page count, maintenance count, and printer serial number from the old Formatter PCA, replace it with the new PCA. 1 Enter Service Mode as described in “Printer Service Mode” on page 141. 2 When SERVICE MODE is displayed, press MENU to access the Service Menu. 3 Press ITEMS to display PAGECOUNT=, MAINTCOUNT=, and S.N.=. 4 Enter the appropriate values for each item. 5 Press GO to exit Service Mode. Note The page count interval can be changed to a value less than 350,000 for special media situations. 304 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Removing and Replacing the Formatter Assembly
Figure 6-35 Formatter Assembly Note The Formatter Assembly is extremely sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). DIMMs and the Formatter PCA can be damaged by small amounts of ESD. Wear an anti-static wrist wrap when removing or replacing any of these components 1 If the Formatter is to be replaced, make sure to note the page count. 2 Loosen the two captive screws (figure 6-35, callout 1), and slide the Formatter PCA out of the chassis. 3 After installation of a replacement Formatter, be sure to re-enter the serial number, page count, and maintenance count. (See table 3-24 on page 141 for more information.) C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 305,Fusing Assembly
Figure 6-36 Fusing Assembly 1 Open the Diverter Assembly access door, and remove the Duplexer if installed. CAUTION Use the upper levers to release the Fusing Assembly, NOT the lower levers. The lower levers set the pressure rollers inside the Fusing Assembly for envelope printing (down for single sheets, up for envelopes). 2 To release the Fusing Assembly rotate the upper levers down (figure 6-36, callout 1). 3 To remove the Fusing Assembly lift up on the finger handles (figure 6-36, callout 2) while pulling outward. 306 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,To Reinstall:
1 Make sure that the Fuser Output sensor flag (figure 6-36, callout 3) on the upper left corner of the Fusing Assembly rotates freely. 2 Make sure that the lower levers are set down for single sheets. If having trouble printing envelopes, move the levers up. Move the levers back down when done. C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 307,Laser/Scanner Assembly CAUTION
The Laser/Scanner diode is extremely sensitive to ESD. 1 Remove the toner cartridge. 2 Remove the top cover (see figure 6-10). Figure 6-37 Laser/Scanner Assembly 3 Unplug three cable connectors (figure 6-37, callout 1). 308 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, 4 Re-route the cable running across the top of the assembly so that it is out of the way. CAUTION Do not touch the laser/scanner mirror located under the forward edge of the assembly. Use approved ESD handling procedures when touching the Beam Detect PCA. 5 Remove 4 screws (figure 6-37, callout 2).To Reinstall:
Make sure that the locator pins are properly seated. C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 309,Main Gear Assembly
1 Remove the following components in the order listed: • Toner Cartridge • Tray 1 • Tray 2 • Transfer Roller Assembly (see figure 6-62 on page 337) • Back Cover Assembly (see figure 6-6 on page 273) • Tray 1 Pickup Assembly (see figure 6-26 on page 295) • Right Lower Door Assembly (see figure 6-16 on page 285) • Paper Input Unit (PIU) (see figure 6-42 on page 314) • High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) (see figure 6-51 on page 323) • Main Motor (see figure 6-41 on page 313) Figure 6-38 Main Gear Assembly (1 of 3) 2 Remove 2 screws (figure 6-38 on page 310, callout 1). CAUTION Be careful not to damage the plastic gears when removing the Main Gear Assembly. 310 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Note A slight gentle rocking motion will help free the Main Gear Assembly from the printer. 3 From inside of the PIU cavity, carefully tilt the bottom of the Main Gear Assembly away from the chassis and down to free the gear mechanisms.To Reinstall:
Figure 6-39 Main Gear Assembly (2 of 3) Note A slight gentle rocking motion will help install the Main Gear Assembly as it is rotated into place. 1 Observe the gear assembly position from inside the toner cartridge cavity (figure 6-39, callout 2). C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 311, Figure 6-40 Main Gear Assembly (3 of 3) 2 Tilt the top of the assembly inward and insert the upper back part of the assembly in place (figure 6-40, callout 3). 3 Continue rotating the assembly upwards into place. 4 Make sure that the locating pins are properly aligned and that the gear assembly fits tightly against the chassis before replacing the screws (figure 6-38, callout 4). 312 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Main Motor Assembly
Figure 6-41 Main Motor 1 Remove the back cover (see figure 6-6 on page 273). 2 Remove the HVPS (see figure 6-51 on page 323). 3 Unplug the connector (figure 6-41, callout 1). CAUTION Be careful when removing the Main Motor. The steel drive shaft can damage the plastic gears. 4 Remove 4 screws (figure 6-41, callout 2).To Reinstall:
Align the Main Motor to the chassis with the locator tab (figure 6-41, callout 3) and the machined ring around the output shaft. C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 313,Paper Input Unit (PIU)
Figure 6-42 Paper Input Unit 1 Remove Tray 2 and Tray 3. Remove both trays to prevent damage to the PIU plastic sensor flags. 2 Remove the back cover (see figure 6-6 on page 273). 3 Remove the Tray 1 Pickup Assembly (see figure 6-29 on page 298). 4 Remove the Right Lower Door Assembly (see figure 6-16 on page 285). 5 Remove 4 screws (figure 6-42, callout 1). 6 Slide the assembly out from the chassis approximately 3 inches, and unplug the connector inside the right end (figure 6-42, callout 2). 7 Continue sliding the assembly out of the chassis.To Reinstall:
Make sure that Trays 2 and 3 are removed when reinstalling the Paper Input Unit. 314 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,PCA, DC Controller
Figure 6-43 DC Controller PCA 1 Remove the Formatter Assembly (see figure 6-35 on page 305). 2 Remove the back cover (see figure 6-6 on page 273). 3 Remove the High Voltage Power Supply (see figure 6-51 on page 323). 4 Unplug 19 connectors from the PCA (figure 6-43, callout 1). 5 Remove 2 screws (figure 6-43, callout 2) from the left side of the PCA and 2 self-tapping screws (figure 6-43, callout 3) from the right side of the PCA. 6 Carefully tip the left side of the PCA outward to clear the Formatter PCA connector from the card cage.To Reinstall:
Make sure the retaining clip posts (figure 6-43, callout 4) and the two locator pins (figure 6-43, callout 5) are properly aligned. C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 315,Output Paper Sensor PCA
1 Remove the following components in the order listed: • Toner Cartridge • Formatter Assembly (see figure 6-35 on page 305) • AC Access Cover (see figure 6-5 on page 272) • Top Cover (see figure 6-10 on page 277) • Back Cover (see figure 6-6 on page 273) • Fan 3 and Housing Assembly (see figure 6-22 on page 291) • High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) (see figure 6-51 on page 323) • DC Controller PCA (see figure 6-43) Figure 6-44 Output Paper Sensor PCA (1 of 4) 2 Remove 7 screws (figure 6-44, callout 1), and remove the Formatter PCA cage. 316 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-45 Output Paper Sensor PCA (2 of 4) 3 Remove 5 screws (figure 6-45, callout 2), and remove the Formatter PCA grounding strip. C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 317, Figure 6-46 Output Paper Sensor PCA (3 of 4) 4 Remove 3 screws (figure 6-46, callout 3), and remove the plastic PCA shield. (Note the positioning of the metal grounding fingers at the left of the shield.) 318 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-47 Output Paper Sensor PCA (4 of 4) 5 Unplug the connector (figure 6-47, callout 4). 6 Remove 2 screws (figure 6-47, callout 5), and unplug the connector on the back side of the PCA.To Reinstall:
Make sure that the sensor flags rotate freely and that the top cover and Diverter doors operate the microswitch (SW1401). C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 319,Paper Size PCA
Figure 6-48 Paper Size PCA (1 of 3) 1 Remove the following components in the order listed: • Toner Cartridge • Trays 2 and 3 • Back Cover (see figure 6-6) • Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS) (see figure 6-52) 2 Unplug the fan cable from the left side of the connector (figure 6-48, callout 1), remove 1 screw (figure 6-48, callout 2), and remove the plastic shield (figure 6-48, callout 3). 320 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-49 Paper Size PCA (2 of 3) Note The Paper Size PCA for Tray 2 (figure 6-49, callout 4) is identical to the PCA for Tray 3 (figure 6-49, callout 5). The removal procedure for both PCAs is the same. 3 Unplug the connector (figure 6-49, callout 6), remove 3 screws (figure 6-49, callout 7), and remove the PCA and actuating fingers. C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 321, Figure 6-50 Paper Size PCA (3 of 3)To Reinstall:
Make sure that the actuating fingers are aligned with the locating pins (figure 6-50, callout 8). 322 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS)
Figure 6-51 High Voltage Power Supply 1 Remove the back cover (see figure 6-6 on page 273). 2 Unplug the cable from the LVPS to the DC Controller PCA (figure 6-51, callout 1), and move it out of the way. 3 Unplug the connector from the bottom of the HVPS (figure 6-51, callout 2). Note Do NOT remove the screw indicated in Figure 6-51, beneath the null symbol. 4 Remove 1 self-tapping screw (figure 6-51, callout 3) and 2 screws (figure 6-51, callout 4).To Reinstall:
Make sure that the plastic alignment pin (figure 6-51, callout 5), the connector pins, and the high voltage contacts are properly aligned before replacing the screws. C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 323,Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS)
Figure 6-52 Low Voltage Power Supply 1 Remove the Formatter Assembly (see figure 6-35 on page 305). 2 Remove the back cover (see figure 6-6 on page 273). 3 Remove Fan 3 and its Housing Assembly (see figure 6-22). 4 Unplug 3 LVPS connectors (figure 6-52, callout 1). 5 Unplug the LVPS fan (FM1) cable from the DC Controller (figure 6-52, callout 2). 6 Remove 7 screws (figure 6-52, callout 3). 324 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Registration Assembly
Figure 6-53 Registration Assembly (1 of 3) 1 Open the top cover door and remove the toner cartridge. 2 Remove the Transfer Roller Assembly (see figure 6-62 on page 337). 3 Remove the Main Gear Train Shield. Release the retainer clip (figure 6-53, callout 1), and lift the forward end up. 4 Remove 2 screws at rear of assembly (figure 6-53, callout 3). C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 325, Figure 6-54 Registration Assembly (2 of 3) 5 Unplug the clutch cable from the clutch on the right end of the Registration Assembly (figure 6-54, callout 2). 326 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-55 Registration Assembly (3 of 3) 6 Lift the registration guide and remove 2 screws at the front of the assembly (figure 6-55, callout 4).To Reinstall:
1 Lift the registration guide, and place the Registration Assembly into position. 2 Lift the registration guide and make sure that the locator pin near the right screw is properly positioned. 3 Make sure that the grounding strap is under the left screw. 4 Be sure to connect the clutch cable connector. 5 After replacing the 4 screws, replace the Main Gear Train Shield. Tilt the top outward, reinstall the lower tabs in place, and snap the cover down into position. C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 327,Tray 1 Feed Roller and Separation Pad Feed Roller
Figure 6-56 Tray 1 Feed Roller 1 Open the Tray 1 door, and remove the plastic shield. 2 Pinch the retainer tabs together (figure 6-56, callout 1), and slide the roller to the left off of the shaft. 328 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Tray 1 Separation Pad
Figure 6-57 Tray 1 Separation Pad 1 Open the Tray 1 door, and remove the Feed Roller. 2 Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver into the slot (figure 6-57, callout 2), and carefully pry the separation pad upwards out of its retaining notches.To Reinstall:
Make sure the metal edge of the Separation Pad faces forward. C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 329,Tray 2 and 3 Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers
Figure 6-58 Tray 2 and 3, Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers There are three rollers for each tray: the Pickup Roller, the Feed Roller, and the Separation Roller. The Feed and Separation Rollers are interchangeable with each other and between trays. The Pickup Rollers are interchangeable between trays. ● Tray 2 Pickup Roller: figure 6-58, callout 1 ● Tray 2 Feed Roller: figure 6-58, callout 2 ● Tray 2 Separation Roller: figure 6-58, callout 3 ● Tray 3 Pickup Roller: figure 6-58, callout 4 ● Tray 3 Feed Roller: figure 6-58, callout 5 ● Tray 3 Separation Roller: figure 6-58, callout 6 Note The Feed and Separation rollers have protruding tabs, and the pickup rollers have recessed retaining tabs. Be careful not to lose the plastic torque limiters located behind the Separation Rollers (figure 6-58, callout 7). 330 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, 1 Remove trays. From inside the tray cavity, remove the rollers by pinching the retainer tabs together and sliding the roller off the shaft. C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 331,Paper Input Unit Sensor (PS2)
1 Remove the following components in the order listed: • Toner Cartridge • Trays 2 and 3 • Transfer Roller (see figure 6-62 on page 337) • Registration Assembly (see figure 6-54 on page 326) • Front Cover (see figure 6-7 on page 274) • Tray 1 Assembly (see figure 6-26 on page 295) • Right Lower Door Assembly (see figure 6-16 on page 285) Note The sensor retaining tabs are released from above, and the sensor is removed and replaced from below. 2 Refer to the following page for the removal and reinstallation procedure for the PS2 sensor. 332 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-59 Paper Input Unit Sensor (PS2) 3 Release the retaining tabs (figure 6-59, callout 1) on the right end of the sensor, and rotate the sensor down to free the tabs on the left end. 4 Unplug the connector from the sensor.To Reinstall:
1 Plug in the connector before reinstalling. 2 Holding the sensor flag out of the way, first hook the tabs on the left end in first. Snap the right end of the sensor upward into place. C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 333,Registration Sensor (PS1)
1 Remove the following components in the order listed: • Toner Cartridge • Trays 2 and 3 • Transfer Roller (see figure 6-62 on page 337) • Registration Assembly (see figure 6-54 on page 326) • Front Cover (see figure 6-7 on page 274) • Tray 1 Assembly (see figure 6-26 on page 295) • Right Lower Door Assembly (see figure 6-16 on page 285) • Paper Input Unit (see figure 6-42 on page 314) Note The sensor retaining tabs are released from above, and the sensor is removed and replaced from inside the Paper Input Unit cavity. 2 Follow the procedure on the following page to remove and reinstall the PS1 sensor. 334 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-60 Registration Sensor (PS1) 3 Release the retaining tabs (figure 6-60, callout 1) on the right end of the sensor and rotate the sensor down to free the tabs on the left end of the sensor. 4 Unplug the connector from the sensor.To Reinstall:
1 Plug in the connector. 2 Holding the sensor flag out of the way, first hook the tabs on the left end in first. Snap the right end of the sensor upward into place. C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 335,Face-up Solenoid Assembly (SL3)
Figure 6-61 Face-up Solenoid Assembly, SL3 1 Remove the top cover (see figure 6-10 on page 277). 2 Remove the Delivery Unit (see figure 6-12 on page 280). 3 Remove 1 self-tapping screw (figure 6-61, callout 1). CAUTION Be careful not to damage the plastic arm when removing the assembly. 4 Pull the forward end of the assembly away from the chassis to clear the locating pin, and slide it forward to clear two retaining tabs. 336 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Transfer Roller Assembly
Figure 6-62 Transfer Roller Assembly CAUTION Handle the Transfer Roller from the ends only. Do not touch the surface of the Transfer Roller. Skin oils will affect its electrical characteristics, resulting in poor image transfer. 1 Open the top cover door, and remove the toner cartridge. 2 Grasp the gear (figure 6-62, callout 1) on the left end, and carefully lift upward just enough to clear the retainer clip. 3 Slide the Transfer Roller Assembly to the left to release the shaft on the right end (figure 6-62, callout 2). C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 337,To Reinstall:
1 Place the right end of the shaft into its retaining cavity. 2 Hold the Transfer Roller wiper up (figure 6-62, callout 3) and slide the assembly to the right until the gear on the left end is in position. 3 Carefully press the left end of the shaft into the retainer clip. 4 Press the Transfer Roller wiper down (figure 6-62, callout 3) until the retaining clips snap into place. 338 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Tray 2 and 3 Assemblies
Note The paper trays are mechanically aligned to the printer chassis at the factory. If you are replacing Tray 2 or Tray 3 with a tray other than the original factory installed unit, you may have to adjust the new tray. For details, see “Adjusting Printer Input Trays” on page 169. 1 Open the tray, and pull it out to the stop. 2 Press the colored tab at the right side of the tray, and continue to pull the tray slightly upwards and out of the chassis.To Reinstall:
1 Align the left rear corner of the tray and the locating track at the lower rear center of the tray with their respective guides, and insert the tray no more than two inches into the chassis. 2 Carefully lift up on the outer end of the tray while pulling the tray stop mechanism, located at the right rear of the tray opening, out and over the tray roller and guide assembly. 3 Carefully slide the tray into the printer until it latches into place. C4265-90907 Printer Assembly Removal and Replacement 339, 340 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement WARNING! For the procedures in this section, the printer and all paper-handling devices must be unplugged. Before attempting to service the 2000- sheet Input Tray, unplug the power cord from the power source; otherwise, severe injury may result. The printer and paper-handling devices may have sharp edges that could cause injury. Note Reinstallation is generally the reverse of the removal process. Carefully follow any additional instructions provided under “To Reinstall.” Orientation.341 Front Cover .343 Back Cover .344 Left Cover .345 Right Cover .346 Main Drive Assembly.347 Paper Tray .349 Main Cable Harness .350 Controller PCA .352 Front LED PCA Assembly .354 Pickup Assembly .356 Power Supply.358 Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers .360 Paper Quantity Switch Assembly .363 Paper Size Switch Assembly .363 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU).366 Tension Springs.368 Locating Pins.369 Casters and Stabilizing Feet .370 Adjustable Foot .371Orientation
Figure 6-63 shows the orientation of the 2000-sheet Input Tray as it is referred to in this section. C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 341, Figure 6-63 2000-sheet Input Tray Orientation To remove the 2000-sheet Input Tray from the printer, see page 261. 342 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Front Cover
Figure 6-64 2000-sheet Input Tray Front Cover 1 Open the paper tray on the 2000-sheet Input Tray to the stops (figure 6-64). 2 Remove the Paper Limit Back Plate from the paper tray (callout 1). 3 Remove the 4 screws in the front of the tray: 3 screws at the top of the tray and 1 screw on the front-right side of the tray (callout 2). 4 Using a flat-blade screwdriver, release the plastic retaining tabs at the left- and right-front sides of the tray (callout 3). 5 Carefully lift up on the Front Cover, and then pull it out to release the plastic retaining tabs that secure the bottom of the Front Cover to the tray chassis (callout 4).To Reinstall:
1 Replace all the plastic retaining tabs properly (callout 4). 2 Reinstall the front adjustable plate, and configure it properly (callout 1). Reinstall the tray size labels. C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 343,Back Cover
1 Make sure that the power cord for the 2000-sheet Input Tray is unplugged from the power source. 2 Remove the 4 screws that secure the Back Cover of the 2000-sheet Input Tray to the chassis: 1 screw on each corner (figure 6-65, callout 1). 3 Pull the Back Cover out from the chassis. Figure 6-65 2000-sheet Input Tray Back CoverTo Reinstall:
1 Insert the tab on the lower-left corner into its alignment slot. 344 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Left Cover
1 Unplug the power cord and the C-link interface cables from the 2000-sheet Input Tray. 2 Remove the 2 screws that are located at the top of the 2000-sheet Input Tray’s Left Cover: 1 screw near each corner (figure 6-66, callout 1). 3 Remove the Left Cover from the unit: a. Pull out on the top of the Left Cover, and then lift up on the Left Cover’s right side to clear the retaining tabs that are along the Left Cover’s bottom edge (callout 2). b. Pull out on the Left Cover’s lower-left corner to release the plastic retainer tab that secures that corner of the cover to the chassis (callout 3).To Reinstall:
Figure 6-66 2000-sheet Input Tray Left Cover 1 Replace the left side of the Left Cover first (callout 3). 2 Tilt the right side of the Left Cover down and toward the chassis to place the lower retaining tabs over the chassis rail (callout 2). C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 345,Right Cover
1 Remove the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see figure 6-78). 2 Remove the 2 screws that are located near the middle of the 2000-sheet Input Tray’s Right Cover: 1 screw on each side (figure 6-67, callout 1). 3 Using a flat-blade screwdriver, release the plastic retaining tab that secures the Right Cover’s upper-left corner to the chassis (figure 6-67, callout 2). 4 To remove the Right Cover, carefully pull out on the top of the cover while lifting it upward to clear the retaining tabs that are along the cover’s bottom edge.To Reinstall:
1 Place the retaining tabs that are along the Right Cover’s bottom edge over the chassis rail. 2 Reinstall the VTU (see figure 6-78). Figure 6-67 2000-sheet Input Tray Right Cover 346 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Main Drive Assembly
1 Remove the Back Cover from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see figure 6-65). Figure 6-68 2000-sheet Input Tray Main Drive Assembly 2 Locate the cable that runs from the Main Drive Assembly on the 2000-sheet Input Tray to the unit’s Controller PCA. Disconnect the cable from the J206 connector on the Controller PCA (figure 6-68, callout 1). 3 Release the cable from the 2 cable clips that hold the cable to the chassis (figure 6-68, callout 2). 4 Remove the 2 screws that connect the Main Drive Assembly to the chassis: 1 screw on top of the Main Drive Assembly and 1 screw on the bottom (figure 6-68, callout 3). 5 Pull the Main Drive Assembly away from the chassis. 6 Inspect the Paper Deck Drive Bushing on the Main Drive Assembly. If the bushing is damaged, it can be replaced without replacing the whole drive assembly. Note Reassembly notes are on the next page. C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 347,To Reinstall:
1 Reroute the cable through the cable clips (figure 6-68, callout 2) and reconnect the cable to the J206 connector on the Controller PCA (figure 6-68, callout 1). 348 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Paper Tray
1 Open the paper tray on the 2000-sheet Input Tray and remove any unused paper. 2 Remove the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see figure 6-78). 3 Remove the Left and Right Covers from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see figure 6-66 and figure 6-67). Figure 6-69 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Tray 4 Remove the 2 screws and metal retaining tabs from the sides of the unit’s chassis: 1 screw and retaining tab on each side of the chassis (figure 6-69, callout 1). 5 Slide the paper tray straight out of the chassis while carefully supporting the rear of the paper tray.To Reinstall:
1 Make sure that the retaining tabs are tightly secured to the unit’s chassis (figure 6-69, callout 1). 2 After replacing the tray, print a test page. If the print is too close to the paper’s edge, adjust the tray. C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 349,Main Cable Harness
1 Remove the Back Cover from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see figure 6-65). 2 Locate and disconnect the 6 cable connectors that connect the Main Cable Harness to the Controller PCA on the 2000-sheet Input Tray (figure 6-70, callout 1). 3 Locate and disconnect the 5 cable connectors that connect the Main Cable Harness to the unit’s chassis (callout 2). 4 Release the cable harness from the 4 cable clips that hold the harness to the unit’s chassis (callout 3).To Reinstall:
1 Properly replace all 11 cable harness connectors (callouts 1 and 2). 2 Reattach the harness to the 4 cable clips that hold the harness to the unit’s chassis (callout 3). 350 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-70 2000-sheet Input Tray Main Cable Harness C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 351,Controller PCA
1 Remove the Back and Left Covers from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see figure 6-65 and figure 6-66). Figure 6-71 2000-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA 2 Disconnect the 11 cables from the Controller PCA on the 2000-sheet Input Tray (figure 6-71, callout 1). 3 Remove the 4 hex screws that secure the 2 C-link cable connectors to the metal base (callout 2). 4 Remove the 2 screws that secure the right side of the Controller PCA to the metal base (callout 3). 5 Release the 2 plastic retaining posts that secure the left side of the Controller PCA to the metal base (callout 4), and then pull the Controller PCA out from the unit’s chassis. 352 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,To Reinstall:
1 Seat the Controller PCA firmly onto the plastic retaining posts that secure the left side of the Controller PCA to the metal plate on the chassis (callout 4). 2 Properly reconnect all 11 cables to the Controller PCA (callout 1). 3 Make sure that the DIP switches on the Controller PCA are in the normal setting (off) (callout 5). (See table 7-35 on page 683.) C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 353,Front LED PCA Assembly
1 Open the paper tray on the 2000-sheet Input Tray halfway to the stops. 2 On the upper-left corner of the front of the unit’s chassis, locate and remove the 1 screw that secures the LED PCA Assembly to the chassis (figure 6-72, callout 1). 3 Reach behind the LED PCA Assembly and pull it away from the chassis. 4 To remove the LED PCA from the cable connector, release the 3 plastic retaining tabs that secure the LED PCA to the connector (figure 6-72, callout 2). 5 Pull the LED PCA from the connector.To Reinstall:
1 Reconnect the LED PCA to the connector (callout 2). 354 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-72 2000-sheet Input Tray Front LED PCA C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 355,Pickup Assembly
1 Remove the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see figure 6-78). 2 Remove the Right Cover from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see figure 6-67). 3 Open the paper tray on the 2000-sheet Input Tray to the stops. Figure 6-73 2000-sheet Input Tray Pickup Assembly 4 Disconnect the 3 cables that are located at the bottom-right side of the Pickup Assembly (figure 6-73, callout 1). 5 Remove the 5 screws that secure the Pickup Assembly to the unit’s chassis: 3 screws along the top, and 1 screw on each side (callout 2). 6 Slide the Pickup Assembly straight out of the chassis. 356 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,To Reinstall:
1 Make sure that the paper tray is open to easily slide the Pickup Assembly into the chassis. 2 Make sure that the Pickup Assembly is seated properly in the locating slots (callout 3). 3 Reconnect the 3 cables that are located at the bottom-right side of the Pickup Assembly (callout 1). C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 357,Power Supply
1 Remove the Back and Left Covers from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see figure 6-65 and figure 6-66). Figure 6-74 2000-sheet Input Tray Power Supply 2 Locate the cable that runs from the Controller PCA on the 2000-sheet Input Tray to the unit’s Power Supply (Figure 6-74, callout 1). Disconnect the cable from the Power Supply by pushing on the retaining tab that is located behind the cable connector (callout 2). 3 Remove the 2 screws that secure the Power Supply to the chassis (callout 3). 4 Lift the Power Supply upward to clear the locating tabs underneath, and then slide the Power Supply to the left to free it from the chassis (callout 4). 358 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,To Reinstall:
1 Carefully align the locating tabs so that they are positioned correctly. 2 Reconnect the cable that runs from the Power Supply to the Controller PCA on the 2000-sheet Input Tray (callout 1). The cable connector is seated properly when it clicks. C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 359,Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers
Three rollers in the 2000-sheet Input Tray pick up paper and feed it to the printer: ● The Pickup Roller is the upper-forward roller (Figure 6-75, callout 1). ● The Feed Roller is the upper-rear roller (callout 2). ● The Separation Roller is the lower roller (callout 3). Note The Feed and Separation Rollers in the 2000-sheet Input Tray are interchangeable with each other and with the Feed and Separation Rollers in trays 2 and 3 on the printer. Additionally, the Pickup Roller in the 2000-sheet Input Tray is interchangeable with the Pickup Rollers in trays 2 and 3 on the printer. The Feed and Separation Rollers have protruding retaining tabs that secure the rollers to their respective shafts. The retaining tab on the Pickup Roller is recessed. The Feed and Separation Rollers must be replaced every 350,000 images. The two rollers are included in the printer maintenance kit C3914A (110V), C3915A (220V). The kit contains all the necessary parts for the required user maintenance procedure. 360 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-75 2000-sheet Input Tray Rollers: Pickup, Feed, and SeparationTo Remove the Feed and Separation Rollers
1 Open the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) on the 2000-sheet Input Tray. 2 Locate the rollers inside the tray cavity. To remove a roller, pinch the retainer tabs together and slide the roller off the shaft. Remove the Feed Roller (upper-rear roller) first. Then remove the Separation Roller (lower roller).To Remove the Pickup Roller
1 Open the paper tray on the 2000-sheet Input Tray to the stops. 2 Remove the Left Cover from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see figure 6-66 on page 345). 3 Locate the Pickup Roller inside the tray cavity. 4 Pinch the recessed retainer tab on the roller, and slide the roller off the shaft. Note Reassembly notes are on the next page. C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 361,To Reinstall:
1 If all three rollers were removed, reinstall the Pickup Roller first (callout 1). 2 When reinstalling the Feed and Separation Rollers, install the Separation Roller (lower roller) first (callout 3). Then install the Feed Roller (upper-rear roller) (callout 2). 3 When installing a roller, listen for a click. It signals that the roller is secured onto the shaft. 362 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Paper Quantity Switch Assembly
1 Remove the Back Cover from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see figure 6-65 on page 344). 2 Locate the cable that runs from the Paper Quantity Switch Assembly on the 2000-sheet Input Tray to the unit’s Controller PCA. Disconnect the cable from the Controller PCA (J205 connector), and then free the cable from the cable clips that secure it to the chassis (Figure 6-76, callout 1). 3 Remove the 1 screw (callout 2) and the metal retaining spring (callout 3) that hold the switch assembly in place. 4 Pull the switch assembly out of its cavity (Figure 6-77, callout 1).To Reinstall:
1 When reinstalling the metal retaining spring that holds the switch assembly in place (Figure 6-76, callout 2), seat the retaining spring onto the locating pins that are on the chassis. 2 Reconnect the switch assembly’s cable to the J205 connector on the Controller PCA (Figure 6-76, callout 1).Paper Size Switch Assembly
1 Remove the Back Cover from the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see Figure 6-65). 2 Locate the cable that runs from the Paper Size Switch Assembly on the 2000-sheet Input Tray to the unit’s Controller PCA. Disconnect the cable from the Controller PCA (J204 connector) (Figure 6-76, callout 4). 3 Remove the 1 screw (callout 5) and the metal retaining spring (callout 6) that hold the switch assembly in place. 4 Pull the switch assembly out of its cavity (Figure 6-77, callout 2).To Reinstall:
1 When reinstalling the metal retaining spring that holds the switch assembly in place (Figure 6-76, callout 5), seat the retaining spring onto the locating pins on the chassis. 2 Reconnect the switch assembly’s cable to the J204 connector on the Controller PCA (Figure 6-76, callout 4). C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 363, Figure 6-76 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Size and Paper Quantity Switch (1 of 2) 364 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-77 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Size and Paper Quantity Switch Assemblies (2 of 2) C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 365,Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU)
Figure 6-78 2000-sheet Input Tray Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) 1 Open the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) on the 2000-sheet Input Tray. 2 Rotate the 2 plastic cams on the VTU hinges toward the 2000-sheet Input Tray to the secure position (Figure 6-78, callout 1). WARNING! Do not release the plastic cams from the secure position while the VTU is off. The springs on the cams are very strong and may cause injury. 3 Locate the 2 cables that run from the VTU to the chassis at the right side’s upper-back corner (Figure 6-78, callout 2) and disconnect the 2 cables from the chassis. 4 Remove the 2 screws that secure the VTU to the chassis: 1 screw near each end of the VTU (Figure 6-78, callout 3). 5 Lift the VTU straight up to clear the metal locating tabs on the chassis. Note Reassembly notes are on the next page. 366 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,To Reinstall:
WARNING! Release the plastic cams only after tightening the screws that secure the VTU to the chassis. 1 Before tightening the screws, make sure that the metal locating tabs are in place. 2 Reconnect the cables that run from the VTU to the chassis at the right side’s upper-back corner (callout 2). C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 367,Tension Springs
1 Remove the Left Cover of the 2000-sheet Input Tray (see figure 6-66 on page 345). Figure 6-79 2000-sheet Input Tray Tension Springs 2 Open the paper tray on the 2000-sheet Input Tray all the way to the stops. 3 Inside the tray cavity, locate and remove the 2 springs on the tray runners: 1 spring on left runner (left side of the chassis) and 1 spring on the right runner (right side of the chassis) as shown in Figure 6-79. 368 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Locating Pins
1 Remove the printer from the 2000-sheet Input Tray. Figure 6-80 2000-sheet Input Tray Locating Pins 2 Locate the 3 Locating Pins on the top of the 2000-sheet Input Tray (Figure 6-80, callout 1), and remove the 2 screws on each Locating Pin. 3 To remove the Locating Pins lift them straight up. C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 369,Casters and Stabilizing Feet
1 Remove the printer from the 2000-sheet Input Tray. Figure 6-81 2000-sheet Input Tray Casters 2 Tip the 2000-sheet Input Tray onto its left side. 3 Locate the 4 Casters, 1 on each corner of the chassis (Figure 6-81, callout 1). 4 Remove a Caster by removing the 2 screws that hold the Caster to the chassis (callout 2). Note To remove the stabilizing feet press as shown in callout 3, and release the stabilizing feet.To Reinstall:
1 Tighten the screws securely when reinstalling each caster (callout 2). 370 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Adjustable Foot
1 Remove the printer from the 2000-sheet Input Tray. Figure 6-82 2000-sheet Input Tray Adjustable Foot 2 Tip the 2000-sheet Input Tray onto its left side. 3 Locate the Adjustable Foot (Figure 6-82, callout 1), and remove the 2 screws that secure the Adjustable Foot to the chassis (callout 2). C4265-90907 2000-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 371, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Removal andReplacement
Note Reinstallation is generally the reverse of the removal process. Carefully follow any additional instructions provided under “To Reinstall.” Orientation of the2x500-sheet Input Tray .373 Back Cover .374 Left Cover .375 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU).376 Right Cover .379 Front Top Cover .382 Trays 4 and 5 .385 Pickup Assembly .387 Paper Deck Drive Assembly .389 Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers .391 Controller PCA .392 Tray-Size Sensing PCA .393 Power Supply.395 Main Cable .396 Storage Paper Tray .398 Front Door (Storage Area).399 Casters .400 Foot Tip and Adjustable Foot Tip (Stabilizing Feet).401 Locating Pins.402 Front LED PCA .403 372 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Orientation of the2x500-sheet Input Tray
Figure 6-83 Orientation of the2x500-sheet Input Tray To remove the2x500-sheet Input Tray from the printer, see page 261. C4265-909072x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 373,Back Cover
Figure 6-84 Back Cover 1 Remove 4 screws (callout 1). 2 Release and pull out the Back Cover. Note The reassembly procedure is the reverse of the disassembly procedure. 374 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Left Cover
Figure 6-85 Left Cover 1 Unplug the power cord and C-link interface cables, and remove the Back Cover (page 374). 2 Remove 2 screws (callout 1). 3 Release the tab next to the power supply (callout 2). 4 Tip the cover outward to release the screw holders (callout 3). 5 Lift the cover up to clear the bottom tabs (callout 4). Note Align the screw holes with their holders when you replace the cover. C4265-909072x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 375,Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU)
Figure 6-86 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) (1 of 3) 1 Open the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) on the2x500-sheet Input Tray. 2 Unplug the 3 cables that connect the VTU to the chassis (callout 1). WARNING! Do not release the plastic cams from the secure position while the VTU is off. The springs on the cams are very strong and may cause injury. 3 Slide the 2 plastic cams on the VTU hinges to the secure position (callout 2). 376 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-87 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) (2 of 3) 4 Remove the 2 screws that secure the VTU to the chassis: 1 screw near each end of the VTU (callout 1). 5 Lift the VTU straight up to clear the metal tabs on the chassis. C4265-909072x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 377,To reinstall:
Figure 6-88 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) (3 of 3) WARNING! To avoid injury, tighten the screws that secure the VTU to the chassis before you release the plastic cams. 1 Insert the metal tabs into the slots of the chassis (callout 1). 2 Tighten the screws (callout 2). 3 Release the cams (callout 3). 4 Plug in the 3 cables that connect the VTU to the chassis (callout 4). 378 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Right Cover
Figure 6-89 Right Cover (1 of 3) 1 Remove the Back Cover (page 374) and the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) (page 376). 2 Remove 3 screws (callout 1). C4265-909072x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 379, Figure 6-90 Right Cover (2 of 3) 3 Release the left side of the Right Cover from the tabs, and remove it (callout 1). 380 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-91 Right Cover (3 of 3) 4 Release the tab from the right side of the Right Cover as shown in figure 6-91 (callout 1). 5 Lift the Right Cover up to clear the tabs at the bottom. C4265-909072x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 381,Front Top Cover
Figure 6-92 Front Top Cover (1 of 3) 1 Remove the printer from the2x500-sheet Input Tray. 2 Remove 2 screws (callout 1). 3 Remove Top Cover. The Top Cover has a label. 382 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-93 Front Top Cover (2 of 3) 4 From inside of the unit release the central tabs, as shown in figure 6-93. C4265-909072x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 383, Figure 6-94 Front Top Cover (3 of 3) 5 Push the front top cover to the left to release the remaining tabs. Note Align the pins when you replace the Top Front Cover. 384 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Trays 4 and 5
Figure 6-95 Trays 4 and 5 (1 of 2) 1 Open the tray and pull it out to the stop (callout 1). 2 As you pull out the tray, tip up the end as shown in callout 2 to release the stop mechanism at the right rear of the tray. C4265-909072x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 385, Figure 6-96 Trays 4 and 5 (2 of 2)To Reinstall:
1 Tip the end of the tray downward. Align the guides with the left rear corner of the tray and the arrow at the lower rear center of the tray (callout 1). 2 Insert the tray no more than 2 inches (5 centimeters) into the chassis. 3 Tip the end of the tray up to engage the tray stop mechanism (located at the right rear of the tray opening). 4 Slide the tray until it latches into place. 386 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Pickup Assembly
Figure 6-97 Pickup Assembly (1 of 2) 1 Remove trays 4 and 5 (page 385), the Right Cover (page 379), and the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) page 376. 2 Remove 6 screws (callout 1). 3 Remove the cable from the bracket (callout 2). C4265-909072x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 387, Figure 6-98 Pickup Assembly (2 of 2) 4 Carefully slide the Pickup Assembly straight out, supporting it until you can reach the connector (callout 1). 5 Unplug the connector (callout 2). 388 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Paper Deck Drive Assembly
Figure 6-99 Paper Deck Drive Assembly (1 of 2) 1 Remove the Back Cover (page 374), Trays 4 and 5 (page 385), and the Pickup Assembly (page 387). 2 Remove 3 screws (callout 1). 3 Unplug the connector (callout 2). C4265-909072x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 389, Figure 6-100 Paper Deck Drive Assembly (2 of 2) 4 Reach into the right side of the input device. Pull the paper deck drive assembly to the left, and then pull it straight out (callout 1). 390 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers
There are three rollers in this assembly. The upper forward roller is the Pickup Roller, the upper rear roller is the Feed Roller, and the lower roller is the Separation Roller. The Feed and Separation Rollers are interchangeable with each other and between the trays. The Pickup Roller is interchangeable with the Pickup Rollers in Trays 2 and 3. ● Pickup Roller: figure 6-101, callout 1 ● Feed Roller: figure 6-101, callout 2 ● Separation Roller: figure 6-101, callout 3 Figure 6-101 Pickup, Feed, and Separation Rollers 1 Remove the paper tray. Note The Feed and Separation Rollers have protruding retaining tabs, and the Pickup Roller has recessed retaining tabs. 2 From inside the tray cavity, remove the rollers by pinching the retainer tabs together and sliding the roller off the shaft. C4265-909072x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 391,Controller PCA
Figure 6-1022x500-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA 1 Remove the Back Cover (page 374) and the Left Cover (page 375). 2 Unplug all 7 connectors. 3 Remove 4 hex screws from the C-link connectors (callout 1). 4 Remove the 2 screws that hold the PCA to the metal base (callout 2). 5 Release the tabs at the left side (callout 3), and remove the PCA. 392 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Tray-Size Sensing PCA
Figure 6-103 Tray-Size Sensing PCA (1 of 2) 1 Remove the Back Cover (page 374) and the Controller PCA (page 392). 2 Remove 1 screw (callout 1) from the size-sensing PCA’s holder. 3 To remove the size-sensing PCA’s holder, use a flat blade screwdriver to release the top and bottom tabs (callout 2) from the slots in the metal. C4265-909072x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 393, Figure 6-104 Tray-Size Sensing PCA (2 of 2) 4 To remove the size-sensing PCA, unplug the cable from the PCA, remove 3 screws from each PCB, and remove the PCA (callout 1). 394 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Power Supply
Figure 6-105 Power Supply 1 Remove the Back Cover (page 374) and the Left Cover (page 375). 2 Unplug the connector (callout 1) from the power supply. (Notice that the release tab is at the rear of the connector.) 3 Remove 2 screws (callout 2). 4 Lift the power supply off the locating pins, and slide it to the left to free it from the chassis.To Reinstall:
1 Align the power supply with the locating tabs. 2 Plug in the power supply connector. C4265-909072x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 395,Main Cable
Figure 6-106 Main Cable (1 of 2) 1 Remove the Back Cover (page 374), the Left Cover (page 375), and Trays 4 and 5 (page 385). 2 Unplug both size-sensing connectors inside the2x500-sheet Input Tray cavity (callout 1). 396 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-107 Main Cable (2 of 2) 3 Unplug 4 connectors from the controller PCA (callout 1), 3 from the Vertical Transfer Unit (callout 2), 1 from the Paper Deck Assembly (callout 3), and 2 from the size-sensing PCAs (callout 4). 4 Remove the main cable from the plastic clips. C4265-909072x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 397,Storage Paper Tray
Figure 6-108 Storage Paper Tray 1 Remove Trays 4 and 5 (page 385). 2 Open the storage tray door. 3 Use a flat-blade screwdriver to release the tabs inside the holes indicated in figure 6-108 (callout 1). Note Be sure to align the door’s latch when you replace the Storage Paper Tray. 398 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Front Door (Storage Area)
Figure 6-109 Front Door (Storage Area) 1 Remove the storage tray (page 398). 2 Release the tabs on both ends (callout 1). 3 Release the storage tray's door from the center tab (callout 2). C4265-909072x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 399,Casters
Figure 6-110 Casters 1 Remove the printer from the input device (page 261). 2 Place the2x500-sheet Input Tray on its left side and locate the casters (callout 1). 3 Remove 2 screws from each caster and release the casters from the frame. Note Be sure to tighten the screws securely when you re-install the new caster. 400 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Foot Tip and Adjustable Foot Tip (Stabilizing Feet)
Figure 6-111 Foot Tip and Adjustable Foot Tip 1 Remove the printer from the input device (page 261). 2 Place the2x500-sheet Input Tray on its left side and locate the Adjustable Foot Tip (callout 2). 3 Press at the location of callout 1 and slide the foot out to remove it. 4 Remove 2 screws that hold the stationary Foot Tip to the frame (callout 3). Remove the stationary Foot Tip. C4265-909072x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 401,Locating Pins
Figure 6-112 Locating Pins 1 Remove the printer from the input device (page 261). 2 Remove 2 screws each from the 3 locating pins (callout 1). 402 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Front LED PCA
Figure 6-113 Front LED PCA 1 Remove the printer from the input device. 2 Remove the Front Top Cover. See table 6-92 on page 382. 3 Remove 1 screw (callout 1). 4 Release the tabs and remove the LED PCA (callout 2). 5 Unplug the cable from the PCA (callout 3). Note Guide the cable into the correct position when you replace it. C4265-909072x500-sheet Input Tray Removal and Replacement 403,Envelope Feeder
With the printer turned off and unplugged, slide the Envelope Feeder up and out of the printer. 404 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal andReplacement
Note Reinstallation is generally the reverse of the removal process. Carefully follow any additional instructions provided under “To Reinstall.” Orientation of the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox .406 Front Cover .407 Back Cover .410 Top Cover .412 Controller PCA .416 Power Supply.417 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) .418 Face-down Bins.423 Empty Bin Sensor PCA .426 Full Bin and Interlock Sensor PCA .428 LED PCA .430 Face-up Sensors PCA.431 Reversing Mechanism Motor.432 Face-up/Diverter Assembly (Flipper) .434 Short Tray 7 .437 Solenoid Reversing Mechanism .438 Flipper Solenoid .439 Handle .440 Latching Mechanism .441 Cover Latch .442 C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 405,Orientation of the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox
Figure 6-114 Orientation of the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Note Before you begin any removal or replacement procedure, turn off all equipment and unplug the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox power supply cable. To remove the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox from the printer, see page 263. 406 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Front Cover
Figure 6-115 Front Cover (1 of 3) 1 Remove 2 screws (callout 1). C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 407, Figure 6-116 Front Cover (2 of 3) 2 Loosen the right side of the Front Cover and pull it toward you approximately 0.5 inch (1.5 centimeters) to clear the tabs (callout 1). 3 Release and clear the tabs on the left side of the Front Cover (callout 2). 408 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-117 Front Cover (3 of 3) CAUTION Be careful not to damage the handle as you remove or replace the cover. The handle can easily catch on the cover. 4 To clear the handle, rotate the Front Cover to the right, and remove it as shown in figure 6-117.To replace
Note the Caution above. C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 409,Back Cover
Figure 6-118 Back Cover (1 of 2) 1 Remove 2 screws (callout 1). 410 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-119 Back Cover (2 of 2) 2 Pull the Back Cover toward you to remove it. Release corner indicated by callout 1 first. C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 411,Top Cover
Figure 6-120 Top Cover (1 of 4) 1 Remove the Front Cover (page 407) and the Back Cover (page 410). 2 Open the Top Cover, and remove the Top Cover's screw and bushing (callout 1). 3 Remove the grounding screw (callout 2). 412 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-121 Top Cover (2 of 4) 4 Remove the screw from the Face-up Bin-Full PCA (callout 1). C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 413, Figure 6-122 Top Cover (3 of 4) 5 To take out the flag, push down the plastic shaft carefully, as shown in callout 1. 414 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-123 Top Cover (4 of 4) 6 To remove the Top Cover lift the right side first as shown. C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 415,Controller PCA
Figure 6-124 Mailbox Controller PCA 1 Remove the Back Cover (page 410). 2 Unplug 8 connectors from the Controller PCA (callout 1). 3 To unplug connector J202, pry it open with a flat blade screwdriver (callout 2). 4 Remove 1 screw from the Controller PCA below Connector J3 (callout 3). 5 Remove the PCA from its 2 plastic pins (callout 4). 6 Remove 1 screw from the plate (callout 5). 7 Remove 4 hex screws from the connectors on the metal plate (callout 6). 8 Remove the PCA controller. Note When you replace the Controller PCA, be sure to replace connector J202 (callout 1 in Figure 6-125). 416 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Power Supply
Figure 6-125 Mailbox Power Supply 1 Remove the Back Cover (page 410). 2 Release connector J202 with a flat blade screwdriver and unplug it (callout 1). 3 At the bottom of the power supply, unplug J201 (callout 2). 4 Remove 2 screws (callout 4). 5 Pull the power supply from its 3 plastic pins (callout 3). Note Be sure to replace connector J202 (callout 1) and the Power Supply Connector (callout 2). C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 417,Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover)
Figure 6-126 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) (1 of 5) 1 Remove the Front Cover (page 407) and the Back Cover (page 410). 2 Remove 1 screw from the front side and the bushing below the handle (callout 1). 418 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-127 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) (2 of 5) 1 Grasp the green handle and pull up slightly, then out, to open the Paper Path Cover. C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 419, Figure 6-128 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) (3 of 5) 420 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-129 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) (4 of 5) 2 Remove the screw of the holding arm (callout 1) and release the arm from the Right Door Assembly. C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 421, Figure 6-130 Right Door Assembly (Paper Path Cover) (5 of 5) 3 Release the plastic pin on the right end, and remove the paper path cover as shown in figure 6-130 (callout 1). 422 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Face-down Bins
Figure 6-131 Face-down Bins (1 of 3) Note Bins 1, 3, and 5 each have one rear roller. Bins 2, 4, and 6 each have 2 rear rollers. The procedure for removing and replacing each of the bins is the same. 1 Remove the Front Cover (page 407) and the Back Cover (page 410). 2 Open the right door assembly (paper path cover) (callout 1) Or Remove the right door assembly to remove bin 5 or 6. 3 Remove 3 screws at the right side of the unit from the bin that needs to be replaced (callout 2). C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 423, Figure 6-132 Face-down Bins (2 of 3) 4 From the back side of the device, push the bin as it is shown in callout 1. 5 Grasp the bin from the right side, and pull it straight out. Note the position of the tab (callout 2). 424 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-133 Face-down Bins (3 of 3) To Reinstall: 1 Guide the empty bin sensor in the slot at the back side (figure 6-132, callout 1). 2 Make sure that the tabs are in place as shown in figure 6-133 callout 1. 3 Make sure that the holes for the 3 screws align with the holes of the tray. 4 Replace 3 screws (figure 6-131, callout 2). C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 425,Empty Bin Sensor PCA
Figure 6-134 Empty Bin Sensor PCA (1 of 2) 1 Remove the Back Cover (page 410). 2 Unplug J305 (the topmost connector) from the Empty Bin Sensor PCA (callout 1). 3 Remove 2 screws and the metal plates that hold the Empty Bin Sensor PCA (callout 2). 426 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-135 Empty Bin Sensor PCA (2 of 2) 4 Lift up the Empty Bin Sensor PCA to free it from the sensor flags, and pull it out as shown. C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 427,Full Bin and Interlock Sensor PCA
Figure 6-136 Full Bin and Interlock Sensor PCA (1 of 2) 1 Remove the Back Cover (page 410) and the Empty Bin Sensor PCA (page 426). 2 Unplug 4 connectors (J301, J302, J303, and J304). See callout 1. 3 Remove 4 screws from the Full Bin and Interlock Sensor PCA and one screw from the harness (callout 2). 428 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-137 Full Bin and Interlock Sensor PCA (2 of 2) 4 Rotate the PCA toward the right, and then pull it out as shown. Note The reassembly procedure is the reverse of the disassembly procedure. C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 429,LED PCA
Figure 6-138 LED PCA 1 Remove the Front Cover (page 407). 2 Remove 1 screw (callout 1). 3 Unplug J307 from the LED PCA, and remove the LED PCA (callout 2). Note The reassembly procedure is the reverse of the disassembly procedure. 430 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Face-up Sensors PCA
Figure 6-139 Face-up Sensors PCA 1 Remove the Front Cover (page 407). 2 Remove 1 screw (callout 1). 3 Unplug J306 from the Empty Bin Sensor PCA, and remove the Empty Bin Sensor PCA (callout 2). C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 431,Reversing Mechanism Motor
Figure 6-140 Reversing Mechanism Motor (1 of 2) 1 Remove the Back Cover (page 410). 2 Remove 1 screw from the metal plate (callout 1). 432 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-141 Reversing Mechanism Motor (2 of 2) 3 Unplug the motor's connector (callout 1). 4 Remove 2 screws (callout 2) and the motor. CAUTION Do not damage the belt as you remove the motor. Note The reassembly procedure is the reverse of the disassembly procedure. C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 433,Face-up/Diverter Assembly (Flipper)
Figure 6-142 Face-up/Diverter Assembly (Flipper) (1 of 3) 1 Remove the Front Cover (page 407) and the Back Cover (page 410). 2 Open the Top Cover as shown. 3 Remove the grounding screw (callout 1) at the top back side (figure 6-142). 434 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-143 Face-up/Diverter Assembly (Flipper) (2 of 3) 4 Using pliers, release the springs at each end of the assembly (second figure on this page, callout 1). C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 435, Figure 6-144 Face-up/Diverter Assembly (Flipper) (3 of 3) 5 Rotate the assembly upward, and then release side 1 (callout 1) first and side 2 (callout 2) second. Remove the assembly as shown. Note The reassembly procedure is the reverse of the disassembly procedure. 436 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Short Tray 7
Figure 6-145 Short Tray71Place the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox on its side as shown. 2 Remove 2 screws from the bottom (callout 1). 3 Remove the tray. Note The reassembly procedure is the reverse of the disassembly procedure. C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 437,Solenoid Reversing Mechanism
Figure 6-146 Solenoid Reversing Mechanism 1 Remove the Back Cover (page 410). 2 Unplug the cable from inside the bracket (callout 1). 3 Remove 1 screw and the solenoid (callout 2). Note The reassembly procedure is the reverse of the disassembly procedure. 438 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Flipper Solenoid
Figure 6-147 Flipper Solenoid 1 Remove the Front Cover (page 407). 2 Unplug the cable (callout 1). 3 Remove 1 screw and the solenoid (callout 2). 4 Release the solenoid along with the plastic actuator. C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 439,Handle
Figure 6-148 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Handle 1 Release the left end of the spring (callout 1). 2 Release the 2 tabs (callout 2), and re the handle out.To Reinstall:
Be sure the tabs of the handle are properly in place. Push the handle into place until it clicks. Note The reassembly procedure is the reverse of the disassembly procedure. 440 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Latching Mechanism
Figure 6-149 Latching Mechanism 1 Remove the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Handle (page 440). 2 Remove the E-clip in figure 6-149 (callout 1). 3 Move the bushing by sliding it over the shaft, to put it closer to the latching system (callout 2). 4 Slide the Latching Mechanism to the front of the device, and remove it.To Reinstall:
Note Guide the pin through the hole. First slide the shaft into the hole located at the front bottom of the device. The tab on the bushing should be on the top during reinstallation. C4265-90907 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Removal and Replacement 441,Cover Latch
Figure 6-150 Cover Latch 1 Remove the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Handle (figure 6-148). 2 Remove 1 screw (callout 1), and remove the Cover Latch. 442 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement WARNING! For the procedures in this section, the printer and all paper-handling devices must be unplugged. Before attempting to service an 8-bin Mailbox, unplug the power cord from the power source; otherwise, severe injury may result. This printer and paper-handling devices may have sharp edges that could cause injury. Note Reinstallation is generally the reverse of the removal process. Carefully follow any additional instructions provided under “To Reinstall.” Orientation.444 Front and Back Covers .445 Top Cover .447 Power Supply.448 Paper Bins and Blind Cover.449 Flipper Assembly .450 Delivery Head Motor .453 Transport Belt Motor .454 Input Paper Guide .456 Metal Tape and Housing Assembly .458 Controller PCA .460 Anticurl Strings .462 Delivery Head Assembly .464 Interlock Switch .469 Diagnostic LED PCA .470 User Status LED PCA .472 Adjustable and Fixed Casters .474 Attachment Assembly .475 C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 443,Orientation
Figure 6-151 shows the orientation of the 8-bin Mailbox as it is referred to in this section.Top Back Right Left Front Bottom
Figure 6-151 Orientation of the 8-bin Mailbox 444 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Front and Back Covers
Note The procedures for removing the Front and Back Covers are the same. However, before removing the Back Cover, disconnect the Power Supply cable that connects the 8-bin Mailbox Power Supply to the 8- bin Mailbox Controller PCA. WARNING! Unplug the power cord from the 8-bin Mailbox Power Supply, and then unplug the 8-bin Mailbox Power Supply cable from the 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA. 1 Remove the 8-bin Mailbox from the printer (page 261). Figure 6-152 8-bin Mailbox Covers (Front and Back) 2 For each cover, using a small flat-blade screwdriver, release the 3 retaining tabs that secure the cover to the right side of the 8-bin Mailbox frame (callout 1), and rotate the cover outward to release it from the frame. C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 445,To Reinstall:
1 Insert the retaining tabs that secure each cover to the left side of the 8-bin Mailbox frame, and then snap the opposite edge of each cover into position. 446 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Top Cover
1 Remove the Front and Back Covers from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-152). Figure 6-153 8-bin Mailbox Top Cover 2 Remove the 2 screws closest to the upper-right side of the 8-bin Mailbox: 1 screw on the front, next to the user LED, and the other at the back side of the 8-bin Mailbox frame (callout 3). 3 Slide the Top Cover to the left side of the device, and lift it up.See table 6-151 on page 444. C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 447,Power Supply
Figure 6-154 8-bin Mailbox Power Supply 1 Locate the cable that runs from the 8-bin Mailbox Power Supply down to the 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA, and disconnect the cable from the Controller PCA (Figure 6-154, callout 1). 2 Remove the Power Supply from the Back Cover of the 8-bin Mailbox by pressing the plastic retaining tabs that are on each side of the Power Supply (callout 2).To Reinstall:
1 Align the Power Supply with the mounting holes that are on the Back Cover so that the retaining tabs on the Power Supply (callout 2) fit into their respective slots. 2 Reconnect the Power Supply Cable to the 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA (callout 1). 448 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Paper Bins and Blind Cover
The procedure for removing a paper bin and the Blind Cover is the same. Each bin rests in its labeled slot. Figure 6-155 8-bin Mailbox Paper Bins and Blind Cover 1 Remove the Face-up Bin first. Lift up on the outer edge of the bin to clear the retaining notch in the frame, and then pull the bin away from the 8-bin Mailbox frame (callout 1). 2 Remove the Blind Cover. 3 Remove each Face-down Bin, starting at the top and working down in sequence.To Reinstall:
1 Slide a bin into its designated slot, and then lower the bin into the retaining notch in the frame. 2 Replace the paper bins, beginning with the bottom Face-down Bin and continuing upward in order. 3 Place the Blind Cover between Face-down Bin 1 and the Face-up Bin. C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 449,Flipper Assembly
1 Remove all the paper bins and the Blind Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-155). 2 Remove the Front, Back, and Top Covers from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-152 and Figure 6-153). Figure 6-156 8-bin Mailbox Flipper Assembly (1 of 3) 3 Remove the 2 screws closest to the upper-left side of the 8-bin Mailbox: 1 screw on the front and back sides of the 8-bin Mailbox frame (Figure 6-156, callout 1). 450 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-157 8-bin Mailbox Flipper Assembly (2 of 3) 4 Hold down the Jam Access Door while unplugging the ground wire that runs from the Input Paper Guide to the Flipper Motor (Figure 6-157, callout 2). 5 Unplug the Flipper Assembly’s 3 cables from the connectors that are located on the 8-bin Mailbox unit’s back side (Figure 6-156, callout 3). 6 Using a flat-blade screwdriver, release the plastic retaining tab that secures the Flipper Assembly to the top of the 8-bin Mailbox frame (Figure 6-158, callout 4). C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 451, Figure 6-158 8-bin Mailbox Flipper Assembly (3 of 3) 7 Hold down the Jam Access Door, and pull out the Flipper Assembly (Figure 6-158, callout 5).To Reinstall:
1 Hold down the Jam Access Door to reconnect the ground wire to the Flipper Motor (Figure 6-157, callout 2). 2 Route the Flipper Assembly’s 3 cables through the back side of the 8-bin Mailbox frame and reconnect the 3 cables to the connectors (Figure 6-156, callout 3). CAUTION Do not over-tighten the screws that secure the Flipper Assembly to the 8-bin Mailbox frame. The nuts in the Flipper Assembly could rotate in their slots. 452 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Delivery Head Motor
1 Remove the Back Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-152). Figure 6-159 8-bin Mailbox Delivery Head Motor 2 Locate the cable that runs from the Delivery Head Motor down to the 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA, and disconnect the cable from the connector in the middle of the 8-bin Mailbox frame (Figure 6-159, callout 1). 3 Remove the 2 screws that secure the Delivery Head Motor to the 8-bin Mailbox frame (callout 2). 4 Pull the Delivery Head Motor away from the 8-bin Mailbox frame.To Reinstall:
1 Position the motor in the 8-bin Mailbox frame so that the cable grommets face down. 2 Reconnect the motor’s cable to the connector in the middle of the frame (callout 1). C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 453,Transport Belt Motor
1 Remove the Back Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-152). 2 Remove all the paper bins and the Blind Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-155). 3 Release the Controller PCA Assembly from the bottom of the 8- bin Mailbox frame (see figure 6-165 on page 460, steps 1 through 7). Figure 6-160 8-bin Mailbox Transport Belt Motor 4 Locate the cable that runs from the Transport Belt Motor to the 8- bin Mailbox Controller PCA, and disconnect the cable from the J8 connector on the Controller PCA (Figure 6-160, callout 1). 5 Remove the 2 screws (and washers) that secure the Transport Belt Motor to the 8-bin Mailbox frame (Figure 6-160, callout 2). CAUTION When pulling out the motor, be careful to not damage the internal drive belt. 6 Gently pull out the motor. 454 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,To Reinstall:
1 Reroute the cable on the Transport Belt Motor behind the flat cable, and connect it to the J8 connector on the 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA (callout 1). 2 Reinstall the 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA Assembly (see Figure 6-165). 3 Replace the internal drive belt onto the Transport Belt Motor’s gear before replacing and tightening the screws that secure the motor to the frame. C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 455,Input Paper Guide
1 Remove the 8-bin Mailbox from the printer. 2 Remove the Face-up Bin and the Blind Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-155). Figure 6-161 8-bin Mailbox Input Paper Guide (1 of 2) 456 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-162 8-bin Mailbox Input Paper Guide (2 of 2) 3 Hold down the Jam Access Door while unplugging the ground wire that runs from the Input Paper Guide to the Flipper Motor (Figure 6-161, callout 1). 4 Use a flat-blade screwdriver to release the retaining tabs that secure the Input Paper Guide to the upper-right side of the 8-bin Mailbox (Figure 6-162, callout 2). 5 Pull the Input Paper Guide free of the frame (callout 3) while routing the ground wire that connects to the end of the paper guide through the wire’s access hole (callout 4).To Reinstall:
1 Reroute the ground wire through its access hole (Figure 6-162, callout 4). 2 Reconnect the ground wire to the Flipper Motor (Figure 6-161, callout 1). 3 Replace the Face-up Bin and the Blind Cover (see Figure 6-155). C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 457,Metal Tape and Housing Assembly
1 Remove all the paper bins and the Blind Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-155). Figure 6-163 8-bin Mailbox Metal Tape and Housing Assembly (1 of 2) WARNING! The Metal Tape’s sharp edges can cause serious injury. When rewinding the Metal Tape into its housing, hold the tape securely and rewind it slowly. 2 With the Delivery Head Assembly at the top of the 8-bin Mailbox, hold the Metal Tape near the end, and push and release the retainer tab that secures the end of the tape to the top of the 8-bin Mailbox frame (Figure 6-163, callout 1). Then let the tape slowly rewind into its housing. 3 Remove the 1 screw that secures the Static Brush to the Delivery Head Assembly (callout 2), and then move the Static Brush out of the way. 4 Lower the Delivery Head Assembly halfway to the stops. 458 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-164 8-bin Mailbox Metal Tape and Housing Assembly (2 of 2) 5 Using a flat-blade screwdriver, release the plastic retaining tabs located on each side of the tape housing (Figure 6-164, callout 3). 6 Gently pull on the Delivery Head Assembly to remove the end of the tape from behind the rollers that hold the tape in its track (callout 4). Then pull the tape housing toward you to remove it.To Reinstall:
1 Thread the end of the Metal Tape behind the rollers (callout 4), and then pull the end of the tape to the top of the 8-bin Mailbox and reinsert it into place (Figure 6-163, callout 1). 2 Use the guide pins to reinstall the tape housing (Figure 6-164, callout 3). When the housing is correctly positioned, it will click into place. 3 Reinstall the static brush (Figure 6-163, callout 1). C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 459,Controller PCA
1 Remove the 8-bin Mailbox from the printer. Figure 6-165 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA (1 of 2) 2 Locate the power cable that runs from the 8-bin Mailbox Power Supply down to the 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA, and disconnect the cable from the Controller PCA (Figure 6-165, callout 1). 3 Disconnect the C-link cable from the 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA (callout 2). 4 Remove all paper bins and the Blind Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-155). 5 Carefully lay the 8-bin Mailbox onto its front side. 6 Loosen the 1 grounding screw and the 2 self-tapping screws that secure the Controller PCA to the bottom-right side of the 8-bin Mailbox frame (callout 3). 7 Remove the 2 self-tapping screws that secure the Controller PCA to the bottom-left side of the 8-bin Mailbox frame (callout 4). One of the screws is connected to a grounding cable. 8 Open the metal box to reveal the Controller PCA. 460 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-166 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA (2 of 2) 9 Disconnect the 8 cables from the Controller PCA (Figure 6-166, callout 5).To Reinstall:
1 Reconnect the 8 cables to the connectors on the 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA (callout 5). 2 Be sure to reinstall the grounding cable beneath its corresponding screw. C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 461,Anticurl Strings
1 Remove the Back Cover, all the paper bins, and the Blind Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-152 and Figure 6-155). Figure 6-167 8-bin Mailbox Anticurl Strings (1 of 2) 2 At the lower-left side of the 8-bin Mailbox frame, locate the Tension Springs on the Anticurl Strings, and remove the 2 screws that secure the springs to the frame (Figure 6-167, callout 1). 3 Remove the Anticurl Strings from the lower pulleys (callout 2). 4 Remove the Delivery Head Assembly from the 8-bin Mailbox frame (see Figure 6-169). 462 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-168 8-bin Mailbox Anticurl Strings (2 of 2) 5 Release the upper ends of the Anticurl Strings from the Jam Access Door by pushing the retaining tabs that secure the strings to the Jam Access Door (Figure 6-168, callout 3).To Reinstall:
1 Reverse the procedure given above. C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 463,Delivery Head Assembly
1 Remove the Back Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-152). 2 Remove all the paper bins and the Blind Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-155). Figure 6-169 8-bin Mailbox Delivery Head Assembly (1 of 4) WARNING! The Metal Tape’s sharp edges can cause serious injury. When rewinding the Metal Tape into its housing, hold the tape securely and rewind it slowly. 3 With the Delivery Head Assembly at the top of the 8-bin Mailbox, hold the Metal Tape near the end, and release the retainer tab that secures the end of the tape to the top of the 8-bin Mailbox frame (Figure 6-169, callout 1). Then let the tape slowly rewind into its housing. 464 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-170 8-bin Mailbox Delivery Head Assembly (2 of 4) 4 At the lower-left side of the 8-bin Mailbox frame, locate the Tension Springs on the Anticurl Strings, and remove the 2 screws that secure the springs to the frame (Figure 6-170, callout 2). 5 Remove the Anticurl Strings from the lower pulleys (callout 3). C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 465, Figure 6-171 8-bin Mailbox Delivery Head Assembly (3 of 4) 6 On the back side of the 8-bin Mailbox, release the flat ribbon cable from the cable clip that secures the cable to the 8-bin Mailbox frame (Figure 6-171, callout 4), and gently disconnect the flat ribbon cable from the Delivery Head Assembly (callout 5). 7 Raise the Delivery Head Assembly to the top of the 8-bin Mailbox frame. 8 Hold up the Delivery Head Assembly, and remove the 2 screws that secure it to the elevator mounts: 1 screw on each end of the assembly (Figure 6-169, callout 6). The screw that secures the back end is captive. 466 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-172 8-bin Mailbox Delivery Head Assembly (4 of 4) 9 Rotate the Delivery Head Assembly clockwise while guiding the back end out of its access opening (see page 6-172). 10 Release the Anticurl Strings from the pulleys on each end of the Delivery Head Assembly (Figure 6-172, callout 7). C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 467,To Reinstall:
1 Replace the Anticurl Strings into the pulleys on the ends of the Delivery Head Assembly. 2 Reinstall the Delivery Head Assembly onto its elevator mounts and secure it with the screws. Make sure that the locating pins are in place. 3 Replace the Tension Springs on the Anticurl Strings at the bottom of the frame with the T-10 Torx screws (Figure 6-170, callout 2). 4 Snap the Anticurl Strings into the pulleys at the bottom of the frame (Figure 6-170, callout 3). 5 Reconnect the flat ribbon cable to the Delivery Head Assembly, and secure the cable to the frame with the cable clip (Figure 6-171, callouts 4 and 5). 6 Make sure that the Delivery Head Assembly moves up and down freely. 468 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Interlock Switch
1 Remove the Back Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-152). Figure 6-173 8-bin Mailbox Interlock Switch CAUTION Before removing the wires from the 8-bin Mailbox Interlock Switch, note the location of each wire. Replacing the wires incorrectly can damage the Interlock Switch. 2 Inside the back side of the 8-bin Mailbox frame, disconnect the 2 wires from the Interlock Switch (Figure 6-173, callout 1). 3 Remove the Interlock Switch by pressing together the 2 retaining tabs that hold the switch in place (callout 2).To Reinstall:
1 Reconnect the wires in the correct positions (callout 1). C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 469,Diagnostic LED PCA
Figure 6-174 8-bin Mailbox Diagnostic LED PCA (1 of 2) 1 Locate the Diagnostic LED that is on the back side of the 8-bin Mailbox (Figure 6-174, callout 1). 2 Remove the Back Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-152). 470 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-175 8-bin Mailbox Diagnostic LED PCA (2 of 2) 3 Disconnect the 2 flat cables from the Diagnostic LED PCA (Figure 6-175, callout 2). 4 Remove the 1 screw that secures the Diagnostic LED PCA to the 8-bin Mailbox frame (callout 3). 5 Pull the Diagnostic LED PCA away from the 8-bin Mailbox frame. C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 471,User Status LED PCA
Figure 6-176 8-bin Mailbox User Status LED PCA (1 of 2) 1 Locate the User Status LED PCA that is on the upper-front side of the 8-bin Mailbox (Figure 6-176, callout 1). 2 Remove the Front Cover from the 8-bin Mailbox (see Figure 6-152). 472 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-177 8-bin Mailbox User Status LED PCA (2 of 2) 3 Disconnect the cable from the User Status LED PCA (Figure 6-177, callout 2). 4 Pull the LED PCA away from its frame. 5 Remove the 1 screw that secures the LED PCA frame to the 8-bin Mailbox frame (callout 3). C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 473,Adjustable and Fixed Casters
Note The procedures for removing the Adjustable and Fixed Casters are the same. 1 Remove the 8-bin Mailbox from the printer. 2 Carefully lay the 8-bin Mailbox onto its front side. Figure 6-178 8-bin Mailbox Adjustable and Fixed Casters 3 Remove the 1 screw that secures the caster to the 8-bin Mailbox frame (Figure 6-178, callout 1). 4 Remove the Caster. 474 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Attachment Assembly
1 Disconnect the power cable and the C-link cable from the 8-bin Mailbox Controller PCA (see Figure 6-165, callouts 1 and 2). 2 Release the Controller PCA from the 8-bin Mailbox frame, but leave the wire cables connected to the Controller PCA (see Figure 6-166). Figure 6-179 8-bin Mailbox Attachment Assembly 3 Set the Controller PCA on top of the 8-bin Mailbox unit (Figure 6-179, callout 1). 4 Remove the E-clip (callout 2). 5 Release the pivot pin that holds the Attachment Assembly’s rod to the 8-bin Mailbox frame. 6 Remove the attachment assembly.To Reinstall:
1 Replace the E-clip. 2 Reconnect the C-link cable and the power cable to the Controller PCA. C4265-90907 8-bin Mailbox Removal and Replacement 475,Stapler Assembly Removal and Replacement
Note Reinstallation is generally the reverse of the removal process. Carefully follow any additional instructions provided under “To Reinstall.” Mailbox with Stapler, Stapler Removal or Installation .477 Back Plate .479 Stapler Controller PCA .481 Top Cover Assembly .484 Stapler Bed Assembly .485 Hinges .487 476 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Mailbox with Stapler, Stapler Removal or Installation
Figure 6-180 Mailbox with Stapler, Stapler Removal or Installation Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000- sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling Accessories (C4788-90904). The Stapler Assembly is mounted in the 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler, replacing the three Face-down bins and the blind cover. 1 Turn off the printer. 2 Make sure the Delivery Head Assembly is not in the stapler area. It should be in the bottom portion of the mailbox. You can move the Delivery Head Assembly downward gently with your hand. C4265-90907 Stapler Assembly Removal and Replacement 477, 3 Disconnect the C-link cable connecting the mailbox to the stapler. See figure 6-181. Figure 6-181 C-link Cable on Mailbox with Stapler 4 Remove the Face-up Bin (figure 1-2 on page 31). Lift the bin gently to remove it. 5 Lift up on the outer edge of the stapler to clear the retaining notches, and pull the stapler forward out of the frame (figure 6-180).To Reinstall:
1 Slide the stapler into the 4th slot from the top, and lower it into its retaining notches (figure 6-180). 2 Replace the Face-up Bin. 3 Connect the C-link cable from the mailbox to the stapler. Turn the printer on. 478 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Back Plate
Figure 6-182 Back Plate (1 of 2) 1 Remove the Stapler Assembly (see figure 6-180). 2 Remove the Scan Bar by carefully pressing the tab on the scan bar backwards and downwards through the hole of the Stapler Bed (see figure 6-182) with a flat-tip screwdriver, then lift the bar. C4265-90907 Stapler Assembly Removal and Replacement 479, Figure 6-183 Back Plate (2 of 2) 3 Remove the Torx screw joining the Back Plate with the Stapler (see figure 6-183, callout 2). 4 Release the ground cable that is connected to the Back Plate (see figure 6-183, callout 1).To Reinstall:
CAUTION Do not overtighten the screws when replacing the Back Plate. Do not touch the metallic plate edges. 480 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Stapler Controller PCA
Figure 6-184 Stapler Controller PCA (1 of 3) 1 Remove the Stapler Assembly (see figure 6-180). 2 Remove the Back Plate (see figure 6-182). 3 Remove 2 screws located on the right side of the Stapler (see figure 6-184, callout 1). C4265-90907 Stapler Assembly Removal and Replacement 481, Figure 6-185 Stapler Controller PCA (2 of 3) 4 Unplug the cables that are connected to the PCA. Identify their color and size and the ground cables (see figure 6-185, callouts 1 and 2). 482 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-186 Stapler Controller PCA (3 of 3) 5 The board is supported by a hooked tab at the top of the card (see figure 6-186, callout 1). Slide the board to the left and then down.To Reinstall:
1 Slide the board up and then to the right. 2 Reconnect all cables. C4265-90907 Stapler Assembly Removal and Replacement 483,Top Cover Assembly
Figure 6-187 Top Cover Assembly 1 Remove the Stapler Assembly (see figure 6-180 on page 477). 2 Open the Top Cover Assembly, and remove the Back Plate (see figure 6-182 on page 479). 3 Unplug the ground and signal cables from the right side of the Stapler Controller board, being careful to keep them in the cable holder. See callout 1 and 3 on figure 6-185. 4 On each side of the assembly, pull the hinge to release the 2 posts from the retaining notches (see figure 6-187).To Reinstall:
CAUTION Keep the Top Cover Assembly open while reconnecting the cables. Cable damage could occur the next time the cover is opened if the cables are reinstalled too tightly. 484 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Stapler Bed Assembly
Figure 6-188 Stapler Bed Assembly 1 Remove the Stapler Assembly (see figure 6-180 on page 477). 2 Remove the Back Plate (see figure 6-182 on page 479). 3 Remove the Stapler Unit Controller PCA (see figure 6-188 on page 485, callout 1). 4 Remove the Top Cover Assembly (see figure 6-187 on page 484). 5 Remove the wire frame by pushing both arms of the wire frame toward the center to clear the retaining notches and lift. 6 Release the brushes bar from the retaining notches and lifting upwards. 7 Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the top of the Stapler Bed Assembly and push gently to release the latches in the front of the stapler bed (see figure 6-188 on page 485, callout 2). 8 Remove 3 Torx screws that join the stapler bed with the rest of the unit (see figure 6-188 on page 485, callout 3). 9 To remove the Stapler Bed Assembly, lift the edge of the assembly where the stapler unit resides, then gently lift the entire Stapler Assembly. C4265-90907 Stapler Assembly Removal and Replacement 485,To Reinstall:
Replace the Stapler Bed. Replace the Stapler Controller. Replace the actuator for the paper bin empty sensor. CAUTION Make sure that the actuator is oriented as shown in its proper place before replacing the Stapler Bed Assembly (see figure 6-189 on page 487, callout 3). 486 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Hinges
Figure 6-189 Hinges 1 Remove the Stapler Assembly (see figure 6-180 on page 477). 2 Remove the Top Cover Assembly (see figure 6-187 on page 484). 3 Remove the Stapler Bed Assembly (see figure 6-188 on page 485). 4 Release the brushes bar from the retaining notches, and lift upwards. 5 Remove 2 screws joining each hinge to the housing (see figure 6-189, callout 1). 6 Disconnect the 2 cables in the hinge containing cables from the Stapler Controller PCA (see figure 6-185 on page 482, callout 2). C4265-90907 Stapler Assembly Removal and Replacement 487,Duplexer
1 With the printer turned off and unplugged, open the Diverter door on the left side of the printer. 2 Push down the green release lever located at the lower right of the Duplexer and slide it straight out of the printer. 488 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,HP Digital Copier Removal and Replacement
WARNING! Make sure the power is off and the main power to the system has been disconnected before servicing. Note Unplug the HP Digital Copier, separate it from its stand, and place it on a table to perform removal and replacement procedures. Installing the HP Digital Copier .490 Hardware Table .497 Orientation of the HP Digital Copier .499 Copy Module Maintenance Parts .500 Copy Module Skins .505 Copy Module Power Supply/Main Board Assemblies .524 Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies .535 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies .549 For required tools, see page 257. C4265-90907 HP Digital Copier Removal and Replacement 489,Installing the HP Digital Copier
1 Install the HP DigitalCopier on the Optional HP Digital Copier Stand
For detailed instructions on setting up the HP Digital Copier Stand, see the installation guide that came with the stand. 1 Place the HP Digital Copier Stand near the desired location. Note Be sure to leave space for the installation of the accessories. See “Space Requirements” on page 81 for 2 dimensions. It is also important to leave space between the stand and the desired location to allow access to the cables during installation. WARNING! 3 Use caution when completing the following steps. Once you place the HP Digital Copier on the stand, bumping or moving may cause it to tip. The printer must be moved into position immediately after installation of the HP Digital Copier is complete. 2 With one other person, lift the HP Digital Copier and align it with the screws on the HP Digital Copier Stand. 3 With a flathead screwdriver, screw the HP Digital Copier onto the stand. 490 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,CAUTION
Operating the HP Digital Copier with the shipping lock in place might damage the device. It is important that you perform steps 4 and 5. 4 Unscrew and remove the shipping 5 lock. 5 Rotate the shipping lock and reinsert it into the HP Digital Copier in the unlocked position. Note When you replace the shipping lock, you may need to power cycle the printer to 6 move the Carrier Unit into position. 6 To install the output bin, hold the bin vertically (as shown) and push down to attach the bin to the metal guides. 7 Pull the output bin down. For longer paper, flip the bin extension out as shown. 7 8 Lift the input tray up to lock it into place. For longer paper, flip the tray extension out as shown. C4265-90907 Installing the HP Digital Copier 491,Install the printer on the Optional Input Accessory
For detailed instructions on installing the printer onto the optional input accessory, 1 see the installation guide that comes with the accessory.Roll the printer onto the Optional HP Digital Copier
rear view Stand 1 Lift both sides of the printer and gently rock the printer back and forth 2 as you push it onto the stand. 2 When the printer is in place, lock the wheels and rotate the levelers up or down to stabilize the printer. front view 492 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Install the Optional Output Accessory
Note For detailed information on installing the optional output accessory, see the installation guide that came with the accessory and the online user guide that came with the printer. 1 Roll the optional output accessory onto the HP Digital Copier Stand. Note Be sure to properly align the mounting bracket as you roll the optional output accessory onto the HP Digital Copier Stand. 2 After the front two rollers are on the base of the HP Digital Copier Stand, attach the mounting bracket (called out below). 3 Roll the optional output accessory toward the printer until it clicks into place. mounting bracket Figure 6-190 Optional Output Accessory Note Be sure to leave enough space to completely extend the optional output accessory away from the printer. See “Space Requirements” on page 81. For cabling information, see “Communication Link (Daisy Chain)” on page 233. C4265-90907 Installing the HP Digital Copier 493,Install the Copy Connect EIO Board into the Printer
CAUTION Make sure that the printer is turned off. Insert the Copy Connect EIO Board that came with the HP Digital Copier into slot 3 (the top slot) on the printer. (Use the screws that are in the existing EIO cover to install the Copy Connect EIO Board.) Note If a cover is on slot 3, use a phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws. Remove the cover and install the Copy Connect EIO Board. Figure 6-191 Copy Connect EIO Board (slot 3) 494 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Install the Copy Connect Cable
1 Plug the Copy Connect cable into the HP Digital Copier (A). Note See the icon on the back of the HP Digital Copier for correct orientation of the cable. 2 Plug the other end of the Copy Connect cable into the Copy Connect EIO Board (B). 3 Wrap the excess cable as shown in figure 6-192(C).A B C
Figure 6-192 View with HP Digital Copier Stand (preferred configuration)A B
Figure 6-193 View with HP Digital Copier on Tabletop C4265-90907 Installing the HP Digital Copier 495, 1 Install the Y Power CordCAUTION
Y cord main Turn off the printer and HP Digital Copier before you install the Y power cord. 2 main long printer power cord short 1 Plug the main end of the Y power Y cord short cord into the HP Digital Copier. 2 Unplug the power cord from the printer. Plug the power cord into the 3 short end of the Y power cord. 3 Plug the long end of the Y power cord into the printer. Y cord long 496 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Hardware Table
Note The numbers in the “Reference” column are used in the diagrams in Chapter 8. Table 6-2. Hardware Table Part Number Example Reference Description (for kits of 20) B1 TP Screw m3x8PA03002-C282FJ B2 TP Screw m3x6PA03002-C281FJ B3 TP Screw m4x8PA03002-C288FJ B4 Machine Screw w/washer m3x6PA03002-C283FJ B5 Machine Screw w/washer m3x8PA03002-C284FJ B6 Machine Screw w/washer m3 x 35 PA03002-C285FJ C4265-90907 Installing the HP Digital Copier 497,Table 6-2. Hardware Table (continued) Part Number Example Reference Description (for kits of 20)
B10 Machine Screw w/washer m4x8PA03002-C286FJ B15 Flathead Screw PA03002-C287FJ m3 x6 B20 E-ring, Latch Lever (20pcs) PA03002-C254FJ B21 E-ring, Idle Roller (20pcs) PA03002-C253FJ B22 Retainer Ring ADF Lock Bearing (20pcs) PA03002-C255FJ Thumb Screw for Document Cover PA03002-C290FJ Thumb screws for Pick Roller Cover PA03002-C123FJ 498 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Orientation of the HP Digital Copier
Figure 6-194 Orientation of the HP Digital Copier 1 Front 2 Left 3 Back 4 Right WARNING! Remove the power cord before you begin service procedures. C4265-90907 Installing the HP Digital Copier 499,Copy Module Maintenance Parts Separation Pad Assembly
Figure 6-195 Separation Pad Assembly CAUTION Do not bend the pick spring (metal tabs) as you remove the Separation Pad Assembly. 1 Open the ADF. 2 Push the Separation Pad Assembly in the direction of the imprinted arrow (callout 1). 3 Rotate the Assembly down, free of the pick spring (callout 3).To replace
Reverse the above procedure. 500 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Pick Roller Assembly
Figure 6-196 Pick Roller Cover CAUTION As you remove the Pick Roller Cover, do not bend the plastic parts in the middle of the cover (callout 1). 1 Remove 2 Flathead M3x6 thumb screws (callout 2) and remove the Pick Roller Cover. C4265-90907 Copy Module Maintenance Parts 501, Figure 6-197 Pick Rollers (1 of 2) 2 Lift the white tab (callout 1) and push the collar toward the black roller (callout 2). This allows the brass bushing to slide along the shaft. 3 Slide the whole shaft and roller forward to release the shaft from the hole in the rear (callout 3). 502 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-198 Pick Rollers (2 of 2) 4 Lift out the rear end of the roller and release the shaft from the hole in the front. Lift out the entire roller and shaft assembly. CAUTION Do not touch the rubber part of the new rollers. Skin oils or gear lubricant can damage the rollers. Note Important! Retain the brass bushings. Replacement Pick Rollers include the white collar but not the bushings. When you replace the brass bushings on the roller, note that they are keyed flat on the sides to fit correctly in the holes. 5 Remove the front and rear brass bushings if they are not worn and place them on the new roller. Note To remove the second roller, follow the steps above. Note the difference between the rollers to replace the correct roller in its place. C4265-90907 Copy Module Maintenance Parts 503,To replace
1 Reverse the above procedure. CAUTION Do not touch the rubber part of the new rollers. Skin oils or gear lubricant can damage the rollers. 2 Place the brass bushings on the new roller and replace the front end first. 3 Align the rear end of the Pick Roller Cover with the gears first and then replace the cover. 504 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Copy Module Skins Document Holding Pad
Figure 6-199 Document Holding Pad Pull apart the Velcro pads and remove the Document Holding Pad. C4265-90907 Copy Module Skins 505,Paper Chute Flip-out
Figure 6-200 Paper Chute Flip-out CAUTION Do not attempt to remove the screws that hold the paper chute onto the FB Cover Assembly. If the screws are removed, the chute cannot be realigned properly by field service personnel. 1 Bow the tray slightly to free the pins from the hinges (callout 1). 2 Lift the tray out of the slots (callout 2). 506 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Output Tray Flip-out
1 Bow the tray slightly to free the pins from the hinges. 2 Lift the tray out of the slots. Note This procedure is not shown because it is similar to removing the Paper Chute Flip-out (above).Output Tray
Figure 6-201 Output Tray 1 To remove the Output Tray, close the Output Tray Flip-out and raise the tray to the vertical position. 2 Lift the tray straight up. C4265-90907 Copy Module Skins 507,Flatbed (FB) Cover Assembly
CAUTION Do not attempt to remove the screws that hold the paper chute onto the FB Cover Assembly. If the screws are removed, the chute cannot be realigned properly. The Rubber Stop, Paper Chute Flip-out, and Document Holding Pad can be replaced. Do not remove any other parts of the FB Cover Assembly. Figure 6-202 FB Cover Assembly 1 Push in the metal support and lower the chute to the storage position. Open the cover. 508 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-203 Thumb Screw for Document Cover Assembly 2 Remove the thumb screw. C4265-90907 Copy Module Skins 509, Figure 6-204 Removing the Cover from the Posts CAUTION Do not hit the glass as you remove the FB Cover Assembly. 3 The FB Cover Assembly rests on two posts. Slide the assembly to the right to release it, then lift it straight up. 510 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,ADF Latch Cap
Figure 6-205 ADF Latch Cap CAUTION A magnetic screwdriver is required to remove the ADF Latch Cap. 1 Open the ADF. 2 Locate the screw inside the ADF Latch Cap. 3 Depress the ADF Latch Cap until you can reach the screw with a magnetic screwdriver. CAUTION Be careful not to drop the screw. 4 Remove the TP screw (m3x8).To replace
1 Depress the lever for the ADF Latch Cap until the screw hole is accessible. 2 Use a magnetic screwdriver to place the screw in the hole. 3 Replace the ADF Latch Cap and tighten the screw. C4265-90907 Copy Module Skins 511,ADF Cover
Figure 6-206 ADF Cover (1 of 2) 1 Open the ADF and remove 2 TP screws (m3x8) (callout 1). 2 Close the ADF. Note Note the location of the LED (callout 2). Be careful not to damage the LED Assembly underneath when you remove the ADF Cover. 512 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-207 ADF Cover (2 of 2) CAUTION Be careful not to damage the LED Assembly when you remove the ADF Cover. 3 To remove the ADF Cover, pry outward to release the plastic tabs, and then pry the cover upward with your fingers as shown. C4265-90907 Copy Module Skins 513,Front Panel
Figure 6-208 Front Panel (1 of 2) 1 Pry up the corner of the Front Panel overlay with a flat-blade screwdriver. 2 Lift off the overlay. Note The Front Panel can be removed while still attached to the Panel Cover. If this assembly is being removed to access the Flatbed Assemblies, go to “Panel Cover” on page 519. 514 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-209 Front Panel (2 of 2) 3 Remove 1 TP screw (m3x8) (callout 1). 4 Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the slot and push the handle to the right (callout 2) to pry the Front Panel loose, as shown by the arrow. CAUTION Be careful not to pull the connecting cable when you remove the Front Panel. 5 Remove the Front Panel. C4265-90907 Copy Module Skins 515, Figure 6-210 Front Panel Cable Clamp and Front Panel Frame Ground Plate 6 Remove 3 screws. Remove the Front Panel Cable Clamp and Front Panel Frame Ground Plate in order to remove the Ribbon Cable.To replace
Be sure to place the top part of the Front Panel Cable Clamp on the exposed metal. 516 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-211 Front Panel Ribbon Cable CAUTION Handle the Ribbon Cable with care. Always release the connector before you pull on the cable. See the next page. C4265-90907 Copy Module Skins 517, Figure 6-212 Unplugging the Ribbon Cable 7 To release the Ribbon Cable, use your fingernail to gently pull up each end of the connector (callout 1). Unplug the ribbon cable. Note the orientation of the contacts on the cable so the cable is not twisted.To replace
1 Plug the cable into the connector. When the cable is inserted in the connector, the contacts point toward the middle of the Front Panel as shown in Figure 6-211. This also allows the cable to lie flat. 2 Press down the upper center of the Front Panel to engage the tabs as you push the Front Panel to the left, into place. 518 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Panel Cover
CAUTION Do not tip up the HP Digital Copier. Figure 6-213 Panel Cover (bottom view) CAUTION Do not tip up the HP Digital Copier. Slide it to the edge of the table just far enough to access the screws. 1 Slide the HP Digital Copier to the edge of the table. 2 Remove 2 TP screws (m3x8) underneath the Front Panel. 3 Lift up and pull out the Panel Cover. C4265-90907 Copy Module Skins 519,Front Panel Brackets
Figure 6-214 Front Panel Brackets (1 of 2) 1 Remove 3 (brass machine screw m4x8 with washer) screws. 520 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, CAUTION Do not tip up the HP Digital Copier. Figure 6-215 Front Panel Brackets (2 of 2) CAUTION Do not tip up the HP Digital Copier. Slide it to the edge of the table to access the bottom. 2 Slide the HP Digital Copier to the edge of the table. Remove the brackets. C4265-90907 Copy Module Skins 521,Upper Cover
Figure 6-216 Upper Cover (1 of 2) 1 Remove the TP screw (m3x8) from the front right corner. 522 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-217 Upper Cover (2 of 2) 2 Remove 3 screws [two TP screws (m3x6) and one TP screw (m3x8)]. Note For replacement, the screws in the ADF are longer. The ADF is shown open to locate the screws. Always close the ADF to remove the Upper Cover. CAUTION Be careful of the LED PCA and Front Panel ribbon cable when you remove the cover. 3 Lift the Upper Cover straight up to remove it.To replace
Carefully feed the Front Panel ribbon cable through the slot. C4265-90907 Copy Module Skins 523,Copy Module Power Supply/Main Board Assemblies
WARNING! Make sure the power is off and the main power to the system has been disconnected before servicing. See “Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions” on page 256. The Power Supply and Main Board Tray contains the Copy Processor Board, the Power Supply, and the Control PCA.Copy Processor Board
Figure 6-218 Copy Processor Board CAUTION The Copy Processor Board is ESD sensitive. 1 Remove 2 thumb screws. 2 Slide the Copy Processor Board out. 524 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Power Supply and Main Board Tray
WARNING! Make sure the power is off and the main power to the system has been disconnected before servicing. See “Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Precautions” on page 256. Figure 6-219 Power Supply and Main Board Tray (1 of 2) 1 Remove 2 brass machine screws with washers (m3x8) (callout 1). 2 Pull the Assembly out by the handle (callout 2) approximately 2.5 inches (6 centimeters). C4265-90907 Copy Module Power Supply/Main Board Assemblies 525, Figure 6-220 Power Supply and Main Board Tray (2 of 2) 3 Unplug 3 connectors. 4 Remove the tray. 526 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,RFI Cover
Figure 6-221 RFI Cover (inside/rear view) Remove the RFI Cover (Radio Frequency Interference shield) in order to replace the Control PCA, the Power Supply, or the Fan Assembly. 1 Remove 4 TP screws (m3x8) from the rear of the RFI Cover. C4265-90907 Copy Module Power Supply/Main Board Assemblies 527, Figure 6-222 RFI Cover (outside/front view) 1 Remove 3 TP screws (m3x8) from the front of the RFI Cover. 2 Remove the RFI Cover. 528 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Control PCA
Figure 6-223 Control PCA 1 Remove the Power Supply and Main Board Tray and the RFI Cover. 2 Remove 7 TP screws (m3x8). 3 Unplug 2 connectors. 4 Remove the Control PCA. Retain the EEPROM (page 531), Back PCA (page 534) and the Card Cage (page 530). C4265-90907 Copy Module Power Supply/Main Board Assemblies 529,Card Cage
Figure 6-224 Card Cage Note To remove the Card Cage, flip over the Control PCA and remove 4 TP screws (m3x8). 530 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,EEPROM
Figure 6-225 EEPROM When you replace the Control PCA, retain the EEPROM from the old PCA and replace it on the new PCA in order to retain the default settings (such as calibration) for the HP Digital Copier. C4265-90907 Copy Module Power Supply/Main Board Assemblies 531,Fan
Figure 6-226 Fan 1 Remove the Power Supply and Main Board Tray and the RFI Cover. 2 Remove 2 TP screws (m3x8) (callout 1). 3 Unplug the connector (callout 2). 532 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Power Supply
Figure 6-227 Power Supply 1 Remove the Power Supply and Main Board Tray and the RFI Cover. 2 Remove 4 TP screws (m3x8) (callout 1). 3 Remove 2 brass machine screws m4x8 with washer (callout 2). C4265-90907 Copy Module Power Supply/Main Board Assemblies 533,Back PCA
Figure 6-228 Back PCA 1 Remove the Power Supply and Main Board Tray and the RFI Cover. Remove the Control PCA (page 529). 2 Remove 2 TP screws (m3x8). 3 Pull out the Back PCA. Note The board is keyed for correct insertion. 534 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies
Note To access the ADF Unit Assemblies, remove the skins down to the ADF Cover (pages 505 to 512).Optical Unit
Figure 6-229 Optical Unit (1 of 2) CAUTION The Optical Unit is ESD sensitive. 1 Unplug 3 connectors (callout 1). Remove the cables from their routing guides. Note the routing of the cables in order to replace them in the correct positions. (Routing is also shown on page 546.) 2 Remove 1 TP screw (m3x8) and the Optical Unit Tie-down with Pad (callout 2). C4265-90907 Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies 535, CAUTION Do not remove the CCD PCA or any of the screws on the Optical Unit other than the screws mentioned. Do not disassemble the Optical Unit. Figure 6-230 Optical Unit (2 of 2) 3 Holding the Optical Unit, release the ADF lever and open the ADF Assembly 45°. Rotate the Optical Unit as shown (the green board is on top and level) (callout 1). 4 Slide the Optical unit to the left off the slots in the metal bar (callout 2). Note The replacement Optical Unit includes a Back Side Lamp and Lamp Inverter PCA, but not an Optical Unit Tie-down with Pad. 536 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,ADF Lamp PCA
Figure 6-231 ADF Lamp PCA (1 of 2) Note It is not necessary to remove the Optical Unit to reach the ADF Lamp PCA. CAUTION Be careful not to damage the PCA as you remove it. 1 Use a flat-blade screwdriver to pry the tab loose. CAUTION Do not touch the Optical Unit Mirrors. Fingerprints will affect image quality. C4265-90907 Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies 537,To replace
Figure 6-232 ADF Lamp PCA (2 of 2) Note the orientation of the PCA to replace it in the correct position. The PCA fits under the tabs. 538 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,ADF Lamp
Figure 6-233 ADF Lamp Remove 2 TP screws (m3x8). CAUTION Remove the Lamp carefully; it is fragile. Do not disassemble the Optical Unit beyond removal of the Lamp and Lamp PCA; it will be irreparably damaged!To replace
Replace the screw nearest the Lamp cable first. CAUTION Do not over-tighten the screws holding the Lamp in place. Over- tightening the screws can damage the plastic. C4265-90907 Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies 539,Sensor Unit Assembly
Figure 6-234 Sensor Unit Assembly (1 of 3) 1 Remove the Optical Unit. 2 Remove the Separation Pad (page 500). 3 Remove 2 TP screws (m3x8) as shown. 540 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-235 Sensor Unit Assembly (2 of 3) 4 Remove 1 TP screw (m3x8) from each of the 2 cable holders and remove the cables from the cable holders (callout 1). 5 Unplug 1 connector from the motor (callout 2). 6 Remove the cables from the wiring harness sleeve. C4265-90907 Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies 541, Figure 6-236 Sensor Unit Assembly (3 of 3) 7 Remove the Sensor Unit Assembly. 542 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,ADF Motor Unit
Figure 6-237 ADF Motor Unit 1 Remove the ADF Latch Cap (page 511) and the ADF Cover (page 512). 2 Unplug the connector from the ADF Motor. 3 Remove 2 TP screws (m3x8). 4 Move the belt out of the way. 5 Remove the ADF Motor. 6 Remove the belt (see the next page). C4265-90907 Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies 543,ADF Belt
1 Remove the ADF Latch Cap (page 511) and the ADF Cover (page 512). Figure 6-238 ADF Belt 2 Loosen 2 screws (callout 1) and remove the ADF Belt.To replace
1 Place a new belt on pulleys 2 and 3 as shown. 2 Place the belt on pulley 4. 544 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,To adjust belt tension
1 Make sure the 2 screws (callout 1 in Figure 6-238) on the ADF Motor Unit are loose when you adjust the belt tension. 2 To adjust the belt tension, pull the motor up firmly (by hand only). Note It is very difficult to overtighten the belt tension by hand. A belt that is too loose, however, can adversely affect image quality. 3 Maintaining upward pressure on the motor, tighten the 2 screws (callout 1) on the ADF Motor Unit. C4265-90907 Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies 545,LED Assembly PCA
Figure 6-239 LED Assembly PCA 1 Remove the ADF Latch Cap (page 511) and the ADF Cover (page 512). 2 Remove 1 TP screw (m3x8) (callout 1). 3 Remove 1 TP screw (m3x8) from each of the 2 cable holders (callout 2) and remove the cables from the cable holders. CAUTION Do not attempt to unplug the connector from the PCA. It is permanently attached to the PCA on one end. Unplug the other end from the Main Board. 4 Unplug 1 connector from the Main Board. 5 Remove the cable (callout 3) from the wiring harness sleeve.To replace
Note the PCA has 2 holes, one for the screw and one for the locating pin. Be sure to orient the PCA properly with the 2 holes. 546 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,ADF Unit
Figure 6-240 ADF Unit (shown without Optical Unit) Note To get to the Glass Plate assemblies, you can remove the ADF Unit with the Optical Unit intact. (An Optical Unit is not included with a replacement ADF Assembly.) 1 Remove 4 TP screws (m3x6) (callout 1) and unplug 3 cables from the Main Board Tray (shown in Figure 6-220 on page 526). WARNING! Once the ADF latch is removed, if the lever is triggered the ADF can spring open rapidly and pinch your fingers. CAUTION Be careful not to damage the LED Assembly (callout 2) when you are working around the ADF Unit. 2 Lift off the ADF Unit.To replace
1 The ADF is keyed to the Glass Plate Assembly. Make sure it fits properly in its place before you replace the screws. C4265-90907 Copy Module ADF Unit Assemblies 547, 2 Always perform an offset adjustment whenever you replace the ADF. See “Adjusting the Copy Module” on page 175. 548 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies
Note To access the Flatbed Assemblies, remove the skins (starting on page 505), including the Front Panel (starting on page 514) and the ADF Unit Assemblies (starting on page 535).Front Panel Frame Ground Spring
Figure 6-241 Front Panel Frame Ground Spring 1 Remove 2 TP screws (m3x8). 2 Remove the spring. C4265-90907 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 549,Output Tray Brackets
Figure 6-242 Output Tray Brackets Remove 1 TP screw (m3x8) from each bracket and remove the bracket. 550 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Glass Plate Assembly
Figure 6-243 Glass Plate Assembly 1 Remove the ADF Unit (page 547). Output Tray Brackets and open the Power Supply and Main Board Tray. 2 Remove 2 TP screws (m3x8) as shown. CAUTION Remove the Glass Plate Assembly carefully; it is breakable. 3 Remove the Glass Plate Assembly. C4265-90907 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 551, Figure 6-244 Idle Roller Coil Spring Remove the Idle Roller Coil Spring.To replace
Align the Idle Roller Coil Spring on the pin and press it into place. 552 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Home Position Sensor
Figure 6-245 Home Position Sensor (1 of 2) 1 Move the Carrier Unit away from the sensor. C4265-90907 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 553, Figure 6-246 Home Position Sensor (2 of 2) 2 From underneath, pry the tabs to release the sensor. 3 Unplug the connector. (The cable is included with the Junction PCA.) 554 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Carrier Unit Lamp
Figure 6-247 Dust Cover 1 Remove the Carrier Unit Dust Cover.To replace
Place the dust cover shiny side down and underneath the long metal tab. C4265-90907 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 555, Figure 6-248 Lamp (1 of 2) 1 Remove 1 TP screw (m3x8). 556 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-249 Lamp (2 of 2) 2 Unplug 1 connector. CAUTION When you replace the Lamp, be sure to replace the cable as far as possible into the recess of the corner of the Carrier Unit so it will not get pinched or cut. Note For replacement, the rear end of the Lamp goes in first. C4265-90907 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 557,Carrier Unit
CAUTION Do not disassemble the Carrier Unit. Figure 6-250 Carrier Unit (1 of 2) 1 Remove 1 screw from the end of the Carrier Shaft. Note When you replace the Carrier Unit, check the alignment of the rail and rail bushing. The metal bushing should fit into the rail instead of sitting on top. 558 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-251 Carrier Unit (2 of 2) 2 Move the Carrier to the center (callout 1). 3 Pull out the Carrier Shaft.Cleaning and Lubricating the Carrier Unit Shaft
1 If the Carrier Unit Shaft is dirty, wipe it off with a cloth, then relubricate it (see below). Otherwise, be careful not to remove the lubricant. 2 Place an even coating of Terrace Oil 46 (light weight oil) on the Carrier Unit Shaft as needed (for example, if paper dust or other material interferes with movement of the Carrier Unit, or if you have cleaned the shaft). C4265-90907 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 559, Carrier Unit Figure 6-252 Carrier Belt 3 Slide the belt off the Carrier Unit. CAUTION Handle the Ribbon Cable with care. Always release the connector before you pull on the cable. 560 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-253 Unplugging the Ribbon Cable 4 To release the Ribbon Cable, use your fingernail to gently pull up each end of the connector (callout 1). Unplug the ribbon cable. Note the orientation of the contacts on the cable so the cable is not twisted. CAUTION During reassembly, when you insert the Carrier Shaft, be careful not to dislocate the Felt Pad in the Carrier Frame. See page 562. 5 Remove the Carrier Unit. Note The replacement Carrier Unit includes a Lamp, Dust Cover, and pre- lubricated Felt Pad. A ribbon cable is not included. CAUTION If the brass bushing comes off the rail, be sure to replace it so that the rail fits into the bushing’s groove, and the bushing does not sit on top of the rail. If the bushing sits on top of the rail, it can block the Carrier Unit. C4265-90907 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 561,Felt Pad
Figure 6-254 Felt Pad 1 Remove the Carrier Unit Lamp. 2 Insert the Felt Pad as shown. 562 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Feet
Figure 6-255 Feet Pinch the tabs to remove the foot. C4265-90907 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 563,Frame Ground Spring
Figure 6-256 Frame Ground Spring 1 Lift out the Frame Ground Spring.To replace
Align the spring and the grounding plate. CAUTION Do not forget to replace the Frame Ground Spring when you reassemble the HP Digital Copier. 564 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907,Front Lamp PCA
Figure 6-257 Front Lamp PCA 1 Remove the Carrier Unit. The Front Lamp PCA is located on the underside of the Carrier Unit. 2 Unplug 1 connector. 3 Remove 1 TP screw (m3x8). C4265-90907 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 565,Junction PCA and Cover
Figure 6-258 Junction PCA Cover 1 Remove 2 TP screws (m3x8). 2 Remove the Junction PCA Cover. 566 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-259 Junction PCA 3 Unplug 2 connectors. Note For replacement, note the routing of the cables. C4265-90907 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 567,Front Panel Ribbon Cable
Figure 6-260 Front Panel Ribbon Cable CAUTION Do not bend the metal Front Panel Cable Cover. 1 Gently peel off one side of the Front Panel Cable Cover. 568 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-261 Unplugging the Ribbon Cable 2 Remove the Front Panel Cable Clamp and Front Panel Frame Ground Plate (figure 6-210 on page 516). 3 To release the Ribbon Cable, use your fingernail to gently pull up each end of the connector (callout 1). Unplug the ribbon cable. Note the orientation of the contacts on the cable so the cable is not twisted.To replace
CAUTION You must remove the Front Panel Cable Clamp and Front Panel Frame Ground Plate in order to replace the cable. The cable will be crushed if you place it over the top of the clear cover. 1 Remove the Front Panel Cable Clamp and Front Panel Frame Ground Plate. 2 Replace the Ribbon Cable and the Front Panel Cable Clamp and Front Panel Frame Ground Plate. 3 Make sure the Front Panel Cable Clamp lies as flat as possible, allowing the Carrier Unit to pass over without touching the clear part. C4265-90907 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 569,Carrier Belt and Motor
Figure 6-262 Carrier Belt and Motor (1 of 2) 1 Remove 1 machine screw with washer (m3x35) to release the pulley shaft and pulley spring. 2 Remove the Carrier Belt from the pulley. 570 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, Figure 6-263 Carrier Belt and Motor (2 of 2) CAUTION Do not disassemble the Carrier Motor Assembly. 3 Remove 2 TP screws (m3x6) from the bracket by the motor. 4 Lift the motor and unplug 1 connector from underneath the motor. Note The replacement Flatbed Motor Unit includes a replacement motor, a short belt, and a long belt. The cable, pulley shaft, and spring are ordered separately.To replace
1 Reverse the above procedure. 2 To adjust the tension of the Carrier Belt, tighten or loosen the screw shown in Figure 6-262. C4265-90907 Copy Module Flatbed Assemblies 571, 572 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement C4265-90907, 7 TroubleshootingChapter contents
Troubleshooting Process .574 Troubleshooting the Print System.582 Troubleshooting the Printer and Paper-handling Devices.594 Step 1 Power On .594 Step 2 Display .598 Step 3 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages . 604 Step 4 Paper Path Troubleshooting .645 Step 5 Information Pages .651 Step 6 Image Quality.661 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices .681 Diagrams .702 Troubleshooting the Copy Module .717 Step 1 Power On .718 Step 2 Display and Communication .719 Step 3 Error Messages and Problems .720 Step 4 Image Quality.727 Step 5 Paper Path .726 Testing the Copy Module .730 C4265-90907 Chapter contents 573,Troubleshooting Process
The troubleshooting process is a systematic approach that addresses the major problems first and then other problems as you identify the causes for printer malfunctions and errors. If you know the cause of a problem in the printer system, go directly to that area. Otherwise, use the troubleshooting process diagrams starting on the next page. The diagrams illustrate the major steps for troubleshooting the printing system. In the diagrams starting on page 577, each heading depicts a major troubleshooting step. A YES answer to the questions allows you to proceed to the next major step. A NO answer indicates that additional testing is needed. Proceed to the referenced location and follow the directions for that area. After completing the additional testing, proceed to the next major step. 574 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, To avoid replacing parts that are not broken, use figure 7-1 below to isolate the problem. Figure 7-1 Troubleshooting Process C4265-90907 Troubleshooting Process 575, See the flowcharts on the following pages for each of the components of the troubleshooting process: ● Printer System Troubleshooting Process (page 577) ● Printer/Paper-Handling Troubleshooting Process (page 578) ● Copy Module Troubleshooting Process (page 580) 576 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Printer System Troubleshooting Process
Figure 7-2 Print System Troubleshooting Process 1 Printer/Paper-Handling Troubleshooting Process (page 578) 2 Copy Module Troubleshooting Process (page 580) C4265-90907 Troubleshooting Process 577,Printer/Paper-Handling Troubleshooting Pro-
cess Figure 7-3 Printer and Paper-Handling Troubleshooting Process (1 of 2) 578 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, Figure 7-4 Printer and Paper-Handling Troubleshooting Process (2 of 2) 1. Power On (page 594) 3. Paper Path Troubleshooting (page 645) 2. Event Log Pages (page 598) 4. Image Quality (page 661) C4265-90907 Troubleshooting Process 579,Copy Module Troubleshooting Process
123Figure 7-5 Copy Module Troubleshooting Process (1 of 2) 1. Power On (page 718) 3. Error Messages and Problems (page 720) 2. Display and Communication (page 719) 580 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, 456Figure 7-6 Copy Module Troubleshooting Process (2 of 2) 4. Information Pages (page 725) 6. Image Quality (page 727) 5. Paper Path (page 726) C4265-90907 Troubleshooting Process 581,Troubleshooting the Print System Preliminary Operating Checks
Prior to troubleshooting a specific printer problem, you should ensure that: ● The printer is being maintained on a regular basis as described in Chapter 4. ● The customer is using acceptable paper as specified in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. ● The printer is positioned on a solid, level surface. ● The line voltage does not vary more than 10% from the nominal rated value as specified on the Power Rating Label. ● The operating environment for the printer and paper is within the temperature and humidity specifications listed in Chapter 1 of this manual. ● The printer is never exposed to ammonia fumes such as those produced by diazo copiers or office cleaning materials. ● The printer is not exposed to direct sunlight. ● Non-HP components (such as refilled Toner Cartridges, font cartridges, and memory boards) are removed from the printer. Note When moving the printer into a warm room from a cold location such as a warehouse, various problems can occur due to condensation in the printer. For example, if the photosensitive drum is cold, the resistance of the photoconductive layer will be high. This will lead to incorrect contrast. Leave the printer running for 10 to 20 minutes. Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000- sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling Accessories (C4788-90904). 582 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Communication
Ask the customer to run a print job from the host system. If the print job is successful, communication to the printer is ensured.Interface Troubleshooting
Figure 7-7 Communications Link (C-link) Cables, Supported Daisy Chain Connections Note If the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox is sitting on a tabletop instead of on a stand, it is the first device in the daisy chain. All C-link cables have a single dot molded into the device output connector cable end, and two dots molded into the device input connector cable end. Note It is important that the C-link cables are installed in the supported daisy chain configuration as shown in figure 7-7. This is so that the devices are recognized and correctly reported on the Event Log. It is possible, but not recommended, to attach the C-link cables in other configurations. This will rearrange the supported device numbering. Keep this configuration in mind when evaluating the Event Log. C4265-90907 Troubleshooting the Print System 583, If any of the installed devices are not shown on the configuration page, verify that the C-link cabling is correctly connected and functional (figure 7-7) and that DC power is available to the paper handling devices. Check and reseat suspect cable connections. If any of the cables are replaced, you must cycle the power to have the printer recognize the device again. 584 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Network Troubleshooting
This section provides an overview of the printer’s interface requirements. Note Communication problems are normally the customer’s responsibility. Refer the customer to the network administrator for assistance in troubleshooting network problems.Test Message
After the printer is installed, verify communications between the printer and the IBM-compatible computer. Enter the following at the DOS prompt: C:\DIR>LPT1 ENTER (for printing to parallel port #1) The printer should print a directory listing of the C:\ directory.EIO Troubleshooting
The JetDirect Configuration Page shown in figure 7-8 on page 586 contains valuable information about the current status of the EIO accessories. Before attempting to troubleshoot a network problem or notifying your network consultant of a problem, always print a Configuration Page from the Control Panel’s Information Menu. If an EIO accessory is installed, the JetDirect Configuration Page prints too. See the HP JetDirect Network Interface Configuration Guide for detailed explanations of network issues. C4265-90907 Troubleshooting the Print System 585, Network statistics I/O card status IP address IPX/SPX status Node name Figure 7-8 Sample JetDirect Configuration Page 586 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, ● If the EIO JetDirect Card has successfully powered up and completed its internal diagnostics, the I/O CARD READY message will appear. If communication is lost, an I/O NOT READY message appears followed by a two digit error code. Consult the HP JetDirect Network Interface Configuration Guide for further details and recommended action. ● The “Network Statistics” column indicates the status of network activity. Bad packets, framing errors, un-sendable packets, and collisions should be minimal. If a high percentage (greater than one percent) of these occur, contact the network administrator. All of the statistics are set to zero when the printer is powered off. ● A “Novell Status” block should state the Novell printer server name to which the printer is connected. If the Node Name reads “NPIxxxxxx” (xxxxxx = last six digits of the EIO's LAN address), the EIO card has not been configured for a Novell server (as in figure 7-8). This could indicate that the card is operating under an IPX protocol other than Novell. Consult with the network administrator if the Node Name is not present. ● In the TCP/IP protocol block, the default IP address is “192.0.0.192.” It is acceptable to operate the printer with this default address. The error message, ARP DUPLICATE IP ADDRESS may appear in this block. This is also an acceptable error code if the TCP/IP protocol is not being used. Please check with the network administrator to determine the correct IP address for the printer.Verify Host System Operation
Try to print to another known working printer or move the failing printer to a known working location. Verify that the correct driver is installed and operating properly.Verify Network and Server Operation
● Try to print the job to the printer's parallel port. ● Try to print from the host system through the network to another printer. Contact the network administrator for assistance. C4265-90907 Troubleshooting the Print System 587,General Troubleshooting Information
Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000- sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling Accessories (C4788-90904).Miscellaneous Problems and Solutions
The following lists symptoms and typical solutions to those problems. Abnormal noises are evident, such as grinding or chattering when main motor energized. From the toner cartridge area: 1 Replace the toner cartridge. 2 Replace the Main Gear Assembly. See Main Gear Assembly on page 310 for instructions. From Tray 2 or 3: 1 Verify proper paper loading, acceptable media. 2 Inspect the “fingers” on the paper trays to ensure proper paper size detection. 3 Replace the Paper Input Unit. See Paper Input Unit (PIU) on page 314 for instructions. 4 Replace the Main Gear Assembly. See Main Gear Assembly on page 310 for instructions. From 2000-sheet Input Tray: 1 Check the white plastic bushing on Tray 4. The bushing is located on the Tray 4 main drive assembly. The bushing accepts the Tray 4 pilot pin when Tray 4 is closed. Replace if broken. 2 Replace 2000-sheet Input Tray Vertical Transfer Assembly. 3 Replace the 2000-sheet Input Tray Main Drive Assembly. From 8-bin Mailbox: 1 Verify pawls are riding above the output rollers (see figure 7-25 on page 703). 2 Check the (small rollers in the flipper area). 588 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, Will not feed from Tray x when printing from application; paper path test works fine. Verify the correct paper size: 1 Tray 1: From Control Panel Paper Handling Menu. 2 Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5: Remove and reseat the paper fences in the correct position in the failing tray. Excessive Image Skew 1 Remove and reseat the paper fences (front fence in paper trays). 2 Image Skew Specifications: • 1 mm over 260 mm length • First line to leading edge 5.0 +/- 2.5 mm • Text Stretching 1% simplex 1.5% duplex Envelope • Skew 6.0 over 260 mm length • First line on envelopes to leading edge/ left margin 15 +/- 4.5 mm Loses Page Counts, Serial Number. Print the Event Log and look for a 68 error with a page count of zero. Using the Event Log, take the page count shown at the top of the page and add the page count from any/all errors preceding any 68 errors. Use this number and enter it into the Control Panel from Service Mode. Will not print from 2000-sheet Input Tray or2x500-sheet Input Tray. 1 Print the Configuration Page. Make sure that the Paper Handling Controller and 2000-sheet or2x500-sheet Input Tray are listed in the Paper Handling Options section. 2 Verify that power is supplied the to the 2000-sheet or2x500-sheet Input Tray. 3 Run a paper path test from Tray 4 or 5. If the test is successful, the paper size detection switches may have failed or an incorrect size is specified in the application software. 4 Replace the Paper Handling Controller if it is not shown on the Configuration Page. 5 Verify that the C-link cables are connected as shown in figure 7-7 on page 583. 6 Reseat the C-link Cable, and inspect for pushed in pins. C4265-90907 Troubleshooting the Print System 589, 7 Replace the C-link Cable. 8 Replace the 2000-sheet or2x500-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA. Jams when printing envelopes, transparencies, or labels to the 8-bin Mailbox or 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler. The 8-bin Mailbox does not support these media. Direct these media to the Face-up Bin (top bin of the 8-bin Mailbox). Stops printing and hangs on certain jobs. 1 Remove any non-HP Memory DIMMs and retry. 2 Set to 300 DPI and retry. Top 2/3 of portrait page is lighter. 1 Replace the Toner Cartridge and retry. 2 Replace the Transfer Guide. Will not print to Mailbox. 1 Print the Configuration Page. Make sure that the Paper Handling Controller, 2000-sheet Input Tray, and 8-bin Mailbox are listed in the Paper Handling Options section. 2 Replace the Paper Handling Controller if it is not shown on the Configuration Page. 3 Inspect the C-link Cables for pushed out pins. 4 Replace the C-link Cables. 5 Connect the 8-bin Mailbox directly to the printer. If it is now recognized on the Configuration Page, replace the 2000-sheet Input Tray Controller. 6 Replace the 8-bin Mailbox Controller. 7 Replace the 8-bin Mailbox External Power Supply. 8 Replace the entire 8-bin Mailbox. Wrinkling Envelopes 1 Place the Fusing Levers in up position and retry the envelopes. 2 Try new media. Make sure that the envelopes are within specifications. See the HP LaserJet Family Print Media Guide. 3 Verify the Output Destination is the left Face Up Bin. 590 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, Poor Fusing 1 Make sure that the Fusing Levers are in the down position for cut sheet paper. 2 Verify all packing spacers have been removed from inside the printer. 3 Try new media. Make sure that the media is within specifications. See the HP LaserJet Family Print Media Guide. 4 Verify that the proper fusing mode for the media is set in the Control Panel. 5 Make sure that the AC power does not fluctuate out of range during the print cycle. See table 2-4 on page 87. Feeds from incorrect tray when selecting different media for the first page of the job. First you must determine if it is a hardware or a software issue. Run a paper path test from each paper tray to eliminate the hardware. See page 648. If the paper path test fails, troubleshoot the error message. Make sure that the most current printer driver is installed. Select the Print Quality Tab from the printer driver. Click on About. You may find the most current driver in various electronic locations. Check with HP Service and Support. If the paper path test works, it may be a software or user related issue. Perform the following steps: 1 Define the media types that are loaded in each paper tray. This can be done from either JetAdmin or the front control panel of the printer. From JetAdmin 1 Select the Trays tab. 2 Select the correct media type for each tray listed. 3 Click on OK save your changes and exit JetAdmin. From the Control Panel Note To set the paper type for Tray 1, set TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE from the Paper Handling Menu. 1 From the Paper Handling Menu, press ITEM to select a specific tray. 2 Press + until you get to the correct type of media. C4265-90907 Troubleshooting the Print System 591, 3 Press SELECT. 4 Repeat this step for each paper tray. 5 Press GO. 6 From inside your application, choose the page setup option for that application. 7 Select the paper source/type option. 8 Select the correct media source/type for the first page. 9 Select the correct media source/type for all other pages. CAUTION Do not make changes to the driver unless the application does not provide this option. Print job settings selected through your application always override settings made through the printer driver. Printer settings made in the application or print driver always override the corresponding setting made on the printer Control Panel. 10 Print the document. 592 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Paper Curl
Paper curl is inherent to the laser printing processes, as it occurs when paper is subjected to heat. Paper curl tends to relax as the paper cools while resting on a flat surface. The specification for maximum paper curl when the paper is lying flat before print is 0.2 inches (5 mm). Although paper curl cannot be totally eliminated, some steps can be taken to lessen its impact, as suggested in the following table. Table 7-1. Paper Curl Possible Cause Recommended Action 1. Paper Path Try using Tray 1 and output the paper to the Face-up Bin. 2. Paper Surface The recommended printing surface of the page is usually marked on the end of a ream of paper, indicated by a small arrow and the phrase “print this side first.” Load paper in Tray 1 with the recommended printing surface facing up (facing down in Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5). 3. Paper Storing and Over time, paper assumes the characteristics of its storage environment (in a Handling humid environment, paper absorbs moisture; in a dry environment, paper loses moisture). Paper with higher moisture content will tend to curl more. Evaluate the storage conditions of the paper. 4. Paper Type All paper is manufactured differently (different textures, moisture content, drying processes, composition, etc.). Change the type of paper being used and re- evaluate the paper curl results. C4265-90907 Troubleshooting the Print System 593,Troubleshooting the Printer and Paper-handling Devices Step 1. Power On
It is important to have the printer's Control Panel functional as soon as possible in the troubleshooting process so that the printer's diagnostics can assist in locating printer errors. Table 7-2. Power On Defects or Blank Display Problem Action 1. Is AC power available at Verify. See table 2-4 on page 87. the printer's power receptacle? 2. Is the printer's on/off Push the switch to the on position. switch set to on? 3. Are the printer's fans on? Note: Fan operation is significant since all fans are controlled by the printer's DC Controller PCA. When the printer is in PowerSave mode, the (See figure 7-9 on page 596 fans are off. Make sure that the printer is not in PowerSave mode. Press to locate the fans.) GO. Operational fans indicate: 1. AC power is present in the printer. 2. DC power supply is functional (both 24V DC and 5V DC are being generated). 3. DC Controller PCA's micro-processor is functional. NO If the fans are NOT working, turn off the printer and remove the printer's Formatter PCA. Disconnect all the printer's paper handling options. Then turn on the printer and check the fans again. If the fans are still not working, perform the following steps: 1. Verify that all fans are connected to the DC Controller PCA according to figure 7-30 on page 708. 2. Replace the low-voltage DC power supply. See Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS) on page 324 for instructions. 3. Replace the DC Controller PCA. See PCA, DC Controller on page 315 for instructions. 594 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Table 7-2. Power On Defects or Blank Display (continued) Problem Action If the fans are working but the printer's Control Panel is blank, print an YES engine test. See “Engine Test” on page 597.
If the engine test was successful, perform the following steps: 1. Reseat or replace the cable from the Control Panel that is connected to J203 of the DC Controller PCA (see the main wiring diagram in the back of the manual). 2. Replace the printer's Formatter PCA. See Formatter Assembly on page 304 for instructions. 3. Replace the Control Panel assembly. See Control Panel on page 269 for instructions. If the engine test was not successful, verify that there is no paper in the paper path. Retry the engine test. If the engine test is still unsuccessful, replace the DC Controller PCA. See PCA, DC Controller on page 315 for instructions.C4265-90907 Power On 595
, Figure 7-9 Fan Location and Airflow Table 7-3. Fans Fan Name Fan Location Fan 1: Laser/Scanner Fan Exhaust air flows from the back of the printer, on the left-hand side of the fusing assembly. Fan 2: Low-voltage Power Lower right-hand corner of the printer. Supply Fan Fan 3: Formatter Fan (intake) Intake fan below the formatter. Fan 4: Standard Output Directly above the center of the fusing assembly. Delivery Fan Fan 5: MP Tray (Intake) Right side of MP (Tray 1) Assembly Fan Note Control Panel numbers do not correspond to fan numbers (i.e., a fan error ending in .1 does NOT refer to Fan 1). 596 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Engine Test
The engine test verifies that the print engine is functioning correctly. This test is very useful for isolating printer problems since the Formatter PCA is completely bypassed during an engine test. The engine test prints a full page of horizontal lines across the entire printable area. The engine test prints from Tray 3 ONLY and can be activated with the Formatter PCA removed. Note Tray 3 must be installed and loaded with paper to perform an engine test. Also, make sure that the EP toner cartridge is installed in the printer.Engine Test Button Location
The engine test button is located on the DC Controller PCA. It is accessible through a hole at the right rear of the printer. See figure 7-10.Printing an Engine Test
To print an engine test, use a non-metallic object (such as a pencil) to press the engine test button (see figure 7-10). A single test page will print. The engine test will be continuous as long as the button is held in. Figure 7-10 Engine Test Button C4265-90907 Power On 597,Step 2. Display
The Control Panel should display READY, OFFLINE, or POWERSAVE ON. For information about errors displayed, access the Event Log. If the display is blank, see Power On Defects or Blank Display on page 594.Event Log Pages
Use the Event Log to diagnose and troubleshoot printer errors and intermittent failures. You can either print or display the Event Log from the Control Panel’s Information Menu. (Select PRINT EVENT LOG or SHOW EVENT LOG.) (The Configuration Page lists the maximum number of entries in the Event Log.) See figure 7-11 on page 600 for a sample page one of the Event Log. Page one of the Event Log shows the current page count at the left side of the page, with the printer's serial number directly to the right of the page count. The left column is the error sequence number, with the error listed on the right (the highest sequence number is the most recent event logged). The next column is the page count at the time of the error, and the last column is the Personality (PCL or PostScript) column or the Jam Cause at the time of the error. Note The HP LaserJet 8100 series Event Log consists of one page only. The HP LaserJet 8150 series Event Log contains two pages. 598 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, See figure 7-12 on page 601 for a sample page two of the HP LaserJet 8150 series Event Log. Use the following table as a key to the troubleshooting information contained in page two: Table 7-4. HP LaserJet 8150 Series Event Log Page 2 Symbol Explanation L Number of images printed in Low Fusing Mode. N Number of images printed in Normal Fusing Mode. H1 Number of images printed in High 1. H2 Number of images printed in High 2. H3 Number of images printed in High 3. E2E Number of images printed using Edge-to-Edge. TD Toner density setting at the time this page is printed. FM Fuser mode setting at the time this page is printed. AJL Average job length. MJL Maximum job length. S Number of pages printed in simplex (one side of the paper). D Number of pages printed in duplex (both sides of the paper). TC Number of toner cartridges used. PP/C Pages printed per cartridge (up to the last 20 cartridges). PMK Number of pages per preventive maintenance kit (up to the last five kits). PS PowerSave setting at the time this page is printed. See “Printer Message Tables” on page 607 for more information about correcting Event Log messages in the printer and paper handling devices. C4265-90907 Display 599, Figure 7-11 Sample Event Log, page one 600 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, Figure 7-12 HP LaserJet 8150 Series Sample Event Log, page two C4265-90907 Display 601,Print the Event Log
The printer’s internal Event Log stores the most recent errors and can be printed at any time. To print the Event Log: 1. Press Menu until INFORMATION MENU appears. 2. Press Item until PRINT EVENT LOG appears. 3 Press Select to print the Event Log.Display the Event Log
If the printer cannot print or move any paper, follow these steps to display the Event Log. Otherwise, print the Event Log. 1. Press Menu until INFORMATION MENU appears. 2. Press Item until SHOW EVENT LOG appears. Press Select to show the Event Log. 3. Press - Value + to scroll through the Event Log. 4. Write down the error messages. For example: Error number Error code 13.3 PAPER JAM 01 13.3 CHECK RIGHT DOOR 0000006 Page count Appears on display panel Appears in the Event Log 5. Check the Event Log for specific error trends in the last 10,000 printed pages. 6. Ask the customer for any observed error trends. (For example, do paper jams tend to occur in a specific area of the printer?) 7. Record any specific error trends. 8. See “Printer Message Tables” on page 607 and follow the recommended action. 9. If the Control Panel displays READY, OFFLINE, or POWERSAVE ON, go to the next section. If it displays any other message, repeat this procedure starting from step 1. 602 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Interpret the Event Log
See figure 7-11 on page 600 for a sample Event Log. The errors on the control panel and the Event Log codes may not be the same. For example, 13.11 on the control panel may be 13.11 1B in the Event Log. The 1B provides more information about the error. Likewise, if a 50.1 FUSER ERROR is displayed on the Control Panel, the Event Log will record a 50.02.01 error, with the 02 signifying that 2 sensors were blocked. Make sure that you refer to the correct number in “Printer Message Tables” on page 607. When an error is detected in an Optional Paper Handling Device, a 13.11, 11.zz, 22.zz to 13.12,13.22, or 66.xy.zz will be displayed on the Control Panel. Hint Whenever a 13.xx appears on the Control Panel, a good practice is to clear the jammed paper from the printer, press GO to take the printer offline, and print the Event Log. If you cannot print the Event Log, you can still display it on the Control Panel. The last error is the error at the top of the Event Log printout with the highest number in the left-most column. Write the error next to the last error logged. To interpret the Event Log: ● Each individual entry in the log is called an “error,” while all errors occurring at the same page count are called an “event.” See the Recommended Action in “Printer Message Tables” on page 607 for each error comprising an event to gain a clear picture of what took place during that event. Events usually conclude with a time- out or no response from the device (error 66.xy in the Event Log). Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on. ● Use the Event Log table in this section to associate errors in the Event Log with the Control Panel error message. Follow the Recommended Action listed in the Event Log Table starting on page 607 for each error or event. Note It is assumed that any Paper Handling Devices are connected as shown in the C-link Cable Diagram (figure 7-7 on page 583). The errors will be logged with different device numbers if any non-standard cabling is installed. C4265-90907 Display 603,Step 3. Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages
Be sure to read the exact text of the control panel message, including the error message number and the text, in order to locate the error message in the tables. This printer has enhanced information in the control panel. Printer messages displayed on the control panel provide five categories of information. Each message category is assigned a priority. If more than one condition occurs at the same time, the highest priority message is displayed. When it has been cleared, the next priority message will be displayed, and so on. The displayed messages and their priorities are: ● Printer Status ● Warning messages ● Error messages ● Critical error messages ● External Paper Handling Device MessagesControl Panel and Event Log Message Format
The format of Control Panel messages is: ● 13.xy PAPER JAM IN INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICE ● INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICE CONDITION xy.zz ● 66.xy.zz INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICE FAILURE The Event Log messages have the following format: ● 13.xy zz INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICE PAPER JAM ● 65.xy.zz INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICE CONDITION ● 66.xy.zz INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICE HARDWARE MALFUNCTION Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000- sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling Accessories (C4788-90904). 604 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, Note The following are two examples of Control Panel messages, the corresponding Event Log messages, and what the messages mean. These examples do not show the recommended action to follow to fix the problem. See “Printer Message Tables” on page 607 for the recommended actions for these messages. Control Panel Message Event Log Page Meaning 13.11 PAPER JAM IN INPUT 13.11 1B A paper jam occurred in the first C-link device configured. It is an input deviceDEVICE
(2000-sheet Input Tray or2x500-sheet Input Tray) with an error code 1B. This is normally a timeout at an entry or exit sensor. 66.22.09 OUTPUT DEVICE 66.22.09 A hardware malfunction occurred in the second C-link device configured. It is anFAILURE
output device (Mailbox) with an error code 09. This is an external memory error. Note Be sure to print a configuration page to properly identify the input or output device configured. Notice that the error format only identifies the C-link device number and the device type; it does not identify which input or output device is used in the system. C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 605, Figure 7-13 Error Format for Paper Handling 606 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Printer Message Tables
Printer messages are grouped according to the device generating the error. Within the groupings listed below, the alphabetic error messages are listed first, followed by the numeric messages. ● “Engine Error Messages” (page 608) ● “Duplexer Error Messages” (page 643) Input Devices ● “Envelope Feeder Error Messages” (page 627) ● “2000-sheet Input Tray Error Messages” (page 620) ● “2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Error Messages” (page 624) Output Devices ● “7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Error Messages” (page 629) ● “8-bin Mailbox Error Messages” (page 634) ● “Stapler Error Messages” (page 640) ● “Paper Handling Device Controller Messages” (page 644) The following is an example of the format for numerical control panel messages. 13.yy PAPER JAM Device number in Device Type: the daisy chain Input or output device C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 607,Engine Error Messages Table 7-5. Engine Error Messages Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message
13.1 PAPER JAM 13.1 zz Paper feed 1. Paper late jam. Paper Use the Paper Path Test on page did not reach PS2. 153 and page 648 to see if aCHECK RIGHT
problem exists from both engineDOOR
trays. If PS2 is bad, it will fail when printing from Tray 2 or 3. Verify flag movement by manually inserting paper in the sensor path. Replace PS2 or the Paper Input Unit (PIU) Assembly. See Paper Input Unit (PIU) on page 314 for instructions. 608 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Table 7-5. Engine Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message
13.3 PAPER JAM 13.3 XX Paper delay jam. Paper did not reach 1. Remove the toner cartridge,CHECK RIGHT PS1 at the registration area. lift the green handle, and verify DOOR the sensor flag operation.
alternates with 2. Make sure that the sensor isTHEN OPEN AND not broken. CLOSE TOP 3. Replace the registration COVER assembly if necessary. See
Registration Assembly on page 325 for instructions. 13.5 FUSER 13.5 XX Fuser output, paper late jam. Paper Remove the toner cartridge, and never reached PS1403 at the fusing check the path between theOUTPUT, PAPER
assembly. registration and fusingSTOPPED JAM
assemblies. PS1403 on the sensor PCA may be faulty. 13.6 FUSER 13.6 XX PS1402 did not sense the paper. 1. Perform the paper path test to Fuser output, paper stopped jam. verify all input and output.OUTPUT PAPER
Paper never exited the fusing 2. Check the fuser flag at theSTOPPED JAM
assembly. sensor board area. 3. Check the fuser access door. 4. Make sure that the flag is not broken. PS1403 on the sensor PCA, or the delivery exit spring/ gears, may be faulty. 13.9 CHECK 13.9 XX Face-down bin paper late jam. Paper did not arrive at PS1402 when expected. Inspect the pathLEFT DOOR
between the fuser and delivery assemblies. Check the diverter assembly. 13.20 PAPER 13.20 XX The engine could not eject a page in Remove the jam from the the printer. The front panel message location indicated on the controlJAM CHECK ...
(...) will indicate the sensor closest to panel. the paper. 13.A PAPER JAM 13.A XX Paper stopped at the Face-down bin. Check the paper path. This jam is sensed by PS1402 on theCHECK LEFT
sensor PCA.DOOR
20 Error The printer received more data than 1. Press GO to print the can fit in its available memory. You transferred data (some dataINSUFFICIENT
might have tried to transfer too many might be lost).MEMORY
macros, soft fonts, or complex 2. Simplify the print job, or install alternates with graphics. additional memory.PRESS GO TO CONTINUE C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 609
,Table 7-5. Engine Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message
21 PAGE TOO Error The data (dense text, rules, raster or 1. Press GO to print the vector graphics) sent to the printer transferred data. (Some dataCOMPLEX
alternates with was too complex. might be lost.) 2. To print the job without losingPRESS GO TO
data, from the ConfigurationCONTINUE Menu in the printer control
panel, set PAGE PROTECT=ON, print the job, and then return toPAGE PROTECT=AUTO. Do not
leave PAGE PROTECT=ON; it might degrade performance. If this message appears often, simplify the print job. 22 EIO x Error Too much data was sent to the EIO 1. Press GO to clear the card in the specified slot (x). An message. (Data will be lost.)BUFFER
improper communications protocol 2. Check the host configuration.OVERFLOW may be in use.
alternates withPRESS GO TO CONTINUE
22 PARALLEL Error Too much data was sent to the 1. Check for a loose cable parallel port. connection and be sure to use aI/O
This error can occur if the driver you high-quality cable. (Some non-BUFFER
are using is not IEEE-1284 HP parallel cables might beOVERFLOW compliant. For best results, use an missing pin connections or might
alternates with HP driver that came with the printer. otherwise not conform to thePRESS GO TO IEEE-1284 specification.) CONTINUE This error can occur if the driver
you are using is not IEEE-1284 compliant. For best results, use an HP driver that came with the printer. 2. Press GO to clear the error message. (Data will be lost.) 22 SERIAL I/0 Error Too much data was sent to the serial 1. Make sure that the correctBUFFER port. serial pacing option is selected OVERFLOW from the I/O Menu in the printer’s
alternates with control panel.PRESS GO TO 2. Print a Menu Map, and verify CONTINUE that the serial pacing item (from
the I/O Menu in the printer’s control panel) matches the setting on the computer. 3. Press GO to clear the error message. (Data will be lost.) 610 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Table 7-5. Engine Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message
40 BAD SERIAL Error The printer encountered an error 1. Verify the cable connections. while transferring data from the Make sure that the printer’sTRANSMISSION
alternates with computer. The error might have serial configuration is set the occurred for several reasons: same as the computer from thePRESS GO TO
• The computer was powered on or I/O Menu in the printer’s controlCONTINUE off while the printer was online. panel.
• The printer’s serial configuration 2. The serial baud rate setting was not the same as the computer’s. can be accessed from the I/O Menu in the printer’s control panel. 3. Press GO to clear the error message and continue the printing. 4. Turn the printer off. 5. Reseat the EIO card, and turn the printer on. 40 EIO x BAD Error The connection has been broken 1. Turn the printer off, and reseat between the printer and the EIO card the card.TRANSMISSION
alternates with in the specified slot. 2. Press GO to clear the error message and continue printing.PRESS GO TO CONTINUE
41.x Error A temporary printing error occurred. Press GO. The page containingPRINTER ERROR X Description the error will automatically be
alternates with 1 Unknown misprint error. reprinted.PRESS GO TO 2 Beam detect misprint error.
3 See error 41.3. If this message persists:CONTINUE
4 No VSYNC error. 1. Reseat the connections to the 5 Media feed error. Laser/Scanner and the Engine 9 Noise VSREQ error. Controller Board. 2. Replace the Laser/Scanner. See Laser/Scanner Assembly on page 308 for instructions. 3. Replace the Engine Controller Board. 41.3 Error The paper size you are trying to print 1. Make sure that the control is not the same as the control panel panel setting for Tray 1 or theUNEXPECTED
setting for Tray 1. Envelope Feeder is correctlyPAPER SIZE
adjusted for size. (The printer will continue trying to print the job until the size settings are correct.) 2. Press GO. The page containing the error will automatically be reprinted. (Or, you might want to press CANCEL JOB to clear the job from the printer’s memory.)C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 611
,Table 7-5. Engine Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message
50.x FUSER Critical Error A fuser error has occurred. Turn the printer off for at least 20 X Description minutes, and then turn theERROR
1 Low Fuser temperature. printer on. 2 Fuser warm up service. 3 High Fuser temperature. If the error continues: 4 Faulty Fuser. 1. Make sure that the Fusing 5 Inconsistent Fuser. Assembly is installed correctly and is fully seated into its connectors (no bent pins or pins outside their receptacles). 2. Reseat or replace the fuser cable assembly. 3. Replace the DC Controller. 51.x Error A temporary printing error occurred. 1. Press GO. The page X Description containing the error willPRINTER ERROR
1 Beam detect error. automatically be reprinted. 2 Laser error. 2. Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on. 3. Reseat the cables. See the wiring diagrams at the back of this manual. 4. Replace the Laser/Scanner. See Laser/Scanner Assembly on page 308 for instructions. 52.x Error A temporary printing error occurred. 1. Press GO. The page X Description containing the error willPRINTER ERROR
0 Laser/scanner error. automatically be reprinted. 1 Laser/scanner startup error. 2. Turn the printer off, and then 2 Laser/scanner rotation error. turn the printer on. 3. Reseat the cables. See the wiring diagrams at the back of this manual. 4. Replace the Laser/Scanner. See Laser/Scanner Assembly on page 308 for instructions. 612 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Table 7-5. Engine Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message
53.xy.zz Critical Error There is a problem with the printer’s 1. Turn the printer off, and reseat memory. The DIMM that caused the or replace the specified DIMM.PRINTER ERROR
error will not be used. Values of x, y, 2. Try the DIMM in another slot. and zz are as follows: 3. Replace the DIMM that caused the error. x = DIMM type 0 = ROM 1 = RAM y = Device location 0 = Internal memory (ROM or RAM) 1 to 3 = DIMM slots 1, 2, or 3 zz = Error number 0 = Unsupported memory (for example, presence detect bad) 1 = Unrecognized memory (for example, presence detect bad) 2 = Unsupported memory size 3 = Failed RAM test 4 = Exceeded maximum RAM size 5 = Exceeded maximum ROM size 6 = Invalid DIMM speed 7 = DIMM reporting information incorrectly 8 = DIMM RAM parity error 9 = ROM needs to be mapped to an unsupported address 10 = DIMM address conflict 11 = PDC XROM out of bounds 12 = Unable to make a temporary mappingC4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 613
,Table 7-5. Engine Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message
55.x Error A printer error has occurred. 1. Press GO to clear the error X Description message.PRINTER ERROR
alternates with 0 NO_RESET_REPORT 2. Turn the printer off and reseat 1 NO_ENGINE_RESPONSE the formatter board, all DIMMs,PRESS GO TO
2 EXCESSIVE_GLITCHES EIO Cards, and the hard diskCONTINUE 3 LOST_PPRDY_SIGNAL drive.
4 COMMUNICATION_TIMEOUT 4. Check the cable from the DC 5 BAD_TRAY_BIN_REPORTS controller and laser/scanner 6 ECC7_COMMAND_ERROR assembly. 7 INCOMING_PARITY_ERROR 5. Replace the laser scanner 8 OUTGOING_PARITY_ERROR assembly. 9 MISSED_INTERRUPT 6. Replace the DC controller A HUNG_COMMUNICATIONS PCA. B LOST_XISR_ERROR 7. Replace the formatter board. C INVALID_BUS_TIMEOUT D VERY_LATE_ECOMM_ISR 56.x Error A temporary printing error occurred. 1. Press GO. The pagePRINTER ERROR X Description containing the error will
alternates with 1 Illegal input. automatically be reprinted.CYCLE POWER TO 2 Illegal output. 2. Turn the printer off, and then CONTINUE turn the printer on.
3. Check the printer’s configuration. 57.X Critical Error A fan motor failure occurred. All fans Turn the printer off, and then turn are enabled to low speed operation the printer on.FAN FAILURE
at power on. Fans will go into high If the message continues, check speed operation during the print and reseat the cabling between cycle. the fan motors and the DC X Description Controller PCA. 2 Fan 3 - Formatter Fan (intake) 3 Fan 2 - Low-voltage power supply (exhaust) 5 Fan 1 -Laser/scanner (exhaust) Low-voltage power supply (exhaust) 6 Fan 4 - Face-down delivery (exhaust) 9 Fan 5 - Tray 1 fan 58.x Error A temporary printing error occurred. Turn the printer off, and then turn X Description the printer on.PRINTER ERROR
alternates with 1 Tray 1 lifter malfunction. 2 Tray 2 lifter malfunction.CYCLE POWER TO
3 Tray 3 lifter malfunction.CONTINUE
4 Tray 4 lifter malfunction. X Tray X lifter malfunction. 614 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Table 7-5. Engine Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message
59.x Critical Error A printer error has occurred. Turn the printer off, and then turn X Description the printer on.PRINTER ERROR
0 Motor error. 1 Motor startup error. 2 Motor rotation error. 62.x Critical Error There is a problem with the printer’s Reseat or replace the specified memory. The x value refers to the DIMM.PRINTER ERROR
location of the problem: 0 = Internal memory 1 to 3 = DIMM slots 1, 2, or 3 64 Critical Error A scan buffer error occurred. Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on.PRINTER ERROR
If this message persists, replace the Formatter. 68 NVRAM ERROR Error An error occurred in the printer’s 1. Print a configuration page and nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) and check the printer settings toCHECK SETTINGS
one or more printer settings has determine which values have been reset to its factory default. changed. 2. Remove EIO card. It will be reset if not removed. 3. Hold down CANCEL JOB while turning the printer on. This will clean up the NVRAM by removing old areas that are not being used. 68 NVRAM FULL Error The printer’s nonvolatile memory 1. Print a configuration page and (NVRAM) is full. Some settings check the printer settings toCHECK SETTINGS
might have been reset to the factory determine which values have defaults. changed. 2. Remove EIO card. It will be reset if not removed. 3. Hold down CANCEL JOB while turning the printer on. This will clean up the NVRAM by removing old areas that are not being used. 69.x Critical Error A temporary printing error occurred. 1. Turn the printer off, and then X Description turn the printer on.PRINTER ERROR
0 The duplex mechanism has failed. 2. Reseat the duplexer. 1 The duplex slide adjust has failed.C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 615
,Table 7-5. Engine Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message
79.xxxx Critical Error The printer detected an error. The 1. Turn the printer off, and then numbers (xxxx) indicate the specific turn the printer on.PRINTER ERROR
type of error. 2. Try printing a job from a different software application. If the job prints, go back to the first application and try printing a different file. (If the message only appears with a certain software application or print job, contact the software vendor for assistance.) If the message persists, try the following: 1. Cycle power. 2. Reseat or replace the interface cable and cycle power. 3. Remove the DIMMs one at a time and cycle power. 4. Try using the parallel interface, if possible. 5. With the EIO cards removed from the printer, perform a cold reset. 6. Remove the Hard Disk and cycle power. 7. If the error persists, replace the Formatter. 8X.YYYY Critical Error The EIO accessory card in slot X 1. Move the EIO card to another has encountered a critical error as slot.EIO ERROR
specified by YYYY. 2. If the error persists, replace the EIO card. 3. If the error is corrected, reseat the EIO card in the original slot.BAD OPT TRAY Error The optional tray is not connected 1. Re-install the optional tray.
properly. 2. Make sure the optional tray isCONNECTION
connected and the connector is not damaged. 3. Replace the optional tray.CHECK INPUT Error The optional input tray cannot feed Check the doors and paper
paper to the printer because a door guides.DEVICE
alternates with or paper guide is open.PAPER PATH OPEN PLEASE CLOSE IT
616 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Table 7-5. Engine Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message CHECK OUTPUT Error The paper path between the printer Close the paper path. DEVICE and the external paper handling
alternates with output device is open and must beCLOSE OUTPUT closed before printing can continue. DELIVERY PATH EXTERNAL Status When an external paper handling No action required.
device is connected to the printer, itDEVICE
must have 10 seconds to initializeINITIALIZING
after boot or after coming out of PowerSave mode.MANUALLY FEED Error Tray 1 does not contain the specified Load the specified type of paper
size paper. into Tray 1. [SIZE]MANUALLY FEED Error One of the following occurred: 1. Load the requested paper into
• A manual feed was requested. Tray 1. [TYPE] [SIZE] • There is no paper in Tray 1. 2. Press GO if the desired paper • The wrong size paper is loaded. is already loaded in Tray 1. • The control panel is not set for the 3. Press - VALUE + to scroll kind of paper loaded. through the available types and sizes. 4. Press SELECT to accept the alternate type or size.MANUALLY FEED Error Tray 1 does not contain the specified Load the specified type of
type of envelope. envelope into Tray 1. [TYPE] ENVMANUALLY FEED Error Tray 1 does not contain an envelope. Load an envelope into Tray 1. TRAY 1 ENVELOPE OUTPUT BIN Error The output bin is full and needs to be 1. Remove the media from the FULL emptied. Face-down bin.
alternates with 2. Make sure that the sensor flagCLEAR PAPER moves freely. FROM [BINNAME] TRAY X Warning The media type in the specified tray Load known media, or set the
cannot be determined. correct media type.CONTAINS UNKNOWN MEDIA C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 617
,Table 7-5. Engine Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message TRAY X EMPTY Warning The paper tray is empty. Paper is 1. Load the empty tray (x) to
sensed in the tray by black plastic clear the message. flags and photosensors. If paper is If you do not load the specified not in a tray, the flags will rotate tray, the printer will continue through an access in the upper tray. printing from the next available When paper is present, the flags are tray, and the message will blocked from rotating through this continue to display. access. 2. Make sure that the paper out flag is not stuck in the down position by rough media. Do this before opening the tray. To check this flag without opening Tray 2, remove the Duplexer if it is present. 3. Open the Front Access Door. This provides you with a clear view of the Tray 2 paper out sensor flag. To check this flag without opening Tray 3, use a flashlight to observe the paper out flag. If either paper flag is damaged, replace the paper flag or the paper input tray. If the printer is using Tray 2 or 3 and the message is accompanied by a clicking noise every few seconds, replace the Paper Input Unit Assembly. See Paper Input Unit (PIU) on page 314 for instructions.TRAY X LIFTING Error Displays when tray X is in the 1. If the message does not go
process of lifting the paper to the top away, verify that the media can of the tray for proper feeding. be pulled from another tray. 2. The Paper Input Unit may need to be replaced. See Paper Input Unit (PIU) on page 314 for instructions.TRAY XX LOAD Error Tray X does not contain the specified Load the specified size of paper
size of paper. into Tray X. [SIZE]TRAY XX LOAD Error Tray X does not contain the specified Load the requested paper into
size of paper. the indicated tray, or press [SIZE] SELECT to override the message and to print on a loaded paper size. 618 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Table 7-5. Engine Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message TRAY xx LOAD Error One of the following occurred: 1. Load the requested paper into
• There is no paper loaded in the the specified tray (x). [TYPE] [SIZE] specified tray, or the paper is not the Make sure that the trays are size requested, or the control panel correctly adjusted for size. is not set for the size of paper The tray type settings (and size loaded. for Tray 1) must be set from the • The tray is not properly adjusted for printer’s control panel. size. If you are trying to print A4 or • The default paper size is set letter size paper and this incorrectly. message appears, make sure • If this message appears and the that the default paper size is set tray contains the correct size of correctly from the Printing Menu paper, a sensor could be damaged in the printer’s control panel. or a paper sensor lever could be 2. Press GO to print from the stuck. next available tray. 3. Press - VALUE + to scroll through the available types and sizes. 4. Press SELECT to accept the alternate type or size. 5. Inspect the switches in the tray. 6. Turn the printer on with the tray removed and push the switches by hand to see if they register.TRAY X OPEN Warning The specified tray is open. Close the tray to continue. UNSUPPORTED Error An external paper handling device Load a supported paper size in
detected an unsupported paper size. the tray.SIZE IN TRAY
The printer will go offline until the [YY] condition is corrected.USE [TYPE] Error If the requested paper size or type is 1. Press - VALUE + to scroll
not available, the printer asks if it through the available types and [SIZE] should use another paper size or sizes.INSTEAD?
type instead. 2. Press SELECT to accept the alternate type or size.C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 619
,Input Device Messages
2000-sheet Input Tray Error Messages Table 7-6. 2000-sheet Input Tray Error Messages Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message Input Device 65.11.01 The detected tray is not consistent 1. Make sure the size, source, with the paper size specified by the and type of paper selected from Condition Paper Handling Controller. the software configuration is 11.01 correct. 2. Pull out Tray 4 to verify that the size and type of paper loaded matches to the size and type specified in the software configuration. 620 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Table 7-6. 2000-sheet Input Tray Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message
13.11 PAPER 13.11 11 Timeout at Entry sensor (PS31) on 1. Open the Vertical Transfer the 2000-sheet Input Tray Unit (VTU) and remove media.JAM IN INPUT
2. Make sure that the ENTRYDEVICE 13.11 1B Timeout at Exit sensor (PS32) on the Sensor (PS31) can move freely.
2000-sheet Input Tray. 3. Make sure that the three feed, 13.11 21 Page stays longer at Entry sensor separation, and pickup rollers (PS31) on the 2000-sheet Input Tray. are properly seated. 4. If the problem persists, open 13.11 2B Page stays longer at Exit sensor the VTU and override its Open/ (PS32) on the 2000-sheet Input Tray. Close Door Sensor (PS35), perform a Paper Path Test feeding from the 2000-sheet Input Tray, and make sure the feed rollers are advancing the paper. If rollers do not rotate, verify the connections at the Pickup Assembly and the Controller PCA in the input device. 5. If the rollers rotate and drop down, but do not advance the paper, replace the feed and separation rollers using the maintenance kit. 6. If the rollers do not rotate or do not drop down, replace the Pickup Assembly. 7. If the problem persists, replace the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) where sensor (PS31) is located. 13.11 PAPER 13.11 31 At power on, Entry sensor (PS31) at 1. Open the Vertical Transfer the VTU is active. Unit (VTU) and remove media.JAM IN INPUT
2. Verify that sensor (PS31 andDEVICE PS32) moves freely.
3. If any of the sensors (PS31 or PS32) are damaged, replace the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU). 13.11 PAPER 13.11 3B At power on, Exit sensor (PS32) at 1. Open the Vertical Transfer the VTU is active. Unit (VTU) and remove media.JAM IN INPUT
2. Verify that sensor (PS31 andDEVICE
PS32) moves freely. 3. If any of the sensors (PS31 or PS32) are damaged, replace the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU).C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 621
,Table 7-6. 2000-sheet Input Tray Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message
66.11.01 INPUT 66.11.01 Lifting motor malfunction. 1. Make sure there are no objects or fragments of paper inDEVICE FAILURE
the free area at the 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4). 2. Make sure that the lifting plate lifts up freely by hand. 3. Make sure that the paper size plates are installed correctly, and that they are not bent. 4. Replace the Paper Deck Drive Assembly's Bushing, if broken. 5. Replace the Paper Deck Drive Assembly. 6. Replace the 2000-sheet Input Tray's (Tray 4) paper tray. 66.11.02 INPUT 66.11.02 Feed motor malfunction. 1. Make sure there are no objects or fragments of paper inDEVICE FAILURE
the free area at the 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4). 2. Check Paper Tray Raised Sensor (PS34) that is working properly (perform a sensor test). 3. Check for proper installation of the Pick up roller. 4. Check the Pickup assembly and Paper Deck Drive Assembly cabling. 5. Replace the Pickup assembly or the Paper Deck Drive Assembly, if necessary. 622 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Table 7-6. 2000-sheet Input Tray Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message
66.11.03 INPUT 66.11.03 Lifting and feed motor malfunction. 1. Make sure there are no objects or fragments of paper inDEVICE FAILURE
the free area at the 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4). 2. Make sure that the lifting plate lifts up freely by hand. 3. Make sure that the paper size plates are installed correctly, and they are not bent. 4. Check for broken Paper Deck Drive Assembly's Bushing, if so replace it. 5. Replace the Paper Deck Drive Assembly. 6. Check Paper Tray Raised Sensor (PS34) is working properly (perform a sensor test). 7. Check for proper installation of the Pickup roller. 8. Check Pickup Assembly cabling. 9. Replace the Pickup Assembly.C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 623
, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Error Messages Table 7-7. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Error Messages Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message Input Device 65.11.01 The detected tray is not consistent 1. Make sure the size, source, with the paper size specified by and type of paper selected from Condition Paper Handling Controller. the software configuration is 11.01 correct. 2. Pull out tray 4 or 5 to verify that the size and type of paper loaded matches to the size and type specified in the software configuration. 624 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Table 7-7. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message Input Device 65.11.04 Lifter malfunction. 1. Make sure that the lifting plate
lifts up freely by hand.Condition
2. Make sure that the paper size 11.04 plate is installed correctly, and is not bent or broken. 3. Replace the Paper Deck Drive Assembly's Bushing, if broken. 4. Replace the Paper Deck Drive Assembly. 5. Replace the2x500-sheet Input Tray's corresponding paper tray.Input Device 65.11.06 Requested to feed more than 4 1. Check for proper installation
pages at a time. of the Pickup roller.Condition
2. Check the Pickup assembly 11.06 and the Paper Deck Drive Assembly cabling. 3. Replace the Pickup assembly or the Paper Deck Drive Assembly, if necessary.C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 625
,Table 7-7. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message
13.11 PAPER 13.11 11 Page did not arrive at entry sensor. 1. Open the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) and remove media.JAM IN INPUT 13.11 1B Page did not arrive to exit sensor. 2. Make sure that the ENTRY DEVICE
13.11 21 Page stays longer at entry sensor. Sensor (PS1) can move freely. 3. Make sure that the three feed, 13.11 2B Page stays longer at exit sensor. separation, and pickup rollers are properly seated. 4. If the problem persists, open the VTU and override its Open/ Close Door Sensor (PS35), perform a Paper Path Test feeding from the2x500-sheet Input Tray, and make sure the feed rollers are advancing the paper. If rollers do not rotate, verify the connections at the Pickup Assembly and the Controller PCA in the input device. 5. If the rollers rotate and drop down, but do not advance the paper, replace the feed and separation rollers using the maintenance kit. 6. If the rollers do not rotate or do not drop down, replace the Pickup Assembly. 7. If the problem persists, Replace the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) where sensor (PS31) is located. 13.11 PAPER 13.11 31 At power on, entry sensor is active. 1. Open the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) and remove media.JAM IN INPUT
2. Verify that sensor (PS1 andDEVICE PS2) moves freely.
3. If any of the sensors (PS1 or PS2) are damaged, replace the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU). 13.11 PAPER 13.11 3B At power on, exit sensor is active. 1. Open the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) and remove media.JAM IN INPUT
2. Verify that sensor (PS1 andDEVICE
PS2) moves freely. 3. If any of the sensors (PS1 or PS2) are damaged, replace the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU). 626 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Envelope Feeder Error Messages Table 7-8. Envelope Feeder Error Messages Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message ENVELOPE Warning The envelope feeder is empty. Refill the envelope feeder.
Printing of the current job is notFEEDER EMPTY
interrupted.ENV FEEDER Error The envelope feeder does not have Put the requested paper into the
the requested paper. envelope feeder.LOAD [SIZE] ENV FEEDER Error There is no envelope in the feeder, 1. Load the requested envelope
the wrong size is loaded in the type and size into the envelopeLOAD [TYPE]
feeder, or the type and size is set feeder. [SIZE] incorrectly in the control panel. 2. Make sure that the envelope size and type are set correctly from the Paper Handling Menu in the printer’s control panel. 3. Press GO if the desired envelope is already loaded in the feeder. 4. Press - VALUE + to scroll through the available types and sizes. 5. Press SELECT to accept the alternate type or size.WRONG ENVELOPE Error The envelope feeder you are trying Install the correct envelope
to install will not work for this printer. feeder.FEEDER INSTALLED C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 627
,Output Device Messages
Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000- sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling Accessories (C4788-90904). 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Error Messages 628 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Table 7-9. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Error Messages Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message
13.12 or 13.22 13.12 01 or Unexpected page at (ES) Entry 1. Open the Top Cover andPAPER JAM IN 13.22 01 Sensor. remove any jammed paper. OUTPUT DEVICE 2. Make sure that the Entry
Sensor (ES) moves freely. 3. Perform a sensor test to make sure that the Entry Sensor (ES) is working properly. 4. If a problem persists, replace the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox controller PCA. 5. Replace the sensors PCA. 13.12.11 or Page did not reach the Entry Sensor 1. Open the Top Cover and 13.22.11 (ES) on time. remove any jammed paper. 2. Make sure that the Entry Sensor (ES) moves freely. 3. Perform a sensor test to make sure that the Entry Sensor (ES) is working properly. 4. If the problem persists, replace the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox controller PCA. 5. Replace the sensors PCA.C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 629
,Table 7-9. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message
13.12 or 13.22 13.12 12 or Page did not reach the Paper Path 1. Open the Paper Path CoverPAPER JAM IN 13.22 12 Sensor 1 (PPS1) on time. and remove any jammed paper. OUTPUT DEVICE 2. Make sure that the Paper Path
(continued) Sensor 1 (PPS1) moves freely. 3. Perform a sensor test to make sure that the Paper Path Sensor 1(PPS1) is working properly. 4. Replace the sensors PCA. 5. If the problem persists, replace the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox controller PCA. 13.12 15 or Page did not reach the Paper Path 1. Open the Paper Path Cover 13.22 15 Sensor 2 (PPS2) on time. and remove any jammed paper. 2. Make sure that the Paper Path Sensor 2 (PPS2) moves freely. 3. Perform a sensor test to make sure that the Paper Path Sensor 2 (PPS2) is working properly. 4. Replace the sensors PCA. 5. If the problem persists, replace the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox controller PCA. 13.12 17 or Page did not reach the Face-up 1. Open the Top Cover and 13.22 17 Delivery Sensor (FUDS) on time. remove any jammed paper. 2. Make sure that the Face-up Delivery Sensor (FUDS) moves freely. 3. Perform a sensor test to make sure that the Entry Sensor (FUDS) is working properly. 4. If the problem persists, replace the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox controller PCA. 5. Replace the sensors PCA. 13.12 21 or Page stays at Entry Sensor (ES). 1. Open the Top Cover and 13.22 21 remove any jammed paper. 2. Make sure that the Entry Sensor (ES) moves freely. 3. Perform a sensor test to make sure that the Entry Sensor (ES) is working properly. 4. If the problem persists, replace the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox controller PCA. 5. Replace the sensors PCA. 630 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Table 7-9. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message
13.12 or 13.22 13.12 22 or Page stays at Paper Path Sensor 1 1. Open the Paper Path CoverPAPER JAM IN 13.22 22 (PPS1). and remove any jammed paper. OUTPUT DEVICE 2. Make sure that the Paper Path
(continued) Sensor 1 (PPS1) moves freely. 3. Perform a sensor test to make sure that the Paper Path Sensor 1(PPS1) is working properly. 4. Replace the sensors PCA 5. If the problem persists, replace the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox controller PCA. 13.12 25 or Page stays at Paper Path Sensor 2 1. Open the Paper Path Cover 13.22 25 (PPS2). and remove any jammed paper. 2. Make sure that the Paper Path Sensor 2 (PPS2) moves freely. 3. Perform a sensor test to make sure that the Paper Path Sensor 2 (PPS2) is working properly. 4. Replace the sensors PCA. 5. If the problem persists, replace the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox controller PCA. 13.12 27 or Page stays at Face-up Delivery 1. Open the Top Cover and 13.22 27 Sensor (FUDS). remove any jammed paper. 2. Make sure that the Face-up Delivery Sensor (FUDS) moves freely. 3. Perform a sensor test to make sure that the Entry Sensor (FUDS) is working properly. 4. If the problem persists, replace the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox controller PCA. 5. Replace the sensors PCA. 13.12 31 or Page found at Entry Sensor (ES) 1. Open the Top Cover and 13.22 31 during power on sequence. remove any jammed paper. 2. Make sure that the Entry Sensor (ES) moves freely. 3. Perform a sensor test to make sure that the Entry Sensor (ES) is working properly. 4. If the problem persists, replace the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox controller PCA. 5. Replace the sensors PCA.C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 631
,Table 7-9. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message
13.12 or 13.22 13.12 32 or Page found at Paper Path Sensor 1 1. Open the Paper Path CoverPAPER JAM IN 13.22 32 (PPS1) during power on sequence. and remove any jammed paper. OUTPUT DEVICE 2. Make sure that the Paper Path
(continued) Sensor 1 (PPS1) moves freely. 3. Perform a sensor test to make sure that the Paper Path Sensor 1(PPS1) is working properly. 4. Replace the sensors PCA. 5. If the problem persists, replace the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox controller PCA. 13.12 35 or Page found at Paper Path Sensor 2 1. Open the Paper Path Cover 13.22 35 (PPS2) during power on sequence. and remove any jammed paper. 2. Make sure that the Paper Path Sensor 2 (PPS2) moves freely. 3. Perform a sensor test to make sure that the Paper Path Sensor 2 (PPS2) is working properly. 4. Replace the sensors PCA. 5. If the problem persists, replace the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox controller PCA. 13.12 37 or Page found at Face-up Delivery 1. Open the Top Cover and 13.22 37 Sensor (FUDS) during power on remove any jammed paper. sequence. 2. Make sure that the Face-up Delivery Sensor (FUDS) moves freely. 3. Perform a sensor test to make sure that the Entry Sensor (FUDS) is working properly. 4. If the problem persists, replace the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox controller PCA. 5. Replace the sensors PCA. 66.12.16 or 66.12 16 or Solenoid Malfunction. 1. Check that the 2 parallel black 66.22.16 66.22.16 bars that are connected to theOUTPUT DEVICE Diverter Solenoids (S3 and S4) FAILURE have free movement.
2. Check for proper installation of the C-link cables. 3. Replace the C-link cables. 4. Replace the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox controller PCA. 632 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, Table 7-9. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message 66.12.32 or 66.12 32 or Solenoid Malfunction. 1. Check that the 2 parallel black 66.22.32 66.22.32 bars that are connected to the OUTPUT DEVICE Diverter Solenoids (S3 and S4) FAILURE have free movement. 2. Check for proper installation of the C-link cables. 3. Replace the C-link cables. 4. Replace the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox controller PCA. C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 633, 8-bin Mailbox Error Messages Table 7-10. 8-bin Mailbox Error Messages Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message 22.1 or 12.1 65.22.01 The Face-up Bin is too full. 1. Empty the Face-up Bin. OUTPUT DEVICE or 2. Check that sensor flag moves CONDITION 65.12.01 freely. (PSFaceFull.) 3. Check for proper cable connection in flipper area. 4. If the problem persists, replace the Flipper assembly. 634 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Table 7-10. 8-bin Mailbox Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message OUTPUT DEVICE 65.22.02 Elevator Problem (Home not Found). 1. Check that the blind cover or CONDITION 22.2 or scan bar is installed properly.
or 12.2 65.12.02 2. Check for jammed paper in the delivery head assembly. 3. Check for free movement of the delivery head assembly. 4. Check that all paper bins are seated correctly. 5. Check that paper bins or the blind cover are not broken. 6. Replace the delivery head motor. 7. Replace the MBM controller PCA. 8. Replace the delivery head assembly.OUTPUT DEVICE 65.22.03 Elevator Problem Scanning bins 1. Check that the blind cover or CONDITION 22.3 or Error. scan bar is installed properly.
or 12.3 65.12.03 2. Check for jammed paper in the delivery head assembly. 3. Check for free movement of the delivery head assembly. 4. Check that all paper bins are seated correctly. 5. Check that there is no paper bin or blind cover broken. 6. If the error message persists, replace the delivery head motor (M1), the MBM controller PCA, or the Delivery Head Assembly.OUTPUT DEVICE 65.22.04 Slider Jam in the head assembly. 1. Perform a paper path test. CONDITION 22.4 or 2. Check for damaged sensor
or 12.4 65.12.04 (PSExit 1) or (PSExit 2) in the delivery head assembly. 3. Check fingers in the head assembly, they must be over the ejector rollers. 4. Replace the Head Assembly.C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 635
,Table 7-10. 8-bin Mailbox Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message
13.22 or 13.12 13.22 01 Flipper Entry Sensor (PSEntry) Jam. 1. Open the Jam Access DoorPAPER JAM IN or and remove any jammed paper. OUTPUT DEVICE 13.12 01 2. Make sure that the Full Bin
Sensor Flag (PSFaceFull) moves freely. 3. Make sure that the Flipper's shaft is not out of place. 4. If the problem persists, replace Flipper Assembly. 5. Replace the MBM Controller PCA. 13.22 02 Flipper Face-up Sensor (PSFaceup) 1. Open the Jam Access Door or Jam. and remove any jammed paper. 13.12 02 2. Make sure that the Full Bin Sensor Flag (PSFaceFull) moves freely. 3. Make sure that the Flipper's shaft is not out of place. 4. If the problem persists, replace the Flipper Assembly. 5. Replace the MBM Controller PCA. 13.22 03 Belt Jam (Transport Belt Motor (M5) 1. Check for jammed paper at or stop for an unexpected reason). the double-belt system and 13.12 03 Delivery Head Assembly. 2. Ensure free movement of the double belt (both belts). 3. Ensure parallel position of the double belt system. 4. Check that the Metal Tape is in place and in good condition. 5. Replace the Transport Belt Motor (M5). 6. Replace the MBM Controller PCA. 7. Replace the Delivery Head Assembly. 636 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Table 7-10. 8-bin Mailbox Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message
13.22 or 13.12 13.22 04 Jam in Head Assembly at (PSExit 1). 1. Check for jammed paper inPAPER JAM IN or the Delivery Head Assembly. OUTPUT DEVICE 13.12 04 2. Ensure free movement in
(PSExit 1) sensor flags on the delivery head assembly. 3. Check the delivery roller's fingers. They must be over the ejector rollers on the delivery head assembly. 4. Replace the flat ribbon cable that connects to the delivery head assembly to the controller PCA. 5. Replace the MBM Controller PCA. 6. Replace Delivery Head Assembly. 13.22 or 13.12 13.22 05 Jam in Head Assembly at (PSExit 2). 1. Check for jammed paper inPAPER JAM IN or the Delivery Head Assembly. OUTPUT DEVICE 12.12 05 2. Ensure free movement in
(PSExit 2) sensor flags on the delivery head assembly. 3. Check the delivery roller's fingers. They must be over the ejector rollers on the delivery head assembly. 4. Replace the flat ribbon cable that connects to the delivery head assembly to the controller PCA. 5. Replace the MBM Controller PCA. 6. Replace Delivery Head Assembly.C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 637
,Table 7-10. 8-bin Mailbox Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message
13.22 or 13.12 13.22 06 Elevator (Head Assembly) Jam when 1. Check for jammed paper inPAPER JAM IN or scanning and looking for home the delivery head assembly. OUTPUT DEVICE 13.12 06 position. 2. Check that the blind cover is
properly installed. 3. Check that the Scan Bar (if stapler unit is installed) is properly seated. 4. Check for free movement of the delivery head assembly. 5. Check that all paper bins are seated correctly. 6. Check for broken paper bins, blind cover, or Scan Bar. 7. Replace the flat ribbon cable that connects to the delivery head assembly to the controller PCA. 8. Replace the delivery head motor (M1). 9. Replace the MBM controller PCA. 10. Replace the delivery head assembly. 13.22 or 13.12 13.22 0A Communication problem. Wrong 1. Make sure that all the C-linkPAPER JAM IN or Page Request. cables are properly installed and OUTPUT DEVICE 13.12 0A the connectors of this cables are
tight enough. 2. Move the 8-bin Mailbox away from the Engine and resend the job. 3. Replace the C-link cables. 4. Perform a Power Cycle. 5. If the error condition persists, replace the Formatter board. 66.12.08 or 66.12.08 Flipper Motor Malfunction. 1. Check for jammed paper in 66.22.08 or the Flipper Assembly area.OUTPUT DEVICE 66.22 08 2. Replace Flipper assembly. FAILURE 3. Replace the MBM controller
PCA. 66.12.09 or 66.12.09 External Memory Error. Replace the MBM Controller 66.22.09 or PCA.OUTPUT DEVICE 66.22 09 FAILURE
638 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, Table 7-10. 8-bin Mailbox Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message 66.12.zz or 66.12.zz MBM C-link is not responding. 1. Check for proper installation or of the C-link cables. 66.22.zz 66.12.zz 2. Replace the C-link cables. OUTPUT DEVICE 3. Replace the 8-bin Mailbox FAILURE controller PCA. Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000- sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling Accessories (C4788-90904). C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 639,Finisher Devices Messages
Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000- sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling Accessories (C4788-90904).Stapler Error Messages
Table 7-11. Stapler Error Messages Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message CHECK FINISHER Error A stapler jam or a paper jam 1. Clear the paper from the DEVICE occurred. stapler. alternates with 2. Open the top cover of the CLEAR JAM stapler and clear the stapler jam. 3. Resend the print job. CHECK FINISHER Error The paper is not aligned correctly in 1. Remove the paper from the DEVICE the stapler. stapler. alternates with 2. Resend the print job. FINISHER ALIGNERROR
640 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Table 7-11. Stapler Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message FINISHER LOW Warning The finishing device is running out of Refill the finishing device.
finishing material.ON FINISHING AGENT FINISHER OUT Error The external paper handling finisher Refill the finishing device.
device is out of binding agent.OF BINDING AGENT STAPLER LOW ON Warning The stapler device is running out of Refill the stapler device.
staples.STAPLES STAPLER OUT OF Warning The external paper handling stapler Refill the stapler device.
device is out of staples.STAPLES TOO MANY PAGES Warning The external paper handling stapler Staple the pages manually.
device received too many pages toIN JOB TO
staple. The pages will be ejectedSTAPLE
unstapled. 13.23 or 13.33 13.33 0A Staple Jam. • Clear jammed staple.PAPER JAM IN • Replace staple cartridge. OUTPUT DEVICE • Replace Stapler Top Cover
Assembly. • Replace Stapler Controller PCA. 13.33 0B Rack Jam. • Remove jammed media. • Perform a device reset cycle by opening and closing the Stapler Top Cover. • Manually move the internal parts of the stapling unit looking for free movement. • Replace the Stapler Top Cover Assembly. • Replace the Stapler ControllerPCA
13.33 0C Slider Jam. • Remove jammed media. • Perform a device reset cycle by opening and closing the Stapler Top Cover. • Manually move the sliders looking for free movement and observe the power on sequence. • Replace the Stapling Bed Assembly • Replace the Stapler Controller PCA.C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 641
, Table 7-11. Stapler Error Messages (continued) Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message 13.23 or 13.33 13.33 0D Retainer Jam. • Remove jammed media. PAPER JAM IN • Perform a device reset cycle by OUTPUT DEVICE opening and closing the Stapler Top Cover. • If the problem persists replace the Stapling Bed Assembly. 642 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Duplexer Error Messages Table 7-12. Duplexer Error Messages Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message
13. 1 13.1 0B Paper feed 1. Paper late jam. No 1. Open the front door, and page from Duplexer. remove any paper. 2. Open the right door, and remove any paper. 3. Remove any paper from the Duplexer. 4. Perform a Paper Path Test using the Duplexer. 5. Check that the sensors in the Duplexer have free movement. 6. If the problem persists, replace the entire Duplexer Unit. 13.1 16 Paper feed 1. Paper late jam. Duplexer's 2nd sensor. 13.1 1F Paper feed 1. Paper late jam. Duplexer's 2nd sensor. 13.10 13.10 15 Duplex turn around. Paper late jam. Duplexer's 1st sensor. 13.11 13.11 04 Duplex turn around. Paper stopped jam. Duplexer's 1st sensor. 13.12 13.12 0D Duplex path. Paper late jam. Duplexer's 2nd sensor. 13.20 13.20 08 Could not automatically eject paper.C4265-90907 Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages 643
,Paper Handling Controller Error Messages Table 7-13. Paper Handling Controller Error Messages Control Panel Event Description Recommended Action Message Log Error Message
66.00.zz 66.00.01 A communication error occurred in 1. Turn the printer off, and then through the Paper Handling Controller or in turn the printer on.SERVICE ERROR
66.00.65 the controller PCA of an external 2. Replace or exchange C-link paper handling device. cables. 3. If the problem persists, replace the PCA controller board for the input or output device. 4. If the problem persists, replace the Formatter PCA. 66.00.15 66.00.15 The Paper Handling Controller had a 1. Turn the printer off, and then bad C-link (communication) cable. turn the printer on.SERVICE ERROR
This error could be caused by a 2. If the problem persists, check power failure. the C-link and power cables. 3. If the problem persists, check the device power connector and power supply (internal or external). Replace if damaged. 4. If the problem persists, replace the PCA Controller board for the device. 5. If the problem persists, replace the Formatter PCA. 66.00.23 66.00.23 Error 66.00.23 is due to a bad C- 1. Turn the printer off, and then link connection or a damaged C-link turn the printer on.SERVICE ERROR
cable. 2. If the problem persists, replace the PCA Controller board for the input or output device. 3. If the problem persists, replace the Formatter PCA. 644 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Step 4. Paper Path Troubleshooting
Paper jams occur in the printer when paper either does not reach or clear a photosensor along the printer's paper path in a specific amount of time. If a paper jam occurs, a 13.xx PAPER JAM message is displayed on the printer's Control Panel. The following lists general questions you should ask and topics you should explore prior to troubleshooting: Table 7-14. General Paper Path Troubleshooting Questions Problem Action What is the frequency of the Verify with the customer. Print or display the Event Log to paper jams (e.g. determine paper jam history. See Display on page 598 and continuous, one jam per Printer and Paper-Handling Devices Messages on page 604 and 100 pages, one jam per evaluate the Event Log. 1000 pages, etc.)? Do paper jams only occur See Paper Jams on page 646 and use the Paper Path Test to when the paper is fed from isolate the problem. a particular paper input source (e.g., Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4, Tray 5, or Envelope Feeder)? Do jams only occur when Use Paper Path Test on page 648 to isolate the problem. paper is output to a specific output bin (e.g., Face-down bin, Face-up Bin, mailbox bin, duplex operation, stapler)? Do paper jams occur with a Try known good media. See the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print specific type of media? Media Guide. Where does the leading Attempt to duplicate. See Paper Path Test on page 648. Inspect edge of the first sheet of the paper path and all paper path mechanical assemblies prior to paper in the printer's paper the leading paper jam. path stop when a jam occurs? Are any sheets of paper physically damaged or torn? C4265-90907 Paper Path Troubleshooting 645, Table 7-14. General Paper Path Troubleshooting Questions (continued) Problem Action Is the customer loading the Observe the customer loading the paper. Do not fan the paper. paper trays correctly? See proper paper handling procedures in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. Is the customer overfilling Make sure that the paper is NOT over the maximum fill marks in the paper trays? the paper trays. Observe the customer loading paper in the trays. Are the paper tray guides Make sure that the Tray 2 and 3 left-side paper fence is set set correctly? correctly at both the front and rear of the tray. Make sure that the front fence is locked into the correct position. For Tray 4, make sure that all adjustments are set correctly: front, back, and side at the top and bottom of the tray. Does the printer need Inspect the paper path and paper path rollers. See Cleaning the cleaning? Printer and Paper Handling Accessories on page 158. When was the User From the Configuration Page, determine the number of pages Maintenance performed on since the last maintenance (see figure 7-17 on page 654). The the printer? Printer Maintenance Kit should be installed every 350,000 images.Paper Jams
Paper jams occur most often when: ● Paper trays are not correctly loaded. Make sure the paper is loaded with the arrow pointing up in Tray 1 and down in Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5. ● The print media does not meet the specifications listed in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. ● The media is in poor condition. ● The printer needs cleaning. The printer monitors the timing of four sensors to determine that a paper jam has occurred: PS2, PS1, PS1403, and PS1402. 646 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, If a paper jam occurs, the printer will display a 13.x PAPER JAM message on the control panel. See “Printer Message Tables” on page 607 for detailed descriptions of the 13.x messages and the recommended actions to resolve the errors. Figure 7-14 shows the possible locations for most of the paper jams. Figure 7-14 Paper Path Jam Locations 1 Toner cartridge area 7 Tray 2 and Tray32Tray 1 pickup roller and feed area 8 Fusing Assembly Area 3 Right door 9 Left door 4 Tray 4 (2000-sheet Input Tray) and 10 8-bin Mailbox Tray 5 (2 x 500-sheet Input Tray, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox not shown) transfer door (not shown) 5 Tray 4 (2000-sheet Input Tray) and 11 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler Tray 5 (2 x 500-sheet Input Tray, not shown) 6 Front door C4265-90907 Paper Path Troubleshooting 647,Paper Path Test
Using the error trend information from Display on page 598, you can verify a specific printer paper path with the paper path test. You must first set the desired paper destination in the configuration menu and then select the paper path test. The paper path test menu will allow you to select the desired paper source and number. Note Feeding paper from Tray 1 will not allow the user to send paper to the Face-down output bins during this test. Note If the 8-bin Mailbox is installed, in order to perform the paper path test, the printer must be configured to mailbox mode. If the printer is not in mailbox mode, ask the network administrator to change the configuration to mailbox mode to complete this test.To perform a paper path test:
1 Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears. 2 Press ITEM until PRINT PAPER PATH TEST appears. 3 Press SELECT. 4 Press + or - until the desired input tray appears. 5 Press SELECT. 6 Press + or - until the desired output bin appears. 7 Press SELECT. 8 Press + or - until the desired duplex mode appears. 9 Press SELECT. 10 Press + or - to choose the desired number of copies. 11 Press SELECT. 648 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, Figure 7-15 Paper Path Test Source and Output SelectionCustomer Print Job
Ask the customer to send a print job from the problem source(s) to the problem destination(s). Try to recreate the paper jam errors by having the customer do typical print jobs and the type of print job that has been causing the paper jams. When verifying print jobs, make sure that all of the settings are selected as desired. Keep in mind that application settings take priority over driver settings, which take priority over the printer control panel settings. If a single setting is not present in the application, but is set in the driver, that will override the front panel settings. Note JetAdmin does have capabilities to override paper types and sizes and certain conditions. See the HP LaserJet 8100, 8100 N and 8100 DN Printers User Guide for more information. C4265-90907 Paper Path Troubleshooting 649,Clearing Paper Jams
Note Open and close all printer covers to clear the paper jam message. After removing a sheet of paper, you may need to check other areas to make sure that all paper has been removed. All portions of a jammed piece of paper must be removed or you may run into repeated jams. If the jam persists, try the following: ● If you have PostScript installed, use the JAM RECOVERY=ON menu item under the PostScript Menu. The printer will attempt to automatically recover from paper jams. ● Execute a formfeed from the computer or the printer's control panel. A formfeed may flush any paper or envelopes left in the printer. ● Check to make sure you have located and removed all scraps of paper from inside the printer. ● Use the Event Log Page and Event Log Codes to aid you in isolating where the errors are occurring.Clearing Repeated Paper Jams
1 Check to see that media is correctly loaded in trays and that all width guides are correctly set (not skewed). 2 Try turning over the stack of paper in the tray. If you are using letterhead paper, try printing from Tray 1. 3 Do not use previously printed paper or torn, worn, or irregular paper. 4 Check the media specifications. If it is outside of the recommended specifications, problems may occur. (See the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide.) 5 The printer may be dirty. Clean the printer as described in the first section of this chapter. 6 Check that paper loaded in Tray 1 is NOT longer than 17.7 inches (450 mm) or wider than 11.7 inches (297 mm). (These are the maximum dimensions that the printer can feed; otherwise the printer will jam.) 7 Make sure that Tray 4 and Tray 5 are set for the size of paper installed and that the tray is not overloaded with paper. 650 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Step 5. Information Pages
From the printer’s Control Panel you can print pages that give details about the printer and its current configuration. The following information pages are described: ● Menu Map (below) ● Event Log Pages (page 598) ● Configuration Pages (page 653) ● File Directory Page (page 656) ● Usage Page (page 657) For a complete list of the printer’s information pages, print a Menu Map and see the Information Menu.Menu Map
To see the current settings for the menus and items available in the printer Control Panel, print a Control Panel Menu Map: 1 Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears. 2 Press ITEM until PRINT MENU MAP appears. 3 Press SELECT to print the Menu Map. The content of the Menu Map varies, depending on the options currently installed in the printer. The printer driver or software application can override many of these values. See figure 7-16 on page 652 for a sample Menu Map. C4265-90907 Information Pages 651, Figure 7-16 Sample Menu Map Table 7-15. Key to Figure 7-16 Information Menu lets you print information pages and perform a paper path test. Paper Handling Menu contains paper handling options. Print Quality Menu lets you set print quality settings. Printing Menu contains various print options. Configuration Menu contains various printer settings. I/O Menu contains communication settings. Resets Menu shows options for resetting the printer. Note Items will only appear if options are installed. 652 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Configuration Pages
Use the configuration pages to view current printer and copy module settings, help troubleshoot printer problems, or verify installation of optional accessories, such as memory (DIMMs), paper trays, and printer languages. To print a configuration page from the printer control panel: 1 Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears. 2 Press ITEM until PRINT CONFIGURATION appears. 3 Press SELECT to print the configuration page. See figure 7-17 on page 654 for a sample configuration page. The content of the configuration page varies, depending on the options currently installed in the printer. If any of the installed devices are not shown on the configuration page, verify that the C-link cabling is correctly connected and functional (figure 7-7 on page 583) and that DC power is available to the paper handling devices. Check and reseat suspect cable connections. If any of the cables are replaced, you must cycle the power to have the printer recognize the device again. The Menu Map shows current control panel settings. See figure 7-16 on page 652 for a sample Menu Map. See chapter 3 for information about the default settings. C4265-90907 Information Pages 653, Printer Information Memory Lists the serial number, HP Lists printer memory, PCL Driver JetSend IP addresses, page Work Space (DWS), and I/O counts, and other information buffering and resource saving for the printer. information. Event Log Lists the number of Security entries in Lists the the log, the status of the maximum printer’s number of Control Pane entries lock, Control viewable, Panel and the last password, three and disk entries. drive. Installed Personalities and Options Paper Trays and Options Lists all printer languages that are Lists the size settings for all the installed (such as PCL and PS) and lists trays and lists the optional paper the options that are installed in each handling devices that are installed. DIMM slot and EIO slot. HP Toner Gauge Indicates the amount of toner remaining in the cartridge. Must be reset at the Control Panel when a new cartridge is installed. Figure 7-17 Sample printer Configuration Page (1 of 2) 654 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, General Information Lists information about the EIO Copy Connect Card, model and serial number, firmware revision, and other information for the copy module. Cleaning Counter Indicates number of scans since last cleaning. (Reset in service mode). Maintenance Counter Usage Count Information Indicates number of scans since Indicates total ADF and flatbed scans. the last time maintenance was performed. (Reset in service mode). Figure 7-18 Sample Copy Module Configuration Page C4265-90907 Information Pages 655,File Directory Page
Print a file directory page to ensure the copy module firmware is loaded on the printer’s hard disk drive. To print a file directory page from the printer control panel: 1 Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears. 2 Press ITEM until PRINT FILE DIRECTORY appears. 3 Press SELECT to print the file directory page. Information about the hard disk Indicates device type and File Size location, capacity, serial Indicates size of number, and other each file. information. Directory/File Name Shows the names of directories and files. Figure 7-19 Sample File Directory Page 656 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Usage Page
The usage page is designed to fit into a pay-per-page (PPP) model. A reseller can configure the usage page with instructions for a user to send the information back to the reseller in order to prepare bills. Print a usage page from the printer control panel (or access the information remotely from Web JetAdmin) to determine how many simplex or duplex pages of each paper size have been scanned on the copy module and printed on the printer. Average toner coverage is approximated by counting pixels. Paper jams are not counted. The data cannot be reset manually and values such as total print and scan impressions, toner coverage, serial number, default language and default paper size are backed up between the printer’s NVRAM and hard disk. To print a usage page from the printer control panel: 1 Press MENU until INFORMATION MENU appears. 2 Press ITEM until PRINT USAGE PAGE appears. 3 Press SELECT to print the usage page. C4265-90907 Information Pages 657, Information box configurable by resellers Simplex and duplex counted separately Resellers can specify click values for each paper size Precalcu- lated total prints and scans Average percent toner Number of toner coverage cartridges that have been in the printer Figure 7-20 Sample Usage Page 658 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Verify Installed Options
In the Installed Personalities and Options section on the configuration page, look for options such as hard disk information and DIMM types RAM or ROM and sizes. Verify that the options installed in the printer are reflected in the configuration page. If an installed device is not shown on the configuration page, see table 7-16 on page 660 for recommended actions. The Paper Tray and Options section of the configuration page identifies two types of paper handling devices that communicate or interact with the printer: ● Engine DC controller-driven devices • Duplexer • Envelope Feeder ● Communication Link Devices (C-link protocol) • Input devices: 2000-sheet Input Tray2x500-sheet Input Tray • Output devices: 8-bin Mailbox 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler (includes a finisher) 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker While the engine DC controller-driven devices draw power (24V DC) and control signals from the engine, the C-link devices have their own power supply and controller board. The information from the Paper Handling Controller is carried by the C-link cables that connect the controller board of all the C-link protocol supported devices. The C-link protocol supports up to 5 devices connected to the paper handling controller in a daisy chain. Each device controller has an input or output port that provides flexible connections in different configurations. However, it is recommended to use the configuration shown in figure 7-7 on page 583 to avoid rearrangements in the supported device numbering and confusions when evaluating the Event Log. C4265-90907 Information Pages 659, Table 7-16. Printer Devices Troubleshooting Device Action if installed and not detected Duplexer Turn the power off, reseat the Duplexer, verify that the connector is not broken, and turn the printer on. If the connector is broken or turning the printer on and off does not work, then replace the duplex cable and/or duplexer. Envelope Feeder Turn the power off, reseat the envelope feeder, and turn the printer on. If this does not work, replace the envelope feeder. Device 1 Verify that the C-link cables are installed correctly (see figure 7-7 on page 2000-sheet Input 583). Tray Remove all C-link connections and visually inspect for connector damage Device 2 on the cable pins and connector ends. 8-bin Mailbox Try using a different cable to connect the problem device directly to the Device 3 Paper Handling Controller. All C-link cables are wired the same, but are Stapler different lengths. If a device is not recognized, replace the device controller or defective C-link cable. Device 1 Verify that AC power is present in the 2000-sheet or2x500-sheet Input2x500-sheet Tray. and 2000-sheet Input Verify that the C-link cable is connected properly to the Paper Handling Tray Controller or the tray will not lift. Device 2 Verify that the DC power supply is receiving power. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Verify that the DC power supply output is connected to the 8-bin Mailbox controller. Verify that the C-link cables are properly installed and external power applied. Check if Fuse F202 in the2x500-sheet or 2000-sheet Input Tray's Controller PCA is blown. Replace the DC power supply. Replace the 8-bin Mailbox controller. 660 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Step 6. Image Quality
When you are working with customers, obtain a print sample before you begin troubleshooting their printer. Ask the customer to explain the quality they expect from the printer. The print sample will also help clarify the customer's explanation and expectations. Table 7-17. Image Quality Problem Action 1. Do you have a print Obtain a print sample from the customer. sample? 2. Does the problem repeat Use the Repetitive Defect Ruler in figure 7-21 on page 677. on the page? 3. Is the toner cartridge full Check the toner cartridge using the check list on page 662. and is it manufactured by HP? 4. Is the printer clean? Perform the cleaning procedure described in Cleaning the Printer and Paper Handling Accessories on page 158. 5. Is the customer using For more information about HP's paper specification standards, print media that meets all see Paper Capacities and Sizes on page 50 and the HP LaserJet HP paper specification Family Paper Specification Guide. standards? 6. Is the print sample similar Compare and perform the actions recommended in Image Quality to those in the Image Tables on page 663. Quality Tables on page 663? 7. Is the problem on the Perform the steps in Half Self Test Functional Check on page 678 drum or transfer roller? to determine where the defect is. If the defect is on the drum, replace the toner cartridge. If it is not on the drum, replace the transfer roller. C4265-90907 Image Quality 661,Check the Toner Cartridge
Image formation defects are often the result of toner cartridge problems. If there is any doubt, always replace the toner cartridge before troubleshooting image defects. Use the following check list to make sure that the toner cartridge is still operable. ● Make sure that the toner cartridge has toner. Full toner cartridge weight = 3200 grams (114 oz) Empty weight = 2200 grams (80.5 oz) ● Check the expiration date of the toner cartridge (stamped on the cartridge box). ● Check the toner cartridge to see if it has been disassembled or refilled. ● Make sure that the toner cartridge is seated properly in the printer cavity. ● Inspect the cartridge for toner leaking through worn seals. (If the drum has been manually rotated it may have caused internal damage and toner spills may result.) Note Toner cartridges are rated for 20,000 images at 5% coverage. It is possible to wear out the gears and the cartridge seals before TONER LOW is displayed if the 20,000 image expectancy is exceeded. ● Check the surface of the photosensitive drum in the toner cartridge to see if it has been damaged or scratched. Touching the drum will contaminate the photosensitive surface and may cause spotting and defects during printing. ● White areas on the page may indicate that the drum has been exposed to light for too long. If white areas appear, stop the printer and wait a few minutes. This should eliminate most defective images. If not, the toner cartridge may be placed in a dark environment for several days, which may restore some life to the drum. 662 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Image Quality Tables
Table 7-18. Blank (White) Page Possible Cause Recommended Action OCCASIONAL BLANK PAGES: 1. Software Configuration. Make sure that the application software is not sending incorrect page length requests, or extra page eject commands. 2. Network Configuration. Some Check with the network administrator. sharing devices on networks may generate a blank page as a separator. 3. Multiple Feeds. The printer may be Remove the paper from the tray and feeding two or more pages at once bend the stack to separate the pages because the paper is difficult to (see the HP LaserJet Printer Family separate. Print Media Guide). ALL PAGES BLANK: 1. Sealing tape left in toner cartridge. Remove the sealing tape. Table 7-19. Black Pages Possible Cause Recommended Action 1. Defective toner cartridge. Replace the toner cartridge. 2. Light is leaking into the printer. Make sure that all covers are in place. C4265-90907 Image Quality 663, Table 7-19. Black Pages (continued) Possible Cause Recommended Action 3. High voltage contact springs are Inspect and clean the high voltage dirty or defective. The high voltage contacts. If damaged, replace the contacts are mounted on the High High Voltage Power Supply PCA. See Voltage Power Supply PCA and High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) protrude into the toner cartridge on page 323 for instructions. cavity. 4. High voltage power supply circuit is Replace the High Voltage Power defective (not supplying the correct Supply PCA. See High Voltage Power negative voltage). Supply (HVPS) on page 323 for instructions. 5. DC Controller PCA is defective. If Replace the DC Controller PCA. See the DC Controller turns on the laser PCA, DC Controller on page 315 for beam continuously, the entire surface instructions. of the Photosensitive drum is neutralized causing a completely black page. 6. Laser/Scanner Assembly is faulty Replace the Laser/Scanner (turning laser on continuously). Assembly. See Laser/Scanner Assembly on page 308 for instructions. 7. Connectors between the Laser/ Inspect and reseat the connectors. Scanner unit and DC Controller are Replace cables as necessary. not seated properly or are defective. Table 7-20. Fading Print Possible Cause Recommended Action 1. Toner supply is low. Shake the cartridge gently to redistribute the toner, or replace the cartridge. 2. Print Density is set incorrectly. Change to a darker setting and retry printing. 664 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, Table 7-20. Fading Print (continued) Possible Cause Recommended Action 3. EconoMode is on. EconoMode Turn EconoMode off. Verify that saves toner by reducing the dot EconoMode is not being enabled by density. This may appear to be a print either the printer driver or the job quality problem in some cases. application. 4. Paper does not meet Try a different paper lot (see HP specifications. The moisture content, LaserJet Printer Family Print Media conductivity, or surface finish may not Guide). work correctly with the electrophotographic process. 5. Transfer Roller is defective or Inspect the Transfer Roller for proper incorrectly installed. If the Transfer installation and contact. If the Roller loses conductivity, it cannot Transfer Roller is damaged, replace effectively pull toner from the drum to it. See Transfer Roller Assembly on the paper. page 337 for instructions. 6. Laser/Scanner door is not opening 1. Remove and reseat the toner properly. cartridge. 2. Check the Laser/Scanner shutter door for proper operation. If defective, replace the Laser/Scanner Assembly. See Laser/Scanner Assembly on page 308 for instructions. 7. High voltage contact springs are Check the contacts for functionality. If dirty or defective. The high voltage damaged, replace the High Voltage contacts are mounted on the High Power Supply PCA. See High Voltage Voltage Power Supply PCA and Power Supply (HVPS) on page 323 protrude into the toner cartridge for instructions. cavity. 8. High Voltage Power Supply PCA is Replace the High Voltage Power defective. Supply PCA. See High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) on page 323 for instructions. 9. DC Controller PCA is defective. Replace the DC Controller PCA. See The DC Controller supplies the PCA, DC Controller on page 315 for proper voltage to the High Voltage instructions. Power Supply PCA. C4265-90907 Image Quality 665, Table 7-21. Dropout Possible Cause Recommended Action 1. Single sheet of paper is defective. Try reprinting the job. 2. Paper does not meet Try a different paper lot (see HP specifications. The moisture content, LaserJet Printer Family Print Media conductivity, or surface finish may not Guide). work correctly with the electrophotographic process. 3. DC Controller is defective (low Replace the DC Controller. See PCA, primary voltage). DC Controller on page 315 for instructions. 4. High Voltage Power Supply PCA is Replace the High Voltage Power defective. Supply PCA. See High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) on page 323 for instructions. 5. Transfer Roller is defective. Replace the Transfer Roller. See Transfer Roller Assembly on page 337 for instructions. Table 7-22. Black Lines (parallel or perpendicular to path) Possible Cause Recommended Action 1. Toner cartridge is not seated Remove the cartridge and reinsert it. properly. 2. Toner cartridge is damaged. Inspect the toner cartridge for a scratched or streaked photosensitive drum. Clean the printer (see Cleaning the Printer and Paper Handling Accessories on page 158), and replace the cartridge. 666 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, Table 7-22. Black Lines (parallel or perpendicular to path) Possible Cause Recommended Action 3. Fusing Assembly is contaminated Inspect the Fusing Assembly for or damaged. toner build-up or scratches on the fuser rollers. Replace the Fusing Assembly if damaged. See Fusing Assembly on page 306 for instructions. 4. Static Eliminator Strip teeth are Clean using compressed air. Be contaminated or defective. careful not to spray the Transfer Roller. 5. Repetitive defect. If the lines are See the Repetitive Image Defect repeated at a consistent interval Ruler (figure 7-21 on page 677). down the page, this is a repetitive defect. Table 7-23. Toner Smear Possible Cause Recommended Action 1. Paper does not meet Try a different paper lot or other specifications. The moisture content, media (see HP LaserJet Printer conductivity, or surface finish of the Family Print Media Guide). media being printed may not work correctly with the electrophotographic process. 2. Fusing Rollers are dirty. Toner Remove and inspect the Fusing build-up can cause the print on a Assembly for excessive toner build- page to smear. up. 3. The Static Eliminator Strip is dirty Clean the Anti-Static Brush using or is not grounded, allowing a static compressed air. charge to remain on the page. C4265-90907 Image Quality 667, Table 7-23. Toner Smear (continued) Possible Cause Recommended Action 4. Fusing Assembly is defective. The Replace the Fusing Assembly. See print will smear if the Fusing Fusing Assembly on page 306 for Assembly is not heated sufficiently to instructions. Try changing fuser bond the toner image to the paper. modes depending on the type of media used. 5. DC Controller is defective. The DC If a new Fusing Assembly does not Controller regulates fusing roller resolve the problem, replace the DC temperature. Controller PCA. See PCA, DC Controller on page 315 for instructions. Table 7-24. Background Scatter Possible Cause Recommended Action Random Background Scatter 1. Paper does not meet Try a different media or paper lot (see specifications. The moisture content, HP LaserJet Printer Family Print conductivity or surface finish may not Media Guide). work correctly with the electrophotographic process. 2. Inside of printer is dirty (toner may Clean inside of printer (see Cleaning have leaked out of the toner the Printer and Paper Handling cartridge). Accessories on page 158). Install a new toner cartridge if leaking. 3. Printing on envelope seams. Move the text to an area without Printing on an envelope seam can seams. If not printing on seams, try a cause a background scatter problem. higher print density setting (see item 6, below). 4. Toner cartridge is defective. Install a new toner cartridge. 668 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, Table 7-24. Background Scatter (continued) Possible Cause Recommended Action 5. Transfer Roller is dirty or worn. A Clean the Transfer Roller using a dry, worn Transfer Roller can cause lint-free cloth. DO NOT touch the background scatter due to improper Transfer Roller with your fingers. If bias voltages. the problem persists, replace the Transfer Roller Assembly. See Transfer Roller Assembly on page 337 for instructions. 6. Print Density is set too low, Adjust the print density to a higher causing background scatter, setting. particularly with envelopes and heavier papers. Background Scatter at Leading Edge Only (Leading Edge Halo) 1. Toner buildup in the Fuser Inlet Clean Fuser Inlet Guide. See Guide. Cleaning the Printer and Paper Handling Accessories on page 158 for instructions. Table 7-25. Repetitive Defects Possible Cause Recommended Action 1. Toner cartridge is damaged. If the Inspect the drum for scratches or defect repeats at any of the following damage. Replace the toner cartridge. intervals and in the direction of paper Use the Repetitive Defect Ruler, movement, it is associated with a figure 7-21 on page 677. component inside the toner cartridge. See figure 7-21 on page 677. 2. Transfer Roller has toner on it. If Clean the Transfer Roller using a dry, defects occur on the back of the page lint-free cloth. DO NOT touch the at intervals of 54mm (2.3 inches), the Transfer Roller with your fingers. If Transfer Roller may be dirty. This the problem persists, replace the problem sometimes corrects itself Transfer Roller Assembly. See after a few pages. Transfer Roller Assembly on page 337 for instructions. C4265-90907 Image Quality 669, Table 7-25. Repetitive Defects (continued) Possible Cause Recommended Action 3. Rollers are dirty. Any dirty roller in Examine and clean the rollers in the the paper path may result in a paper path. See Cleaning the Printer repetitive print defect. and Paper Handling Accessories on page 158. 4. Fusing Assembly is dirty or Print a cleaning page. If the problem defective. persists, replace the Fusing Assembly. See Fusing Assembly on page 306 for instructions. 5. Gears are worn, causing slippage Inspect the gears driving the toner or jumping. cartridge and the Fuser. Replace the Main Drive Assembly if necessary. See Main Gear Assembly on page 310 for instructions. 6. Paper does not meet Try a different media or paper lot (see specifications. The surface of the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print paper may be too coarse, causing Media Guide). repeated marks. Table 7-26. Line at Edge of Paper Possible Cause Recommended Action Toner cartridge is defective. The Replace the toner cartridge. photosensitive drum is wearing out. The line will grow wider, with cross- hatching. Shaking the cartridge does not relieve the problem. 670 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, Table 7-27. Misshapen Characters, Voids Possible Cause Recommended Action 1. Paper surface too rough. Toner Turn EconoMode off. Use paper with migrates to low spots, leaving higher correct finish (smoothness) (see HP areas void. LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide). 2. Printing on wrong side of paper. Turn EconoMode off. Check for the The label on the ream of paper arrow on the paper wrapper. Be sure indicates which side to print on. The paper is loaded with the arrow different surface properties of some pointing up in Tray 1 or down in Trays papers may cause problems if loaded 2, 3, 4, and 5. wrong side up. 3. Paper surface is too smooth for Turn EconoMode off. Use paper with proper toner adhesion. correct finish (smoothness) (see HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide). 4. Transparencies are bad. Turn EconoMode off. Use Hewlett- Transparencies can have this Packard approved transparencies problem because they are not (see HP LaserJet Printer Family Print designed for proper toner adhesion. Media Guide). 5. Transfer Roller is bad. If the Turn EconoMode off. Clean the Transfer Roller has finger oils on its Transfer Roller using a dry, lint-free surface, is dirty, or is worn-out, this cloth. DO NOT touch the Transfer problem can result. Roller with your fingers. If the problem persists, replace the Transfer Roller Assembly. See Transfer Roller Assembly on page 337 for instructions. 6. Laser/Scanner Assembly is bad. Replace the Laser/Scanner Assembly. See Laser/Scanner Assembly on page 308 for instructions. C4265-90907 Image Quality 671, Table 7-28. Faulty Registration Possible Cause Recommended Action 1. Paper tray is overloaded. If the tray Reload proper amount of paper is overloaded, the Pickup Rollers may squarely in the tray. Review paper not pick correctly. loading with the customer. 2. Paper guide on the paper tray is Make sure that the paper guide is incorrectly adjusted. If the guide is adjusted for the correct paper size pushing too tightly against the paper, and is locked into position. it may be delayed in being pulled into the printer. If the guide is too loose, it may cause image skewing. 3. Paper does not meet Try a different paper lot (see HP specifications. The surface of the LaserJet Printer Family Print Media paper may be too smooth for the Guide). Pickup and Feed Rollers to correctly feed paper into the printer. 4. Drive gears are worn or broken. If Replace the defective gear or Main any gear within the drive train or Drive assembly. See Main Gear paper path becomes excessively Assembly on page 310 for worn or dirty, erratic paper movement instructions. can result. 5. Worn Pickup or Registration Inspect all paper path rollers, looking Rollers. Paper is not being picked up for wear, cracks, or glazing. Replace consistently. the worn rollers. Table 7-29. Image Skew Possible Cause Recommended Action 1. Paper is loaded incorrectly. If the Remove paper from the tray, and paper is not installed flush into the install paper correctly. Position the paper tray, a skewing problem will paper guide correctly for the paper result. size being used. 2. Paper size adjustment levers are Verify and correct. missing or installed incorrectly. 672 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, Table 7-29. Image Skew (continued) Possible Cause Recommended Action 3. Paper lot is bad. Paper that is Try a different paper lot (see HP manufactured poorly or inconsistently LaserJet Printer Family Print Media or that has too smooth or too rough a Guide). surface texture can cause an image skew problem. 4. Pickup and/or Registration Rollers Inspect all paper path rollers, looking are worn. Paper is not being picked for wear, cracks, or glazing. Replace up consistently. the worn rollers. Table 7-30. Bubble Print Possible Cause Recommended Action 1. Photosensitive drum inside toner 1. Check for proper mounting of the cartridge is not grounded. High Voltage Power Supply (HVPW) and the HVPS ground contacts on the toner cartridge. 2. Check for proper seating of toner cartridge. 3. Replace the toner cartridge. 2. Toner cartridge is leaking. Replace the toner cartridge. 3. Paper does not meet Try a different paper lot (see HP specifications. The moisture content, LaserJet Printer Family Print Media conductivity, or surface finish may not Guide). work correctly with the electrophotographic process. 4. High Voltage Power Supply is Replace the High Voltage Power defective. Supply. See High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) on page 323 for instructions. C4265-90907 Image Quality 673, Table 7-31. White Stripes Parallel to Path Possible Cause Recommended Action 1. Toner cartridge is nearly empty. Remove the toner cartridge, and This can cause uneven toner shake it gently. The cartridge will distribution. soon require replacement. 2. Toner cartridge has been exposed Store the toner cartridge in a to too much light. darkened environment for several days. This may restore the photosensitive potential. 3. Foreign objects in beam path. Any Remove the toner cartridge, and foreign objects will block the light check for damage. Replace the toner from developing an image on the cartridge if it is damaged. Photosensitive drum. Remove the printer cover, and inspect the path from the Laser/ Scanner to the toner cartridge drum, looking for foreign objects in the beam path. Table 7-32. Partial Blank Page Possible Cause Recommended Action 1. Page is too complex. The printer Set Page Protect to on or auto. cannot create the image fast enough Simplify print job. to keep pace with the print engine. 2. Not enough memory. The page is Add printer memory. See Memory too complex for standard printer and Personality Upgrade on page memory. 258 for instructions. As an alternative, simplify the print job. 3. Printing on legal-size paper from Review software selection. Make Tray 4 when software is specifying sure that printing is on selected size. letter size (this will also cause paper jams). 674 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, Table 7-33. Compressed Print Possible Cause Recommended Action 1. Toner cartridge bushings are too Replace the toner cartridge. tight. This may occur on refilled toner cartridges. 2. Gear is broken or worn. Inspect and replace the worn gear or assembly. Table 7-34. Blank Portion in the Middle of the Page (Tray 4 Input only) Possible Cause Recommended Action 1. Bad clutch in vertical transfer door. Replace the Tray 4 vertical transfer door. 2. Bad clutch in paper pickup Replace Tray 4 paper pickup assembly. assembly. C4265-90907 Image Quality 675,Repetitive Defect Ruler
Repetitive print defects are usually associated with a specific roller within the printer or the toner cartridge. Use figure 7-21 to isolate the cause of repetitive print defects. Align the first occurrence of the defect with the top of the “ruler” and measure to the next occurrence of the defect to determine the roller in question. When you are certain that your defect pattern matches the pattern of the ruler, replace the indicated roller. 676 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, Figure 7-21 Repetitive Defect Ruler C4265-90907 Image Quality 677,Image System Troubleshooting Half Self Test Functional Check
The electrophotographic process can be subdivided into the following stages: ● Cleaning (removing excess toner from drum surface) ● Conditioning (placing a uniform electrical charge on drum) ● Writing (laser strikes surface of drum to create latent image) ● Development (formation of the toner image on drum) ● Transfer (charge to transfer the image to paper) ● Fusing (heat and pressure to produce a permanent image) See Chapter 5 for more information. The purpose of the Half Self Test Check is to determine which process is malfunctioning. Perform the test as follows: 1 Print a Configuration Page. See Configuration Pages on page 653 for instructions. 2 Open the top cover after the paper advances half-way through the printer (about five seconds after the Main Motor begins rotating). The leading edge of the paper should have advanced past the toner cartridge. 3 Remove the toner cartridge. 4 Open the toner cartridge's drum shield to view the drum's surface. If a dark and distinct toner image is present on the drum's surface, assume that the first four functions of the electrophotographic process are functioning (cleaning, conditioning, writing, and developing—see Chapter 5), and troubleshoot the failure as a transfer or fusing problem. If NO image is present on the photosensitive drum, perform the functional checks on the following pages. 678 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Drum Rotation Functional Check
The photosensitive drum, located in the toner cartridge, must rotate for the print process to work. The photosensitive drum receives its drive from the Main Drive assembly. To verify whether the drum is rotating: 1 Open the top cover. 2 Remove the toner cartridge. 3 Mark the cartridge's drive gear with a felt-tipped marker. Note the position of the mark. 4 Install the toner cartridge, and close the top cover. The start-up sequence should rotate the drum enough to move the mark. 5 Open the printer, and inspect the gear that was marked in step 3. Verify that the mark moved. If the mark did not move, inspect the Main Drive assembly to make sure that it is meshing with the toner cartridge gears. If the drive gears appear functional, and the drum does not move, replace the toner cartridge. Note This test is especially important if refilled toner cartridges have been used.High-Voltage Power Supply Check
The High-Voltage Power Supply PCA provides the necessary voltages for the electrophotographic processes (see figure 7-22 on page 680). A method for verifying the high-voltage system is given below. Toner cartridge connection points Visually inspect the four connection points on the inside right end of the toner cartridge. If they are dirty or corroded, clean the connections. If damaged, replace the toner cartridge. High voltage contacts The high voltage contact springs mount on the High Voltage Power Supply PCA and protrude through the toner cartridge cavity to contact the toner cartridge. Verify that the contacts are not dirty or corroded and that the spring action is functional. If damaged, replace the High Voltage Power Supply PCA (see High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) on page 323 for instructions). C4265-90907 Image Quality 679, Primary Charging Roller Toner Registration/ Toner Sensor Drum Ground Developing Roller Bias Post Transfer Bias Transfer Roller Fuser Bias Figure 7-22 High Voltage Power Supply Contacts 680 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices
2000-sheet Input Tray Standalone Diagnostics The 2000-sheet Input Tray can run stand-alone diagnostic tests to test the device’s motors, functionality, and sensors. You will need one power cord, one #2 Phillips screwdriver, and a small flat-blade screwdriver for the DIP switches. 2000-sheet Input Tray Motor Test This test verifies that the three motors on the 2000-sheet Input Tray are functioning properly. 1 Identify the Back Cover (opposite from the tray door). Remove the four screws in the Back Cover. Remove the Back Cover (see Back Cover on page 273). 2 Pull open the paper tray, and open the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU). 3 Set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA to Motor Test Mode. (See Table 7-35 on page 683 for an explanation of the DIP switch settings.) 4 To turn the Power Supply switch to Diagnostic Mode pull out on the blue handle. • If the motors are working properly, you will hear them as they rotate continuously. • If the motors do not rotate, replace the corresponding field- replaceable unit: either the Paper Pickup Assembly, the VTU, or the Paper Deck Drive Assembly. 5 To stop the test, set the power switch back to Operational Mode (push in), and reset the DIP switches on the Controller PCA to the off position (see Table 7-35 on page 683). 2000-sheet Input Tray Standalone Running Test This test verifies that the 2000-sheet Input Tray is functioning properly. For this test, use the LED located on the Controller PCA on the 2000-sheet Input Tray. (See Table 7-36 on page 684 for an interpretation of the LED patterns.) CAUTION If the 2000-sheet Input Tray is setting underneath the printer, paper jams may occur because the printer will not pick up the paper. To prevent excessive paper jams during this test, feed only 6 to 8 pages. C4265-90907 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 681, 1 Make sure that paper is in the tray. 2 Set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA for stand-alone running mode. (See Table 7-35 for an explanation of the settings). 3 To set the power supply switch to Diagnostic Mode, pull the blue power supply switch outward. The motors will start. Paper should now be lifted from the tray and fed through the VTU. • If the unit does not work properly, the lower Service LED on the Controller PCA flashes in a pattern that indicates the problem. (See Table 7-36 on page 684 for an interpretation of the LED patterns.) 4 To stop the test, set the power supply switch back to Operational Mode, and set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA to the off position (see Table 7-35). Open the VTU, and remove any media from the paper path. 682 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, 2000-sheet Input Tray Sensor Test This test manually activates the sensors on the 2000-sheet Input Tray to test if they are working properly. 1 Set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA for sensor test mode. (See Table 7-35 for an explanation of the settings.) 2 For each paper sensor: a. Pull open the paper tray, and open the VTU. b. Remove the metal spring that holds the sensor unit in place (secured by 1 screw). (See Figure 6-76, callouts 2 and 5.) c. Pull out the sensor unit. 3 To set the power supply switch to Diagnostic Mode, pull the blue power supply switch outward. 4 To manually activate each sensor, press it in with your finger. • When you activate the sensor, the bottom Service LED on the Controller PCA comes on. When you release the sensor, the LED goes off. • If the LED does not come on, there is a problem with the sensor. Replace the corresponding field-replaceable unit. 5 To stop the test, set the power supply switch back to Operational Mode, and set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA to the off position (see Table 7-35). Table 7-35. DIP Switch Settings DIP Switch Normal Motor Test Stand-alone Sensor Test Running Test 1 Off On On Off 2 Off On Off Off 3 Off Off Off On 4 Off On On On Note Be sure to turn the power supply off and set all the DIP switches to the off position (normal settings) when you finish the diagnostics or the unit will not work properly. Then, replace the back cover. C4265-90907 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 683, 2000-sheet Input Tray LED Status InterpretationIf the 2000-sheet Input Tray is working properly, it will pick up paper
from the tray and feed it through the VTU, and the bottom ServiceLED will flash regularly every 0.5 seconds. Table 7-36. 2000-sheet Input Tray LED Status Interpretation Long Short (.03 Error Number/ Recommended Action
(1 sec.) sec.) Meaning3166.11.01 Lift the tray by hand to make sure that it lifts freely. Lifter Malfunction Make sure that the paper size plates are correctly installed (in the same corresponding slots) and are not bent. If neither if these is the problem, replace Tray 4. 2 1 13.11.11 The media does not reach the sensor. Open the Registration Sensor VTU door, and remove the media. Replace the VTU Delay Jam assembly or the paper pickup assembly. 2 2 13.11.3B Open the VTU door, and remove the media. Check Registration Sensor the sensors, and replace the corresponding field- Station Jam/Initial replaceable unit. Jam2313.11.31 The media did not reach the sensor. Open the VTU Jam Sensor Delay door, and remove the media. Replace the VTU or Jam the paper pickup assembly. 2 4 13.11.21 Open the VTU door and remove the media. 13.11.2B Jam Sensor Stationary Jam/Initial Jam11VTU Door Open Close the door. 1 2 Paper Tray Close the tray. Open Wrong Size Paper Load the correct size of paper, or check the sensors. Loaded. 1 3 No Paper in Tray Load paper, or check the sensors.Note If the LED does not come on, replace the Paper Deck PCA or the Universal Power Supply Assembly.
684 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Standalone Diagnos- tics The standalone diagnostics are designed to test the2x500-sheet Input Tray’s motors, functionality, and sensors. You will need a power cord, a #2 Phillips screwdriver, and a small flatblade screwdriver for the DIP switches. If the2x500-sheet Input Tray is working properly, it picks paper up from the tray and feeds it into the VTU, while the bottom service LED flashes regularly every 0.5 seconds. Note To go from one test to another or to change the DIP switch settings, set the blue power supply switch to Operational Mode (push in). Reset the DIP switches on the Controller PCA, and then switch the power supply back to Diagnostic Mode (pull out) to enable the new diagnostic test. See figure 7-38 on page 688 for DIP switch settings. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Motor Test This test verifies that the three motors on the2x500-sheet Input Tray are functioning properly. 1 Identify the Back Cover (opposite side from tray door). Remove the 4 screws in the Back Cover. Remove the Back Cover. 2 Pull open Trays 4 and 5, and open the Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU). 3 Set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA to Motor Test Mode. (See table 7-7 on page 624 for an explanation of the DIP switch settings.) 4 To turn the power supply switch to Diagnostic Mode, pull out on the blue handle. • If the motors are working properly, you will hear them as they rotate continuously. • If the motors do not rotate, replace the corresponding field- replaceable unit: either the Paper Pickup Assembly, the VTU, or the Paper Deck Drive Assembly. 5 To stop the test, set the power supply switch back to Operational Mode (push in), and reset the DIP switches on the Controller PCA to the off position. C4265-90907 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 685, Table 7-37. DIP Switch Settings for troubleshooting test procedures DIP Switch Normal Motor Test Stand-alone Sensor Test Running Test 1 Off On On Off 2 Off On Off Off 3 Off Off Off On 4 Off On On On Note The DIP switch is on if it is set to the top. The DIP switch is off if it is set to the bottom. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Standalone Running Test This test verifies that the2x500-sheet Input Tray is functioning properly. For this test, use the LED located on the Controller PCA. (See table 7-38 on page 688 for an interpretation of the LED patterns.) CAUTION If the2x500-sheet Input Tray is underneath the printer, paper jams may occur because the printer will not pick up the paper. To prevent excessive paper jams during this test, feed only 6 to 8 pages. 1 Make sure that there is paper in both trays. 2 Set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA for standalone running mode. (See table 7-37 on page 686 for an explanation of the settings). 3 To test Tray 5, open Tray 4. To test Tray 4, open Tray 5. 686 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, 4 To set the power supply switch to Diagnostic Mode, pull the blue power supply switch outward. The motors will start. Paper should now be lifted from the tray and fed through the VTU. The service LED flashes regularly every 0.5 seconds. • If the unit does not work properly, the service LED on the Controller PCA flashes in a pattern that indicates the problem. (See table 7-38 on page 688 for an interpretation of the LED patterns.) 5 To stop the test, set the power supply switch back to Operational Mode. Open the VTU, and remove any media from the paper path. 6 To test Tray 4, close Tray 4 and open Tray 5. Repeat step 4. 7 To stop the test, set the power supply switch back to Operational Mode, and set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA to the off position (see table 7-37 on page 686). Open the VTU, and remove any media from the paper path. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Sensor Test Note Be sure that trays 4 and 5 and the VTU are closed before starting the sensor test. This test manually activates the sensors on the2x500-sheet Input Tray to test if they are working properly. 1 Set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA for sensor test mode. (See table 7-7 on page 624 for an explanation of the settings.) 2 To set the power supply switch to Diagnostic Mode, pull the blue power supply switch outward. 3 To manually activate each sensor, press it in with your finger. • When you activate the sensor, the service LED on the Controller PCA comes on. When you release the sensor, the LED goes off. • If the LED does not come on, there is a problem with the sensor. Replace the corresponding field-replaceable unit. 4 To stop the test, set the power supply switch back to Operational Mode, and set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA to the off position (see table 7-7 on page 624). Note Be sure to turn the power supply off, and set all the DIP switches to the off position (normal settings) when you finish the diagnostics or the printer will not work properly. Replace the back cover. C4265-90907 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 687, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray LED Status InterpretationIf the2x500-sheet Input Tray is working properly, it will pick up paper
from the tray and feed it though the VTU and the bottom service LED will flash regularly every 0.5 seconds.See page 624 for2x500-sheet Input Tray error messages. Table 7-38. Patterns of LED flashing (2-second pause between each pattern) Long Short Error Number/
(1 sec) (0.3 sec) Meaning Recommended Action3165.11.04 Verify that the tray lifts up freely by lifting it by hand. Lifter malfunction Verify that the paper size plates are installed correctly (in the same corresponding slots) and are not bent. If neither of these is the problem, replace Tray 4 or 5. 2 1 13.11.11 The media did not reach the sensor. Open the VTU Registration sensor door, and remove the media. Replace the paper delay jam feed (VTU) assembly or the paper pickup assembly. 2 2 13.11.31 Open the VTU door, and remove the media. Check Registration sensor the sensors, and replace the corresponding field- stationary/jam initial replaceable unit. jam2313.11.1B The media did not reach the sensor. Open the VTU Jam sensor delay jam door, and remove the media. Replace the paper feed (VTU) assembly or the paper pickup assembly. 2 4 13.11.3B Open the VTU door, and remove the media. Jam sensor stationary jam/initial jam11The VTU door is open Close the door. 1 2 Trays 4/5 are open Close the tray(s). Check the sensors. Wrong paper size Load the correct size of paper. Check the sensors. loaded13No paper in trays 4/5 Load paper. Check the sensors.Note If the LEDs will not come on, replace the paper deck PCA or the
universal power supply assembly. 688 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Standalone Diagnos- tics The standalone diagnostics are designed to test the device’s motors, functionality, and sensors. You will need a power cord, a #2 Phillips screwdriver, and a small flatblade screwdriver for the DIP switches. Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000- sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling Accessories (C4788-90904). Note To change from one test to another or change the DIP switch settings, push the blue power supply switch in (off position), then set to the new test positions. 1 To remove the back cover remove 2 screws (see page 410). 2 Identify the interlock switch. This black switch is set when the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox comes into contact with the printer. (Look on opposite side from the paper trays.) This interlock can be defeated by holding it in with a finger or a piece of tape. 3 Identify the DIP switch, SW1 (upper-right corner of the controller PCA). 4 Identify the service LED, LED1 (near the C-link connectors). Table 7-39. DIP switch settings for troubleshooting test DIP Switch Normal Motor Standalone Running Test Sensor Test Settings Test Mailbox Stacker 1 Off On On Off Off 2 Off On Off On Off 3 Off Off On Off On 4 Off On Off On On C4265-90907 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 689, Note The DIP switch is on if it is set to the right. The DIP switch is off if it is set to the left. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Motor Test This test allows you to verify the functionality of the main motor, Face- down solenoid, and face-up diverter solenoid. 1 The top cover and paper access door must be closed to perform this test. 2 Set the DIP switches for the motor test (see table 7-39). 3 Pull out the power supply switch to the test position. 4 Press and hold in the interlock switch. A self-test should be performed, then the main motor will start moving continuously until the interlock switch is released. The service LED will flash every 0.5 seconds. If any other pattern results with the service LED, see table 7-40 on page 691 for the possible causes. 5 Push in the power supply switch to the normal position. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Standalone Running Test This test allows you to feed paper into the unit to test the paper path without a connection to the printer. You can configure either the Mailbox Mode or the Stacker Mode to ensure the paper path is working properly. 1 The top cover and paper access door must be closed to perform this test. 2 Set the DIP switches for the standalone running test in either Mailbox Mode or the Stacker Mode (see table 7-39 on page 689). 3 Pull out the power supply switch to the test position. 4 Press and hold in the interlock switch. Perform a self-test. Then manually start feeding paper. • In Mailbox Mode, the unit will deliver paper to all bins, starting with the Face-up Bin, then down to the bottom bin. • In Stacker Mode, the unit will stack paper starting at the bottom bin until the top-of-stack is reached on each bin. 5 If problems are found, the possible cause will be indicated by the Service LED (see table 7-40 on page 691). 6 Push in the power supply switch to the normal position. 690 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Sensor Test This test allows you to check if all unit sensors are working properly. By activating any unit sensor flag, the service LED should turn on. 1 Make sure that all bins are empty to perform the sensor test. 2 Set the DIP switches for the sensor test (see table 7-39 on page 689). 3 Do NOT press the interlock switch in at this time. 4 Pull out the power supply switch to the test position. 5 Make sure that the service LED is off. 6 Manually activate any sensor flag. The service LED should turn on if the sensor is functional. Note To test the top cover or paper access door sensors, you need to press the interlock switch and simultaneously open and close each cover. A self-test should be performed, and the LED should remain on. To test the bin full sensors, press the sensor in the paper tray closest to the back of the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox (on your left as you face the bins). The test will not work if you press the sensor closest to the front of the device. CAUTION Be sure to turn the power supply off and set all the DIP switches to the off position (normal settings) when you finish the diagnostics or the printer will not work properly. Replace the back cover. See page 629 for 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox error messages. Table 7-40. Patterns of Flashing LEDs Error Number/ Long Short Meaning Recommended Action3166.12.16 ● Perform the motor test to check the solenoids. 66.22.16 ● Perform the sensor test. Paper exit solenoid ● Replace the sensor bin full PCA, solenoids, or malfunction controller board. 2 1 13.12.31 ● Open the top cover and paper access door to 13.22.31 remove any remaining paper, then perform a Initial jam sensor test. ● Replace the sensor bin full PCA or controller PCA. C4265-90907 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 691, Table 7-40. Patterns of Flashing LEDs (continued) Error Number/ Long Short Meaning Recommended Action2213.12.01 ● Open all covers and doors in the device, and 13.22.01 remove any jammed paper. Jam without delivery ● Check for paper jammed in the printer. notice ● Try printing again. 2 3 13.12.11 ● Open all covers and doors in the device, and 13.22.11 remove any remaining media. Entry sensor delay ● Check each output bin. 2 5 13.12.17 ● Perform a sensor check. 13.22.17 ● Check the sensor flag, the optical sensor, or Face-up sensor delay cabling. 2 7 Reversing area delay ● Replace the sensor PCAs. ● Replace the controller PCA. 2 9 13.12.15 13.22.15 Vertical sensor delay2413.12.21 ● Open the top and back covers, and remove 13.22.21 any remaining media. Entry sensor ● Check each output bin. activated too long ● Perform a sensor check. 2 6 13.12.27 ● Check the sensor flag, the optical sensor, or 13.22.27 cabling. Face-up sensor ● Replace the sensor PCAs. activated too long ● Replace the controller PCA. 2 8 13.12.21 13.22.21 13.12.27 13.22.27 Reversing area sensor activated too long 2 10 13.12.22 13.22.22 13.12.25 13.22.25 Vertical sensor activated too long11Door open or ● Close the top cover and paper access door. interlock switch ● Firmly attach the 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox to deactivated the printer. ● Perform a sensor check. ● Check the bin full and interlock sensor PCA, cabling, and controller PCA. 692 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, Table 7-40. Patterns of Flashing LEDs (continued) Error Number/ Long Short Meaning Recommended Action12Bin full when running ● Remove paper from all the bins. the standalone test C4265-90907 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 693, 8-bin Mailbox Standalone Diagnostics Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000- sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling Accessories (C4788-90904). The stand-alone diagnostics are designed to test the device’s motors and functionality without connection to the printer. Note that the diagnostics do not test the functionality of the stapler. You will need one power cord and a small flat-blade screwdriver for the power supply switch. 8-bin Mailbox LEDs Description The 8-bin Mailbox has two sets of LEDs: ● User LED. The first is a single LED located on the right side of the top cover (Figure 7-23, callout 1). This User LED provides information to the end user about the 8-bin Mailbox power-on status and the attachment and alignment to the printer. ● Service LEDs. The second set is formed by three independent LEDs located in the middle of the left side cover (Figure 7-23, callout 2). This group is called the Service LEDs, and they show additional technical information to decode the 8-bin Mailbox status. Figure 7-23 8-bin Mailbox LEDs Description 8-bin Mailbox Standalone Diagnostic Test Each time you run the stand-alone diagnostic test, proceed as follows: 1 Turn off the printer, and pull the 8-bin Mailbox away from the printer. 694 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, 2 With the 8-bin Mailbox unplugged, configure the power supply switch to the test mode by sliding the power supply switch up with a small flat-blade screwdriver (Figure 7-24, callout 1). Figure 7-24 8-bin Mailbox Power Supply Test Mode Switch 1 Plug in the power cord. The User LED should be solid green, and the Service LEDs should be ‘Off, Solid Red, Off’ to indicate the test mode has been entered. Note Be sure to reset the power supply switch to the normal operation when you finish the diagnostics; otherwise the unit will not work properly.Power-on Test
1 Push the 8-bin Mailbox interlock switch and keep it pressed. A sequence of tests will begin to test the device. 2 The head assembly will move up and down twice, scanning that all unit bins are properly installed and that all unit motors have started. 3 At the end of the power-on test, the flipper motor remains on and waits for paper to be fed. C4265-90907 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 695, 4 The User LED remains solid green and the service LEDs remain ‘Off, Solid Red, Off’ as an indication that the power-on test was successful. 5 If a problem exists, an error code will be shown in the Service LEDs. (See table 3-3 for an interpretation of the LEDs.) 8-bin Mailbox Paper Path Test 1 If the power-on test is successful, then manually feed paper through the input paper guide in the horizontal position. 2 The paper will pass across the flipper assembly and move down to the bottom bin by the double belt system through the head assembly. 3 If after feeding several pages the paper path test is successful, then reattach the 8-bin Mailbox to the printer. 4 If a problem exists, an error code will be shown in the Service LEDs. (See table 7-41 for an interpretation of the LEDs.) Note Be sure to reset the power supply switch to the normal operation when you finish the diagnostics; otherwise the unit will not work properly. 696 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, 8-bin Mailbox LEDs Status Interpretation Table 7-41. 8-bin Mailbox LED Status Interpretation Ser- User vice Recommended Message Description/Number LED LEDs Action solid green solid red solid amber blinking red blinking amber blank MBM Ready No action required. The 8-bin Mailbox was successfully connected and initialized by the printer. PowerSave Mode No action required. The 8-bin Mailbox is in PowerSave mode. Self-test Mode ● Run the power-on test. The 8-bin Mailbox is in test mode. ● Run the paper path test. MBM Unlatched from the Printer ● Check for proper alignment. The 8-bin Mailbox is not properly ● Check the attachment clips. attached to the printer. ● Check the Adjustable Casters. ● Check the Interlock Switch. Face-up Bin is Too Full ● Remove the paper from the The Face-up Bin has too much paper Face-up Bin. and it has reached the PSFaceUp flat, ● Check for a stuck Sensor Flag. avoiding the flipping operation. ● Replace the Flipper Assembly. 65.12.01 ● Check for the proper cable 65.22.01 connections. C4265-90907 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 697, Table 7-41. 8-bin Mailbox LED Status Interpretation (continued) Ser- User vice Recommended Message Description/Number LED LEDs Action solid green solid red solid amber blinking red blinking amber blank Jam in Flipper Area ● Open the Jam Access Door, A time-out condition occurred at the and check for a paper jam or entry area. an out-of-place Flipper Assembly shaft. 13.12.02 ● Check for a stuck paper 13.22.02 sensor. 65.12.01 ● Replace the Flipper Assembly. 65.22.01 ● Replace the 8-bin Mailbox PCA. Jam in Belt ● Check for paper jammed at the A time-out condition occurred in the Transport Belt System/Delivery Transport Belt. Head Assembly. ● Make sure that the Transport 13.12.03 Belt (both belts) move freely. 13.22.03 ● Make sure that the belts are parallel in the Transport Belt system. ● Make sure that the Metal Tape is in place and in good condition. ● Replace the Transport Belt Motor. ● Replace the 8-bin Mailbox PCA. ● Replace the Delivery Head Assembly. 698 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, Table 7-41. 8-bin Mailbox LED Status Interpretation (continued) Ser- User vice Recommended Message Description/Number LED LEDs Action solid green solid red solid amber blinking red blinking amber blank Jam in Delivery Head Assembly ● Check for paper jammed in the A time-out condition occurred in the Delivery Head Assembly. PSExit1 sensor. ● Make sure that both the PSExit1 and PSExit2 sensors 13.12.05 on the Delivery Head Assembly 13.22.05 move freely. ● Make sure that the fingers are over the Ejector Rollers on the Delivery Head Assembly. ● Replace the flat ribbon cable that connects to the Delivery Head Assembly. ● Replace the Delivery Head Assembly. ● Replace the 8-bin Mailbox PCA. C4265-90907 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 699, Table 7-41. 8-bin Mailbox LED Status Interpretation (continued) Ser- User vice Recommended Message Description/Number LED LEDs Action solid green solid red solid amber blinking red blinking amber blank Jam in the Delivery Head Position ● Make sure that the Blind Cover System and Scan Bar are installed The elevator motor detected an invalid properly. window when scanning. ● Check for paper jammed in the Transport Belt System and the 13.12.06 Delivery Head Assembly. 13.22.06 ● Make sure that the Delivery 65.12.03 Head Assembly (up and down) 65.22.03 moves freely. 65.12.03 65.22.03 ● Make sure that all paper bins are seated correctly. ● Make sure that the paper bins and the Blind Cover are not broken. ● Replace the Delivery Head Position Motor. ● Replace the Delivery Head Assembly. ● Replace the 8-bin Mailbox PCA. Slider Problem at the Head ● Check for paper jammed in the Assembly Delivery Head Assembly. The sliders do not activate the slider ● Make sure that all the paper photosensor. bins are seated correctly. ● Replace the Delivery Head 65.12.04 Assembly. 65.22.04 700 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, Table 7-41. 8-bin Mailbox LED Status Interpretation (continued) Ser- User vice Recommended Message Description/Number LED LEDs Action solid green solid red solid amber blinking red blinking amber blank Wrong Page Request ● Check the bin destination. A page request was received with an ● Check the paper size invalid output bin or invalid paper size configuration. information. ● Turn on the printer. 13.12.0A 13.22.0A Flipper Error ● Check for paper jammed in the During the flipper calibration, an Flipper Assembly area. abnormal reference voltage was ● Check the cable connections. encountered. ● Replace the Flipper Assembly. 66.12.08 ● Replace the 8-bin Mailbox 66.22.08 PCA. External Memory Error ● Replace the 8-bin Mailbox The 8-bin Mailbox’s nonvolatile RAM PCA. (NVRAM) is damaged. 66.12.09 66.22.09 C4265-90907 Self-Diagnostics on Paper-handling Devices 701,Diagrams
This section contains the following diagrams: ● Figure 7-25, “Printer Sensors and Switches,” on page 703 ● Figure 7-26, “Printer Motor, Clutches, and Solenoids,” on page ● Figure 7-27, “DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (1 of 5),” on page ● Figure 7-28, “DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (2 of 5),” on page ● Figure 7-29, “DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (3 of 5),” on page ● Figure 7-30, “DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (4 of 5),” on page ● Figure 7-31, “DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (5 of 5),” on page ● Figure 7-32, “Mailbox with Stapler Wiring Diagram,” on page 710 ● Figure 7-33, “2000-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA Inputs,” on ● Figure 7-34, “2000-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA Outputs,” on ● Figure 7-35, “2000-sheet Input Tray Main Wiring Diagram,” on ● Figure 7-36, “8-bin Mailbox Main Wiring Diagram,” on page 714 ● The main wiring diagram is inserted inside the cover. 702 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, Figure 7-25 Printer Sensors and Switches C4265-90907 Diagrams 703, Figure 7-26 Printer Motor, Clutches, and Solenoids 704 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, Figure 7-27 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (1 of 5) C4265-90907 Diagrams 705, Figure 7-28 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (2 of 5) 706 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, Figure 7-29 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (3 of 5) C4265-90907 Diagrams 707, Figure 7-30 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (4 of 5) 708 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, Figure 7-31 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs (5 of 5) C4265-90907 Diagrams 709, Figure 7-32 Mailbox with Stapler Wiring Diagram 710 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, Figure 7-33 2000-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA Inputs C4265-90907 Diagrams 711, Figure 7-34 2000-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA Outputs 712 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, Figure 7-35 2000-sheet Input Tray Main Wiring Diagram C4265-90907 Diagrams 713, 5 1 10 6 Vcc 15 111 2 (two dots) J5 34 1 /TX53/RX previous PS FLIPPER14/TERMINATE OUT device PS FLIPPER26/CLOCK connector J11 12 /STROBE 1(in) 2 M2 Encoder 13 POWER ON IN J4C-link 3 2-7-8-11 GND 4 Flipper Roller Motor 5-10 24 V MULTIBINMAILBOX Transport Belt Motor CONTROLLER 1 M52
(one dot) J8PCA 34 1 /TX 3 /RX next 4 /TERMINATE IN device J9 12 INTERLOCK SWITCH 6 /CLOCK connector J12 12 /STROBE (out) 13 POWER ON OUT C-link Vcc 12 PS FUFULL 2-7-8-11 GND J2 3 PS FACEUP5-10 24V4PS ENTRYCBARed Green power 2 LEDs supply J13 J10 3 connector 4 152631+24V 1 M1 Delivery Head 2 +24V 1 53 2 Position Motor 3 GND26J7 4 Vcc44GND55ON/OFF J1 6 +5V 1716151413121110987654321Head Slider M3 M4 Ejector Motor Motor PS BIN EMPTY PS EXIT 2 PS BIN FULL / HEAD POSITION PS EXIT 1 PS EJECTFigure 7-36 8-bin Mailbox Main Wiring Diagram
714 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, C4265-90907 Diagrams 715, 716 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Troubleshooting the Copy Module
This section deals with troubleshooting procedures specific to the HP Digital Copier. For a general troubleshooting approach, see the flowcharts starting on page 575. The steps for troubleshooting the HP Digital Copier are as follows: ▼ Step 1: Power On (page 718) ▼ Step 2: Display and Communication (page 719) ▼ Step 3: Error Messages and Problems (page 720) ▼ Step 4: Information Pages (page 725) ▼ Step 5: Paper Path (page 726) ▼ Step 6: Image Quality (page 727) C4265-90907 Troubleshooting the Copy Module 717,Step 1. Power On
Is the copy module on and displaying anything on the Front Panel? (YES = Go to Step 2: Display and Communication) Table 7-42. Power On Checks Check Recommended Action Is the host printer on ● Make sure both the printer and copy module power switches are and functioning set to the on position. correctly? ● Ensure the printer and copy module are not in power save mode. Press any key on the front panel. ● Eliminate paper-handling devices as a cause of the problem. ● Troubleshoot the printer. See page 594. Is AC power available to ● Check power to the printer's power receptacle. the printer System? ● Make sure power is cabled correctly to provide AC power to the copy module. (See “Install the Y Power Cord” on page 496 for y cable descriptions.) ● To test power, plug in the copy module directly. ● Plug in a known working device to test the outlet. Is the copy module’s ● If the fan is running, the copy module power supply and Control fan working? PCA are probably OK. ● Disconnect the copy connect cable to the printer and plug in the Copy Module directly to the AC outlet. The copy module should boot to the second icon and stop. ● If the fan still does not run check its connection to the Control PCA. If the connection is OK, suspect the power supply. After completing the power-on checks above, print the information pages from the printer's Information Menu. ● Verify that the copy connect EIO appears on the printer configuration page. ● Verify that the HP Digital Copier page prints. 718 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Step 2. Display and Communication
Does the copy module LCD display indicate READY TO COPY? (YES = Go to Step 3: Error Messages and Problems) Table 7-43. Display and Communication Checks Problem Recommended Action The Fan works, but the ● Re-check power availability. display is blank with no ● Check the front panel connections and cable. backlight. ● Reseat the ribbon cable into the connector on the front panel. ● Suspect the front panel or the cable. The display is blank ● Check the front panel connections and cable. with the backlight on. ● Inspect and reseat the ribbon cable into the connector on the front panel. ● Check the connections to and reseat the Power Supply and Main Board Assemblies. ● Reseat the copy connect EIO card and copy processor card. ● Check the connections between the copy connect EIO card and the Copy Processor card. ● Perform an offline test (page 733) to confirm the control PCA is good. ● Perform a Copy Processor LED test (page 730). If the Copy Processor is okay, suspect the front panel. Replace the suspected part. The front panel ● Perform a Copy Processor LED test (page 730) to confirm that backlight comes on and the Copy Processor is okay. If necessary, replace the Copy display shows the logo, Processor. a boot icon, or error ● Reseat the copy connect EIO card and the copy processor card. message. ● Check the connections between the copy connect EIO card and the Copy Processor card. ● Print a directory of the printer’s hard disk drive to check that the Copy Module Firmware is installed (see page 656). ● Make sure Loading Program 1 and Loading Program 2 displays on the printer’s control panel during bootup. If it does not, re-download the copy module firmware (see page 150). ● If the display shows an error message, see page 720 to resolve the problem. ● If the display stops at one of the four boot icons, note which and see page 732 to resolve the problem. C4265-90907 Display and Communication 719,Step 3. Error Messages and Problems
Have you resolved error messages? (YES = Go to Step 5: Paper Path) Note Show or print the event log for the copy module or printer from the printer’s Information Menu. ● Does the copy module’s front panel report any errors? (See page 720 and take appropriate actions.) ● Does the printer’s control panel report any copy module errors? (See page 607 and take appropriate actions.) ● Does the printer’s event log report any errors? (See page 598 and take appropriate actions.)Status Messages
This section shows status messages that display on the HP Digital Copier Front Panel when there is a problem with the HP Digital Copier. There are 3 different types of errors made by the HP Digital Copier: ● Boot Errors (page 721) ● Equipment Errors (page 721) ● Temporary Errors (page 724) For printer problem solving information, see the printer troubleshooting flowchart starting on page 578. For printer and paper- handling devices error messages see page 604. 720 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Boot Errors
Table 7-44. Boot Errors Boot Error Description 0x00058001 Bad connection (displayed after the second icon is displayed) This error indicates a bad physical connection between the copy module and the printer. This could also indicate that the Scanner Service Agent failed to load, or that the printer ID is not an HP LaserJet 8150MFP 0x00058002 No file (displayed after the third icon is displayed) This error indicates that a connection was established, the Scanner Service Agent loaded, but firmware was not found on the disk. 0x00058003 Bad file (displayed after the third icon is displayed) This error indicates that a connection was established, the Scanner Service Agent loaded, firmware was found on the disk, but one or more of the files appear to be corrupt. Note that the “bad file” error below can also indicate that the copy processor gave up on downloading the runtime firmware after trying several times. It can also occur sporadically if you try to print a printer configuration page while the copy processor is downloading the firmware Note All other numbered Boot Errors (0x00000000-0x000007FF) indicate that the Copy Processor card failed its own diagnostics and is probably bad. These errors will likely be seen in conjunction with and can be confirmed by a blinking red LED on the Copy Processor LED test.Equipment Errors
To correct an equipment error, turn the printer and HP Digital Copier off and then turn both devices on. If the error message persists, replace the indicated part. C4265-90907 Error Messages and Problems 721, Table 7-45. Equipment Errors Error Message Description DEVICE ERROR: Turn the printer off and then on. If the error persists, replace the EEPROM FAILURE Control PCA and the EEPROM. DEVICE ERROR: An error occurred while accessing the backside RAM buffer. BACKSIDE RAM BUFFER Replace the Control PCA.FAILURE
DEVICE ERROR: The motor has a blown fuse. MOTOR FUSE FAILURE ● Check connections to motors. ● Check to see if the motors turn. ● Replace the motor. ● If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. ● If the problem persists, replace the Power Supply. DEVICE ERROR: A Lamp has a blown fuse. LAMP FUSE FAILURE ● Check connections to Lamps. ● Replace the Control PCA. DEVICE ERROR: A problem occurred with the backside optical system. BACKSIDE OPTICAL ● Check to see if the Lamp(s) turn on during an offline test. If FAILURE yes, then clean the glass and optics. If no, replace the Lamp. ● Check the Optical Unit cable connection. ● Replace the Lamp. ● If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. DEVICE ERROR: A problem occurred with the frontside optical system. FRONTSIDE OPTICAL ● Check to see if the Lamp(s) turn on during an offline test. If FAILURE yes, then clean the glass and optics. If no, replace the Lamp. ● Check the Optical Unit/Carrier Unit cable connection. ● If necessary, replace the Lamp. ● If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. 722 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, Table 7-45. Equipment Errors (continued) Error Message Description DEVICE ERROR: A mechanical problem occurred. MECHANICAL FAILURE ● Check that the shipping lock has been removed and reinserted properly. ● Check that the Home Position Sensor is connected. ● Check the Carrier Belt. ● Check the Flatbed Motor. ● If the problem persists, replace the Flatbed Motor Unit. ● If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. ● If the problem persists, replace the Power Supply. C4265-90907 Error Messages and Problems 723,Temporary Errors
A Temporary Error displays when problems with the paper path occur. The Front Panel will display the specific error and graphically illustrate the actions needed to correct the error. Automatic Document Feeder Table 7-46. Temporary Errors Error Message Description ADF PAPER JAM Paper was not found on the ADF path before a READ command was executed, or paper did not pass through the ADF within the specified time. This error state can be reset by one of the following operations: ● the copy module receives a CLEAR command ● or remove paper from the ADF and close the ADF cover ● visually inspect for bad alignment ● If the problem is chronic, clean or replace the ADF pick rollers and separation pad ADF COVER IS OPEN The ADF cover was opened during the ADF READ operation or the ADF cover was open when the ADF read started. ADF MISFEED A START command was received but a misfeed occurred from the ADF input tray. Restack the pages in the ADF input tray. Press START to continue the copy job. ● visually inspect for bad alignment ● If the problem is chronic, clean or replace the ADF pick rollers and separation pad 724 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Step 4. Information Pages
Print information pages from the printer’s Information Menu. See page 651. C4265-90907 Information Pages 725,Step 5. Paper Path
Is the ADF feeding paper correctly? (YES = Go to Step 6: Image Quality) ● Does the copy module cause damage to the original, experiencing frequent mispicks, double-feeds, jams, or skewed paper feeding? ● Check paper types used by customer and suggest to use the flatbed if out of specification. ● Determine if the ADF cleaning interval has been exceeded. (Check the configuration page. See “Sample Copy Module Configuration Page” on page 655 for an example. Inspect and clean the ADF assemblies as needed.) ● Determine if the maintenance interval has been exceeded. (Check the configuration page. See “Sample Copy Module Configuration Page” on page 655 for an example. Inspect and replace the Pick Rollers and Separation Pad as needed.) ● Try a copy from the flatbed to isolate the problem to the ADF mechanism or optics. ● Confirm connection to the ADF (3 cables), confirm ADF Motor Belt, and perform a test of the ADF sensors in the copy module service mode to ensure each sensor moves freely. ● Perform an ADF offset calibration (page 175). ● Perform the ADF test in service mode or an offline test and inspect mechanisms for failure. Be sure to use paper that conforms to HP recommended paper specifications for this test. Replace implicated components. ● See “Error Conditions” on page 727. 726 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Step 6. Image Quality
Is the image quality acceptable? (YES = End) ● Does the copy module output display problems with any of the following? Resolution, grayscale, jitter, skew, image placement, improper image scaling, image out of position, part of image missing, unclear image. ● Determine if the problem is isolated to the flatbed, ADF, or occurs from both. Check to see if the suggested cleaning interval has been exceeded and clean if necessary. (See error and symptom tables and take recommended action.) Table 7-47. Error Conditions Error Condition/Symptom Remedies Power Lamp does not light ● Check the power plug and the Front Panel connection. ● Make sure that the PCA tray is inserted. ● If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. ● If the problem persists, replace the Power Supply. No image or image scrambled ● Check interface connections. ● If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. ● Check the backside or frontside (if frontside only, replace the Carrier Unit). Grayscale or resolution is bad on ● Check that the document is placed on the flatbed the flatbed correctly. ● Clean both sides of the flatbed glass. ● Clean the Carrier Unit. ● If the problem persists, replace the Carrier Unit. ● If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. Excessive Jitter on the flatbed ● Check to see if the cables routed in the mechanism frame are in contact with the Carrier Frame. Reroute the cables if necessary. ● Check for objects blocking the movement of the Carrier Unit during scan. Clean or remove. ● Check if carrier unit belt is loose. ● Replace FB Motor Unit if necessary. ● Clean and relubricate the Carrier Unit Shaft. ● Lubricate the carrier guide rail. ● Replace the Control PCA if necessary. C4265-90907 Image Quality 727, Table 7-47. Error Conditions (continued) Error Condition/Symptom Remedies Image is out of position or partly ● Run an offset adjustment. missing from the flatbed ● Make sure that the glass plate assembly has been reseated correctly if moved. ● Replace the Carrier Unit. Image is unclear or faded from the ● Check that the document is placed on the flatbed flatbed correctly. ● Inspect and clean both sides of the flatbed glass. ● Clean the Carrier Unit. ● If the problem persists, replace the Carrier Unit. ● If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. Magnification is incorrect from the ● Check to see if magnification is incorrect on subscan flatbed or mainscan direction. ● Subscan: check the Carrier Belt and tighten the adjustment screw, and lubricate the Carrier Shaft and Guide Rail. If the problem persists, replace the Flatbed Motor. ● Mainscan: replace the Carrier Unit. If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. Grayscale or resolution is bad on ● Check to see that the document is placed in the ADF the ADF paper chute correctly. ● Check to see that the document size is supported by the ADF. ● Frontside: clean both sides of the glass and clean the Carrier Unit. If the problem persists, replace the Carrier Unit. If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. ● Backside: clean the glass under the ADF and clean the Optical Unit. If the problem persists, replace the Optical Unit. If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. Excessive Jitter on the ADF ● Check for contaminants on the Feed Roller, Eject Roller, and Idler Feed Roller. ● Check that the document size is supported by the ADF. ● Check the ADF for objects blocking mechanical operation. ● Clean the ADF. ● If the problem persists, replace the ADF. 728 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, Table 7-47. Error Conditions (continued) Error Condition/Symptom Remedies Image is out of position or partly ● Check that the original document size is supported by missing from the ADF the ADF. If not, use the flatbed. ● Perform an offset adjustment. ● Clean the ADF. ● If the problem persists, replace the ADF. ● If frontside, replace the Carrier Unit. ● If backside, replace the Optical Unit. Image is unclear, faded, or ● Inspect and clean both sides of the flatbed glass. streaked from the ADF ● Clean the ADF. ● Frontside: clean the Carrier Unit. If the problem persists, replace the Carrier Unit. If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. ● Backside: clean the Optical Unit and back Lamp. If the problem persists, replace the Optical Unit. If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. Magnification is incorrect on the ● Check that the original document paper type is ADF supported by the ADF. If not, then use the flatbed. ● Check to see if magnification is incorrect on the subscan or mainscan direction. ● Subscan: inspect the Feed Roller, Eject Roller and Idler Feed Roller for foreign objects and clean if necessary. Clean the ADF. If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. ● Mainscan frontside: replace the Carrier Unit. If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. ● Mainscan backside: replace the Optical Unit. If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. Frequent paper feed errors: jams, ● Check that the original document paper type is mispicks, double-feeds, damaged supported by the ADF. If not, then use the flatbed. originals, skewed copies on the ● Make sure that the originals are being loaded into the ADF ADF correctly. ● Inspect the Pick Rollers and Separation Pad for contamination and clean. ● Clean the ADF. ● Replace the Pick Rollers and Separation Pad. ● Perform an offset calibration. Front panel buttons and touch ● Perform Front Panel tests. screen are not working ● Replace the Front Panel. ● If the problem persists, replace the Control PCA. C4265-90907 Image Quality 729,Testing the Copy Module
Use the following tests to diagnose problems with the copy module. ● Print information pages (page 651) ● Copy Processor LED Test (below) ● Copy Module Boot Up Icon Conditions (page 732) ● Copy Module Offline Test (page 733) ● Other Tests (page 735) ● Service Mode Tests (page 737) Note If the 1394 connect or firmware download fails, the display will freeze at icon 2, 3, or 4. The display of any icon is the best indication that the Front Panel is functioning correctly.Copy Processor LED Test
Figure 7-37 Copy Processor LEDs 730 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Performing a Copy Processor LED Test
1 From the back of the copy module, unscrew the left thumb screw on the Copy Processor Card. 2 Gently pull the loosened thumbscrew downward, moving the bulkhead of the Copy Processor Card slightly away from the body of the copy module. Be careful not to unseat the Copy Processor Board. 3 Look down inside the copy module near the bulkhead of the Copy Processor Card. You should be able to see the Copy Processor LEDs. Note If you cannot see the LEDs you may have to temporarily remove the Copy Processor bulkhead. To do this, remove 2 screws to temporarily detach the bulkhead from the PCA so that the LEDs may now be seen easily. Reinstall the Copy Processor.Copy Processor LED Test Results
Table 7-48. Copy Processor LED Test Results If LED is Indicates that Copy Process or is Blinking green Good - do not replace it Blinking red Bad and should be replaced Blinking red and green Probably good, but firmware download was not successful (Check the “Copy Module Boot Up Icon Conditions” on page 732 and the printer connections) C4265-90907 Testing the Copy Module 731,Copy Module Boot Up Icon Conditions
Table 7-49. Icon Conditions Icon Condition Recommended Action No icon ● If the display is blank, or only the backlight appears, or it freezes at the logo, see “Display and Communication” on page 719. ● Check connections and suspect the Front Panel. (If the Copy Processor passes the LED test, the Front Panel should not stop at Icon 1.) Stops at Icon 1 The copy processor did not pass its power on tests. ● Perform a Copy Processor LED test and if the test indicates the Copy Processor is bad, replace it. Stops at Icon 2 The Copy Processor likely cannot make the connection to the printer. ● Check connections. ● Reseat cards. ● Check the printer’s configuration pages for the Copy Connect EIO and Digital Copier Pages. ● Ensure the printer and its peripherals are working correctly. ● Make sure Loading Program 1 displays on the printer’s control panel during bootup. If it does not, re-download the copy module firmware (see page 150). ● Make sure the printer is an HP LaserJet 8150MFP. Stops at Icon 3 Copy module firmware failed to download. ● Check connections. ● Reseat cards. ● Print a directory of the printer’s hard disk drive to check that the Copy Module Firmware is installed (see page 656). ● Redownload the Copy Module Firmware (page 150). ● Make sure the printer is an HP LaserJet 8150MFP. Stops at Icon 4 The system could not start the downloaded copy module firmware. ● Perform the recommended actions above. ● Make sure Loading Program 1 and Loading Program 2 displays on the printer’s control panel during bootup. If it does not, re-download the copy module firmware (see page 150). ● Print a directory of the printer’s hard disk drive to check that the Copy Module Firmware is installed (see page 656). ● Redownload the Copy Module Firmware (page 150). ● Check the printer’s configuration pages for the Copy Connect EIO and Digital Copier Pages. 732 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, Note Download is complete and successful when the main menu replaces Icon 4.Copy Module Offline Test
This test does not depend on a functioning Copy Processor or a functioning Front Panel. This is a pass or fail test. If the Carrier Unit moves, the ADF feeds paper, and the Lamps come on, then the test is passed. If this does not happen, the copy module will appear to be dead. Successful completion of this test will exercise the functionality of both Lamps, the Carrier Unit, the Optical Unit, and the Control PCA. ADF cover OMR sensor ADF empty open sensor B5sensor A4 B4 size A3 sensor Top of paper sensor Figure 7-38 Locations of ADF Sensors 1 Turn the copy module off. 2 Open the ADF cover and pull the ADF Empty Sensor to the paper out position, and push the B5 Paper Sensor (with respect to portrait paper) while turning the copy module on. When you hear the copy module begin to initialize, release the sensors. 3 Close the ADF and then open the ADF. C4265-90907 Testing the Copy Module 733, 4 Close the ADF. At this point you should be in the offline test mode. If no paper is loaded within 5 seconds, the flatbed test executes. (The Carrier Unit moves and the Lamp lights as if they were making a flatbed copy.) 5 Open the ADF to stop the flatbed test. 6 Have a stack of paper ready. Close the ADF and load paper. 7 The ADF will move paper and the Lamps will light as if making a two-sided copy. Note Successful completion of this test will exercise the functionality of both Lamps, the Carrier Unit, the Optical Unit, and the Control PCA. 734 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Other Tests
Use the tests listed below to determine if a part is “good” or “bad” without swapping parts. Table 7-50. Other Tests Possible Bad Part Tests and indicators that the part is “Good” or “Bad” Copy Processor Board Good if: ● the Front Panel icons display. ● the Copy Processor LED test (page 730) shows green or green and red. Control PCA Good if: ● there are no equipment errors. ● the fan is on. ● the Front Panel works. ● the offline test is OK. Front Panel Good if: ● the backlight comes on (might be OK). ● logo displays (probably OK). ● the first icons display (definitely OK). ● passes the service mode tests (which catch small defects such as bad pixels, stuck buttons, or no touch). Power Supply Good if: ● the fan comes on. ● the start button LED lights. ● the Front Panel displays an image. Paper handling mechanisms Good if: ● the service mode ADF test works. ● the offline test works. ● both tests work without damaging the original. C4265-90907 Testing the Copy Module 735, Table 7-50. Other Tests (continued) Possible Bad Part Tests and indicators that the part is “Good” or “Bad” Optics Good if: ● there is no optical failure. (An optical failure may also indicate it is time to clean the optics.) ● Lamps light during the offline test. ● a simple page is copied. Copy Module Firmware Good if: ● the disk directory matches the standard (file names and sizes). ● Loading Program 1 is visible on the Front Panel of the printer. ● the printer configuration page identifies an HP LaserJet 8150MFP. ● copy module firmware is reloaded. Copy Connect EIO Good if: ● shows up on the configuration pages. ● the fourth startup icon is passed. ADF Sensors Good if: ● the service mode test of each sensor passes. ADF Lamp Good if: ● resistor R3 is temporarily shorted to ground and the lamp lights. ● lights during an offline test. Home Position Sensor Bad if: ● the Carrier Unit bumps into the side of the copy module for 5 seconds. Carrier Unit Lamp Good if: ● lights during an offline test. 736 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907,Service Mode Tests
The following tests are available through the copy module’s Tests Menu in service mode. Follow the prompts on the front panel to complete the tests. 1 Front panel tests ● display ● touch screen 2 Keypad/LED tests ● keypad buttons ● start button LED 3 Sensors Tests (ADF) 4 ADF paper feed tests C4265-90907 Testing the Copy Module 737, 738 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting C4265-90907, 8 Parts and DiagramsChapter contents
How to Use the Part Lists and Diagrams .740 Illustrations and Parts Lists .741 Printer and paper-handling components .742 Printer Parts and Diagrams .744 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams .758 HP Digital Copier Parts and Diagrams .776 Alphabetical Parts List (Printer and Paper-handling Devices) 791 Alphabetical Parts List (Copy Module) .801 Numerical Parts List (Printer and Paper-handling devices) .805 Numerical Parts List (Copy Module).815 C4265-90907 Chapter contents 739,How to Use the Part Lists and Diagrams
The figures in this chapter illustrate the major subassemblies and their component parts. Each table lists the reference designator (item number) for each part, the associated part number for the item, the quantity, and a description of the part. While looking for a part number, pay careful attention to the voltage listed in the description column to ensure that the part number selected is for the correct model of printer. Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000- sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling Accessories (C4788-90904). Note Parts that have no item or part number listed are not field-replaceable parts and cannot be ordered.Ordering Parts
All standard part numbers listed are stocked and may be ordered from HP's CSSO-a or CSSO-E. Hewlett-Packard Co. Commercial Service and Support Organization-Americas 8050 Foothills Blvd. Roseville, CA 95678 Parts Direct Ordering 1-800-227-8164 (U.S. Only) Hewlett-Packard Co. Commercial Service and Support Organization-Europe Wolf-Hirth Strasse 33 D-7030 Böblingen, Germany (49 7031) 14-2253 Contact your local HP Parts Coordinator for other local phone numbers.Common Hardware
See table 6-1 in Chapter 6 for a list of the common hardware used in the printer. 740 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Illustrations and Parts Lists
The following illustrations and their associated parts tables list the field-replaceable components for this printer. Where applicable, the exchange part number is listed immediately following the original equipment part numbers. This chapter also provides two cross- reference tables of all the parts listed in this chapter: table 8-29 on page 791 lists the parts in alphabetical order, and table 8-31 on page 805 lists the parts in numerical order. Both tables are cross- referenced to the appropriate figure and reference designator in this chapter. C4265-90907 Illustrations and Parts Lists 741,Printer and paper-handling components
Figure 8-1 HP LaserJet 8150 MFP Paper-Handling Components Table 8-1. Printer and Paper-Handling Components 8100 Part/ 8150 Part/ Exchange Exchange No. Ref Description/Product Number Number (if different) QTY 01 Formatter Assembly C4107-67901 C4265-67901) 01A Formatter Assembly, Exchange C4107-69001 (ex.) C4265-69001 not shown Firmware ROM C4214-60005 C8530-67901 not shown 8 MB Memory SDRAM DIMM C4141-67901 C7842-67901 not shown 16 MB Memory SDRAM DIMM C7843-67901 C7843-67901 not shown 32 MB Memory SDRAM DIMM C4143-67901 C7845-67901 not shown 64 MB Memory SDRAM DIMM C7846-67901 C7846-67901 05 Toner Cartridge/C4182X 06 Envelope Feeder/C3765B C3765-60501 1 742 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Table 8-1. Printer and Paper-Handling Components (continued)
8100 Part/ 8150 Part/Exchange Exchange No. Ref Description/Product Number Number (if different) QTY
07 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4)/C4781A R95-3002-000CN 1 not shown2x500-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4, 5)/C4780A R95-3003-000CN 08 Tray 2 R98-1005-000CN 1 09 Tray 3 R98-1004-000CN 1 not shown Paper Size Guide (Trays 2 and 3) RF5-1484-000CN 1 not shown Paper Size Guide Label (Trays 2 and 3) RS5-8605-000CN 1 10 Duplexer/C4782A C4782-60501 1 C4782-69501 (ex.) 12 8-bin Mailbox/C4785B 1 12 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler/C4787A 1 12 5-bin Mailbox for Stapler (5-bin Mailbox only, C4787-60502 1 without the Stapler Unit.) C4787-69502 (ex.) 13 Face-up Bin RB1-6491-000CN 1 14 EIO Coverplate 5021-0349 3 15 Stapler Assembly C4787-60500 1 not shown 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox/C4238A R95-3007-000CN 1 not shown Stand for 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox C4784-60500 1 not shown Packaging Kit, printer 5041-9238 not shown Packaging Kit, duplexer C3762-60500 not shown Packaging Kit, 2000-sheet Input Tray C3763-60500 not shown Packaging Kit, 8-bin Mailbox C3764-60500 not shown Packaging Kit, Envelope Feeder C3765-60500 not shown Maintenance Kit, 100-120V/C3914A C3914-69001 (ex.) not shown Maintenance Kit, 220-240V/C3915A C3915-69001 (ex.) not shown C-link Cable Assembly 61 cm (printer to C3763-60502 2000-sheet Input Tray) not shown C-link Cable Assembly 97 cm (8-bin Mailbox C3766-60539 to Stapler) not shown Stapler Cartridges (3-pack)/C3772A not shown Power Box (includes bracket clip) C4781-60500 not shown Jumper Cable, Short C4781-60501 not shown Jumper Cable, Long C4781-60502C4265-90907 Printer and paper-handling components 743
,Printer Parts and Diagrams
Figure 8-2 Printer Covers and Doors 744 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Table 8-2. Printer Covers and Doors Ref Description 8100 Part No. 8150 Part No. QTY
1 Display, Control Panel RG5-4384-000CN 1 1a Overlay, Control Panel (English) C4214-40029 1 1a Overlay, Control Panel (French) C4214-40030 1 1a Overlay, Control Panel (Italian) C4214-40031 1 1a Overlay, Control Panel (Portuguese) C4214-40032 1 1a Overlay, Control Panel (German) C4214-40041 1 1a Overlay, Control Panel (Spanish) C4214-4004212Tray, Output-Face-down RB1-6490-000CN13Spring, Torsion RB1-6509-000CN14Spring, Compression RB1-6493-000CN15Label, Operation RS5-8676-000CN16Hinge Plate RB2-3641-000CN17Screw, M4 x 10 XA9-0870-000CN 8 Tray, Face-up RB1-6491-000CN19Delivery Cover ( Left Side F/U) RB2-3558-000CN 1 10 Hinge, Stopper RF5-2701-000CN 2 11 Cover, Left-Lower RB1-6480-000CN 1 12 Screw, M4x8XA9-0605-000CN 13 Cover, Switch RB1-6492-000CN 1 14 Front Cover (Duplex Jam Removal) RB2-3626-000CN 1 15 Front Cover RG5-4362-000CN 1 16 Right Cover Assembly RG5-1915-000CN 1 17 Open/Close Stopper RB1-6484-000CN 1 18 Right, Lower Cover (Rear Plastic on Metal) RB2-3642-000CN 1 19 Screw, M3x8XA9-0872-000CN 20 Cover, Rear RF5-1402-000CN 1 21 Electrical Cover (Rear by Formatter) RB1-6489-000CN 1 22 Diverter Assembly RG5-4325-000CN 1 22a (n/s) Gear, 20T RA9-1127-000CN 1 22b Diverter Drive Assembly RF9-1249-000CN 1 23 Top Cover Assembly RG5-4360-000CN 1 24 Tray Lock (Plastic Clip) RB2-3636-000CN 1C4265-90907 Printer Parts and Diagrams 745
, Figure 8-3 Printer Internal Components (1 of 4) 746 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Table 8-3. Printer Internal Components (1 of 4)
8150 Part No.Ref Description 8100 Part No. (if different) QTY
1 Assembly, Transfer Roller RG9-1361- 1 000CN 2 Roller, Transfer RF9-1394-000CN13Transfer Guide Bushing RB1-6441-000CN24Transfer Guide Holder RF5-2676-000CN25Holder, Damper-Front RB1-6461-000CN16Holder, Damper-Rear RB1-6462-000CN18Main Motor Cable RG5-4386-000CN19Screw, M4x8TP XB6-7400-807CN 1 10 Main Motor RH7-5219-000CN 1 11 Clutch Cover RB2-3631-000CN 1 12 Paper Input Unit (PIU) (See Figure 8-7 on page RG5-4334-000CN 1 754 to order) 12 Paper Input Unit (PIU) (ex.) C4214-69004 1 13 Fusing Assembly, 110V RG5-4318-000CN1xFuser Lock Lever-Right RB1-6615-020CN1xFuser Lock Lever-Left RB1-6616-020CN 1 13 Fusing Assembly, 110V (ex.) C4214-69007 1 13 Fusing Assembly, 220V RG5-4317-000CN 1 13 Fusing Assembly, 220V (ex.) C4214-69008 1 14 Printer Drive Assembly RG5-4365-000CN 1 15 Registration Assembly RG5-4303-000CN 1 15A Electromagnetic Clutch RH7-5187-000CN 1 16 Feeder Assembly (see figure 8-7 on page 754 RG5-4305-000CN 1 for detail) 17 Tray 1 Assembly (see figure 8-7 on page 754 for RG5-4330-000CN 1 detail) 17A Cover, Internal Tray RB1-6749-000CN 1 18 Tray 1 Assembly Cover RG5-4329-000CN 1 19 Face-down Delivery Assembly (see figure 8-7 RG5-1874-000CN 1 on page 754 for detail)C4265-90907 Printer Parts and Diagrams 747
, Figure 8-4 Printer Internal Components (2 of 4) 748 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Table 8-4. Printer Internal Components (2 of 4)
8150 Part No.Ref Description 8100 Part No. (if different) QTY
1 Guide, Rear RF5-2726-000CN12Release, Arm RB1-6446-000CN13Arm-Pressure-front RB1-6444-000CN14Guide, Front RB2-3622-000CN15Foot RB1-6421-000CN46ROD Rail RB1-6778-000CN27Spring, Tension RS5-2499-000CN28Guide, Rail RB1-6776-000CN29Stopper, Rail, Tray RB1-6777-000CN 2 10 Stopper, Rail,Tray RB1-6783-000CN 2 11 Cable, Tray Sensor, Cassette Size RG5-1920-000CN 1 12 Cover, Upper Right RB1-6464-000CN 1C4265-90907 Printer Parts and Diagrams 749
, Figure 8-5 Printer Internal Components (3 of 4) 750 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Table 8-5. Printer internal Components (3 of 4)
8150 Part No.Ref Description 8100 Part No. (if different) QTY
1 Cable, Scanner Motor RG5-4378-000CN12Assembly, Laser Scanner RG5-4344-000CN12Assembly, Laser Scanner (exchange) C4214-69003 (ex.) 1 3 Laser and Control Panel Cable RG5-4377-000CN14Stopper, CG RB1-6427-000CN25Fan, FM2/Laser Scanner RH7-1266-000CN16Shutter, White (not shown) RB1-6473-000CN17High-Voltage Power Supply RG5-4306-000CN18Shutter RB1-6458-000CN 1C4265-90907 Printer Parts and Diagrams 751
, Figure 8-6 Printer Internal Components (4 of 4) 752 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Table 8-6. Printer Internal Components (4 of 4)
8150 Part No.Ref Description 8100 Part No. (if different) QTY
1 Guides, Interface RB1-6771-000CN22Shield, Formatter RF5-2678-000CN13Guide, Slide RB1-6775-000CN14Shield, Plate RF5-1464-000CN15Power Supply, Low-Voltage 110 V RG5-4300-000CN15Power Supply, Low Voltage-220 V RG5-4301-000CN16110V Fuse VD5-0246-301CN17Cable, Registration RG5-1928-000CN18Cable, Fuser 2 RG5-1850-000CN19Cable, Fuser 1 RG5-4381-000CN 1 10 Fan, FM3/Formatter RH7-1271-000CN 1 11 Cable, Fan 3 RG5-1921-000CN 1 12 Fan, FM2/Low Voltage Power Supply RH7-1396-000CN 1C4265-90907 Printer Parts and Diagrams 753
, Figure 8-7 Detail of Assemblies 754 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Table 8-7. Detail of Assemblies
8150 Part No.Ref Description 8100 Part No. (if different) QTY
A1 Feeder Assembly RG5-4305-000CN A2 Block, Shaft Holding, Front RB2-3503-000CN 1 A3 Compression Spring, Front RS6-2072-000CN 1 A4 Sensor Cable RG5-1843-000CN 1 A5 Sensor Arm PS1 RB1-6417-000CN 1 A6 Sensor Arm Spring RB1-6409-000CN 1 A7 Compression Spring, Rear RS6-2073-000CN 1 A8 Block, Shaft Holding, Rear RB2-3504-000CN 1 B1 Assembly, Paper Pickup RG5-4334-000CN 1 B2 Plate, Guide-Upper RB1-6582-000CN B3 Roller, Pickup RF5-2708-000CN B4 Limiter, torque RB2-3851-000CN 2 B5 Clutch, Paper Feed RH7-5188-000CN 1 B6 PCA, PIU RG5-1860-000CN 1 B7 Photo Interrupter WG8-0291-000CN 1 B8 Arm, Sensor-PS2 RB1-6557-000CN 1 B9 Spring, Sensor Arm RB1-6558-000CN 1 B10 Cable, Sensor RG5-1859-000CN 1 B11 Motor, PIU RH7-1350-000CN 1 B12 Cable, Paper Pickup RG5-1861-000CN 1 B13 Feed and Separation Rollers RF5-1834-000CN 4 C1 Assembly, Tray 1 RG5-4330-000CN 1 C2 Fan, FM5 RH7-1397-000CN C3 Tray1 Feed Roller RB1-9526-000CN 1 C4 Tray 1 Separation Pad RF5-2703-000CN 1 D1 Delivery Assembly RG5-1874-000CN 1 D3 Fan, FM4/Delivery Assembly RH7-1289-000CN 1 D5 Paper Height Lever RB1-6693-000CN 1 D6 Paper Sensing Lever RB1-6692-000CN 1C4265-90907 Printer Parts and Diagrams 755
,Figure 8-8 PCB Assembly Location Diagram Table 8-8. PCB Assembly Locations
8150 Part No.Ref Description 8100 Part No. (if different) QTY
1 PCB, Switch/Sensor RG5-1846-000CN12Assembly, DC Controller PCB RG5-4375-030CN12Assembly, DC Controller PCB (exchange) C4214-69009 (ex.) 1 3 PCB, Tray, Multi-purpose RG5-1884-000CN14PCB, Tray Sensor RG5-1845-000CN25Paper P/U PCB RG5-1860-000CN 1 756 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907, Figure 8-9 Face-up Solenoid Assembly Table 8-9. Face-up Solenoid Assembly 8150 Part No. Ref Description 8100 Part No. (if different) QTY 1 Face-up Solenoid Assembly RG5-1875-000CN 1 C4265-90907 Printer Parts and Diagrams 757,Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams Input Devices
2000-sheet Input Tray Kit 1 Kit 1 Kit 1 84 78 Kit 1 Kit 1 80 81 79 74 73 72 76 Kit 1 Kit 1 75 89 Kit 1 Figure 8-10 2000-sheet Input Tray Components (1 of 2) 758 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Table 8-10. 2000-sheet Input Tray Components (1 of 2)
8150 Part No.Ref Description 8100 Part No. (if different) QTY
71 Back Cover RB2-2519-000CN 1 72 Tray Size Labels RS5-8611-000CN 1 73 Tray Size Plate RB1-6894-000CN 1 74 Caster XZ9-0442-000CN 4 75 Feed and Separation Rollers RF5-1834-000CN 2 76 Front Cover (with LED window) RF5-2568-000CN 1 77 Left Cover RF5-2646-000CN 1 78 Locating Pin, Metal (Positioning) RF5-2556-000CN 3 79 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Tray RG5-3845-000CN 1 80 Paper Deck Drive Assembly RG5-3851-000CN 1 81 Paper Deck Drive Bushing RS5-1399-000CN 1 82 Paper Pickup Assembly RG5-3843-000CN 1 83 Pickup Roller RF5-1835-000CN 1 84 Plate Paper Limit Back RG5-3850-000CN 1 85 Plate Paper Limit Middle RG5-3849-000CN 1 86 Plate Paper Reference Front RG5-4201-000CN 1 87 Right Cover RB1-7832-020CN 1 88 Top Cover (Label Included) RG5-2644-000CN 1 89 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) RG5-3854-000CN 1 Kit 1 Hardware Kit RY7-5044-000CN 1C4265-90907 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams 759
, Figure 8-11 2000-sheet Input Tray Components (2 of 2) 760 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Table 8-11. 2000-sheet Input Tray Components (2 of 2)
8150 Part No.Ref Description 8100 Part No. (if different) QTY
90 Feet Adjustable Tip RG5-3853-000CN 1 91 Front LED PCA with holder and cable RG5-4204-000CN 1 92 Main Cable RG5-3919-000CN 1 93 Metal retaining spring (Spring Leaf) RB1-7835-000CN 1 94 Metallic Retaining Tab (Plate Stop) RB1-7677-000CN 1 95 Outrigger RG5-3852-000CN 1 96 Paper Deck PCA (2000-sheet Input Tray RG5-3908-000CN 1 Controller) 97 Paper Quantity Sensor PCA Assembly RG5-2166-000CN 1 98 Paper Size Sensor PCA Assembly RG5-2168-000CN 1 99 Power Supply Cable (PSU) RG5-3909-000CN 1 100 Power Supply Fuse 250V/3.15A VD7-1893-151CN 1 101 Tension Spring RS5-2561-000CN 1 102 Universal Power Supply Assembly RG5-4021-000CN 1 103 2000-sheet Input Tray (whole unit) R95-3002-000CN 1 Kit 1 2K (2000-sheet Input Tray) Deck Hardware Kit RY7-5044-000CN 1 Not Jumper Cable, Long C4781-60502 1 Shown Not Jumper Cable, Short C4781-60501 1 Shown Not Power Box (includes bracket clip) C4781-60500 1 Shown Not Tray Shipping Lock RB1-7746-000CN 1 Shown Not C-link Cable (engine to input device) C3763-60502 1 Shown Not Clutch cover for 2000-sheet input tray RB2-2509-000CN 1 ShownC4265-90907 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams 761
, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Figure 8-122x500-sheet Input Tray Internal Components 762 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Table 8-12. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Internal Components
8150 Part No.Ref Description 8100 Part No. (if different) QTY
1 Back Cover RB2-3675-000CN12Tray Size Labels RS5-8611-000CN13Tray Size Plate RB1-6894-000CN14Feed and Separation Rollers RF5-1834-000CN45Front Top Cover RF5-2762-000CN16Left Cover RF5-2764-000CN17Main Cable RG5-4440-000CN18Front Door (Cover Storage Tray) RB2-3668-000CN19Paper Deck Drive Assembly RG5-4416-000CN 1 102x500-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA RG5-4442-000CN 1 11 Paper Feed Assembly (Vertical Transfer Unit) RG5-4403-000CN 1 12 Paper Pickup Assembly RG5-4410-000CN 1 13 Storage Paper Tray RB2-3669-000CN 1 14 Tray-Size Sensing PCA RG5-1845-000CN 1 15 Holder Size PCA RB2-3667-000CN 1 16 Pickup Roller RF5-2708-000CN 1 17 Power Supply Fuse 250V/3.15A VD7-1893-151CN 1 18 Right Cover RB2-3666-000CN 1 19 Universal Power Supply Assembly RG5-4021-000CN 1 20 Outrigger RG5-4205-000CN 1 21 Caster XZ9-0442-000CN 1 22 Power Supply Cable (PSU) RG5-3909-000CN 1 23 Front LED PCA RG5-4441-000CN 1 25 Tray 4 Assembly R98-1007-000CN 1 26 Tray 5 Assembly R98-1006-000CN 1 27 Locating Pin, Metal (Positioning) RF5-2556-000CN 1 not Power Box (Includes bracket clip) C4781-60500 1 shown not Jumper Cable, Short C4781-60501 1 shown not Jumper Cable, Long C4781-60502 1 shownC4265-90907 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams 763
, Table 8-12. 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray Internal Components (continued) 8150 Part No. Ref Description 8100 Part No. (if different) QTY not Feet Adjustable Tip RG5-3853-000CN 1 shown not Clutch cover for2x500-sheet input tray RB2-3690-000CN 1 shown 32 Top Cover (Includes label) RF5-2766-000CN 1 33 Spacer, latch RB2-3705-000CN 1 34 Latch XZ9-0379-000CN 1 352x500-sheet Input Tray (whole unit) R95-3003-000CN 1 Note All screws are included in the Screws Kit, and all shipping locks are included in the Shipping Locks Kit. 764 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Output Devices
Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000- sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling Accessories (C4788-90904). 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Figure 8-13 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Internal Components C4265-90907 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams 765,Table 8-13. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Internal Components
8150 Part No.Ref Description 8100 Part No. (if different) QTY
1 Top Cover Assembly (Upper Guide) RG1-3838-000CN12Bin Full Sensor RA2-2484-000CN13Flag, Sensor RA2-2485-000CN14Bushing RA2-2505-000CN15Front Cover RF1-4004-000CN16Back Cover RF1-4008-000CN17Power Supply RH3-2205-000CN C4783-69507187-bin Tabletop Mailbox Controller PCA RG1-3853-000CN 1 Assembly 9 Solenoid Reversing Mechanism RH7-5223-000CN 1 10 Solenoid Flipper RH7-5225-000CN 1 11 Reversing Mechanism Motor RF1-4003-000CN 1 12 Plate (Motor Cover) RA2-2541-000CN 1 13 Face-down Bin Assembly, Odd (with 1 roller) RG1-3836-000CN 1 14 Face-down Bin Assembly, Even (with 2 rollers) RG1-3837-000CN 1 15 Reversing Tray (Face-up) RA2-2487-000CN 1 16 Diverter Assembly (Flipper) RG1-3844-000CN 1 17 Face-up Bin Full and Sensor PCA RG1-3816-000CN 1 18 Right Cover Assembly RG1-3840-000CN 1 19 Plate, Stopper RA2-2527-000CN 1 20 LED PCA RG1-3817-000CN 1 21 Empty Bin Sensor PCA RG1-3815-000CN 1 22 Support Plate RA2-2500-000CN 1 23 Full Bin and Interlock sensor PCA RG1-3814-000CN 1 not C-link Cable (80 cm) C4783-70000 1 shown 25 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox, whole unit R95-3007-000CN 1 not 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox, Stand Assembly C4784-60500 1 shown 27 Bottom Bin (Tray) RA2-2408-000CN 1 31 Handle Latch RA2-2512-000CN 1 32 Cover Latch RA2-2531-000CN 1 766 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907, Table 8-13. 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Internal Components (continued) 8150 Part No. Ref Description 8100 Part No. (if different) QTY 33 Pin Positioning Bushing RA2-2439-000CN 1 34 Spring Tension RA2-2513-000CN 1 35 Rail Assembly RG1-3842-000CN 1 36 Latching Mechanism RF1-4005-000CN 1 not Hardware Screws Kit for 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox RY7-5048-000CN 1 shown Note All screws are included in the Screws Kit. C4265-90907 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams 767, 8-bin Mailbox Note For information on the 3,000-sheet Stapler/Stacker, see HP 3,000- sheet Stapler/Stacker Service Manual Supplement for Paper-Handling Accessories (C4788-90904). Figure 8-14 8-bin Mailbox Components (1 of 3) 768 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Table 8-14. 8-bin Mailbox Components (1 of 3)
8150 Part No.Ref Description 8100 Part No. (if different) QTY
20 User LED PCA (with Cable) C4785-60515 1 21 Adjustable Fixed Caster C4785-60511 1 22 Attachment Assembly (Rod, Bracket, Cables) C4785-60516 1 23 Blind Cover C4785-60503 1 24 Standard Output Bin C4785-60502 1 25 Face-up Bin C3764-60505 1 26 Front Cover C4785-60504 1 27 8-bin Mailbox Assembly without attachment rod C4785-69500 (ex.) 1 (Exchange Unit) 28 8-bin Mailbox Assembly with attachment rod C4785-60500 1 (Whole Unit) 29 8-bin Mailbox Controller (with metal box) C4785-60508 1 30 Nonadjustable Fixed Caster C4785-60510 1 31 Top Cover C3764-60555 1 32 Stapler Assembly (Exchange Unit) C4787-69500 (ex.) 1 33 Stapler Assembly C4787-60500 1 34 5-bin Mailbox - for Stapler C4787-60502 1 35 5-bin Mailbox - for Stapler Assembly (Exchange C4787-69502 (ex.) 1 Unit) Kit 1 Plastic Parts C4785-60519 1 Kit 1/ Spacer, Plastic (included in Kit 1) 1G Kit 3 Hardware C4785-60521 1 Kit 3/ Screws Torx, T20, M4X10 (included in Kit 3) 3B Kit 3/ Screws Torx, Tapping T20, M4X10 (included in Kit 3) 3C Kit 3/ Screw Torx, Tapping T10 (included in Kit 3) 3EC4265-90907 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams 769
, Figure 8-15 8-bin Mailbox Components (2 of 3) 770 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Table 8-15. 8-bin Mailbox Components (2 of 3)
8150 Part No.Ref Description 8100 Part No. (if different) QTY
32 Flipper Assembly C4785-60509 1 33 Head Assembly (with Metal Tape) C4785-60506 1 34 Metal Tape and Housing Assembly C4785-60507 1 Kit 1 Plastic Parts C4785-60519 1 Kit 1/ Anticurl String 1A Kit 1/ Anticurl Spring 1B Kit 1/ Pulley, Small Bottom 1C Kit 3 Hardware C4785-60521 1 Kit 3/ Screws Torx, T20, M4x12 3D Kit 3/ Screw Torx, Tapping T10 3E Kit 3/ Caster Screws 3F Not Repackaging Kit C4785-60513 1 Shown Not Short C-link Cable adapter (extension)1 C4785-70001 1 Shown Not C-link Cable 5-bin 8-bin Mailbox to Stapler Unit C3766-60539 1 Shown 1. The extension is necessary when no input device is used in combination with an 8-bin mailbox or a 5-bin mailbox with stapler.C4265-90907 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams 771
, Figure 8-16 8-bin Mailbox Components (3 of 3) 772 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Table 8-16. 8-bin Mailbox Components (3 of 3)
8150 Part No.Ref Description 8100 Part No. (if different) QTY
35 3 Diagnostic LED PCA (with Cable) C4785-60514 1 36 Attachment Clip C4785-60512 1 37 Back Cover C4785-60505 1 38 Delivery Head Position Motor C3764-60507 1 39 Input Paper Guide (Nose Piece) C3764-60561 1 40 Power Supply C4785-60501 1 41 Transport Belt Motor (with Fan) C4785-60518 1 Kit 1 Plastic Parts C4785-60519 1 Kit 1/1D Cable Holder Round Gasket Kit 1/1E Flat Cable holder Edge Kit 1/1F Flat Cable Holder Kit 2 Cables C4785-60520 1 Kit 2/2A Interlock Switch Kit 2/2B Delivery Head Motor Cable Kit 2/2C Flipper Sensors - Controller Cable Kit 2/2D Flipper Encoder - Controller Kit 2/2E Flipper Motor - Controller Kit 2/2AF ESD Cable Kit 2/2G Delivery Head Assembly Flat Cable Kit 3 Hardware C4785-60521 1 Kit 3/3A Screws Torx Not Shown Shipping Lock Kit for 8-bin Mailbox/5-bin C4787-60503 1 Mailbox with StaplerC4265-90907 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams 773
,Stapler
Figure 8-17 Stapler Internal Components 774 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Table 8-17. Stapler Internal Components
8150 PartRef Description 8100 Part No. No. (if QTY
different) Stapler Assembly C4787-60500 1 Stapler Assembly (Exchange Unit) C4787-69500 (ex.) 1 1 Top Cover Assembly C3766-6050112Stapling Bed Assembly C3766-6050313Stapler Control PCA C4787-6050114Back Plate C3766-6050515Hinges, Set of C3766-6050616Wire Frame C3766-6050717Brushes C3766-60508 1 not shown Stapler Packaging C3766-6050918Kit: Plastic staple cover; scan bar (shown) C3766-60510 1 bin full sensor, actuator, and flag (not shown) not shown Kit: T10 Torx screws (10) C3766-6051119C-link Cable (97 cm) C3766-60512 1 not shown Mailbox with Stapler Packaging C3766-60516 1C4265-90907 Paper-Handling Devices Parts and Diagrams 775
,HP Digital Copier Parts and Diagrams
Figure 8-18 Assembly Location Diagram 1 Covers 2 Flatbed 3 Glass Plate Assembly 4 Power Supply and Main Board Tray 5 Carrier Unit 6 ADF Unit 7 Optical Unit 8 Document Cover Assembly 776 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907, Figure 8-19 Covers C4265-90907 HP Digital Copier Parts and Diagrams 777,Table 8-18. Covers
8150 Part No.Ref Description 8100 Part No. (if different) QTY
101 Upper Cover (skin) PA03002-C107FJ 1 102 ADF Cover (skin) PA03002-C106FJ 1 103 ADF Latch Cap PA03002-C201FJ 1 105 Output Tray Assembly PA03002-C121FJ 1 105-1 Output Tray Flip-out PA03002-C263FJ 1 106 Panel Cover PA03002-C264FJ 1 107 Front Panel Bracket PA03002-C257FJ 3 108 Front Panel Frame Ground Spring PA03002-C266FJ 1 109 Front Panel 9000288TF 1 not Front Panel Frame Ground Plate PA03002-C272FJ 1 shown not Front Panel Cable Clamp PA03002-C273FJ 1 shown 778 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Figure 8-20 Flatbed Table 8-19. Flatbed
8150 Part No.Ref Description 8100 Part No. (if different) QTY
202 Carrier Rail PA03002-C205FJ 1 203 FB Motor Unit (w/belt) PA03002-C116FJ 1 205 Carrier Tension Pulley Collar PA03002-C214FJ 1 206 Carrier Tension Pulley Spring PA03002-C212FJ 1 207 Carrier Tension Pulley Shaft PA03002-C211FJ 1 208 Carrier Belt Tension Pulley PA03002-C210FJ 1 209 Carrier Tension Pulley Spacer PA03002-C213FJ 2 210 Idle Roller Coil Spring PA03002-C209FJ 1 211 Carrier Unit Protector PA03002-C216FJ 1 212 Rubber Foot PA03002-C218FJ 4 213 Carrier Ribbon Cable Protector PA03002-C217FJ 1 214 Control PCA Protector PA03002-C215FJ 1C4265-90907 HP Digital Copier Parts and Diagrams 779
,Table 8-19. Flatbed (continued)
8150 Part No.Ref Description 8100 Part No. (if different) QTY
215 Junction PCA Cover PA03002-C267FJ 1 216 Junction PCA PA03002-C103FJ 1 217 Carrier Ribbon Cable Ferrite Bead PA03002-C262FJ 1 218 Front Panel Cable PA03002-C125FJ 1 219 Front Panel Cable Cover PA03002-C270FJ 1 220 Carrier Flex Cable PA03002-C204FJ 1 221 Home Position Sensor PA03002-C207FJ 1 222 Carrier Stopper (shipping lock) PA03002-C124FJ 1 223 Frame Ground Spring 1 PA03002-C208FJ 1 780 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Figure 8-21 Glass Plate and PCA Assembly Table 8-20. Glass Plate and PCA Assembly
8150 Part No.Ref Description 8100 Part No. (if different) QTY
301 Glass Plate Assembly PA03002-C219FJ 1 301-1 Output Tray Bracket, Front PA03002-C223FJ 1 301-2 Output Tray Bracket, Rear PA03002-C222FJ 1 301-4 Exit Idle Roller PA03002-C224FJ 2 301-5 HK Ring V2 PA03002-C225FJ 2 302 Main/PS Cover Bracket PA03002-C220FJ 1 304 Fan Assembly PA03002-C118FJ 1 305 Power Supply PA03002-C101FJ 1 306 Control PCA (FJ) PA03002-C102FJ 1 307 Copy Processor Card Cage PA03002-C258FJ 1 309 Back PCA Board (CP mate) PA03002-C119FJ 1 311 DC Cable PS to Main PA03002-C203FJ 1 313 RFI Cover PA03002-C202FJ 1C4265-90907 HP Digital Copier Parts and Diagrams 781
, Table 8-20. Glass Plate and PCA Assembly (continued) 8150 Part No. Ref Description 8100 Part No. (if different) QTY 314 CCD Cable PA03002-C229FJ 1 315 Copy Processor Card PM-3700 1 316 Copy Connect Cable 8120-8749 1 782 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Figure 8-22 Carrier Unit Table 8-21. Carrier Unit
8150 Part No.Ref Description 8100 Part No. (if different) QTY
401 Carrier Unit PA03002-C113FJ 1 401-1 Lower Lamp (front side) PA03002-C114FJ 1 401-2 Carrier Unit Lamp PCA PA03002-C251FJ 1 401-3 Carrier Rail Bushing PA03002-C206FJ 1 401-4 Carrier Unit Dust Cover PA03002-C256FJ 1 401-5 Carrier Unit Lubrication Felt PA03002-C259FJ 1C4265-90907 HP Digital Copier Parts and Diagrams 783
,Figure 8-23 ADF Unit Table 8-22. ADF Unit
8150 Part No.Ref Description 8100 Part No. (if different) QTY
501-1 ADF Latch Lever Front PA03002-C242FJ 1 501-2 ADF Latch Spring PA03002-C245FJ 2 501-3 Drive Roller Bearing PA03002-C233FJ 2 501-5 Optical Unit Tie Down w/Pad PA03002-C227FJ 1 501-6 Drive Roller Shaft PA03002-C230FJ 2 501-7 ADF Latch Shaft PA03002-C244FJ 1 501-8 Pick Spring PA03002-C240FJ 1 501-9 ADF Motor Unit PA03002-C109FJ 1 501- LED Assembly (includes cable) PA03002-C126FJ 1 501- Key Washer PA03002-C241FJ 1 784 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Table 8-22. ADF Unit (continued)
8150 Part No.Ref Description 8100 Part No. (if different) QTY
501- ADF Belt PA03002-C111FJ 1 501- Bearing for Feed Roller PA03002-C265FJ 2 501- ADF Latch Lever Rear PA03002-C243FJ 1 501- Reduction Gear PA03002-C232FJ 2 501- Drive Roller Gear PA03002-C231FJ 1 501- Pad Shaft PA03002-C238FJ 2 501- Pad Assembly Frame PA03002-C236FJ 1 501- ADF Paper Empty Sensor Arm PA03002-C235FJ 1 501- Pad Plate PA03002-C239FJ 1 501- Pad Spring PA03002-C237FJ 1 501- Separation Pad Assembly PA03002-C122FJ 1 501- Sensor Unit Assembly PA03002-C110FJ 1 501- Top of Form Sensor Arm PA03002-C234FJ 1 26A 501- ADF Cable PA03002-C228FJ 1 26B 501- Paper Anti Static Assembly PA03002-C246FJ 1 501- Pick Roller Cover PA03002-C112FJ 1 501- ADF Lift Spring Rear PA03002-C248FJ 1 501- ADF Lift Spring Front PA03002-C247FJ 1 501- Idle Roller Leaf Spring PA03002-C249FJ 1 501- Pick Roller Assembly PA03002-C120FJ 1C4265-90907 HP Digital Copier Parts and Diagrams 785
, Table 8-22. ADF Unit (continued) 8150 Part No. Ref Description 8100 Part No. (if different) QTY 501- Brass Bushing for Pick Roller PA03002-C269FJ 4 501- Pick Roller Clutch/Gear PA03002-C250FJ 1 501- Thumb Screws (paper guide) (screws for Pick PA03002-C123FJ 2 38 Roller Cover) 786 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907, Figure 8-24 Optical Unit Table 8-23. Optical Unit 8150 Part No. Ref Description 8100 Part No. (if different) QTY 501 ADF Unit PA03002-C108FJ 1 601 Optical Unit PA03002-C117FJ 1 601-1 Upper Lamp (back side) PA03002-C115FJ 1 601-2 ADF Lamp PCA PA03002-C252FJ 1 C4265-90907 HP Digital Copier Parts and Diagrams 787, Figure 8-25 Document Cover Assembly Table 8-24. Document Cover Assembly 8150 Part No. Ref Description 8100 Part No. (if different) QTY 701 FB Cover Assembly PA03002-C104FJ 1 701-1 Document Holding Pad PA03002-C105FJ 1 701-2 Rubber Stop, Document Cover PA03002-C226FJ 1 701-3 Paper Chute Flip Out PA03002-C260FJ 1 788 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,A D B C Figure 8-26 Screws (1 of 4) Table 8-25. Screws (1 of 4)
8100 and 8150 QtyRefABCDDescription Part Number in kit
B1 8 mm 2.5 mm 8 mm 3 mm TP Screw m3x8PA03002-C282FJ 20 B2 8 mm 2.5 mm 6 mm 3 mm TP Screw m3x6PA03002-C281FJ 20A D B C Figure 8-27 Screws (2 of 4) Table 8-26. Screws (2 of 4)
8100 and 8150 QtyRefABCDDescription Part Number in kit
B3 10 mm 3.2 mm 8 mm 4 mm TP Screw m4x8PA03002-C288FJ 20 B4 7 mm 2 mm 6 mm 3 mm Machine Screw w/ PA03002-C283FJ 20 washer m3x6B5 7 mm 2 mm 8 mm 3 mm Machine Screw w/ PA03002-C284FJ 20 washer m3x8B6 7 mm 2 mm 35 mm 3 mm Machine Screw w/ PA03002-C285FJ 20 washer m3 x 35 B10 9 mm 2.6 mm 8 mm 4 mm Machine Screw w/ PA03002-C286FJ 20 washer m4x8C4265-90907 HP Digital Copier Parts and Diagrams 789
,A D B C Figure 8-28 Screws (3 of 4) Table 8-27. Screws (3 of 4)
8100 and 8150 QtyRefABCDDescription Part Number in kit
B15 6 mm 1.75 mm 6 mm 3 mm Flat Head Screw m3 x6 PA03002-C287FJ 20B C D A Figure 8-29 Screws (4 of 4) Table 8-28. Screws (4 of 4)
8100 and 8150 QtyRefABCDDescription Part Number in kit
B20 7 mm 3 mm 2.6 mm 0.6 mm E-ring, Latch Lever PA03002-C254FJ 20 (20pcs) B21 9 mm 4 mm 3.5 mm 0.6 mm E-ring, Idle Roller PA03002-C253FJ 20 (20pcs) B22 5 mm 2 mm 1.7 mm 0.4 mm Retainer Ring ADF Lock PA03002-C255FJ 20 Bearing (20pcs) not Thumb screws for Pick PA03002-C123FJ shown Roller Cover not 13 5.5 10 4 Thumb screw for CA03002-C290 20 shown Document Cover 790 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Alphabetical Parts List (Printer and Paper-
handling Devices)Table 8-29. Alphabetical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices Description Part Number Table No. and Page
2 x 500-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4 and 5)/C4780A R95-3003-000CN table 8-1 on page 742 table 8-12 on page 7632x500-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA RG5-4442-000CN table 8-12 on page 763 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4)/C4781A R95-3002-000CN table 8-1 on page 742 table 8-11 on page 761 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Tray RG5-3845-000CN table 8-10 on page 759 2K (2000-sheet Input Tray) Deck Hardware Kit RY7-5044-000CN table 8-11 on page 761 3 Diagnostic LED PCA (with Cable) C4785-60514 table 8-16 on page 773 5-bin Mailbox - for Stapler C4787-60502 table 8-14 on page 769 5-bin Mailbox - for Stapler Assembly (Exchange C4787-69502 (ex.) table 8-14 on page 769 Unit) 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler/C4787A C4787-69502 (ex.) table 8-1 on page 742 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler/C4787A (8-bin Mailbox C4787-60502 table 8-1 on page 742 only, without the Stapler Unit.) 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Controller PCA Assembly RG1-3853-000CN table 8-13 on page 766 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox, Stand Assembly C4784-60500 table 8-13 on page 766 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox/C4783A R95-3007-000CN table 8-1 on page 742 table 8-13 on page 766 8-bin Mailbox/C4785A table 8-1 on page 742 Adjustable Fixed Caster C4785-60511 table 8-14 on page 769 Arm, Sensor-PS2 RB1-6557-000CN table 8-7 on page 755 Arm-Pressure-front RB1-6444-000CN table 8-4 on page 749 Assembly, DC Controller PCB RG5-4375-030CN table 8-8 on page 756 Assembly, DC Controller PCB (exchange) C4214-69009 (ex.) table 8-8 on page 756 Assembly, Laser Scanner RG5-4344-000CN table 8-5 on page 751 Assembly, Laser Scanner (exchange) C4214-69003 (ex.) table 8-5 on page 751 Assembly, MP Tray (Tray 1) RG5-4330-000CN table 8-7 on page 755 Assembly, Paper Pickup RG5-4334-000CN table 8-7 on page 755 Assembly, Transfer Roller RG9-1361-000CN table 8-3 on page 747 Attachment Assembly (Rod, Bracket, Cables) C4785-60516 table 8-14 on page 769C4265-90907 Alphabetical Parts List (Printer and Paper-handling Devices) 791
,Table 8-29. Alphabetical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices Description Part Number Table No. and Page
Attachment Clip C4785-60512 table 8-16 on page 773 Back Cover, 8-bin Mailbox C4785-60505 table 8-16 on page 773 Back Cover, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox RA2-2455-000CN table 8-13 on page 766 Back Cover, 2000-sheet Input Tray RB2-2519-000CN table 8-10 on page 759 Back Cover, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray RB2-3675-000CN table 8-12 on page 763 Back Plate C3766-60505 table 8-17 on page 775 Bin Full Sensor RA2-2484-000CN table 8-13 on page 766 Blind Cover C4785-60503 table 8-14 on page 769 Block, Shaft Holding, Front RB2-3503-000CN table 8-7 on page 755 Block, Shaft Holding, Rear RB2-3504-000CN table 8-7 on page 755 Bottom Bin (Tray) RA2-2408-000CN table 8-13 on page 766 Brushes C3766-60508 table 8-17 on page 775 Bushing RA2-2505-000CN table 8-13 on page 766 C-link Cable (61 cm) (engine to input device) C3763-60502 table 8-1 on page 742 table 8-11 on page 761 C-link Cable (80 cm) C4783-70000 table 8-13 on page 766 C-link Cable (97 cm) C3766-60512 table 8-17 on page 775 C-link Cable Assembly 97 cm (8-bin Mailbox to C3766-60539 table 8-1 on page 742 Stapler) table 8-15 on page 771 Cable, Fan 3 RG5-1921-000CN table 8-6 on page 753 Cable, Fuser 1 RG5-4381-000CN table 8-6 on page 753 Cable, Fuser 2 RG5-1850-000CN table 8-6 on page 753 Cable, Paper Pickup RG5-1861-000CN table 8-7 on page 755 Cable, Registration RG5-1928-000CN table 8-6 on page 753 Cable, Scanner Motor RG5-4378-000CN table 8-5 on page 751 Cable, Sensor RG5-1859-000CN table 8-7 on page 755 Cable, Tray Sensor RG5-1920-000CN table 8-4 on page 749 Cables C4785-60520 table 8-16 on page 773 Caster XZ9-0442-000CN table 8-10 on page 759 table 8-12 on page 763 Clutch Cover RB2-3631-000CN table 8-3 on page 747 Clutch cover for2x500-sheet input tray RB2-3690-000CN table 8-12 on page 763 Clutch cover for 2000-sheet input tray RB2-2509-000CN table 8-11 on page 761 Clutch, Paper Feed RH7-5188-000CN table 8-7 on page 755 792 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Table 8-29. Alphabetical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices Description Part Number Table No. and Page
Compression Spring, Front RS6-2072-000CN table 8-7 on page 755 Compression Spring, Rear RS6-2073-000CN table 8-7 on page 755 Cover Latch RA2-2531-000CN table 8-13 on page 766 Cover, Internal Tray RB1-6749-000CN table 8-3 on page 747 Cover, Left-Lower RB1-6480-000CN table 8-2 on page 745 Cover, Rear RF5-1402-000CN table 8-2 on page 745 Cover, Switch RB1-6492-000CN table 8-2 on page 745 Cover, Upper Right RB1-6464-000CN table 8-4 on page 749 Delivery Assembly RG5-1874-000CN table 8-7 on page 755 Delivery Cover (Left Side F/U) RB2-3558-000CN table 8-2 on page 745 Delivery Head Position Motor C3764-60507 table 8-16 on page 773 Display, Control Panel RG5-4384-000CN table 8-2 on page 745 Diverter Assembly RG5-4325-000CN table 8-2 on page 745 Diverter Assembly (Flipper) RG1-3844-000CN table 8-13 on page 766 Diverter Drive Assembly RF9-1249-000CN table 8-2 on page 745 Duplexer/C4782A C4782-60501 table 8-1 on page 742 C4782-69501 (ex.) EIO Coverplate 5021-0349 table 8-1 on page 742 Electrical Cover (Rear by Formatter) RB1-6489-000CN table 8-2 on page 745 Electromagnetic Clutch RH7-5187-000CN table 8-3 on page 747 Empty Bin Sensor PCA RG1-3815-000CN table 8-13 on page 766 Envelope Feeder/C4242B C3765-60501 table 8-1 on page 742 Face-down Bin Assembly, Even (with 2 rollers) RG1-3837-000CN table 8-13 on page 766 Face-down Bin Assembly, Odd (with 1 roller) RG1-3836-000CN table 8-13 on page 766 Face-down Delivery Assembly RG5-1874-000CN table 8-3 on page 747 Face-up Bin (8-bin Mailbox) C3764-60505 table 8-3 on page 747 Face-up Bin (engine) RB1-6491-000CN table 8-1 on page 742 Face-up Bin Full and Sensor PCA RG1-3816-000CN table 8-13 on page 766 Face-up Solenoid Assembly RG5-1875-000CN table 8-9 on page 757 Fan, FM1/Laser Scanner RH7-1396-000CN table 8-6 on page 753 Fan, FM2/Low Voltage Power Supply RH7-1266-000CN table 8-5 on page 751 Fan, FM3/ Formatter RH7-1271-000CN table 8-6 on page 753 Fan, FM4/Delivery Assembly RH7-1289-000CN table 8-7 on page 755C4265-90907 Alphabetical Parts List (Printer and Paper-handling Devices) 793
,Table 8-29. Alphabetical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices Description Part Number Table No. and Page
Fan, FM5 RH7-1397-000CN table 8-7 on page 755 Feed and Separation Rollers RF5-1834-000CN table 8-10 on page 759 table 8-12 on page 763 Feeder Assembly RG5-4305-000CN table 8-3 on page 747 Ttable 8-7 on page 755 Feet Adjustable Tip RG5-3853-000CN table 8-11 on page 761 table 8-12 on page 763 Flag, Sensor RA2-2485-000CN table 8-13 on page 766 Flipper Assembly C4785-60509 table 8-15 on page 771 Foot RB1-6421-000CN table 8-4 on page 749 Formatter Assembly C4107-67901 table 8-1 on page 742 Formatter Assembly, Exchange C4107-69001 (ex.) table 8-1 on page 742 Front Cover, 8-bin Mailbox C4785-60504 table 8-14 on page 769 Front Cover, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox RF1-4004-000CN table 8-13 on page 766 Front Cover, engine RG5-4362-000CN table 8-2 on page 745 Front Cover (Duplex Jam Removal) RB2-3626-000CN table 8-2 on page 745 Front Cover (with LED window) RF5-2568-000CN table 8-10 on page 759 Front Door (Cover Storage Tray) RB2-3668-000CN table 8-12 on page 763 Front LED PCA RG5-4441-000CN table 8-12 on page 763 Front LED PCA with holder and cable RG5-4204-000CN table 8-11 on page 761 Front Top Cover RF5-2762-000CN table 8-12 on page 763 Full Bin and Interlock sensor PCA RG1-3814-000CN table 8-13 on page 766 Fuser Lock Lever-Left RB1-6616-020CN table 8-3 on page 747 Fuser Lock Lever-Right RB1-6615-020CN table 8-3 on page 747 Fusing Assembly, 110V RG5-4318-000CN table 8-3 on page 747 Fusing Assembly, 220V RG5-4317-000CN table 8-3 on page 747 Fusing Assembly, 110V (ex.) C4214-69007 table 8-3 on page 747 Fusing Assembly, 220V (ex.) C4214-69008 table 8-3 on page 747 Gear, 20T RA9-1127-000CN table 8-2 on page 745 Guide, Front RB2-3622-000CN table 8-4 on page 749 Guide, Rail RB1-6776-000CN table 8-4 on page 749 Guide, Rear RF5-2726-000CN table 8-4 on page 749 Guide, Slide RB1-6775-000CN table 8-6 on page 753 Guides, Interface RB1-6771-000CN table 8-6 on page 753 794 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Table 8-29. Alphabetical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices Description Part Number Table No. and Page
Handle Latch RA2-2512-000CN table 8-13 on page 766 Hardware C4785-60521 table 8-14 on page 769 table 8-15 on page 771 table 8-16 on page 773 Hardware Kit RY7-5044-000CN table 8-10 on page 759 Hardware Screws Kit for 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox RY7-5048-000CN table 8-13 on page 766 Head Assembly (with Metal Tape) C4785-60506 table 8-15 on page 771 High-Voltage Power Supply RG5-4306-000CN table 8-5 on page 751 Hinge Plate RB2-3641-000CN table 8-2 on page 745 Hinge, Stopper RF5-2701-000CN table 8-2 on page 745 Hinges, Set of C3766-60506 table 8-17 on page 775 Holder Size PCA RB2-3667-000CN table 8-12 on page 763 Holder, Damper-Front RB1-6461-000CN table 8-3 on page 747 Holder, Damper-Rear RB1-6462-000CN table 8-3 on page 747 Input Paper Guide (Nose Piece) C3764-60561 table 8-16 on page 773 Jumper Cable, Long C4781-60502 table 8-1 on page 742 table 8-11 on page 761 table 8-12 on page 763 Jumper Cable, Short C4781-60501 table 8-1 on page 742 table 8-11 on page 761 table 8-12 on page 763 Kit: Plastic staple cover; scan bar C3766-60510 table 8-17 on page 775 bin full sensor, actuator, and flag Kit: T10 Torx screws (10) C3766-60511 table 8-17 on page 775 Label, Operation RS5-8676-000CN table 8-2 on page 745 Laser and Control Panel Cable RG5-4377-000CN table 8-5 on page 751 Latch XZ9-0379-000CN table 8-12 on page 763 Latching Mechanism RF1-4005-000CN table 8-13 on page 766 LED PCA RG1-3817-000CN table 8-13 on page 766 Left Cover, 2000-sheet Input Tray RF5-2646-000CN table 8-10 on page 759 Left Cover, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray RF5-2764-000CN table 8-12 on page 763 Limiter, torque RB2-3851-000CN table 8-7 on page 755 Locating Pin, Metal (Positioning) RF5-2556-000CN table 8-10 on page 759 table 8-12 on page 763 Mailbox with Stapler Packaging C3766-60516 table 8-17 on page 775 Main Cable, 2000-sheet Input Tray RG5-3919-000CN table 8-11 on page 761C4265-90907 Alphabetical Parts List (Printer and Paper-handling Devices) 795
,Table 8-29. Alphabetical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices Description Part Number Table No. and Page
Main Cable, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray RG5-4440-000CN table 8-12 on page 763 Main Motor RH7-5219-000CN table 8-3 on page 747 Main Motor Cable RG5-4386-000CN table 8-3 on page 747 Maintenance Kit, 100-120V/C3914A C3914-69001 (ex.) table 8-1 on page 742 Maintenance Kit, 220-240V/C3915A C3915-69001 (ex.) table 8-1 on page 742 Metal retaining spring (Spring Leaf) RB1-7835-000CN table 8-11 on page 761 Metal Tape and Housing Assembly C4785-60507 table 8-15 on page 771 Metallic Retaining Tab (Plate Stop) RB1-7677-000CN table 8-11 on page 761 Motor, PIU RH7-1350-000CN table 8-7 on page 755 MP Separation Pad RF5-2703-000CN table 8-7 on page 755 MP Tray Assembly Cover (Tray 1) RG5-4329-000CN table 8-3 on page 747 Multi-purpose Tray Assembly (Tray 1) RG5-4330-000CN table 8-3 on page 747 Multi-Purpose Tray Feed Roller (Tray 1) RB1-9526-000CN table 8-7 on page 755 8-bin Mailbox Assembly with attachment rod C4785-60500 table 8-14 on page 769 (Whole Unit) 8-bin Mailbox Assembly without attachment rod C4785-69500 (ex.) table 8-14 on page 769 (Exchange Unit) 8-bin Mailbox Controller (with metal box) C4785-60508 table 8-14 on page 769 Nonadjustable Fixed Caster C4785-60510 table 8-14 on page 769 Open/Close Stopper RB1-6484-000CN table 8-2 on page 745 Outrigger, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray RG5-3852-000CN table 8-12 on page 763 Outrigger, 2000-sheet Input Tray RG5-4205-000CN table 8-11 on page 761 Packaging Kit, 2000-sheet Input Tray C3763-60500 table 8-1 on page 742 Overlay, Control Panel (English) C4214-40029 table 8-2 on page 745 Overlay, Control Panel (French) C4214-40030 table 8-2 on page 745 Overlay, Control Panel (German) C4214-40041 table 8-2 on page 745 Overlay, Control Panel (Italian) C4214-40031 table 8-2 on page 745 Overlay, Control Panel (Portuguese) C4214-40032 table 8-2 on page 745 Overlay, Control Panel (Spanish) C4214-40042 table 8-2 on page 745 Packaging Kit, duplexer C3762-60500 table 8-1 on page 742 Packaging Kit, Envelope Feeder C3765-60500 table 8-1 on page 742 Packaging Kit, 8-bin Mailbox C3764-60500 table 8-1 on page 742 Packaging Kit, Printer 5041-9238 table 8-1 on page 742 Paper Deck Drive Assembly, 2000-sheet Input Tray RG5-3851-000CN table 8-10 on page 759 796 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Table 8-29. Alphabetical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices Description Part Number Table No. and Page
Paper Deck Drive Assembly, 2 x 500-sheet Input RG5-4416-000CN table 8-12 on page 763 Tray Paper Deck Drive Bushing RS5-1399-000CN table 8-10 on page 759 Paper Deck PCA (2000-sheet Input Tray RG5-3908-000CN table 8-11 on page 761 Controller) Paper Feed Assembly (Vertical Transfer Unit) RG5-4403-000CN table 8-12 on page 763 Paper Height Lever RB1-6693-000CN table 8-7 on page 755 Paper Input Unit (PIU) RG5-4334-000CN table 8-3 on page 747 Paper Input Unit (PIU) (ex.) C4214-69004 table 8-3 on page 747 Paper Pickup Assembly, 2000-sheet Input Tray RG5-3843-000CN table 8-10 on page 759 Paper Pickup Assembly, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray RG5-4410-000CN table 8-12 on page 763 Paper Quantity Sensor PCA Assembly RG5-2166-000CN table 8-11 on page 761 Paper Sensing Lever RB1-6692-000CN table 8-7 on page 755 Paper Size Guide (Trays 2 and 3) RF5-1484-000CN table 8-1 on page 742 Paper Size Guide Label (Trays 2 and 3) RS5-8605-000CN table 8-1 on page 742 Paper Size Sensor PCA Assembly RG5-2168-000CN table 8-11 on page 761 PCA, PIU RG5-1860-000CN table 8-7 on page 755 PCB, Switch/Sensor RG5-1846-000CN table 8-8 on page 756 PCB, Tray Sensor RB5-1845-000CN table 8-8 on page 756 PCB, Tray, Multi-purpose RG5-1884-000CN table 8-8 on page 756 Photo Interrupter WG8-0291-000CN table 8-7 on page 755 Pickup Roller, 2000-sheet Input Tray RF5-1835-000CN table 8-10 on page 759 Pickup Roller, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray RF5-2708-000CN table 8-12 on page 763 Pin Positioning Bushing RA2-2439-000CN table 8-13 on page 766 Plastic Parts C4785-60519 table 8-14 on page 769 table 8-15 on page 771 table 8-16 on page 773 Plate (Motor Cover) RA2-2541-000CN table 8-13 on page 766 Plate Paper Limit Back RG5-4201-000CN table 8-10 on page 759 Plate Paper Limit Middle RG5-3849-000CN table 8-10 on page 759 Plate Paper Reference Front RG5-3850-000CN table 8-10 on page 759 Plate, Guide-Upper RB1-6582-000CN table 8-7 on page 755 Plate, Stopper RA2-2527-000CN table 8-13 on page 766C4265-90907 Alphabetical Parts List (Printer and Paper-handling Devices) 797
,Table 8-29. Alphabetical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices Description Part Number Table No. and Page
Power Box (Includes bracket clip) C4781-60500 Ttable 8-1 on page 742 table 8-11 on page 761 table 8-12 on page 763 Power Supply (8-bin Mailbox) C4785-60501 table 8-16 on page 773 Power Supply (7-bin Tabletop Mailbox) RH3-2205-000CN table 8-13 on page 766 Power Supply Cable (PSU) RG5-3909-000CN table 8-11 on page 761 table 8-12 on page 763 Power Supply Fuse 250V/3.15A VD7-1893-151CN table 8-11 on page 761 table 8-12 on page 763 Power Supply, Low Voltage-220 V RG5-4301-000CN table 8-6 on page 753 Power Supply, Low-Voltage 110 V RG5-4300-000CN table 8-6 on page 753 Printer Drive Assembly RG5-4365-000CN table 8-3 on page 747 Rail Assembly RA2-3842-000CN table 8-13 on page 766 Registration Assembly RG5-4303-000CN table 8-3 on page 747 Release, Arm RB1-6446-000CN table 8-4 on page 749 Repackaging Kit C4785-60513 table 8-15 on page 771 Reversing Mechanism Motor RF7-1395-000CN table 8-13 on page 766 Reversing Tray (Face-up) RA2-2487-000CN table 8-13 on page 766 Right Cover, 2000-sheet Input Tray RB1-7832-020CN table 8-10 on page 759 Right Cover, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray RB2-3666-000CN table 8-12 on page 763 Right Cover Assembly, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox RG1-3840-000CN table 8-13 on page 766 Right Cover Assembly, engine RG5-1915-000CN table 8-2 on page 745 Right, Lower Cover (Rear Plastic on Sheet Metal) RB2-3642-000CN table 8-2 on page 745 ROD RB1-6778-000CN table 8-4 on page 749 Rollers, Feed and Separation RF5-1834-000CN table 8-7 on page 755 Roller, Pickup RF5-2708-000CN table 8-7 on page 755 Roller, Transfer RF9-1394-000CN table 8-3 on page 747 Screw, M3x8XA9-0872-000CN table 8-2 on page 745 Screw, M4 x 10 XA9-0870-000CN table 8-2 on page 745 Screw, M4x8XA9-0605-000CN table 8-2 on page 745 Screw, M4x8TP XB6-7400-807CN table 8-3 on page 747 Sensor Arm PS1 RB1-6417-000CN table 8-7 on page 755 Sensor Arm Spring RB1-6409-000CN table 8-7 on page 755 Sensor Cable RG5-1843-000CN table 8-7 on page 755 798 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Table 8-29. Alphabetical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices Description Part Number Table No. and Page
Shield, Formatter RF5-2678-000CN table 8-6 on page 753 Shield, Plate RF5-1464-000CN table 8-6 on page 753 Shipping Lock Kit for 8-bin Mailbox/5-bin Mailbox C4787-60503 table 8-16 on page 773 with Stapler Short C-link Cable adapter C4785-70001 table 8-15 on page 771 Shutter, White RB1-6473-000CN table 8-5 on page 751 Solenoid Flipper RH7-5225-000CN table 8-13 on page 766 Solenoid Reversing Mechanism RH7-5223-000CN table 8-13 on page 766 Spacer, latch RB2-3705-000CN table 8-12 on page 763 Spring, Compression RB1-6493-000CN table 8-2 on page 745 Spring, Torsion RB1-6509-000CN table 8-2 on page 745 Spring Tension RA2-2513-000CN table 8-13 on page 766 Spring, Sensor Arm RB1-6558-000CN table 8-7 on page 755 Spring, Tension RS5-2499-000CN table 8-4 on page 749 Stand for 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox/C4783A C4784-60500 table 8-1 on page 742 Standard Output Bin C4785-60502 table 8-14 on page 769 Stapler Assembly C4787-60500 table 8-1 on page 742 table 8-14 on page 769 table 8-17 on page 775 Stapler Assembly (Exchange Unit) C4787-69500 (ex.) table 8-14 on page 769 table 8-17 on page 775 Stapler Cartridges (3-pack)/C3772A table 8-1 on page 742 Stapler Control PCA C4787-60501 table 8-17 on page 775 Stapler Packaging C3766-60509 table 8-17 on page 775 Stapling Bed Assembly C3766-60503 table 8-17 on page 775 Stopper, CG RB1-6427-000CN table 8-5 on page 751 Stopper, Rail RB1-6777-000CN table 8-4 on page 749 Stopper, Rail RB1-6783-000CN table 8-4 on page 749 Storage Paper Tray RB2-3669-000CN table 8-12 on page 763 Support Plate RA2-2500-000CN table 8-13 on page 766 Tension Spring RS5-2561-000CN table 8-11 on page 761 Toner Cartridge/C4182X table 8-1 on page 742 Top Cover, 8-bin Mailbox C3764-60555 table 8-14 on page 769 Top Cover (Includes label), 2 x 500-sheet Input RF5-2766-000CN table 8-12 on page 763 TrayC4265-90907 Alphabetical Parts List (Printer and Paper-handling Devices) 799
,Table 8-29. Alphabetical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices Description Part Number Table No. and Page
Top Cover (Label Included), 2000-sheet Input Tray RG5-2644-000CN table 8-10 on page 759 Top Cover Assembly (Engine) RG5-4360-000CN table 8-2 on page 745 Top Cover Assembly, stapler C3766-60501 table 8-17 on page 775 Top Cover Assembly (Upper Guide), 7-bin Tabletop RG1-3838-000CN table 8-13 on page 766 Mailbox Transfer Guide RF5-2676-000CN table 8-3 on page 747 Transfer Guide Bushing RB1-6441-000CN table 8-3 on page 747 Transport Belt Motor (with Fan) C4785-60518 table 8-16 on page 773 Tray 2 R98-1005-000CN table 8-1 on page 742 Tray 3 R98-1004-000CN table 8-1 on page 742 Tray 4 Assembly R98-1007-000CN table 8-12 on page 763 Tray 5 Assembly R98-1006-000CN table 8-12 on page 763 Tray Lock (Plastic Clip) RB2-3636-000CN table 8-2 on page 745 Tray Shipping Lock RB1-7746-000CN table 8-11 on page 761 Tray Size Labels RS5-8611-000CN Ttable 8-10 on page 759 table 8-12 on page 763 Tray Size Plate RB1-6894-000CN table 8-10 on page 759 table 8-12 on page 763 Tray, Face-up RB1-6491-000CN table 8-2 on page 745 Tray, Output-Face-down RB1-6490-000CN table 8-2 on page 745 Tray-Size Sensing PCA RG5-1845-000CN table 8-12 on page 763 Universal Power Supply Assembly RG5-4021-000CN table 8-11 on page 761 table 8-12 on page 763 User LED PCA (with Cable) C4785-60515 table 8-14 on page 769 Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) RG5-3854-000CN table 8-10 on page 759 Wire Frame C3766-60507 table 8-17 on page 775 800 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Alphabetical Parts List (Copy Module) Table 8-30. Alphabetical Parts List – Copy Module Description Part Number Table No. and Page
ADF Belt PA03002-C111FJ table 8-22 on page 784 ADF Cable PA03002-C228FJ table 8-22 on page 784 ADF Cover (skin) PA03002-C106FJ table 8-18 on page 778 ADF Lamp PCA PA03002-C252FJ table 8-23 on page 787 ADF Latch Cap PA03002-C201FJ table 8-18 on page 778 ADF Latch Lever Front PA03002-C242FJ table 8-22 on page 784 ADF Latch Lever Rear PA03002-C243FJ table 8-22 on page 784 ADF Latch Shaft PA03002-C244FJ table 8-22 on page 784 ADF Latch Spring PA03002-C245FJ table 8-22 on page 784 ADF Lift Spring Front PA03002-C247FJ table 8-22 on page 784 ADF Lift Spring Rear PA03002-C248FJ table 8-22 on page 784 ADF Motor Unit PA03002-C109FJ table 8-22 on page 784 ADF Paper Empty Sensor Arm PA03002-C235FJ table 8-22 on page 784 ADF Unit PA03002-C108FJ table 8-23 on page 787 Back PCA Board (CP mate) PA03002-C119FJ table 8-20 on page 781 Bearing for Feed Roller PA03002-C265FJ table 8-20 on page 781 Brass Bushing for Pick Roller PA03002-C269FJ table 8-20 on page 781 Calibration Target Kit PA03002-C261FJ Carrier Belt Tension Pulley PA03002-C210FJ table 8-19 on page 779 Carrier Flex Cable PA03002-C204FJ table 8-19 on page 779 Carrier Rail PA03002-C205FJ table 8-19 on page 779 Carrier Rail Bushing PA03002-C206FJ table 8-21 on page 783 Carrier Ribbon Cable Ferrite Bead PA03002-C262FJ table 8-19 on page 779 Carrier Ribbon Cable Protector PA03002-C217FJ table 8-19 on page 779 Carrier Stopper (shipping lock) PA03002-C124FJ table 8-19 on page 779 Carrier Tension Pulley Collar PA03002-C214FJ table 8-19 on page 779 Carrier Tension Pulley Shaft PA03002-C211FJ table 8-19 on page 779 Carrier Tension Pulley Spacer PA03002-C213FJ table 8-19 on page 779 Carrier Tension Pulley Spring PA03002-C212FJ table 8-19 on page 779C4265-90907 Alphabetical Parts List (Copy Module) 801
,Table 8-30. Alphabetical Parts List – Copy Module (continued) Description Part Number Table No. and Page
Carrier Unit PA03002-C113FJ table 8-21 on page 783 Carrier Unit Dust Cover PA03002-C256FJ table 8-21 on page 783 Carrier Unit Lamp PCA PA03002-C251FJ table 8-21 on page 783 Carrier Unit Lubrication Felt PA03002-C259FJ table 8-21 on page 783 Carrier Unit Protector PA03002-C216FJ table 8-19 on page 779 CCD Cable PA03002-C229FJ table 8-20 on page 781 Control PCA (FJ) PA03002-C102FJ table 8-20 on page 781 Control PCA Protector PA03002-C215FJ table 8-19 on page 779 Copy Connect Cable 8120-8749 table 8-20 on page 781 Copy Processor Card PM-3700 table 8-20 on page 781 Copy Processor Card Cage PA03002-C258FJ table 8-20 on page 781 DC Cable PS to Main PA03002-C203FJ table 8-20 on page 781 Document Holding Pad PA03002-C105FJ table 8-24 on page 788 Drive Roller Bearing PA03002-C233FJ table 8-20 on page 781 Drive Roller Gear PA03002-C231FJ table 8-20 on page 781 Drive Roller Shaft PA03002-C230FJ table 8-20 on page 781 E-ring, Idle Roller (20pcs) PA03002-C253FJ table 8-28 on page 790 E-ring, Latch Lever (20pcs) PA03002-C254FJ table 8-28 on page 790 Exit Idle Roller PA03002-C224FJ table 8-20 on page 781 Fan Assembly PA03002-C118FJ table 8-20 on page 781 FB Cover Assembly PA03002-C104FJ table 8-24 on page 788 FB Motor Unit (w/belt) PA03002-C116FJ table 8-19 on page 779 Flat Head Screw m3 x6 PA03002-C287FJ table 8-27 on page 790 Frame Ground Spring 1 PA03002-C208FJ table 8-19 on page 779 Front Panel 9000288TF table 8-18 on page 778 Front Panel Bracket PA03002-C257FJ table 8-18 on page 778 Front Panel Cable PA03002-C125FJ table 8-19 on page 779 Front Panel Cable Clamp PA03002-C273FJ table 8-18 on page 778 Front Panel Cable Cover PA03002-C270FJ table 8-19 on page 779 Front Panel Frame Ground Plate PA03002-C272FJ table 8-18 on page 778 Front Panel Frame Ground Spring PA03002-C266FJ table 8-18 on page 778 Glass Plate Assembly PA03002-C219FJ table 8-20 on page 781 HK Ring V2 PA03002-C225FJ table 8-20 on page 781 802 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Table 8-30. Alphabetical Parts List – Copy Module (continued) Description Part Number Table No. and Page
Home Position Sensor PA03002-C207FJ table 8-19 on page 779 Idle Roller Coil Spring PA03002-C209FJ table 8-19 on page 779 Idle Roller Leaf Spring PA03002-C249FJ table 8-20 on page 781 Junction PCA PA03002-C103FJ table 8-19 on page 779 Junction PCA Cover PA03002-C267FJ table 8-19 on page 779 Key Washer PA03002-C241FJ table 8-20 on page 781 LED Assembly (includes cable) PA03002-C126FJ table 8-20 on page 781 Lower Lamp (front side) PA03002-C114FJ table 8-21 on page 783 Machine Screw w/washer m3 x 35 PA03002-C285FJ table 8-26 on page 789 Machine Screw w/washer m3x6PA03002-C283FJ table 8-26 on page 789 Machine Screw w/washer m3x8PA03002-C284FJ table 8-26 on page 789 Machine Screw w/washer m4x8PA03002-C286FJ table 8-26 on page 789 Main/PS Cover Bracket PA03002-C220FJ table 8-20 on page 781 Maintenance Kit: see Pick Roller Assembly and Separation Pad Assembly Optical Unit PA03002-C117FJ table 8-23 on page 787 Optical Unit Tie Down w/Pad PA03002-C227FJ table 8-20 on page 781 Output Tray Assembly PA03002-C121FJ table 8-18 on page 778 Output Tray Bracket, Front PA03002-C223FJ table 8-20 on page 781 Output Tray Bracket, Rear PA03002-C222FJ table 8-20 on page 781 Output Tray Flip-out PA03002-C263FJ table 8-18 on page 778 Pad Assembly Frame PA03002-C236FJ table 8-20 on page 781 Pad Plate PA03002-C239FJ table 8-20 on page 781 Pad Shaft PA03002-C238FJ table 8-20 on page 781 Pad Spring PA03002-C237FJ table 8-20 on page 781 Panel Cover PA03002-C264FJ table 8-18 on page 778 Paper Anti Static Assembly PA03002-C246FJ table 8-22 on page 784 Paper Chute Flip Out PA03002-C260FJ table 8-24 on page 788 Pick Roller Assembly PA03002-C120FJ table 8-22 on page 784 Pick Roller Clutch/Gear PA03002-C250FJ table 8-22 on page 784 Pick Roller Cover PA03002-C112FJ table 8-22 on page 784 Pick Spring PA03002-C240FJ table 8-22 on page 784 Power Supply PA03002-C101FJ table 8-20 on page 781C4265-90907 Alphabetical Parts List (Copy Module) 803
,Table 8-30. Alphabetical Parts List – Copy Module (continued) Description Part Number Table No. and Page
Reduction Gear PA03002-C232FJ table 8-22 on page 784 Retainer Ring ADF Lock Bearing (20pcs) PA03002-C255FJ table 8-28 on page 790 RFI Cover PA03002-C202FJ table 8-20 on page 781 Rubber Foot PA03002-C218FJ table 8-19 on page 779 Rubber Stop, Document Cover PA03002-C226FJ table 8-24 on page 788 Sensor Unit Assembly PA03002-C110FJ table 8-22 on page 784 Separation Pad Assembly PA03002-C122FJ table 8-22 on page 784 Thumb Screws (paper guide) (screws for Pick PA03002-C123FJ table 8-22 on page 784 Roller Cover) Top of Form Sensor Arm PA03002-C234FJ table 8-22 on page 784 TP Screw m3x6PA03002-C281FJ table 8-25 on page 789 TP Screw m3x8PA03002-C282FJ table 8-25 on page 789 Upper Cover (skin) PA03002-C107FJ table 8-18 on page 778 Upper Lamp (back side) PA03002-C115FJ table 8-23 on page 787 804 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Numerical Parts List (Printer and Paper-handling
devices)Table 8-31. Numerical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices Part Number Description Table No. and Page
Stapler Cartridges (3-pack)/C3772A table 8-1 on page 742 Toner Cartridge/C4182X table 8-1 on page 742 5021-0349 EIO Coverplate table 8-1 on page 742 5041-9238 Packaging Kit, Printer table 8-1 on page 742 C3762-60500 Packaging Kit, duplexer table 8-1 on page 742 C3763-60500 Packaging Kit, 2000-sheet Input Tray table 8-1 on page 742 C3763-60502 C-link Cable (61 cm) (engine to input device) table 8-1 on page 742 table 8-11 on page 761 C3764-60500 Packaging Kit, 8-bin Mailbox table 8-1 on page 742 C3764-60505 Face-up Bin (8-bin Mailbox) table 8-14 on page 769 C3764-60507 Delivery Head Position Motor table 8-16 on page 773 C3764-60555 Top Cover, 8-bin Mailbox table 8-14 on page 769 C3764-60561 Input Paper Guide (Nose Piece) table 8-16 on page 773 C3765-60500 Packaging Kit, Envelope Feeder table 8-1 on page 742 C3765-60501 Envelope Feeder/C3765B table 8-1 on page 742 C3766-60501 Top Cover Assembly, stapler table 8-17 on page 775 C3766-60503 Stapling Bed Assembly table 8-17 on page 775 C3766-60505 Back Plate table 8-17 on page 775 C3766-60506 Hinges, Set of table 8-17 on page 775 C3766-60507 Wire Frame table 8-17 on page 775 C3766-60508 Brushes table 8-17 on page 775 C3766-60509 Stapler Packaging table 8-17 on page 775 C3766-60510 Kit: Plastic staple cover; scan bar table 8-17 on page 775 bin full sensor, actuator, and flag C3766-60511 Kit: T10 Torx screws (10) table 8-17 on page 775 C3766-60512 C-link Cable (97 cm) table 8-17 on page 775 C3766-60516 Mailbox with Stapler Packaging table 8-17 on page 775 C3766-60539 C-link Cable Assembly 97 cm (8-bin Mailbox to table 8-1 on page 742 Stapler) table 8-15 on page 771C4265-90907 Numerical Parts List (Printer and Paper-handling devices) 805
,Table 8-31. Numerical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices Part Number Description Table No. and Page
C3914-69001 (ex.) Maintenance Kit, 100-120V/C3914A table 8-1 on page 742 C3915-69001 (ex.) Maintenance Kit, 220-240V/C3915A table 8-1 on page 742 C4107-69001 (ex.) Formatter Assembly, Exchange table 8-1 on page 742 C4107-67901 Formatter Assembly table 8-1 on page 742 C4214-40029 Overlay, Control Panel (English) table 8-2 on page 745 C4214-40030 Overlay, Control Panel (French) table 8-2 on page 745 C4214-40031 Overlay, Control Panel (Italian) table 8-2 on page 745 C4214-40032 Overlay, Control Panel (Portuguese) table 8-2 on page 745 C4214-40041 Overlay, Control Panel (German) table 8-2 on page 745 C4214-40042 Overlay, Control Panel (Spanish) table 8-2 on page 745 C4214-69009 (ex.) Assembly, DC Controller PCB (exchange) table 8-8 on page 756 C4214-69003 (ex.) Assembly, Laser Scanner (exchange) table 8-5 on page 751 C4214-69004 (ex.) Paper Input Unit (PIU) (exchange) table 8-3 on page 747 C4214-69007 (ex.) Fusing Assembly, 110V (exchange) table 8-3 on page 747 C4214-69008 (ex.) Fusing Assembly, 220V (exchange) table 8-3 on page 747 C4781-60500 Power Box (Includes bracket clip) table 8-1 on page 742 table 8-11 on page 761 table 8-12 on page 763 C4781-60501 Jumper Cable, Short table 8-1 on page 742 table 8-11 on page 761 table 8-12 on page 763 C4781-60502 Jumper Cable, Long table 8-1 on page 742 table 8-11 on page 761) table 8-12 on page 763 C4782-60501 Duplexer/C4782A table 8-1 on page 742 C4782-69501 (ex.) C4783-70000 C-link Cable (80 cm) table 8-13 on page 766 C4784-60500 Stand for 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox/C4783A table 8-1 on page 742 table 8-13 on page 766 C4785-60500 8-bin Mailbox Assembly with attachment rod table 8-1 on page 742 (Whole Unit) table 8-14 on page 769 C4785-60501 Power Supply (8-bin Mailbox) table 8-16 on page 773 C4785-60502 Standard Output Bin table 8-14 on page 769 C4785-60503 Blind Cover table 8-14 on page 769 C4785-60504 Front Cover, 8-bin Mailbox table 8-14 on page 769 C4785-60505 Back Cover, 8-bin Mailbox table 8-16 on page 773 806 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Table 8-31. Numerical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices Part Number Description Table No. and Page
C4785-60506 Head Assembly (with Metal Tape) table 8-15 on page 771 C4785-60507 Metal Tape and Housing Assembly table 8-15 on page 771 C4785-60508 8-bin Mailbox Controller (with metal box) table 8-14 on page 769 C4785-60509 Flipper Assembly table 8-15 on page 771 C4785-60510 Nonadjustable Fixed Caster table 8-14 on page 769 C4785-60511 Adjustable Fixed Caster table 8-14 on page 769 C4785-60512 Attachment Clip table 8-16 on page 773 C4785-60513 Repackaging Kit table 8-15 on page 771 C4785-60514 3 Diagnostic LED PCA (with Cable) table 8-16 on page 773 C4785-60515 User LED PCA (with Cable) table 8-14 on page 769 C4785-60516 Attachment Assembly (Rod, Bracket, Cables) table 8-14 on page 769 C4785-60518 Transport Belt Motor (with Fan) table 8-16 on page 773 C4785-60519 Plastic Parts table 8-14 on page 769 table 8-15 on page 771 table 8-16 on page 773 C4785-60520 Cables table 8-16 on page 773 C4785-60521 Hardware table 8-14 on page 769 table 8-15 on page 771 table 8-16 on page 773 C4785-69500 (ex.) 8-bin Mailbox Assembly without attachment rod table 8-14 on page 769 (Exchange Unit) C4785-70001 Short C-link Cable adapter table 8-15 on page 771 C4787-60500 Stapler Assembly table 8-1 on page 742 table 8-14 on page 769 table 8-17 on page 775 C4787-60501 Stapler Control PCA table 8-17 on page 775 C4787-60502 5-bin Mailbox with Stapler/C4787A (8-bin Mailbox table 8-1 on page 742 only, without the Stapler Unit.) table 8-14 on page 769 C4787-60503 Shipping Lock Kit for 8-bin Mailbox/5-bin Mailbox table 8-16 on page 773 with Stapler C4787-69500 (ex.) Stapler Assembly (Exchange Unit) table 8-14 on page 769 table 8-17 on page 775 C4787-69502 (ex.) 5-bin Mailbox - for Stapler Assembly (Exchange table 8-14 on page 769 Unit) R95-3002-000CN 2000-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4)/C4781A table 8-1 on page 742 table 8-11 on page 761 R95-3003-000CN2x500-sheet Input Tray (Tray 4 and 5)/C4780A table 8-1 on page 742 table 8-12 on page 763C4265-90907 Numerical Parts List (Printer and Paper-handling devices) 807
,Table 8-31. Numerical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices Part Number Description Table No. and Page
R95-3007-000CN 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox/C4783A table 8-1 on page 742 table 8-13 on page 766 R98-1006-000CN Tray 5 Assembly table 8-12 on page 763 R98-1007-000CN Tray 4 Assembly table 8-12 on page 763 R98-1004-000CN Tray 3 table 8-1 on page 742 R98-1005-000CN Tray 2 table 8-1 on page 742 RA2-2408-000CN Bottom Bin (Tray) table 8-13 on page 766 RA2-2439-000CN Pin Positioning Bushing table 8-13 on page 766 RA2-2455-000CN Back Cover, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox table 8-13 on page 766 RA2-2484-000CN Bin Full Sensor table 8-13 on page 766 RA2-2485-000CN Flag, Sensor table 8-13 on page 766 RA2-2487-000CN Reversing Tray (Face-up) table 8-13 on page 766 RA2-2500-000CN Support Plate table 8-13 on page 766 RA2-2505-000CN Bushing table 8-13 on page 766 RA2-2512-000CN Handle Latch table 8-13 on page 766 RA2-2513-000CN Spring Tension table 8-13 on page 766 RA2-2527-000CN Plate, Stopper table 8-13 on page 766 RA2-2531-000CN Cover Latch table 8-13 on page 766 RA2-2541-000CN Plate (Motor Cover) table 8-13 on page 766 RA2-3842-000CN Rail Assembly table 8-13 on page 766 RA9-1127-000CN Gear, 20T table 8-2 on page 745 RB1-6409-000CN Sensor Arm Spring table 8-7 on page 755 RB1-6417-000CN Sensor Arm PS1 table 8-7 on page 755 RB1-6421-000CN Foot table 8-4 on page 749 RB1-6427-000CN Stopper, CG table 8-5 on page 751 RB1-6441-000CN Transfer Guide Bushing table 8-3 on page 747 RB1-6444-000CN Arm-Pressure-front table 8-4 on page 749 RB1-6446-000CN Release, Arm table 8-4 on page 749 RB1-6461-000CN Holder, Damper-Front table 8-3 on page 747 RB1-6462-000CN Holder, Damper-Rear table 8-3 on page 747 RB1-6464-000CN Cover, Upper Right table 8-4 on page 749 RB1-6473-000CN Shutter, White table 8-5 on page 751 RB1-6480-000CN Cover, Left-Lower table 8-2 on page 745 808 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Table 8-31. Numerical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices Part Number Description Table No. and Page
RB1-6484-000CN Open/Close Stopper table 8-2 on page 745 RB1-6489-000CN Electrical Cover (Rear by Formatter) table 8-2 on page 745 RB1-6490-000CN Tray, Output-Face-down table 8-2 on page 745 RB1-6491-000CN Face-up Bin (engine) table 8-1 on page 742 table 8-2 on page 745 RB1-6492-000CN Cover, Switch table 8-2 on page 745 RB1-6493-000CN Spring, Compression table 8-2 on page 745 RB1-6509-000CN Spring, Torsion table 8-2 on page 745 RB1-6557-000CN Arm, Sensor-PS2 table 8-7 on page 755 RB1-6558-000CN Spring, Sensor Arm table 8-7 on page 755 RB1-6582-000CN Plate, Guide-Upper table 8-7 on page 755 RB1-6615-020CN Fuser Lock Lever-Right table 8-3 on page 747 RB1-6616-020CN Fuser Lock Lever-Left table 8-3 on page 747 RB1-6692-000CN Paper Sensing Lever table 8-7 on page 755 RB1-6693-000CN Paper Height Lever table 8-7 on page 755 RB1-6749-000CN Cover, Internal Tray table 8-3 on page 747 RB1-6771-000CN Guides, Interface table 8-6 on page 753 RB1-6775-000CN Guide, Slide table 8-6 on page 753 RB1-6776-000CN Guide, Rail table 8-4 on page 749 RB1-6777-000CN Stopper, Rail table 8-4 on page 749 RB1-6778-000CN ROD table 8-4 on page 749 RB1-6783-000CN Stopper, Rail table 8-4 on page 749 RB1-6894-000CN Tray Size Plate table 8-10 on page 759 table 8-12 on page 763 RB1-7677-000CN Metallic Retaining Tab (Plate Stop) table 8-11 on page 761 RB1-7746-000CN Tray Shipping Lock table 8-11 on page 761 RB1-7832-020CN Right Cover, 2000-sheet Input Tray table 8-10 on page 759 RB1-7835-000CN Metal retaining spring (Spring Leaf) table 8-11 on page 761 RB1-9526-000CN Multi-Purpose Tray Feed Roller table 8-7 on page 755 RB2-2509-000CN Clutch cover for 2000-sheet input tray table 8-11 on page 761 RB2-2519-000CN Back Cover, 2000-sheet Input Tray table 8-10 on page 759 RB2-3503-000CN Block, Shaft Holding, Front table 8-7 on page 755 RB2-3504-000CN Block, Shaft Holding, Rear table 8-7 on page 755 RB2-3558-000CN Delivery Cover (Left Side F/U) table 8-2 on page 745C4265-90907 Numerical Parts List (Printer and Paper-handling devices) 809
,Table 8-31. Numerical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices Part Number Description Table No. and Page
RB2-3581-000CN Limiter, torque table 8-7 on page 755 RB2-3622-000CN Guide, Front table 8-4 on page 749 RB2-3626-000CN Front Cover (Duplex Jam Removal) table 8-2 on page 745 RB2-3631-000CN Clutch Cover table 8-3 on page 747 RB2-3636-000CN Tray Lock (Plastic Clip) table 8-2 on page 745 RB2-3641-000CN Hinge Plate table 8-2 on page 745 RB2-3642-000CN Right, Lower Cover (Rear Plastic on Sheet Metal) table 8-2 on page 745 RB2-3666-000CN Right Cover, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray table 8-12 on page 763 RB2-3667-000CN Holder Size PCA table 8-12 on page 763 RB2-3668-000CN Front Door (Cover Storage Tray) table 8-12 on page 763 RB2-3669-000CN Storage Paper Tray table 8-12 on page 763 RB2-3675-000CN Back Cover, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray table 8-12 on page 763 RB2-3690-000CN Clutch cover for2x500-sheet input tray table 8-12 on page 763 RB2-3705-000CN Spacer, latch table 8-12 on page 763 RB5-1845-000CN PCB, Tray Sensor table 8-8 on page 756 RF1-4004-000CN Front Cover, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox table 8-13 on page 766 RF1-4005-000CN Latching Mechanism table 8-13 on page 766 RF5-1402-000CN Cover, Rear table 8-2 on page 745 RF5-1464-000CN Shield, Plate table 8-6 on page 753 RF5-1484-000CN Paper Size Guide (Trays 2 and 3) table 8-1 on page 742 RF5-1834-000CN Feed and Separation Rollers table 8-10 on page 759 table 8-12 on page 763 RF5-1835-000CN Pickup Roller, 2000-sheet Input Tray table 8-10 on page 759 RF5-2556-000CN Locating Pin, Metal (Positioning) table 8-10 on page 759 table 8-12 on page 763 RF5-2568-000CN Front Cover (with LED window) table 8-10 on page 759 RF5-2646-000CN Left Cover, 2000-sheet Input Tray table 8-10 on page 759 RF5-2676-000CN Transfer Guide table 8-3 on page 747 RF5-2678-000CN Shield, Formatter table 8-6 on page 753 RF5-2701-000CN Hinge, Stopper table 8-2 on page 745 RF5-2703-000CN MP Separation Pad table 8-7 on page 755 RF5-2708-000CN Roller, Pickup table 8-7 on page 755 table 8-12 on page 763 RF5-2726-000CN Guide, Rear table 8-4 on page 749 810 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Table 8-31. Numerical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices Part Number Description Table No. and Page
RF5-2762-000CN Front Top Cover table 8-12 on page 763 RF5-2764-000CN Left Cover, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray table 8-12 on page 763 RF5-2766-000CN Top Cover (Includes label), 2 x 500-sheet Input table 8-12 on page 763 Tray RF7-1395-000CN Reversing Mechanism Motor table 8-13 on page 766 RF9-1249-000CN Top Cover Assembly table 8-2 on page 745 RF9-1394-000CN Roller, Transfer table 8-3 on page 747 RG1-3814-000CN Full Bin and Interlock sensor PCA table 8-13 on page 766 RG1-3815-000CN Empty Bin Sensor PCA table 8-13 on page 766 RG1-3816-000CN Face-up Bin Full and Sensor PCA table 8-13 on page 766 RG1-3817-000CN LED PCA table 8-13 on page 766 RG1-3836-000CN Face-down Bin Assembly, Odd (with 1 roller) table 8-13 on page 766 RG1-3837-000CN Face-down Bin Assembly, Even (with 2 rollers) table 8-13 on page 766 RG1-3838-000CN Top Cover Assembly (Upper Guide), 7-bin Tabletop table 8-13 on page 766 Mailbox RG1-3840-000CN Right Cover Assembly, 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox table 8-13 on page 766 RG1-3844-000CN Diverter Assembly (Flipper) table 8-13 on page 766 RG1-3853-000CN 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox Controller PCA Assembly table 8-13 on page 766 RG5-1843-000CN Sensor Cable table 8-7 on page 755 RG5-1845-000CN Tray-Size Sensing PCA table 8-12 on page 763 RG5-1846-000CN PCB, Switch/Sensor table 8-8 on page 756 RG5-1850-000CN Cable, Fuser 2 table 8-6 on page 753 RG5-1859-000CN Cable, Sensor table 8-7 on page 755 RG5-1860-000CN PCA, PIU table 8-7 on page 755 RG5-1861-000CN Cable, Paper Pickup table 8-7 on page 755 RG5-1874-000CN Face-down Delivery Assembly table 8-3 on page 747 table 8-7 on page 755 RG5-1875-000CN Face-up Solenoid Assembly table 8-9 on page 757 RG5-1884-000CN PCB, Tray, Multi-purpose table 8-8 on page 756 RG5-1915-000CN Right Cover Assembly, engine table 8-2 on page 745 RG5-1920-000CN Cable, Tray Sensor table 8-4 on page 749 RG5-1921-000CN Cable, Fan 3 table 8-6 on page 753 RG5-1928-000CN Cable, Registration table 8-6 on page 753 RG5-2166-000CN Paper Quantity Sensor PCA Assembly table 8-11 on page 761C4265-90907 Numerical Parts List (Printer and Paper-handling devices) 811
,Table 8-31. Numerical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices Part Number Description Table No. and Page
RG5-2168-000CN Paper Size Sensor PCA Assembly table 8-11 on page 761 RG5-2644-000CN Top Cover (Label Included), 2000-sheet Input Tray table 8-10 on page 759 RG5-3843-000CN Paper Pickup Assembly, 2000-sheet Input Tray table 8-10 on page 759 RG5-3845-000CN 2000-sheet Input Tray Paper Tray table 8-10 on page 759 RG5-3849-000CN Plate Paper Limit Middle table 8-10 on page 759 RG5-3850-000CN Plate Paper Reference Front table 8-10 on page 759 RG5-3851-000CN Paper Deck Drive Assembly, 2000-sheet Input Tray table 8-10 on page 759 RG5-3852-000CN Outrigger, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray table 8-12 on page 763 RG5-3853-000CN Feet Adjustable Tip table 8-11 on page 761 table 8-12 on page 763 RG5-3854-000CN Vertical Transfer Unit (VTU) table 8-10 on page 759 RG5-3908-000CN Paper Deck PCA (2000-sheet Input Tray table 8-11 on page 761 Controller) RG5-3909-000CN Power Supply Cable (PSU) table 8-11 on page 761 table 8-12 on page 763 RG5-3919-000CN Main Cable, 2000-sheet Input Tray table 8-11 on page 761 RG5-4021-000CN Universal Power Supply Assembly table 8-11 on page 761 table 8-12 on page 763 RG5-4201-000CN Plate Paper Limit Back table 8-10 on page 759 RG5-4204-000CN Front LED PCA with holder and cable table 8-11 on page 761 RG5-4205-000CN Outrigger, 2000-sheet Input Tray table 8-11 on page 761 RG5-4300-000CN Power Supply, Low-Voltage 110 V table 8-6 on page 753 RG5-4301-000CN Power Supply, Low Voltage-220 V table 8-6 on page 753 RG5-4303-000CN Registration Assembly table 8-3 on page 747 RG5-4305-000CN Feeder Assembly table 8-3 on page 747 table 8-7 on page 755 RG5-4306-000CN High-Voltage Power Supply table 8-5 on page 751 RG5-4318-000CN Fusing Assembly, 110V table 8-3 on page 747 RG5-4317-000CN Fusing Assembly, 220V table 8-3 on page 747 RG5-4325-000CN Diverter Assembly table 8-2 on page 745 RG5-4329-000CN MP Tray Assembly Cover (Tray 1) table 8-3 on page 747 RG5-4330-000CN Multi-purpose Tray Assembly (Tray 1) table 8-3 on page 747 table 8-7 on page 755 RG5-4334-000CN Assembly, Paper Pickup (PIU) table 8-7 on page 755 RG5-4344-000CN Assembly, Laser Scanner table 8-5 on page 751 812 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Table 8-31. Numerical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices Part Number Description Table No. and Page
RG5-4360-000CN Top Cover Assembly table 8-2 on page 745 RG5-4362-000CN Front Cover, engine table 8-2 on page 745 RG5-4365-000CN Printer Drive Assembly table 8-3 on page 747 RG5-4375-030CN Assembly, DC Controller PCB table 8-8 on page 756 RG5-4377-000CN Laser and Control Panel Cable table 8-5 on page 751 RG5-4378-000CN Cable, Scanner Motor table 8-5 on page 751 RG5-4381-000CN Cable, Fuser 1 table 8-6 on page 753 RG5-4384-000CN Display, Control Panel table 8-2 on page 745 RG5-4386-000CN Main Motor Cable table 8-3 on page 747 RG5-4403-000CN Paper Feed Assembly (Vertical Transfer Unit) table 8-12 on page 763 RG5-4410-000CN Paper Pickup Assembly, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray table 8-12 on page 763 RG5-4416-000CN Paper Deck Drive Assembly, 2 x 500-sheet Input table 8-12 on page 763 Tray RG5-4440-000CN Main Cable, 2 x 500-sheet Input Tray table 8-12 on page 763 RG5-4441-000CN Front LED PCA table 8-12 on page 763 RG5-4442-000CN2x500-sheet Input Tray Controller PCA table 8-12 on page 763 RG9-1361-000CN Assembly, Transfer Roller table 8-3 on page 747 RH3-2205-000CN Power Supply (7-bin Tabletop Mailbox) table 8-13 on page 766 RH7-1266-000CN Fan, FM1/Low Voltage Power Supply table 8-5 on page 751 RH7-1271-000CN Fan, FM3/Formatter table 8-6 on page 753 RH7-1289-000CN Fan, FM4/Delivery Assembly table 8-7 on page 755 RH7-1350-000CN Motor, PIU table 8-7 on page 755 RH7-1396-000CN Fan, FM2/Laser Scanner table 8-6 on page 753 RH7-1397-000CN Fan, FM5 table 8-7 on page 755 RH7-5187-000CN Electromagnetic Clutch table 8-3 on page 747 RH7-5188-000CN Clutch, Paper Feed table 8-7 on page 755 RH7-5219-000CN Main Motor table 8-3 on page 747 RH7-5223-000CN Solenoid Reversing Mechanism table 8-13 on page 766 RH7-5225-000CN Solenoid Flipper table 8-13 on page 766 RS5-1399-000CN Paper Deck Drive Bushing table 8-10 on page 759 RS5-2499-000CN Spring, Tension table 8-4 on page 749 RS5-2561-000CN Tension Spring table 8-11 on page 761 RS5-8605-000CN Paper Size Guide Label (Trays 2 and 3) table 8-1 on page 742C4265-90907 Numerical Parts List (Printer and Paper-handling devices) 813
,Table 8-31. Numerical Parts List – Printer and Paper-handling Devices Part Number Description Table No. and Page
RS5-8611-000CN Tray Size Labels table 8-10 on page 759 table 8-12 on page 763 RS5-8676-000CN Label, Operation table 8-2 on page 745 RS6-2072-000CN Compression Spring, Front table 8-7 on page 755 RS6-2073-000CN Compression Spring, Rear table 8-7 on page 755 RY7-5044-000CN 2K (2000-sheet Input Tray) Deck Hardware Kit table 8-10 on page 759) table 8-11 on page 761 RY7-5048-000CN Hardware Screws Kit for 7-bin Tabletop Mailbox table 8-13 on page 766 VD7-1893-151CN Power Supply Fuse 250V/3.15A table 8-11 on page 761 table 8-12 on page 763 WG8-0291-000CN Photo Interrupter table 8-7 on page 755 XA9-0605-000CN Screw, M4x8table 8-2 on page 745 XA9-0870-000CN Screw, M4 x 10 table 8-2 on page 745 XA9-0872-000CN Screw, M3x8table 8-2 on page 745 XB6-7400-807CN Screw, M4x8TP table 8-3 on page 747 XZ9-0379-000CN Latch table 8-12 on page 763 XZ9-0442-000CN Caster table 8-10 on page 759 table 8-12 on page 763 814 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Numerical Parts List (Copy Module) Table 8-32. Numerical Parts List – Copy Module Part Number Description Table No. and Page
8120-8749 Copy Connect Cable table 8-20 on page 781 9000288TF Front Panel table 8-18 on page 778 PA03002-C101FJ Power Supply table 8-20 on page 781 PA03002-C102FJ Control PCA (FJ) table 8-20 on page 781 PA03002-C103FJ Junction PCA table 8-19 on page 779 PA03002-C104FJ FB Cover Assembly table 8-24 on page 788 PA03002-C105FJ Document Holding Pad table 8-24 on page 788 PA03002-C106FJ ADF Cover (skin) table 8-18 on page 778 PA03002-C107FJ Upper Cover (skin) table 8-18 on page 778 PA03002-C108FJ ADF Unit table 8-23 on page 787 PA03002-C109FJ ADF Motor Unit table 8-22 on page 784 PA03002-C110FJ Sensor Unit Assembly table 8-22 on page 784 PA03002-C111FJ ADF Belt table 8-22 on page 784 PA03002-C112FJ Pick Roller Cover table 8-22 on page 784 PA03002-C113FJ Carrier Unit table 8-21 on page 783 PA03002-C114FJ Lower Lamp (front side) table 8-21 on page 783 PA03002-C115FJ Upper Lamp (back side) table 8-23 on page 787 PA03002-C116FJ FB Motor Unit (w/belt) table 8-19 on page 779 PA03002-C117FJ Optical Unit table 8-23 on page 787 PA03002-C118FJ Fan Assembly table 8-20 on page 781 PA03002-C119FJ Back PCA Board (CP mate) table 8-20 on page 781 PA03002-C120FJ Pick Roller Assembly table 8-22 on page 784 PA03002-C121FJ Output Tray Assembly table 8-18 on page 778 PA03002-C122FJ Separation Pad Assembly table 8-22 on page 784 PA03002-C123FJ Thumb Screws (paper guide) (screws for Pick table 8-22 on page 784 Roller Cover) PA03002-C124FJ Carrier Stopper (shipping lock) table 8-19 on page 779 PA03002-C125FJ Front Panel Cable table 8-19 on page 779 PA03002-C126FJ LED Assembly (includes cable) table 8-22 on page 784 PA03002-C201FJ ADF Latch Cap table 8-18 on page 778C4265-90907 Numerical Parts List (Copy Module) 815
,Table 8-32. Numerical Parts List – Copy Module Part Number Description Table No. and Page
PA03002-C202FJ RFI Cover table 8-20 on page 781 PA03002-C203FJ DC Cable PS to Main table 8-20 on page 781 PA03002-C204FJ Carrier Flex Cable table 8-19 on page 779 PA03002-C205FJ Carrier Rail table 8-19 on page 779 PA03002-C206FJ Carrier Rail Bushing table 8-21 on page 783 PA03002-C207FJ Home Position Sensor table 8-19 on page 779 PA03002-C208FJ Frame Ground Spring 1 table 8-19 on page 779 PA03002-C209FJ Idle Roller Coil Spring table 8-19 on page 779 PA03002-C210FJ Carrier Belt Tension Pulley table 8-19 on page 779 PA03002-C211FJ Carrier Tension Pulley Shaft table 8-19 on page 779 PA03002-C212FJ Carrier Tension Pulley Spring table 8-19 on page 779 PA03002-C213FJ Carrier Tension Pulley Spacer table 8-19 on page 779 PA03002-C214FJ Carrier Tension Pulley Collar table 8-19 on page 779 PA03002-C215FJ Control PCA Protector table 8-19 on page 779 PA03002-C216FJ Carrier Unit Protector table 8-19 on page 779 PA03002-C217FJ Carrier Ribbon Cable Protector table 8-19 on page 779 PA03002-C218FJ Rubber Foot table 8-19 on page 779 PA03002-C219FJ Glass Plate Assembly table 8-20 on page 781 PA03002-C220FJ Main/PS Cover Bracket table 8-20 on page 781 PA03002-C222FJ Output Tray Bracket, Rear table 8-20 on page 781 PA03002-C223FJ Output Tray Bracket, Front table 8-20 on page 781 PA03002-C224FJ Exit Idle Roller table 8-20 on page 781 PA03002-C225FJ HK Ring V2 table 8-20 on page 781 PA03002-C226FJ Rubber Stop, Document Cover table 8-24 on page 788 PA03002-C227FJ Optical Unit Tie Down w/Pad table 8-22 on page 784 PA03002-C228FJ ADF Cable table 8-22 on page 784 PA03002-C229FJ CCD Cable table 8-20 on page 781 PA03002-C230FJ Drive Roller Shaft table 8-22 on page 784 PA03002-C231FJ Drive Roller Gear table 8-22 on page 784 PA03002-C232FJ Reduction Gear table 8-22 on page 784 PA03002-C233FJ Drive Roller Bearing table 8-22 on page 784 PA03002-C234FJ Top of Form Sensor Arm table 8-22 on page 784 PA03002-C235FJ ADF Paper Empty Sensor Arm table 8-22 on page 784 816 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Table 8-32. Numerical Parts List – Copy Module Part Number Description Table No. and Page
PA03002-C236FJ Pad Assembly Frame table 8-22 on page 784 PA03002-C237FJ Pad Spring table 8-22 on page 784 PA03002-C238FJ Pad Shaft table 8-22 on page 784 PA03002-C239FJ Pad Plate table 8-22 on page 784 PA03002-C240FJ Pick Spring table 8-22 on page 784 PA03002-C241FJ Key Washer table 8-22 on page 784 PA03002-C242FJ ADF Latch Lever Front table 8-22 on page 784 PA03002-C243FJ ADF Latch Lever Rear table 8-22 on page 784 PA03002-C244FJ ADF Latch Shaft table 8-22 on page 784 PA03002-C245FJ ADF Latch Spring table 8-22 on page 784 PA03002-C246FJ Paper Anti Static Assembly table 8-22 on page 784 PA03002-C247FJ ADF Lift Spring Front table 8-22 on page 784 PA03002-C248FJ ADF Lift Spring Rear table 8-22 on page 784 PA03002-C249FJ Idle Roller Leaf Spring table 8-22 on page 784 PA03002-C250FJ Pick Roller Clutch/Gear table 8-22 on page 784 PA03002-C251FJ Carrier Unit Lamp PCA table 8-21 on page 783 PA03002-C252FJ ADF Lamp PCA table 8-23 on page 787 PA03002-C253FJ E-ring, Idle Roller (20pcs) table 8-28 on page 790 PA03002-C254FJ E-ring, Latch Lever (20pcs) table 8-28 on page 790 PA03002-C255FJ Retainer Ring ADF Lock Bearing (20pcs) table 8-28 on page 790 PA03002-C256FJ Carrier Unit Dust Cover table 8-21 on page 783 PA03002-C257FJ Front Panel Bracket table 8-18 on page 778 PA03002-C258FJ Copy Processor Card Cage table 8-20 on page 781 PA03002-C259FJ Carrier Unit Lubrication Felt table 8-21 on page 783 PA03002-C260FJ Paper Chute Flip Out table 8-24 on page 788 PA03002-C261FJ Calibration Target Kit PA03002-C262FJ Carrier Ribbon Cable Ferrite Bead table 8-19 on page 779 PA03002-C263FJ Output Tray Flip-out table 8-18 on page 778 PA03002-C264FJ Panel Cover table 8-18 on page 778 PA03002-C265FJ Bearing for Feed Roller table 8-22 on page 784 PA03002-C266FJ Front Panel Frame Ground Spring table 8-18 on page 778 PA03002-C267FJ Junction PCA Cover table 8-19 on page 779 PA03002-C269FJ Brass Bushing for Pick Roller table 8-22 on page 784C4265-90907 Numerical Parts List (Copy Module) 817
,Table 8-32. Numerical Parts List – Copy Module Part Number Description Table No. and Page
PA03002-C270FJ Front Panel Cable Cover table 8-19 on page 779 PA03002-C272FJ Front Panel Frame Ground Plate table 8-18 on page 778 PA03002-C273FJ Front Panel Cable Clamp table 8-18 on page 778 PA03002-C281FJ TP Screw m3x6table 8-25 on page 789 PA03002-C282FJ TP Screw m3x8table 8-25 on page 789 PA03002-C283FJ Machine Screw w/washer m3x6table 8-26 on page 789 PA03002-C284FJ Machine Screw w/washer m3x8table 8-26 on page 789 PA03002-C285FJ Machine Screw w/washer m3 x 35 table 8-26 on page 789 PA03002-C286FJ Machine Screw w/washer m4x8table 8-26 on page 789 PA03002-C287FJ Flat Head Screw m3 x6 table 8-27 on page 790 PM-3700 Copy Processor Card table 8-20 on page 781 818 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams C4265-90907,Index Numerics back 338
2 x 500-sheet input tray (trays 4 & 5) 212 front 337 adjustable foot tip 393 left 339 adjustment procedure 169 right 340 casters 392 diagnostics 669 controller PCA 384 diagrams 699, 701 covers dimensions 85 back 366 drive assembly 341 front top 374 electrical specifications 87 left 367 features 205 right 371 front LED PCA assembly 348 diagnostics 673 identification label 37 dimensions 85 LEDs 672 electrical specifications 87 lifter operation 209 front door (storage area) 391 locating pins 361 front LED PCA 395 main cable harness 344 identification label 37 main drive assembly 341 lifter 213 messages 608 locating pins 394 motor test 669 main cable 388 motors 206 messages 612 operation 207 operation 212 ordering 40 ordering 40 orientation 336 orientation 365 paper paths and components 205 paper deck drive assembly 381 paper quantity switch assembly 356 paper paths and components 210 paper size switch assembly 356 paper tray 390 paper tray 343 parts and diagrams 748 pickup and feed system 207 pickup and feed system 212 pickup assembly 350 pickup assembly 379 power supply 209, 352 power supply 213, 387 printing from 209 printing from 209 removing and replacing 257, 335 removing and replacing 257, 364 rollers 354 rollers 383 sensor test 671 specifications 50, 85 sensors 206 storage paper tray 390 specifications 50, 85 tray-size sensing PCA 385 stand-alone running test 669 troubleshooting 577, 673, 675 switches 206 verifying installation 641 tension springs 360 vertical transfer unit (VTU) 368 troubleshooting 576, 577, 669 weight 85 verifying installation 641 2000-sheet input tray (tray 4) vertical transfer unit (VTU) 358 adjustable foot 363 weight 85 adjustment procedure 172 wiring diagram 701 cable harness 344 2-sided printing 204 casters 362 5-bin mailbox with stapler, see mailbox with stapler clutches 206 7-bin tabletop mailbox controller PCA 346 collator mode 218, 225 covers controller PCA 408C4265-90907 Index 819
, covers delivery head assembly 223, 454 back 402 delivery head motor 443 front 399 diagnostic LED PCA 460 latch 433 dimensions 82, 86 top 404 electrical specifications 87 diagnostics 677 face-up and down bins 439 dimensions 86 features 220 diverter assembly 425 flipper assembly 223, 440 door assembly 410 head motor 443 electrical specifications 87 identification label 37 empty bin sensor PCA 417 input paper guide 446 face-down bins 414 interlock switch 459 face-up sensors PCA 422 LEDs 685 face-up/diverter assembly (flipper) 425 mailbox mode 224 flipper assembly 425 messages 622 flipper solenoid 430 metal tape and housing assembly 448 full bin and interlock sensor PCA 419 motors 221 handle 431 operating modes 220, 223 identification label 37 ordering 40 interlock sensor PCA 419 orientation 435 latching mechanism 432 paper bins 439 LED PCA 421 paper jams 578 messages 616 paper path 220, 684 modes 217 power box 44 operation 216 power supply 438 ordering 40 power-on sequence 223, 683 orientation 398 receiving paper 223 paper path cover 410 removing and replacing 258, 434 paper paths and components 214 sensors 221 parts and diagrams 751 space requirements 82 power supply 409 specifications 51, 86 removing and replacing 259, 397 stand-alone diagnostics 682 reversing mechanism motor 423 stapler operation 227 right door assembly (paper path cover) 410 status LED PCA 462 short tray 7 428 switches 221 solenoid reversing mechanism 429 testing 682 specifications 51 transport belt motor 444 stand troubleshooting 576, 578, 682 dimensions and weight 86 verifying installation 641 ordering 41 virtual stacker mode 224 troubleshooting 677 weight 86 verifying installation 641 wiring diagram 702 virtual stacker mode 218 weight 86 A 8-bin mailbox AC access cover 268 anticurl strings 452 AC power attachment assembly 465 distribution 182 belt motor 444 troubleshooting 582 casters 464 accessories components 220 cleaning 158 controller PCA 221, 450 locations 38 covers ordering 40 back 436 see also paper-handling devices blind 439 user installable 254 front 436 verifying installation 641 top 437 acoustic emissions 88 820 Index C4265-90907, ADF (HP Digital Copy 320) bubble print 661 belt 534 button functions (HP Digital Copy 320) 134 cleaning 163 cover 502 C duplex operation 244 cable harness (2000-sheet input tray) 344 lamp 529 cables lamp PCA 527 c-link lamp, cleaning 165 input and output 230 latch cap 501 troubleshooting 571 loading copy connect 485 lubricating gears 165 front panel ribbon (HP Digital Copy 320) 557 motor unit 533 main (2 x 500-sheet input tray) 388 paper path sensors 249 ordering 44 simplex operation 243 parallel 234 unit 537 calibrating adhesive labels, see labels copy module 175 adjustable foot for edge-to-edge printing 1692x500-sheet input tray 393 for normal printing 170 2000-sheet input tray 363 cancel job key 93 adjusting the ADF belt 535 capacity of paper trays 50 administrator mode (HP Digital Copy 320) 147 card cage (HP Digital Copy 320) 520 air conditioners 80 carrier belt and motor (HP Digital Copy 320) 559 anticurl strings (8-bin mailbox) 452 carrier unit appliances 80 cleaning 166 attachment assembly (8-bin mailbox) 465 HP Digital Copy 320 547 attention light 94 lamp (HP Digital Copy 320) 544 automatic document feeder, see ADF lubricating 166 shaft (HP Digital Copy 320) 548B cartridge slots 26
back PCA (HP Digital Copy 320) 524 cartridges 62 back plate (stapler) 469 casters background scatter 6562x500-sheet input tray 392 bed assembly (stapler) 475 2000-sheet input tray 362 belt (HP Digital Copy 320) 534 8-bin mailbox 464 belt motor (8-bin mailbox) 444 CFC usage 68 bin sensor PCA (7-bin tabletop mailbox) 417 cleaning bins ADF 162, 163 configuring carrier unit shaft (HP Digital Copy 320) 548 7-bin tabletop mailbox 217 copy module 165 8-bin mailbox 223 glass 162 removing and replacing HP Digital Copy 320 161 7-bin tabletop mailbox 414 Mopier and accessories 158 8-bin mailbox 439 optics 165 specifications 50, 86 pick rollers 164 black lines 654 printer 159 black page 651 spilled toner 160 blank page toner cartridge drum 192 entire 651 clutches middle of page 663 2000-sheet input tray 206 partial 662 diagram 692 blind cover (8-bin mailbox) 439 drive signals 187 books, copy 29 locations 200 boot errors 707 cold reset brackets (HP Digital Copy 320) paper size 95, 141, 144 front panel 510 performing 96 output tray 539 collator mode (7-bin tabletop mailbox) 218, 225C4265-90907 Index 821
, common features 26 8-bin mailbox 221, 450 communication DC (printer) 311 channels 248 diagrams 693, 699 HP Digital Copy 320 705 stapler 471 communication (Mopier) 248 copy books 29 communication link 230 copy connect cable, installing 485 communications link, see cables, c-link copy connect EIO board, installing in Mopier 484 comparisons of features 27 copy module, see HP Digital Copy 320 compressed print 663 copy processor board (HP Digital Copy 320) conditioning drum 193 LED test 717 configuration menu 113 power-up 239 configuration of MBM menu 118 removing and replacing 514 configuration page covers printing 153 troubleshooting 641 AC access 268 configuring2x500-sheet input tray cold reset default paper size 144 back 366 maintenance count 300 front top 374 page count 300 left 367 serial number 300 right 371 conformity 72 2000-sheet input tray connections, troubleshooting 571 back 338 consumables 62 front 337 control panel left 339 default settings 94 right 340 display 100 7-bin tabletop mailbox keys 92 back 402 language 96 front 399 layout 92 latch 433 lights 93 top 404 menu map 639 8-bin mailbox message format 592 back 436 overriding settings 94 blind 439 removing and replacing 265 front 436 troubleshooting 586 top 437 control panel menus 100 back 269 configuration 113 cleaning 160 configuration of MBM 118 front 270 duplex registration 123 HP Digital Copy 320 EIO 121 ADF 502 I/O 119 junction PCA 555 information 104 panel 509 jobs 101 upper 512 map 155, 640 left lower 272 paper handling 105 stapler 474 print quality 108 top 273 printing 110 curl (paper) 581 private/stored jobs 101 customer support, see troubleshooting quick copy 102 customizing, see configuring resets 125 service mode 141 D control PCA (HP Digital Copy 320) 519 daisy chain 230, 571 controller PCA data light 932x500-sheet input tray 384 2000-sheet input tray 346 7-bin tabletop mailbox 408 822 Index C4265-90907, DC controller PCA driver diagrams 693 overriding control panel settings 94 functions 187 troubleshooting 575 removing and replacing 311 dropouts 654 DC power 181 drum declaration of conformity 72 cleaning 192 default settings 94 conditioning 193 control panel 94 photosensitive, description 191 restoring 125 rotation functional check 667 defining, see configuring DSP (digital signal processor) 238 delivery head assembly (8-bin mailbox) 223, 454 duplex registration menu 123 delivery head motor (8-bin mailbox) 443 duplex registration, adjusting 174 delivery unit (face-down output bin) duplex scanning 29 fan 288 duplexer removing 276 dimensions 86 density calibration adjustment (HP Digital Copy 320) memory requirements 49 177 messages 631 diagnostic LED PCA (8-bin mailbox) 460 operation 204 diagnostics on paper-handling devices 669 ordering 40 diagrams paper paths and components 200 copier 762 removing and replacing 256, 478 how to use 726 specifications 51 list 690 speed 26 paper-handling 744 standard or optional 27, 28 printer 730 verifying installation 641 Digital Copy 320, see HP Digital Copy 320 weight 86 digital signal processor (DSP) 238 dust 80 dimensions duty cycle 26 of Mopier and accessories 81 of printer and accessories 86 E dimensions of Mopier and paper-handling devices EconoMode 186 85 edge-to-edge printing 169 DIMM, see memory EDO DIMMs, see memory DIP switches 671 EEPROM (HP Digital Copy 320) 521 disk, see hard disk 8-bin mailbox display checks (HP Digital Copy 320) 705 anticurl strings 452 display language 96 attachment assembly 465 diverter assembly belt motor 444 7-bin tabletop mailbox 425 casters 464 printer 279, 280 components 220 document cover, cleaning 162 controller PCA 221, 450 document feeder 29 covers document holder, cleaning 162 back 436 document holding pad (HP Digital Copy 320) 495 blind 439 documentation 45 front 436 door assembly top 437 7-bin tabletop mailbox 410 delivery head assembly 223, 454 printer delivery head motor 443 diverter door 280 diagnostic LED PCA 460 right lower door 281 dimensions 82, 86 dots per inch (dpi) 26 electrical specifications 87 dpi (dots per inch) 26 face-up and down bins 439 draft mode, see EconoMode features 220 drive assembly (2000-sheet input tray) 341 flipper assembly 223, 440 head motor 443 identification label 37C4265-90907 Index 823
, input paper guide 446 removing and replacing 256, 396 interlock switch 459 specifications 51 LEDs 685 verifying installation 641 mailbox mode 224 weight 86 messages 622 envelopes metal tape and housing assembly 448 guidelines 52 motors 221 paper jams 578 operating modes 220, 223 troubleshooting 577, 578 ordering 40 environment orientation 435 operating 80 paper bins 439 requirements 84 paper jams 578 environmental product stewardship 68 paper path 220, 684 equipment errors 707 power box 44 error messages, see messages power supply 438 ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) precautions 252 power-on sequence 223, 683 event log receiving paper 223 clearing 141 removing and replacing 258, 434 displaying 590 sensors 221 error sequence numbers 586 space requirements 82 interpreting 591 specifications 51, 86 listed on configuration page 154 stand-alone diagnostics 682 message format 592 stapler operation 227 printing 590 status LED PCA 462 troubleshooting 586 switches 221 viewing 586 testing 682 exchange program 62 transport belt motor 444 exhaust troubleshooting 576, 578, 682 fan 1 (laser/scanner) 284 verifying installation 641 fan 2 (lvps) 286 virtual stacker mode 224 fan 4 (delivery unit) 288 weight 86 exit rollers, cleaning 164 wiring diagram 702 EIO accessories, troubleshooting 573 F EIO cards face-down bins ordering 44 7-bin tabletop mailbox 414 standard 27, 28 8-bin mailbox 439 status 153 delivery unit 276 EIO menu 121 specifications 50 electrical specifications 87 face-up sensors PCA (7-bin tabletop mailbox) 422 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) precautions 252 face-up solenoid assembly 331 EMI statement for Korea 75 face-up/diverter assembly (flipper) (7-bin tabletop empty bin sensor PCA (7-bin tabletop mailbox) 417 mailbox) 425 energy consumption 68 factory settings 94 engine error messages 596 fading print 578, 652 engine test fan microswitch 188 fan 1 (laser/scanner) 284 troubleshooting 585 fan 2 (lvps) 286 envelope feeder fan 3 (formatter) 287 dimensions 86 fan 4 (delivery unit) 288 messages 615 fan 5 (tray 1 intake) 289 ordering 40 HP Digital Copy 320 522 paper paths and components 200 locations 200 printing from 204 motors 188 FastRes 1200 195 faulty registration 660 FCC statement 66 824 Index C4265-90907, features layout 127 common 26 removing and replacing 504 comparison 27 ribbon cable 507, 557 HP Digital Copy 320 29 using 126 feed roller FRUs, see field replaceable units2x500-sheet input tray 383 FTP technical assistance 64 2000-sheet input tray 354 full bin and interlock sensor PCA (7-bin tabletop cleaning 164 mailbox) 419 trays 2 & 3 326 functional block diagram 180 feeder assembly (printer) 298 functional overview (HP Digital Copy 320) 235 feet (HP Digital Copy 320) 552 fusing assembly felt pad (HP Digital Copy 320) 551 cleaning 160 field replaceable units, ordering 61 removing and replacing 302 file directory page 644 fusing images finding pins, see locating pins about 199 finisher components 225 troubleshooting 579 Finland laser statement 75 fire 80 G Firmware, copy module, upgrade 150 gear assembly (printer) 306 Firmware, remote upgrade, printer 148 glass plate assembly (HP Digital Copy 320) 540 5-bin mailbox with stapler, see mailbox with stapler go key 92 flames 80 flashing light 93 flatbed H cleaning glass 162 half self test functional check 666 cover assembly (HP Digital Copy 320) 498 handle (7-bin tabletop mailbox) 431 loading 140 hard disk flatbed operation (HP Digital Copy 320) 244 about 47 flipper assembly ordering 43 7-bin tabletop mailbox 425 removing and replacing 255 8-bin mailbox 440 standard or optional 27, 28 flipper solenoid (7-bin tabletop mailbox) 430 verifying installation 641 fonts hardware table internal 26 engine 262 ordering 43 HP Digital Copy 320 487 foot Hardware Technical Support Center (HTSC) 652x500-sheet input tray 393 head motor (8-bin mailbox) 443 2000-sheet input tray 363 help desk 64 HP Digital Copy 320 552 help, see troubleshooting formatter assembly high voltage power supply fan 287 check 667 function 184 contacts 183, 190 part locations 33 distribution 183 removing 300, 301 removing and replacing 319 retaining settings 143 hinges (stapler) 477 frame ground spring (HP Digital Copy 320) 553 home position sensor (HP Digital Copy 320) 542 front door storage area (2 x 500-sheet input tray) HP 3,000-sheet Stacker, HP 3,000-sheet Stapler/ 391 Stacker Service Manual Supplement 46 front lamp PCA (HP Digital Copy 320) 554 HP 3000-sheet Stacker and HP 3000-sheet Stapler/ front LED PCA Stacker (C4779x and C4788x) Installation Guide2x500-sheet input tray 395 46 2000-sheet input tray 348 HP ASAP (Automated Support Access Program) 64 front panel (HP Digital Copy 320) HP Digital Copier Firmware, Upgrade 150 brackets 510 HP Digital Copy 320 frame ground spring 538 ADF belt 534 installing overlay 126 ADF cover 502 ADF duplex operation 244C4265-90907 Index 825
, ADF lamp 529 front panel ADF lamp PCA 527 brackets 510 ADF latch cap 501 frame ground spring 538 ADF motor unit 533 installing overlay 126 ADF simplex operation 243 layout 127 ADF unit 537 removing and replacing 504 administrator mode 147 ribbon cable 507, 557 alphabetical parts list 787 using 126 assembly locations 762 functional overview 235 back PCA 524 glass plate assembly 540 boot errors 707 hardware table 487 Boot Up Icon Conditions 718 home position sensor 542 button functions 134 image quality 713 calibrating 175 installing 480 card cage 520 LED Assembly PCA 536 carrier belt and motor 559 LED functions 134 carrier unit 547 loading ADF carrier unit lamp 544 lubricating 165 cleaning 161 main board tray 515 cleaning ADF and glass 162 maintaining 168, 490 complete optics cleaning 165 media selection guidelines 56 configurations 35 menu tabs 128 context sensitive help 133 numerical parts list 801 control PCA 519 offline test 719 copy processor offset adjustment 177 function 237 optical unit 525 layout 237 optional stand, installing 482 copy processor board orientation 489 LED test 717 output tray 497 power-up 239 brackets 539 removing and replacing 514 flip-out 497 covers paper chute flip-out 496 junction PCA 555 paper path 712 panel 509 paper path sensors 249 upper 512 part tests 721 default configurations 133 parts 34, 490, 762 density calibration adjustment 177 pick roller assembly 491 diagrams 762 power on checks 704 display and communication troubleshooting 705 power supply 515, 523 document holding pad 495 power-up 241 document quality 57 RFI cover 517 EEPROM 521 ribbon cable 507, 557 equipment errors 707 sensor unit assembly 530 error messages 706 sensors 719 fan 522 separation pad assembly 490 features 29 service mode 145 feet 552 service mode tests 723 felt pad 551 settings and defaults 136 flatbed shipping lock 481 cover assembly 498 skins 495 loading 140 specifications 89 operation 244 stand, installing 480, 482 frame ground spring 553 start button LED 135 front lamp PCA 554 status bar 127 temporary errors 710 826 Index C4265-90907, testing 716 installing troubleshooting 703 copy connect cable 485 vertical magnification adjustment 177 copy connect EIO board 484 y power cord 486 HP Digital Copy 320 480 HP Digital Copy 320 stands 482 optional output accessory 483 HP distribution center 61 y power cord 486 HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Support interface Technology) 64 accessories 44 HP JetDirect print server card, see EIO cards standard 27, 28 HP JetDirect Print Server Software Installation Guide interlock sensor PCA (7-bin tabletop mailbox) 419 45 interlock switch (8-bin mailbox) 459 HP JetSend IP addresses 154 internet technical assistance 64 HP LaserJet 8100 User Guide 45 interpreting event log 591 HP LaserJet 8100/8150 Service Manual 46 IP addresses 154 HP LaserJet 8150 Getting Started Guide 46 item key 93 HP LaserJet 8150, 8150N, 8150DN, 8150HN, and 8150MFP Printers User Guide 45 J HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification jammed paper 232 Guide 45 JetDirect configuration page, printing 573 HP reseller sales and service support 65 JetSend 154 HP support line 61 job interrupt 29, 248 HTSC, see Hardware Technical Support Center job retention 47 humidifiers 80 job separator mode 218 humidity 84 junction PCA and cover (HP Digital Copy 320) 555 hvps, see high voltage power supplyK I
keys on control panel 92 I/O Korean EMI statement 75 menu 119 troubleshooting 571 identification 37 L idler rollers, cleaning 164 labels image formation adhesive 53 block diagram 189 paper jams 578 developing 196 printer identification 37 fusing 199 lamps (HP Digital Copy 320) system 189 ADF 529 transferring 198 ADF PCA 527 writing 194 carrier unit 544 image path 246 front PCA 554 image quality language on control panel 96 HP Digital Copy 320 713 languages (personalities) Mopier 649 removing and replacing 254 troubleshooting 651 standard printer 26 image skew 577, 660 status 153 images per minute 29 verifying installation 641 images per month 26 laser indicator lights 93 safety 73 information menu 104 statement for Finland 75 input paper guide (8-bin mailbox) 446 laser/scanner input tray, see2x500-sheet input tray or 2000-sheet drive 187 input tray fan 284 motors 188 removing and replacing 304 latch cap, ADF (HP Digital Copy 320) 501 latching mechanism (7-bin tabletop mailbox) 432C4265-90907 Index 827
, layout, copy processor 237 main gear assembly (printer) 306 LED main motor, troubleshooting 5762x500-sheet input tray 395 maintenance 2000-sheet input tray 348, 672 count configuring 300 7-bin tabletop mailbox 421 HP Digital Copy 320 168, 490 8-bin mailbox 685 kit, ordering 45 diagnostic 460 preventative 167 status 462 setting count 143 HP Digital Copy 320 536 manuals 45 functions 134 mass storage, see hard disk drive start button LED 135 MBM menu 118 interpreting status 672, 676, 682, 685, 717 mechanical assemblies, cleaning 166 left output bin specifications 50 media, see paper light print 578, 652 memory light, environment 80 installing 254 lights on control panel 93 ordering 43 lines requirements 48 black 654 standard 27, 28 edge of paper 658 status 153 white 662 verifying installation 641 LocalTalk cable 44 Memory Enhancement (MEt) 27 locating pins menu key 922x500-sheet input tray 394 menu map 639 2000-sheet input tray 173, 361 menu map page 155, 640 log, see event log menu tabs (HP Digital Copy 320) 128 low voltage power supply menus, see control panel menus distribution system 181 messages removing and replacing 3202x500-sheet input tray 612 lubricating 2000-sheet input tray 608 ADF gears 165 7-bin tabletop mailbox 616 carrier unit and assemblies 166 8-bin mailbox 622 carrier unit shaft (HP Digital Copy 320) 548 duplexer 631 lvps, see low voltage power supply engine 596 envelope feeder 615M HP Digital Copy 320 706
Macintosh network cable kit (ordering) 44 paper handling controller 632 mailbox (7-bin), see 7-bin tabletop mailbox paper-handling devices 592 mailbox (8-bin), see 8-bin mailbox printer 592 mailbox mode stapler 628 7-bin tabletop mailbox 217 MEt (Memory Enhancement) 27 8-bin mailbox 224 metal tape and housing assembly (8-bin mailbox) mailbox with stapler 448 electrical specifications 87 micro-controller, copier 238 identification label 37 microswitch, engine test 188 operation 227 minus key 93 ordering 41 mirrors, cleaning 165 paper jams 578 model number 37 removing and replacing 258 monthly usage 26 specifications 51 motor troubleshooting 5782x500-sheet input tray 673 verifying installation 641 2000-sheet input tray 206, 669 wiring diagram 698 7-bin tabletop mailbox 423, 678 main board tray (HP Digital Copy 320) 515 8-bin mailbox 221 main cable (2 x 500-sheet input tray) 388 delivery head 443 main cable harness (2000-sheet input tray) 344 transport belt 444 main drive assembly (2000-sheet input tray) 341 diagram 692 828 Index C4265-90907, fan 1(laser/scanner) 285 setting 141, 143 fan 3 (formatter) 287 troubleshooting 577 HP Digital Copy 320 page skew 577, 660 ADF 533 pages per minute (ppm) 26 carrier 559 panel cover (HP Digital Copy 320) 509 locating 200 paper operation 188 components 200 printer 309 delivery 223 test 669 motion 187 troubleshooting 576 ordering 42 verifying functionality 669 path 29 mounting printer on optional stand 482 paths 200 MT1 188 perforated 60 multi-purpose tray, see tray 1 selection guidelines (HP Digital Copy 320) 56 multi-sheet printing 29 separation 198 shipping 54N size 56
network cards, see EIO cards sizes and memory requirements 49 network troubleshooting 571, 573 specifications (HP Digital Copy 320) 56 noise specifications (Mopier and paper-handling emissions 88 devices) 50, 52 troubleshooting 576 specifications guide 45 storing 54 weight equivalence table 55O paper bins (8-bin mailbox) 439
offline test (HP Digital Copy 320) 719 paper chute flip-out (HP Digital Copy 320) 496 offset adjustment (HP Digital Copy 320) 177 paper deck drive assembly (2 x 500-sheet input tray) online technical assistance 64 operation 208, 212 operating removing and replacing 381 environment 80 paper feed, troubleshooting 577 overview 91 paper guide optical unit (HP Digital Copy 320) 525 8-bin mailbox 446 optics cleaning 164 cleaning 165 paper handling systems 29 controller messages 632 optional output accessory (HP Digital Copy 320) 483 menu 105 options, see accessories troubleshooting process 566 ordering paper input unit (PIU) accessories 40 removing and replacing 310 parts 726 sensor 327 ordering parts 61 paper jams output accessory 483 8-bin mailbox or mailbox with stapler 578 output paper sensor PCA (printer) 312 detection 232 output tray (HP Digital Copy 320) 497 troubleshooting 633, 634, 637 brackets 539 paper path flip-out 497 cleaning 159 overcurrent/overvoltage protection 182 cover (7-bin tabletop mailbox) 410 overhead transparencies, see transparencies sensors (HP Digital Copy 320) 249 overriding control panel settings 94 test 153, 636, 684 ozone production 68 troubleshooting 633, 712 paper quantity switch assembly (2000-sheet inputP tray) 356
page count paper size configuring 300 cold reset 95, 141, 144 determining 154 PCA 316 paper size switchesC4265-90907 Index 829
, 2 x 500-sheet input tray 212 2000-sheet input tray 354 2000-sheet input tray 356 printer 326 trays 2 & 3 203 pin configuration, parallel cable 234 paper source default 95 pins (locating) paper trays2x500-sheet input tray 3942x500-sheet input tray 390 2000-sheet input tray 173, 361 2000-sheet input tray 343 PIU, see paper input unit capacity 50 plus key 93 paper-handling devices PM kit, see preventative maintenance diagnostics 669 PostScript Emulation, requirements 49 dimensions 85 PostScript Level 2 emulation (PS) locations 38 fonts 26 ordering 40 memory requirements 49 parts and diagrams 728 power box 44 specifications 50, 85 power control 27 verifying installation 641 power cord (y) 486 paper-handling messages 592 power distribution system 181 parallel cables power rating 37 ordering 44 power save mode pin configuration 234 description 184 specifications 234 electrical specifications 87 part lists power supply copier 7622x500-sheet input tray 213, 387 alphabetical 787 2000-sheet input tray 352 numerical 801 7-bin tabletop mailbox 409 how to use 726 8-bin mailbox 438 paper-handling 744 HP Digital Copy 320 515, 523 alphabetical 777 operation (2000-sheet input tray or2x500-sheet numerical 791 input tray 209 printer 730 see also high voltage power supply alphabetical 777 or low voltage power supply numerical 791 troubleshooting 582, 704 parts PowerSave 27 diagrams 725 power-up ordering 61, 726 copy module 239, 241 PCL Mopier 242 fonts 26 printer components 242 memory requirements 49 testing 683 PCL 5/PJL Technical Reference Documentation ppm, see pages per minute Package 45 precautions 252 PCL 5e and PCL 6 26 preventative maintenance perforated paper 60 about 167 personalities, see languages count 143, 300 phone numbers ordering kit 45 ordering parts 61 print job interrupt 248 technical assistance 64 print quality PhoneNET cable 44 cleaning Mopier 158 photosensitive drum 191 menu 108 pick roller assembly (HP Digital Copy 320) 491 troubleshooting 649 pick rollers, cleaning 164 print settings pickup assembly density adjustment 1832x500-sheet input tray 379 resolution 26 2000-sheet input tray 350 speed 26 printer 294 pickup rollers2x500-sheet input tray 383 830 Index C4265-90907, printer menu map 639 cleaning 159 multiple images per sheet 29 communication 248 with duplexer 204 comparisons of features 27 printing menu 110 dimensions 81, 85, 86 printing supplies 42 diverter assembly 279, 280 Private Job 47 door assembly problems, resolving, see troubleshooting diverter 280 product ID (HP Mopier 320) 242 right lower 281 Proof and Hold 47 driver information 94 PS, see PostScript Level 2 emulation electrical specifications 87 PS1, see registration sensor face-up solenoid assembly 331 PS2, see paper input unit sensor features 26 purchasing, see ordering feeder assembly 298 formatter assembly Q fan 287 quality of documents 57 removing 300, 301 Quick Copy 47 fusing assembly 302 gear assembly 306 hardware table 262 R laser/scanner ready light 93 fan 284 recycling toner cartridges 63 removing and replacing 304 refrigerators 80 messages 592 registration assembly paper input unit (PIU) cleaning roller 159 removing and replacing 310 removing and replacing 321 sensor 327 sensor 329 paper paths and components 200 registration roller, cleaning 160 part locations 725 registration, faulty 660 power-up 242 regulations, FCC 66 removing and replacing 264 regulatory information 37 resetting 96 reinstalling, see replacing rollers remanufactured assemblies 62 feed 324, 326 Remote upgrade of Printer Firmware 148 pickup 326 Remote upgrade, firmware, printer 148 separation 324, 326 Remote upgrade, printer firmware 148 transfer 332 removing separation pad 3252x500-sheet input tray 257, 364 solenoid 331 2000-sheet input tray 257, 335 specifications 85 7-bin tabletop mailbox 259, 397 testing 153 8-bin mailbox 258, 434 timing 232 copy module troubleshooting process 565 ADF unit assemblies 525 verifying communication 573 flatbed assemblies 538 Printer firmware, remote upgrade 148 maintenance parts 490 printer stand (7-bin tabletop mailbox) skins 495 dimensions and weight 86 duplexer 256, 478 ordering 41 major assemblies printing overview 252 file directory page 644 required tools 253 from envelope feeder 204 paper jams 638 from tray 1 203 printer assembly 264 from trays 2 and 3 203 stapler 466 JetDirect configuration page 573 user installable accessories 254 repair process 61C4265-90907 Index 831
, repetitive defects scanning, one pass duplex 29 ruler 665 screws hardware table troubleshooting 657 HP Digital Copy 320 487 replacing Mopier 2622x500-sheet input tray 257, 364 SDRAM DIMMs, ordering 43 2000-sheet input tray 257, 335 see also memory 7-bin tabletop mailbox 259, 397 select key 93 8-bin mailbox 258, 434 selecting menu items 100 copy module self test, see configuration page ADF unit assemblies 525 sensor unit assembly (HP Digital Copy 320) 530 flatbed assemblies 538 sensors maintenance parts 4902x500-sheet input tray 675 skins 495 2000-sheet input tray 206, 671 duplexer 256, 478 7-bin tabletop mailbox 679 major assemblies empty bin 417 overview 252 face-up 422 required tools 253 full bin and interlock 419 printer assembly 264 8-bin mailbox 221 stapler 466 PSEntry 223 user installable accessories 254 PSFaceUp 223 requirements, memory 48 activating 671 resets menu 125 diagram 691 resetting printer 96 HP Digital Copy 320 719 resolution 26 home position 542 resolution enhancement (REt) 26 unit assembly 530 description 185 locating 200 resolving problems, see troubleshooting output paper 312 Resource Manager 47 paper input unit (PIU) 327 REt (resolution enhancement) 26 registration 329 description 185 testing 671, 675, 679 reversing mechanism (7-bin tabletop mailbox) separation pad (Mopier) motor 423 cleaning 160 solenoid 429 tray 1 325 RFI cover (HP Digital Copy 320) 517 separation pad assembly (HP Digital Copy 320) 490 ribbon cable, front panel (HP Digital Copy 320) 507, separation roller 5572x500-sheet input tray 383 rollers 2000-sheet input tray 3542x500-sheet input tray 383 printer 326 2000-sheet input tray 208, 354 serial number cleaning, pickup, and feed 160 configuration page 154 HP Digital Copy 320 491 configuring 300 printer location 37 feed 324, 326 setting 141, 143 pickup 326 troubleshooting 577 separation 324, 326 server, troubleshooting 575 transfer 332 service separation 208 approach 61 troubleshooting 664 during and after the warranty 78 rolling printer onto optional stand 482 service mode HP Digital Copy 320 145S Mopier 141
safety precautions 70, 252 testing 723 scanner setting up, see configuring see HP Digital Copy 320 settings, control panel 94 see laser/scanner scanner drive 187 832 Index C4265-90907, 7-bin tabletop mailbox SME, see Support Materials Europe collator mode 218, 225 smeared toner 655 controller PCA 408 SMO, see Support Materials Organization covers smoothing images 185 back 402 SMT1 188 front 399 solenoids latch 433 7-bin tabletop mailbox top 404 flipper 430 diagnostics 677 reversing mechanism 429 dimensions 86 diagram 692 diverter assembly 425 locations 200 door assembly 410 printer 331 electrical specifications 87 solving problems, see troubleshooting empty bin sensor PCA 417 space requirements 81 face-down bins 414 specifications face-up sensors PCA 422 acoustic emissions 88 face-up/diverter assembly (flipper) 425 electrical 87 flipper assembly 425 ordering guide 45 flipper solenoid 430 paper 52 full bin and interlock sensor PCA 419 paper trays, bins, and accessories 50 handle 431 printer and paper-handling devices 85 identification label 37 specks 656 interlock sensor PCA 419 speed (pages per minute) 26 latching mechanism 432 stabilizing feet (2000-sheet input tray) 362 LED PCA 421 stacker mode messages 616 7-bin tabletop mailbox 218 modes 217 8-bin mailbox 224 operation 216 stand (7-bin tabletop mailbox) ordering 40 dimensions and weight 86 orientation 398 ordering 41 paper path cover 410 stands (HP Digital Copy 320) 480, 482 paper paths and components 214 stapler parts and diagrams 751 back plate 469 power supply 409 bed assembly 475 removing and replacing 259, 397 controller PCA 471 reversing mechanism motor 423 dimensions 86 right door assembly (paper path cover) 410 eject cycle 230 short tray 7 428 hinges 477 solenoid reversing mechanism 429 messages 628 specifications 51 non-HP cartridges 63 stand operation 227 dimensions and weight 86 paper feed cycle 229 ordering 41 paper jams 578 troubleshooting 677 paper paths and components 225 verifying installation 641 parts and diagrams 741, 743, 761 virtual stacker mode 218 removing and replacing 466 weight 86 stapling cycle 230 shipping lock 481 top cover 474 shipping paper 54 verifying installation 641 short tray 7 (7-bin tabletop mailbox) 428 weight 86 site requirements 79 start button checks 245 sizes of paper 56 status bar (HP Digital Copy 320) 127 skew 577, 660 storage paper tray (2 x 500-sheet input tray) 390 skins (HP Digital Copy 320) 495 Stored Job 47 slides, see transparencies slots 26C4265-90907 Index 833
, storing toner smear 655 paper 54 tools 253 toner 84 transfer roller assembly straight-through paper path 29 cleaning 160 sunlight, environment 80 removing and replacing 332 supplies (ordering information) 40 transparencies Support Materials Europe (SME) 61, 726 guidelines 54 Support Materials Organization (SMO) 61, 726 paper jams 578 support, see troubleshooting transport belt motor (8-bin mailbox) 444 switches tray12x500-sheet input tray, paper size 212 feed roller 324 2000-sheet input tray 206 pickup assembly 294 8-bin mailbox 221 printing from 203 detecting tray 209 removing and replacing 291 diagram 691 separation pad 324, 325 function 207, 212 specifications 50 paper quantity 207 tray 7 (7-bin tabletop mailbox) 428 paper size 207 tray selection trays 2 & 3 (paper size) 203 default paper source 95 troubleshooting 577, 579T trays 2 & 3
tabletop mailbox, see 7-bin tabletop mailbox adjustment procedure 169 tape and housing assembly (8-bin mailbox) 448 pickup motor 188 technical assistance 64 printing from 203 technical support, see troubleshooting removing and replacing 334 temperature rollers 326 environment 80, 84 specifications 50 for labels 53 trays 4 & 5, removing and replacing 377 for transparencies 54 tray-size sensing PCA (2 x 500-sheet input tray) 385 temporary errors 710 troubleshooting tension springs (2000-sheet input tray) 360 c-link cables 571 testing communication 571, 705 configuration page connections 571 HP Digital Copy 320 716 control panel 586 Mopier 153 diagnostic tools 669, 682 paper path 153, 636 drum rotation functional check 667 paper-handling devices 669 EIO accessories 573 printer 641 engine 585 text on control panel 96 envelopes 577, 578 tightening the ADF belt 535 event log 586 timing (printer) 232 fusing images 579 toner general 576 consumption 68 half self test functional check 666 storing 84 high voltage power supply check 667 toner cartridge HP Digital Copy 320 703 cleaning spills 160 image quality 649, 651, 713 contacts 183, 190 image skew 577 detection 183 interface 573 image formation 190 messages 592 life expectancy 62 noises 576 ordering 42 paper curl 581 recycling 63 paper feed 577 refilled 63 paper jams 578, 633, 634, 637 troubleshooting 650 paper-handling devices 669 warranty 63 power-on 582, 704 weight 85 preliminary check list 570 834 Index C4265-90907, print quality 649 2000-sheet input tray (tray 4) printer stops/hangs 578 adjustable foot 363 process 562 adjustment procedure 172 copy module 568 cable harness 344 printer system 565 casters 362 printer/paper-handling 566 clutches 206 rollers 664 controller PCA 346 server 575 covers starting 718 back 338 toner cartridge 650 front 337 tray selection 579 left 3392x500-sheet input tray (trays 4 & 5) right 340 troubleshooting 577 dimensions 85 adjustable foot tip 393 drive assembly 341 casters 392 electrical specifications 87 controller PCA 384 features 205 covers front LED PCA assembly 348 back 366 identification label 37 front top 374 LEDs 672 left 367 lifter operation 209 right 371 locating pins 361 diagnostics 673 main cable harness 344 dimensions 85 main drive assembly 341 electrical specifications 87 messages 608 front door (storage area) 391 motor test 669 front LED PCA 395 motors 206 identification label 37 operation 207 lifter 213 ordering 40 locating pins 394 orientation 336 main cable 388 paper paths and components 205 messages 612 paper quantity switch assembly 356 operation 212 paper size switch assembly 356 ordering 40 paper tray 343 orientation 365 pickup and feed system 207 paper deck drive assembly 381 pickup assembly 350 paper paths and components 210 power supply 209, 352 paper tray 390 printing from 209 parts and diagrams 748 removing and replacing 257, 335 pickup and feed system 212 rollers 354 pickup assembly 379 sensor test 671 power supply 213, 387 sensors 206 printing from 209 specifications 50, 85 removing and replacing 257, 364 stand-alone running test 669 rollers 383 switches 206 specifications 50, 85 tension springs 360 storage paper tray 390 troubleshooting 576, 577 tray-size sensing PCA 385 verifying installation 641 troubleshooting 673, 675 vertical transfer unit (VTU) 358 verifying installation 641 weight 85 vertical transfer unit (VTU) 368 wiring diagram 701 weight 85 typefaces, see fonts 2000-sheet input tray (tray 4) diagnostics 669 diagrams 699, 701 troubleshooting 669 2-sided printing 204C4265-90907 Index 835
,U
Upgrade, printer firmware 148 upgradung copy module firmware 150 upper cover (HP Digital Copy 320) 512 user installable accessories 254 user status LED PCA (8-bin mailbox) 462V
vacuum for cleaning 161 value key 93 VCCI statement (Japan) 74 ventillation 80 vertical magnification adjustment (HP Digital Copy 320) 177 vertical transfer unit (VTU) 2 x 500-sheet input tray 368 2000-sheet input tray 358 virtual stacker mode 7-bin tabletop mailbox 218 8-bin mailbox 224W
warranty 77 water 80 Web technical assistance 64 weight of paper 55 white lines 662 white page 651 windows 80 wiring diagram 2000-sheet input tray 701 8-bin mailbox 702 mailbox with stapler 698 printer, see foldout pages words on control panel 96 world wide web technical assistance 65Y
y power cord 486 836 Index C4265-90907, hp LaserJet 8100 and 8150 print systems and paper handling devices copyright © 2000 Hewlett-Packard Company service manual english *C4265-90907* *C4265-90907* C4265-90907]15
Similar documents
CDMA PORTABLECELLULARTELEPHONESCH-210 SE R VICE Manual CDMA PORTABLE CELLULAR TELEPHONE CONTENTS 1. General Introduction 2. Specification 3. Installation 4. NAM Programming 5. Product Support Tools 6. Circuit Description 7. Troubleshooting 8. Exploded Views and Parts List 9. PCB Diagrams 10. Electri
FIXED WIRELESS PHONE SCW-F200 SE R VICE Manual FIXED WIRELESS PHONE CONTENTS 1. Specification 2. NAM Programming 3. Data Transfer 4. Setup Method 5. Circuit Description 6. Troubleshooting 7. Exploded Views and Parts List 8. PCB Diagrams 9. Electrical Parts List 10. Block & Circuit Diagrams 10. SCW-F
GSM Mobile Cellular Phone SGH-600 SERVICE Manual GSM Mobile Cellular Phone CONTENTS 1. General Description 2. Circuit Description 3. Specification 4. Manual Adjustment Test Procedure 5. Troubleshooting C /OK / 6. PCB Views 1 . 2ABC 3 DEF 4 GHI 5JKL 6MNO 7. Electrical Parts List 7PQRS 8TUV 9WXYZ 8. E
GSM Mobile Cellular Phone SGH-500 Manual SERVICE GSM Mobile Cellular Phone CONTENTS 1. Exploded Views and Parts List 2. Electrical Parts List 3. Block Diagram 4. PCB Views 5. Schematic DiagramsC12ABC 3DEF 4GHI 5JKL 6MNO 7PQRS 8TUV 9WXYZ 5. Schematic Diagrams 5-1 Main Power 5-1 5-2 Memory Power 5-2 5
DUAL BAND Mobile Cellular Phone SGH-2400 SERVICE Manual DUAL BAND Mobile Cellular Phone CONTENTS 1. Exploded Views and Parts List 2. Electrical Parts List 3. Block Diagrams 4. PCB Diagrams 5. Schematic Diagrams 6. Troubleshooting 1 2ABC 4G 3DH EFI 5 JKL 7 6MPQ NR OS 8TUV 9WXYZ 1. Exploded Views and
00-Cover 7/28/99 2:29 PM Page 2 GSM Mobile Cellular Phone SGH-800C SERVICE Manual GSM Mobile Cellular Phone CONTENTS 1. Exploded Views and it’s Part list 2. Electrical Part list 3. Block Diagram 4. PCB Diagram 5. Schematic Diagram 01-Exploded 7/21/99 11:28 AM Page 1 1. Exploded View and its Parts Li
SGH-M100 Inte rgrated Analog Circuit Diagram 5. Circuit Diagrams 5-1 SGH-M100 Intergrated Analog Circuit Diagram SAMSUNG Proprietary-Contents may change without notice 5-1 5-2 SGH-M100 I/F Connector & LCD Circuit Diagram VBat Bp_Vf Vtest SPK2P SPK2N Vext Vext VCCD Debug_Rx Debug_Tx MP_UP_DATA MP_DOW
DUAL BAND Mobile SGH-Q100 by Toko (www.gsm-free.com) Manual SERVICE Dual Band Mobile Cellular Phone CONTENTS 1. Electrical Parts List 2. Exploded Views and Parts List 3. Block Diagrams 4. PCB Diagrams 5. Flow Chart of Troubleshooting and Circuit Diagrams C DEF ABC GHI MNO JKL PQRS WXYZ TUV 1. SGH-Q1
GPRS GSM TELEPHONE SGH-Q200 Manual SERVICE GPRS GSM TELEPHONE CONTENTS 1. Electrical Parts List 2. Exploded Views and Parts List 3. Block Diagrams 4. PCB Diagrams 5. Flow Chart of Troubleshooting and Circuit Diagrams 1. SGH-Q200 MAIN Electrical Parts List Level SEC Code Design LOC DESCRIPTIONS 0 SGH
Cordless Telephone SP-R5100SECRETManual SERVICE Cordless Telephone CONTENTS 1. Safety Precautions 2. Specification 3. Function Structures 4. Test Mode 5. Component Pin Array 6. Alignment & Adjustment 7. Trouble Shooting 8. PCB Views 9. Electrical Parts List 10. Exploded Views and Parts List 11. Bloc
HP Mopier 320 System Service Manual English Copyright© 1998 Hewlett-Packard Co. Printed in USA Manual Part No. HP Mopier 320 System C4229-90911 Service Manual *C4229-90911* Printed on at least *C4229-90911* 50% Total Recycled Fiber with at least 10% Post-Consumer Paper C4229-90911 Service Manual HP
GPRS GSM TELEPHONE SGH-S100 Manual SERVICE GPRS GSM TELEPHONE CONTENTS 1. Electrical Parts List 2. Exploded Views and Parts List 3. Block Diagrams 4. PCB Diagrams 5. Flow Chart of Troubleshooting and Circuit Diagrams 1. SGH-S100 MAIN Electrical Parts List Level SEC Code Design LOC DESCRIPTIONS 0 GH9
SERVICE MANUAL No. S1308XL55//// MICRO COMPONENT SYSTEM MODEL XL-55 XL- 55 Micro Component System consisting of XL- 55 (main unit) and CP- XL55 (speaker system). MODEL XL-55C Illustration XL-55 XL- 55C Micro Component System consisting of XL- 55C (main unit) and CP- XL55 (speaker system). • In the i
LPC2361/62 Single-chip 16-bit/32-bit MCU; up to 128 kB flash with ISP/IAP, Ethernet, USB 2.0 device/host/OTG, CAN, and 10-bit ADC/DAC Rev. 03 — 11 November 2008 Product data sheet 1. General description The LPC2361/62 microcontrollers are based on a 16-bit/32-bit ARM7TDMI-S CPU with real-time emulat
LPC2364/65/66/67/68 Single-chip 16-bit/32-bit microcontrollers; up to 512 kB flash with ISP/IAP, Ethernet, USB 2.0, CAN, and 10-bit ADC/DAC Rev. 05 — 9 April 2009 Product data sheet 1. General description The LPC2364/65/66/67/68 microcontrollers are based on a 16-bit/32-bit ARM7TDMI-S CPU with real-
LPC2377/78 Single-chip 16-bit/32-bit microcontroller; 512 kB flash with ISP/IAP, Ethernet, USB 2.0, CAN, and 10-bit ADC/DAC Rev. 04 — 19 November 2008 Product data sheet 1. General description The LPC2377/78 microcontroller is based on a 16-bit/32-bit ARM7TDMI-S CPU with real-time emulation that com
LPC2387 Single-chip 16-bit/32-bit MCU; 512 kB flash with ISP/IAP, Ethernet, USB 2.0 device/host/OTG, CAN, and 10-bit ADC/DAC Rev. 03 — 29 October 2008 Product data sheet 1. General description The LPC2387 microcontroller is based on a 16-bit/32-bit ARM7TDMI-S CPU with real-time emulation that combin
LPC2388 Single-chip 16-bit/32-bit micro; 512 kB flash with ISP/IAP, Ethernet, USB 2.0 device/host/OTG, CAN, and 10-bit ADC/DAC Rev. 01 — 19 December 2008 Product data sheet 1. General description The LPC2388 microcontroller is based on a 16-bit/32-bit ARM7TDMI-S CPU with real-time emulation that com
INVERTEC ® V450-PRO For use with machines having Code Numbers: SERVICE MANUAL SVM199-A | Issue D ate 10-Jul © Lincoln Global, Inc. All Rights Reserved. View Safety Info View Safety Info View Safety Info View Safety Info i SAFETY i WARNING CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNINGS Diesel engine exhaust and
LPC2458 Single-chip 16-bit/32-bit micro; 512 kB flash, Ethernet, CAN, ISP/IAP, USB 2.0 device/host/OTG, external memory interface Rev. 02 — 25 November 2008 Product data sheet 1. General description NXP Semiconductors designed the LPC2458 microcontroller around a 16-bit/32-bit ARM7TDMI-S CPU core wi
LPC2478 Single-chip 16-bit/32-bit micro; 512 kB flash, Ethernet, CAN, LCD, USB 2.0 device/host/OTG, external memory interface Rev. 01 — 11 November 2008 Preliminary data sheet 1. General description NXP Semiconductors designed the LPC2478 microcontroller, powered by the ARM7TDMI-S core, to be a high
DR DR DR DR DRAFT T DR AF AF AF ATTTFTLPC2470DRDR D DA A RA RFFFATFDTDTDFlashless 16-bit/32-bit microcontroller; Ethernet,R ACAN,R LA RFCD, A USB 2.0 device/host/OTG, external memory interfaFcTeTFDRDTRDRev. 01.01 — 24 September 2009 Preliminary dAFaTta sh AeFetDTRDA RF AT DR 1. General description A
ALUMINUM ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS BT High Temperature Range, For +125°C Useseries Highly dependable reliability withstanding load life of 2000 to 10000 hours at +125°C. Suited for automobile electronics where heavy duty services are indispensable. Compliant to the RoHS directive (2002/95/EC). BW High
ALUMINUM ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS PA Miniature Sized, Low lmpedance,High Reliability For Switching Power Suppliesseries Lower impedance than PW series. Smaller case size and high ripple current. Compliant to the RoHS directive (2002/95/EC). PA LowImpedance PW Specifications ltem Performance Character
ALUMINUM ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS GW Snap-in Terminal Type, 105°C High Ripple Currentseries High Ripple current. Withstanding 3000 hours application of rated ripple current at 105°C. Compliant to the RoHS directive (2002/95/EC). GW High RippleCurrent GU Specifications Item Performance Characteristics
ALUMINUM ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS AR Snap-in Terminal Type, 105°C Permissible Overvoltageseries Withstanding 2000 hours application of rated ripple current at 105°C. Reduction of short incidence when overvoltage (rated voltage x 1.5) is applied to a capacitor. Compliant to the RoHS directive (2002/95
ALUMINUM ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS AQ Snap-in Terminal Type, 105°C Permissible Abnormal Voltage,Smaller-sized(692 type) series Withstanding 2000 hours application of rated ripple current of 105°C. Extended voltage range at 200V, 220V and 400V. AK Smaller case sizes and higher ripple current than AK se
ALUMINUM ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS AS Wide Temperature Range, Miniature Type Permissible Abnormal Voltageseries Improved safety feature for abnormally excessive voltage. AQ High ripple current product. Smaller Compliant to the RoHS directive (2002/95/EC). AS Specifications Item Performance Characteris
ALUMINUM ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS PB Miniature Sized, High Ripple Current High Reliabilityseries High ripple current load life of 5000 / 7000 hours at +105°C. Suited for ballast application. Compliant to the RoHS directive (2002/95/EC). CA Long Life PB Smaller PT Specifications Item Performance Chara
ALUMINUM ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS AQ Wide Temperature Range, Permissible Abnormal Voltage(Radial Lead Type) series Improved safety feature for abnormally excessive voltage. High ripple current product. AQ Compliant to the RoHS directive (2002/95/EC). Smaller AS Specifications Item Performance Charact